Mahilig talagang makipagchat si Onin. kadalasan, mga 15-year-old girls na mahilig sa mga tulad niyang may edad na. Kahapon lang muntik nang makipag-eb sa kanya ang isang magandang kolehiyala kaso nga lang finals pa nila.
Pero ngayong gabi, mukhang he has hit the jackpot. kasi ba naman, isang dalagita from Bacolod, na matagal na nyang chatmate ay bibisita sa manila. Sa isip ni Onin,”makakascore ako ngayon!” Matagal tagal na rin kasi ang landian ng dalawa kaya alam niyang the chick’s a sure thing.
So he preps up his stuff, syempre line up yan ng mga pangangailangan para sa pakikipagdate: mabangong hininga, deodorant sa kilikili, branded na pabango, and best of all makapalkapal na wallet. Isang huling ngiti at nilisan na ni Onin ang kanyang condo to meet the chick who will give him “the right kind of pleasure!”
Actually mejo misteryosa ang pagkatao ni miss bacolod. She has never really given him any specifics…may kakaiba din sa kung papaano siya tumingin sa mga litrato niya. para bang may lungkot lagi. it doesn’t matter, inisip niya, as long as i get what i want. Pero may kaunting takot pa rin sa kanyang dibdib habang sinasabi niya ang mga bagay na iyon. Marahil ramdam niyang hindi tulad ni Miss Bacolod ang ibang babae.
Despite his preconception of what could be, tinuloy pa rin ni onin ang kanyang date with Miss Bacolod. And he wasn’t disappointed. She was really beautiful. She had the kind of aura that you would chase. Hahabulin mo kasi ayaw niya magpahabol. pero she was with him, at least she will be…
They had a nice talk over wine, pasta, and dessert. Nagbeer din siya pagkatapos, trying to impress her with stories of him being a nocturnal person. Syempre, may unting hawak at hipo na rin sa kamay, balikat at buhok. I think she gets it, that’s what he thought.
After dinner, Onin broached the subject on spending the night together. Sinabi niya na dahil baguhan pa sa manila si Miss Bacolod baka pwede naman niyang itour ito, kaso dapat maaga. Miss Bacolod didn’t hesitate. Ok lang din sa kanya to stay over Onin’s condo dahil bukas pa nya mapupuntahan ang kanyang mga kaanak.
Mas lalo pa umigting ang pagnanasa ni onin on the ride home dahil hindi na rin niya napigilan ang sarili at hinalikan na ang babae, Miss Bacolod reciprocated the kiss with much enthusiasm. Diretso sila sa bedroom niya when they reached the unit.
On the wee hours of the morning, moments before the sun broke, napansin ni Onin na nawawala sa tabi niya si Miss Bacolod. Nagtaka sya at hinanap ang dalaga. To his surprise he caught her looking at an old photo of his. She was shocked…
The same guy that she was with was in that photo, but the picture dated in the early 1800s pa. Onin was almost 200 years old. when she turned around to see if Onin was around, he was behind her, flashing his fangs.
- END -
Mahilig talagang makipagchat si Onin. kadalasan, mga 15-year-old girls na mahilig sa mga tulad niyang may edad na. Kahapon lang muntik nang makipag-eb sa kanya ang isang magandang kolehiyala kaso nga lang finals pa nila.
Pero ngayong gabi, mukhang he has hit the jackpot. kasi ba naman, isang dalagita from Bacolod, na matagal na nyang chatmate ay bibisita sa manila. Sa isip ni Onin,”makakascore ako ngayon!” Matagal tagal na rin kasi ang landian ng dalawa kaya alam niyang the chick’s a sure thing.
So he preps up his stuff, syempre line up yan ng mga pangangailangan para sa pakikipagdate: mabangong hininga, deodorant sa kilikili, branded na pabango, and best of all makapalkapal na wallet. Isang huling ngiti at nilisan na ni Onin ang kanyang condo to meet the chick who will give him “the right kind of pleasure!”
Actually mejo misteryosa ang pagkatao ni miss bacolod. She has never really given him any specifics…may kakaiba din sa kung papaano siya tumingin sa mga litrato niya. para bang may lungkot lagi. it doesn’t matter, inisip niya, as long as i get what i want. Pero may kaunting takot pa rin sa kanyang dibdib habang sinasabi niya ang mga bagay na iyon. Marahil ramdam niyang hindi tulad ni Miss Bacolod ang ibang babae.
Despite his preconception of what could be, tinuloy pa rin ni onin ang kanyang date with Miss Bacolod. And he wasn’t disappointed. She was really beautiful. She had the kind of aura that you would chase. Hahabulin mo kasi ayaw niya magpahabol. pero she was with him, at least she will be…
They had a nice talk over wine, pasta, and dessert. Nagbeer din siya pagkatapos, trying to impress her with stories of him being a nocturnal person. Syempre, may unting hawak at hipo na rin sa kamay, balikat at buhok. I think she gets it, that’s what he thought.
After dinner, Onin broached the subject on spending the night together. Sinabi niya na dahil baguhan pa sa manila si Miss Bacolod baka pwede naman niyang itour ito, kaso dapat maaga. Miss Bacolod didn’t hesitate. Ok lang din sa kanya to stay over Onin’s condo dahil bukas pa nya mapupuntahan ang kanyang mga kaanak.
Mas lalo pa umigting ang pagnanasa ni onin on the ride home dahil hindi na rin niya napigilan ang sarili at hinalikan na ang babae, Miss Bacolod reciprocated the kiss with much enthusiasm. Diretso sila sa bedroom niya when they reached the unit.
On the wee hours of the morning, moments before the sun broke, napansin ni Onin na nawawala sa tabi niya si Miss Bacolod. Nagtaka sya at hinanap ang dalaga. To his surprise he caught her looking at an old photo of his. She was shocked…
The same guy that she was with was in that photo, but the picture dated in the early 1800s pa. Onin was almost 200 years old. when she turned around to see if Onin was around, he was behind her, flashing his fangs.
- END -
Dylan, a 15-year old na taong lobo, grew a deep admiration to his classmate for two school years, Agnes. Agnes is a charming yet quiet type of teenage girl. Just an ordinary girl from a middle class family. Dylan had a best friend named Rico, a 16-year old vampire who also is in love with Agnes.
They didn’t know that they are both in love with the same girl. One day, Dylan decided to walk to Agnes about what he feels for the girl. He told Agnes to see her after class at the back part of their school. There, the two met but they’re like uncomfortable to each other.
Then Agnes tried to start the conversation… Agnes said, “Dylan, Anong meron? Why do you have to see me? Something’s wrong, or what??”… “Agnes, Mahal kita,” Dylan replied but showed a little bit of embarrassment. He continued, “Maniwala ka. I love you. I wanna know how you feel about me too.”
Agnes was like shocked about what he said. “Dylan, why?” she asked with a confused tone. “Hindi ko alam kung BAKIT. Mahal kita. I love you. I wanna know how you feel about me,” Dylan replied. Agnes looked at Dylan’s eyes then a tear from her left eye dropped.
Dylan was surprised about what he saw. Then asked, “Why?” but then paused. And continued, “Agnes, I am going to tell you a secret. Isa akong taong lobo. At mahal kita, ok lang naman yun diba?” Then Agnes started to cry hardly.
Dylan hugged her to comfort her, but the girl slightly pulled herself from Dylan’s arms.
“Anong meron Agnes?” the guy asked. “Hindi pwede Dylan,” she answered. “But why?” Dylan immediately responded. Suddenly, Dylan saw Rico behind the tree and called him. ‘RICO! Pare!” At biglang nanlaki ang mata ni Agnes. Habang palapit si Rico sa likuran ni Agnes, the girl ran away.
“Anong nangyari dun? Si Agnes yun diba?” Rico asked. “Kilala mo s’ya?” Dylan responded.
“Oo,”…
“Paano?”….
Basta. Nagkakilala lang kami,”…
“Ganun?”…
“Teka, anong nangyari dun?”…
Ewan ko nga eh.”…
“Anong sinabi mo?”…
“Sinabi ko lang namang mahal ko sya eh. At taong lobo ako, ayun, ewan ko sa kanya?”
At biglang ngumiti ng kaunti si Rico habang nakatingin sa baba si Dylan. “Sige pare, uwi na ako,” Dylan said. “Sige, ingat ka,” Rico replied.
Kinabukasan, namataan ni Dylan na di na pumasok sa klase si Agnes. Nagtanong siya sa isang kaklase, “Asan si Agnes?” “Si Agnes? Ay! Teka, naalala ko, may binigay pala si Agnes sakin kanina, ibigay ko daw sa‘yo. Dun kasi ako banda sa bahay nila dumaan papunta rito. Teka, parang love letter ata ‘to! Haha!” “Akin na nga!” At bumalik sa kanyang upuan si Dylan dala-dala yun.
Binuksan ni Dylan at binasa ang sulat. Heto ang nakasulat:
“Dylan, mahal rin kita. Noon pa. Pero di pwede. Kasi may nagmamay-ari na sa akin kahit di ko ginusto. Im tied up already. Sorry talaga. May isang bampira ang nagbanta sa akin na kapag di daw ako mapapasakanya ay he’s going to kill my parents. Takot akong mawala ang parents ko Dylan. I hope you understand,”
Nagmamahal,
Agnes
Bumilis ang tibok ng puso ni Dylan dahil sa kanyang nabasa.
Kinahapunan, pagkatapos ng klase ay pumunta si Dylan kina Agnes. Habang palapit si Dylan sa pintuan ng bahay nila Agnes ay may kung ano siyang naramdaman. “TAO PO! AGNES? AGNES, SI DYLAN ‘TO,” pangangatok ni Dylan with his loud voice. Dylan didn’t get any answer from inside. He stepped a little closer to the door and held the door knob. Then surprisingly, he noticed that the door wasn’t lock at all. Biglang kinabahan si Dylan at dali-daling pinasok ang bahay nina Agnes. Nagulat si Dylan sa nakita niya, nakahandusay na isang matandang babae at matandang lalaki, na mukhang inatake ng bampira. Mas kinalibutan siya when he realized that the two were Agnes’ parents.
Tumakbo palabas si Dylan at inamoy-amoy ang paligid. Naamoy niya ang isang bampira kaya nagkaroon siya ng lead kung saan siya pupunta. Dinala siya ng kanyang pang-amoy sa likod na parte ng kanilang paaralan. Doon nakita niyang pinipilit na gahasain ng isang lalaki, na isa palang bampira, si Agnes.
“TULONG!” sigaw ni Agnes habang grabe ang hagulgol sa pag-iyak. “Agnes! Hoy bampira! Layuan mo siya!” pasigaw na sabi ni Dylan. Tumigil ang bampira at biglang sinugod si Dylan. Hindi naman nakailag si Dylan kaya natumba siya at nakapatong sa kanya ang bampira. Nang akmaing kakagatin na siya ng bampira ay biglang dumating si Rico at hinawakan sa balikat ang bampirang kaaway ni Dylan at itinalapon. Tapos ay tinulungan niyang makatayo si Dylan. “TRAYDOR KA RICO!” sigaw nung isang bampira. “Josh, ano ba! Ano bang ginagawa mo?! Rico replied with anger in his red eyes. “Teka, kilala mo siya Rico?” Dylan asked furiously. “Yes, Dylan. Sorry, ako ang ugat ng kaguluhang ito,” Rico replied. “HA? ANONG IBIG MONG SABIHIN?” Dylan responded with great confusion. “Basta! Mamaya, ipapaliwanag ko. Tulungan mo muna akong iligpit si Josh,”... “Sige!”
Naglaban na nga sila, mahaba-haba rin ang labanan na ‘yon sapagkat may kalakasan din itong si Josh, pero natalo naman nila itong dalawa sa huli. Itinali nila si Josh ng mahigpit sa kahoy. Tumakbo naman si Dylan kay Agnes na halos punit-punit na ang damit at patuloy pa ring lumuluha.
Nagkamalay naman si Josh at nagsisigaw, “Hoi Rico! Hindi ba’t ito naman yung gusto mo!?” Mabilis na lumapit si Rico kay Josh at hinawakan ang leeg nito, sabay sabi, “HINDI ITO ANG GUSTO KO!”
Lumapit naman sina Dylan at Agnes sa kanila. “Now, what?” Dylan asked. Sorry talaga bro,” Rico replied, then added, “Sorry, it was all my fault. I told Josh about what I feel for Agnes and sinabi niya sa aking gagawa siya ng paraan. I thought, ilalakad niya lang ako kay Agnes but ganito pala ang ginawa niya. He threatened Agnes and almost killed her. Aaah!” Sabay suntok sa pagmumukha ni Josh.
“May gusto ka ba kay Agnes?”
“Oo. Sorry. Huli na kasi nang malaman kong mahal mo rin pala siya,”
“Ok lang pare. Ngayong alam mo na, sana’ suportahan mo na lang kami ni Agnes,”
“Agnes, mahal mo siya?” tanong ni Rico kay Agnes. Oo, mahal ko siya. Mahal na mahal,” Agnes answered. “Oh, sige pare. Makakaasa kayo sa suporta ko,” Rico said then turned his back and said, “Congrats pala. Kaibigan pa rin tayo ha? At isa pa, Dylan, ikaw na ang pumatay kay Josh,” then walked away at kitang-kita sa mukha nito ang sakit na nararamdaman. Pero nang tumalikod na ito, ay parang hindi maipinta ang mukha na parang may masamang ibinabalak.
Sa pag alis ni Rico, hinalikan naman ni Dylan si Agnes sa lips. Then after that, Dylan smiled and hugged her tightly.
THE END! J
Si Vhiah y isang 1\'st year collage. Matalino sya, maganda at mabait. Kahit may kaya sya sa buhay, she manages to be always down to earth. Simple lang ang kanyang buhay sa school. Mapayapa at tahimik.
Ngunit sa isang araw, mayroong isang hindi inaasahang pangyayari ang naganap sa buhay nya. Dahil sa kaklase nyang si Jessica, nakilala nya ang isang 4\'th year collage na si Ezekiel. Si Ezekiel ay isang basketball athlete na ubod ng yabang at sungit. Kilala sya bilang \"bad boy\" sa school. Gwapo at matangkad si Ezekiel. Kasama nya ang ka tropa nyang si Myem, na pareho ang ugali kay Ezekiel. Pero ng makilala nya si Vhiah, nag bago si Ezekiel. Naging mabait at palangiti sya.
Kadalasan nga, pag nakikita ni Ezekiel si Vhiah tumatawa sya at naka ngiti. Lagi nya pating tinatawagan si Vhiah. Dahil don, nag ka-gusto sa kanya si Vhiah. Na i kwento ito ni Vhiah sa mg kaybign nyang sina Miah, Bianca, Lily at Kurtney. Napallpit ngayon si Ezekiel kay Vhiah.
Pero, hindi alam ni Vhiah na ang ate ni Jessica, na si Angeline ay may gusto din kay Ezekiel! Si Angeline, at ang kanyang bestfriend na si Kathy, na ka klase ni Ezekiel, ay may gusto sa kanya. Kaya nang nalaman ng mag bestfriend ang tungkol kay Vhiah at Ezekiel, nagalit sila sakanya. Eto namang si Jessica, kumampi narin sa ate nya. Sinisiraan nya si Vhiah kay Ezekiel. Hindi naman naniwala si Eze dahil lagi nyang binabantayan, ng pasikreto si Vhiah.
Isang araw napilitan mag tapat sa kanya si Ezekiel. Na may tinatago syang madilim sa sikreto. Na sila ni Myem, Kathy, Angeline at Jessica ay mga BAMPIRA!!! Pero mababait naman sila. Kaya sa katagalan, na tanggap na rin ni Vhiah ang pag ka-tao or should I say, pag ka-bampira nina Ezekiel. Lalo na\'t minahal na nya si Ezekiel.
Hindi nalang pinansin ni Vhiah sina ang mag ate at Kathy. Alam nya kase na wala naman syang ginagawang mali. Pero na realizeni Vhiah na matatapos na ang pasukan. Hindi na nya makikita si Ezekiel dahil matatapos na sya sa pag aaral. Lalo na dahil di pa nag tatapat sakanya ng pag mamahal si Ezekiel. Nadagdagan pa ang problema nya dahil hindi na sya pinapansin ni Eze. Kahit nasaktan sya ng lubusan, tinanggap na lang nya.
Iniwasan na lang din nya si Ezekiel. Ang inisip nya, sila na ni Kathy, or Angeline. Pero ang totoong rason ni Ezekiel ay hindi nya pwedeng mahalin si Vhiah. Kahit mahal na mahal nya ito at sya lang ang naka pag pa bago ng buhay nya. Masakit din kay Ezekiel pero kaylangan din nyang gawin yon, dahil bampira sya at tao si Vhiah. Ayaw nyang masaktan si Vhiah.
Grumaduate na sina Ezekiel, pero wala parin silang pansinan. Kahit sa facebook chat, o kahit anumang komyunikasyon. Kahit laging umiiyak si Vhiah, mas pinili pa nyang mag move on. Nakalipas ang ilang taon, naka gradute na si Vhiah. Natapos na din nya ang pag aaral.
Hindi inaasahan, nagka tagpo sila ni Ezekiel sa trabaho sa isang Corporation! Pero umasta na lang sya na parang hindi nya nakilala si Ezekiel. Pero sa loob nya, sobrang sakit ng na dadama nya. Ganun narin kay Ezekiel.
Pag uwi ni Vhiah, ng tumawid sya sa daan, BIGLA SYANG NAHAGIP NG TRUCK!!! Nang malaman ni Ezekiel, hindi narin sya nag dalawang isip na gawing bampira si Vhiah. Lalo na\'t iyun lang ang tanging paraan para manatili sya sa mundo.
Nang maging bampira si Vhiah, kaagad na nagtapat sa kanya si Ezekiel. Sinabi na rin nya ang kanya rasong ng pag iwas. Pagkatapos non, naging sila na ni Vhiah. Sabay nalang nilang kinalimutan ang nakaraan. Kasama na don sina Jessica, Angeline at Kathy.
-THE END-
He woke up with a start.
It was dark, a palpable darkness that somehow choked out the sleepiness out of his consciousness. He glanced around the familiar shape of his room, the closed window right across from where he was lying down, on a bed crumpled and equally familiar. He knew this room, the recognizable smell of all his junk thrown together; worn clothing dropped where he shed them off which should have gone to the laundry long before, a collection of discarded scraps of food, socks and shoes reeking of use. It was too mundane, except that somehow he knew somehow that he was not alone.
He blindingly clutched at the comforter that was haphazardly flung across his body sprawled limp on the bed. Its warmth somewhat absent, its purpose not felt as he became aware of the cold that was slowly slipping into his veins; freezing the warmth off the blood that was rushing from his heart into his limbs. His slow, ragged breath coming out as wisps of frozen mist surprisingly bright amidst the darkness.
A pin prick jolt of fear started across his chest. To leap up and spread into his being, that soon his heart was beating a staccato of purposeful beats all too loud in the silence of night; the littlest hair at the back of his neck struggling to be released from their roots, goose bumps covering his almost naked body beneath the sheets.
Thump thump thump
His eyes moved in the darkness, darting to and fro to look for what he knew was there, absorbing the soft light seeping through the edges of the window, the pupils dilated. He could feel the presence of someone, or something, the tangible existence of what stunk of malice. Something that has permeated the air with its ghastly aura. He could not see anything but the darkness. But it was there, among the shadows. Of that he was sure.
His heart was beating faster. He thought he could hear an echo to his breath. Someone else was there breathing with him.
Thump thump thump
Outside, he could hear the muted shriek of the wind. Faint perhaps through the closed windows but nevertheless there. From out of nowhere, a wolf’s howl pierced the almost stillness. Loud and angry, like it was waiting…or it was hungry…or both.
He was afraid. Inexplicably so!
Come
A voice in his mind said. It was familiar but his heart drummed more loudly in his chest. He knew he heard that voice before, the soft feminine voice that was taunting him to come. It was a fluid voice that somehow flowed into his being. A voice that was not auditory but rather like a touch of invitation straight into his mind, gripping at his heart with an ice cold finger that he could not get away from. He shuddered.
Thump thump thump
All of a sudden the window burst open as if the wind has blown it from outside. But no breeze went in as if invisible hands just flung the shut windows open to reveal the night air outside.
Thump thump thump
From where he was, he can see nothing but the moon, the soft pale face of the lady in the sky. He looked towards it. Drawn towards the greenish glow that seemed to be calling unto him and he knew that the voice in his head came from it. The moon, bright and pallid at the same time, hovering just outside his window. Full and an almost complete sphere.
Come
It called again.
Thump thump thump thump
A strong odor of something rose into his nostrils, a warm musky smell of wood and wet dog scent that swiftly pervaded the air.
He tried to cling back to the bed. He knew this, remembered a vague memory of a night that seemed so long ago. He balled his hands into fists and pressed his back to the creaking mattress and willed for whatever inevitable to stop, tears flowing from his eyes and wetting his cheeks as he groaned in exasperation.
No, please
He pleaded as the pains started, shooting out from somewhere within him. Jabs and stabs of inexplicable agony that sliced through his body from the inside out. The skin splitting, his bones shattering and his all too human teeth falling off as bloody canine fangs pierced through his gums.
Nobody heard his cries of anguish, no body saw.
Only the full moon, as the great black shadow of a giant dog leaped from his window to join and run with other lupine shadows waiting beneath his window.
*AMONG THE TOP 10 FINALIST OF THE FIRST LIKHANG IMORTAL, ONE OF MY ARTWORKS - ELEMENTAL - STOOD OUT LIKE A SOUR THUMB SINCE IT DID NOT DEPICT THE USUAL VAMPIRE/WEREWOLF CHARACTERS. I DID IT ON PURPOSE. THE MECHANICS CALLED FOR CHARACTERS WITHIN THE IMMORTAL REALM AND ELEMENTALS ARE IMMORTALS WITHIN THAT SAME WORLD. THOUGH A LOT LIKED THAT WORK, STILL SOME COMMENTED ON IT NOT BEING \"WITHIN THE THEME\". I REFUSE TO COMMENT.
HERE IS THE STORY BEHIND THAT WORK.
_________________________________________
She felt the soft caress of the vines across her face. That’s what woke her, the gentle tendrils of living plant growth that thrives intertwined within her lush hair; small pure white blooms peeking out in places, permeating the air around her with the scent of flowers.
Looking around, she realized that she fell asleep in the woods once more. Lately, she had been doing that a lot; one moment, sitting among the ancient trees of the forest and speaking with the earth spirits that lived within and the next, waking up several hours after from a dreamless sleep. It was as if she was always lulled to slumber by the very elementals that she has come to commune with.
She felt rested but somehow lacking, like there was a memory that was just at the edge of her consciousness. Something she could almost touch but was unable to. A suppressed thought!
“Titania”
A very faint whisper came with a soft breeze and along with it a weak trace of vanilla. The vines in her tresses tightened like there was tension.
“Titania,” came the voice once again.
“Who is there?” she whispered. The voice was strangely familiar, almost painful.
“It is I, Zypher,”
A barrage of emotions and memories came crashing into her awareness. Suddenly, she remembered. Without meaning to stop them, tears from hurt and guilt came unbidden from her eyes and dropped to the forest floor.
How could she be so weak to have forgotten? The nights of illicit passion, the words of promise and the love that could never have been all came to assault her; she knew that the element that continues to make her strong is also that one that makes her forget. She needs to go to him.
She stood up and took the first few steps towards where she knew he was waiting. Waiting for how long, she could not remember. Tentatively she glanced back and as expected the earth elements were waking up to stop her. The gnarled root where she was sleeping was moving rapidly towards her, the claw like tips rushing to stop her flight.
She fled. Unknown to her, with each step she took, from where her feet land a myriad growth burst from the earth and rushed towards her. Soon, behind her was a sea of green and brown all pursuing her before she meets him.
The winds howled all around her, angry and fearful at the same time. As her own element tries to stop her, the air pushes her forward.
Almost blinded by tears, she rushed forward. Worried that she would stumble, she knew that as soon as that happens, the vines, leaves and branches that was slowly gaining on her would cover her and claim her as the earth.
She did not realize that she was slowly leaving the woods behind. Soon she was on a little hill. The winds were howling harder. The fear in her heart was a living entity wanting to burst forth. And then she saw him.
With a burst of light and a shower of feathers, Zypher rushed from the heavens and went straight into her arms. As they hugged, the earth rushed forth. Claws of wood and deadly vines twined around Titania’s ankle and struggled to break them apart. The current of air was a thundering cacophony around them. They did not feel anything but the love that was beating within their hearts. Nothing could have stopped them, even if death was waiting to claim one or the other.
Slowly, with eyes locked, their lips came closer and closer. And then they kissed.
There was a burst of blinding light and a rain of feathers and leaves fell the ground!
A blinding fork of lighting ignited across the midnight skies, a deafening clap of thunder immediately at its wake.
The frail window crashed a few inches where their feet lay.
The boy’s eyes bulged out and shuddered closer to the shivering form of his mother, clutching at the damp threadbare fabric that served as a shared blanket for them. The woman’s hand struggled to pull him closer to share the absent warmth that their closeness could barely create; their combined breath coming out as faint mist from red tinged noses, frigid from the cold. He could barely contain his fear, but still he labored to keep an air of being a man, and not the frail, impoverished barely grown boy that he obviously was.
From outside, the wind blew the rains through the gaps created by the fallen window. The howling storm a cacophony of shrieks and rumblings of thunder immediately after the blinding flashes of lightning. From not far away, another tree crashed from the onslaught of the winds, a scream from a nameless animal on its wake.
The boy shut his eyes closed and wished for everything to be a dream – more like a nightmare.
Outside was a study on darkness. The fields that surrounded the small hut where the mother and son lay huddled, a mass of swaying, soaked crops of rice; their number obviously ruined. Had there been eyes to see the downpour, only multiple shades of black could be seen - pitch, murky and smoky gray. Not that any living creature could have stayed outside for nature’s onslaught.
Another tree crashed from the woods behind the hut.
The boy opened frightened eyes and peered into the darkness. From what little he could see, he imagined shadows playing where only gloominess could be seen, if there was even anything to be glimpsed at. He whimpered and pulled his mother’s hand closer, now forgetting his self projected image of being mature, hugging them and willing himself to find comfort and assurance that he was not alone. He could hear his mother’s ragged breath, like she was struggling to control the fear that was assaulting her, if only to show him her strength that he might again find his own courage within his young heart. But something felt wrong to the boy, there was an unevenness to the heartbeat that was echoing loudly within his mother’s chest.
“Mmmaammaa?”
He whispered, but he could barely make out the words of the reply. He could not make out words above the din of the rainstorm, the woman’s mutterings much too faint to hear. Yet, somehow, he could sense that his mother was writhing in pain.
“Mama?”
He repeated louder and this time he could almost make out the words. It sounded like…
And his eyes flew open and gazed blindly into his mother’s agonized face. Fear gripped his chest and stole his breath as the enormity of what his mother’s words implied.
The baby was coming!
________________________________
Something was restless within the confines of the fiery cave.
From one of the corner shadows, a hanging bat fell and hardly was able to flap its veined wings to cling back to where it was sheltered upside down before the tremors that bothered its slumber started once more. Unable to go back to rest, it peered into the red tinged chamber with blind eyes, ears upright and listening to the scraping sounds that relentlessly filled the cavern.
Far down below, the furnace of churning molten rocks flowed in a river of fire.
A dark horned silhouette stopped. The scraping sound of dragging claws stilled.
All became silent except for the faint sound of the bat’s heart which felt like a reverberating boom of thunder. That and the boiling thud of lava.
Suddenly, a demonic laugh pierced the stillness; loud, maniacal and demented. It was pleased. It was very pleased.
_______________________________
He stumbled on a fallen tree branch.
Oblivious to the sheets of rain that continue to pour down from the heavens, the boy picked himself up from the mud and trudged on running as rainwater soaked every inch of his being. All around him the storm has never shown any sign of abating and it maintained its harsh attack to everything that dared hamper its wild frolic.
The boy did not even notice the slight trickle of blood that mixed with the muck that covered his knees from where he skinned himself from the fall. He never felt the sting that should have assaulted his senses.
He ran.
Passing twists and turns following an almost hidden path among the trees of the woods behind his house, he continued running, afraid to even slow down even when some parts of the trail were overgrown with wild growth and obstacled by fallen debris and dead forest animals.
After some time he made a sharp left and was on a better worn dirt road. Obviously used and kept clean, or, it would have been had it not been for the leaves and fallen pieces of branches – gifts from the storm.
He almost sighed with relief. Further on, he could barely see the flickering light of a lighted candle behind closed windows. Probably, whoever was there had more sense that he and his mother did to have had a candle stay lit amidst the ruthless gust of wind. It was impossible but he never questioned - knowing who lived there.
He could scarcely lift his clenched fist to knock. But the adrenaline that rushed through his veins brought about by fear and the run lent him the energy to feebly lift his hands to the door – it burst open from inside.
“I knew you were coming”, said the voice from the silhouette that framed the open doorway, shielding from him the interior of the hut.
The boy just stood there looking, barely nodding and in a voice, tiny and inaudible from fear-swollen throat whispered –
“Help”
“Please”
_______________________________
“Push, Mercedes, push!”
The shaman’s voice commanded.
From the shadows in the corner, the boy watched with torment, unable to stop the tears flowing from his glazy eyes; ignorant to the fever that was slowly creeping into his tired shivering body, still wet from the rains. His eyes glued to the blood streaked legs of his mother, writhing in pain and soaked not from the rain but from sweat running in rivulets across her pain filled face.
Mercedes pushed. Pushed and gripped her hands on the crimson stained sheets that surrounded her. She pushed with her hips, with her chest and she pushed with the strained heart therein. She pushed and felt the head of the first baby slide into the waiting arms of the old crone that her son fetched from the heart of the woods.
“You have a daughter.”
But she could hardly hear the healer as the next spasms of childbirth came. There was another baby.
The other woman placed the newborn to too gently on the mat beside her. Faced the mother and continued to help in an even pain filled attempt to free another child from her womb. Mercedes screamed in agony.
The boy could do nothing but watch, frozen stone solid in fear for his mother.
“I can see the head Mercedes, push will all your might.”
There was a slight movement where the first baby was placed. In the boy’s mind he formed the question why there was no sound coming from his sister at all. Neither cry nor even the slightest whimper that came with a newborn baby, he remembered the sound of a newly born calf that he was able to witness when their sow bore it. He expected a sound, even a tiny human baby sound. He inched closer and peered into the darkness, struggling for a glimpse of his sibling and gawked in mute terror.
The baby’s skin was rippling. Like something was crawling beneath the skin, something alive and moved underneath the smooth pale skin of the child. The shaman, helping his mother deliver yet another offspring was unmindful to the horror that the boy was witness of. The girl’s skin was darkening, spots of undistinguishable color spotted and spread; the limbs elongating and sticking into the shuddering torso, the head lengthening like clay being formed into something else. It took only a moment, but by then the child was no more, in its place was a slithering serpent the color of a newly emerged leaf.
“It’s a boy Merce…,” but she never finished what she was about to say as she saw the snake where the other child had been.
The boy was frozen mute.
The shaman watched in silent horror as the snake slithered towards the open window into the darkness of the storm outside, the new baby’s cry, the boy’s, shattering the silence, drowning out the howl of the winds outside.
No one was minding Mercedes as she lay sprawled on the makeshift bed of soaked and bloody sheets. Not even when she convulsed, like a tremor was shaking her. Nobody noticed as she gripped the sheets beside her once more and screamed.
Right at that moment, the storm abated.
Ako si Andrea typical 18 year-old girl at naka tira sa Ayala Alabang,Muntinlupa City. Sabi nga raw ng nakararami, halos nasa akin na raw ang magagandang traits ng isang babae.Maganda,matalino,mayaman,talented and skillfull.At syempre ang mga taong inspirasyon ko sa buhay at mga taong nag papasaya sa akin ay ang family at friends ko.Lagi silang naka-all-out support sa akin.
Sinasabi rin ng mga Waya na biniyayaan raw ng magaling na mandirigma sila mommy at daddy kahit mga nilaktawang lobo sila dahil raw sa angking galing ko sa pakikipag-laban kahit bata pa lang ako.Pero nang dahil sa isang pangyayari noong gabing hinding hindi ko makakalimutan, nabago ang buhay ko noong gabing kabilugan ng buwan.
Nakapasok kasi ako sa Asian Cup of Athletes na ginanap noon sa Indonesia at nanalo ako bilang 1st placer na swimmer athlete.Tuwang-tuwa ang family and friends ko at talagang nag paparty pa ang mga bff ko at super kinong-gratulate nila ako.
Yung kapatid kong si Paolo nag-suggest kay Mommy and Daddy na mag celebrate naman kami as a family yung kami kami lang. Naisipan ni Daddy na mag camping kami sa Rizal doon sa isang gubat dun para makapag-bonding kaming apat.
Nag night camping nga kami. Ang saya-saya naming nag tawanan,nagkulitan at nag sa-star gaze pa nga kami and pinipicturan namin yung full moon dahil napaka-ganda talaga nito.Doon ko rin sa akin tinuro ng parents ko na pwedeng humiling sa buwan lalo na pag kabilugan nito ng kahit ano mang gugustuhin ko hilingin.
Magluluto ng nun si Mommy ng hapunan namin kaya pinakuha niya ako nang panggatong kasi naubusan na kami.Sumunod nga naman ako.
Nalingat lang ako ng sandali, habang kumukuha ng mga kahoy,I heard a shouting voice. Takot na takot na parang nasasaktan na ang mga taong naririnig ko.But it was like so familiar.Yung boses.
Kinutuban na akong may masamang nagyari kila Mommy,daddy at Paolo. Nag palit-balat na ako bilang lobo.Pero huli na nang maabutan ko sila, binawian na ng buhay ang pamilya ko. Napoot ako sa galit at sakit na nararamdaman ko sa puso ko lalo na nang nakita ko ang bampirang iyon habang sumisip-sip ng dugo mula kay Paolo...At iyon si Magnus..Ang pinuno ng mga bampira.
Linabanan ko siya pero masyado syang malakas. Hinang hina ako at halos di ko na maigalaw ang katawan ko.Pakiramdam ko patay na ako.Pero nang makita ko ang buwan kahit nang hihina na ako sinubukan kong humiling \\\"HILING SA TALA SA LANGIT AT BUWANG NAKASILIP.BIGYAN NIYO PO AKO NG LAKAS PARA MAIPAG-HIGANTI KO ANG MGA MAGULANG AT ANG KAPATID KO..\\\"nag hihingalo na ako noon at nawalan na nga ako ng malay.
Nang pagising ko, hinanghina pa rin ako at di ko pa rin makalimutang hindi ko man lang sila nailigtas kahit may kapangyarihan ako para gawin iyon ang pamilya ko..Pag dilat ng mga mata ko, nakita ko na parang nasa isa akong maliit ng komyunidad ng mga bampira at nakita ko ang isang babae..Isang bampira na gumagamot sa mga sugat ko..
Ang sabi niya\\\"Wag kang matakot, Lobo\\\".
~End.
SETTING: Bahay ng mag-asawang Claire at Luke. Nagluluto ng almusal si Claire nang bumaba ang kanyang asawang si Luke. Pulis si Luke samantalang housewife naman si Claire.
Claire: Ang aga mo naman! Di pa nga ako tapos magluto eh.
Luke: Ang bango kasi ng niluluto mo eh hanggang sa panaginip ko naamoy ko!
Claire: (tatawa) O siya Mr. Bolero baka ma-late ka pa!
Luke: Alam mo Mahal, hindi naman sa pagiging selfish pero okay na rin itong wala tayong anak para solong-solo kita!
Claire: O sige na nga tara na baby kain na! Bago pa kita mapingot!
MAGRI-RING ANG CELLPHONE NI LUKE HABANG KUMAKAIN SIYA...
Boses sa telepono: Lima ang patay sa may Kalayaan. Bampira nanaman! Mukhang grupo nina Imelda.
Luke: Papunta na ako...(titingin sa asawa) Mahal, aalis na ako. Yung baril na iniwan ko sa iyo, nasaan?
Claire: Nandyan sa may cabinet.
Luke: (Biglang maiinis) Sinabi ko naman sa iyong kailangang nasa tabi mo iyan palagi eh! Ano ba? Alam mo namang may serial killer na gumagala ngayon!
Claire: (Susuyuin ang asawa) Well, alam ko namang nandyan ka para mag-protekta sa akin...my Superhero!
Luke: (Yayakap kay Claire) Hindi kita kayang protektahan palagi Claire...hindi ko rin kayang mawala ka sa akin...
Claire: Aba nag-drama! Sige na po, kukunin ko na po yung baril...Buh-bye! See you later! Shoooo! Late ka na!
Luke: (Hahalik sa asawa) Alis na ko, ingat ka dito ha! Yung tinuro ko sa iyo, siguraduhin mong nakababa ang safety ng baril bago mo ito iputok!
SETTING: Opisina ni Luke. Kausap niya ang baguhang si Mark.
Mark: Pare, nakakatakot na itong mga pag-atake ng mga bampira. Ang mahirap pa, kailangan nating itago sa lahat kahit sa mga pamilya natin! Gusto ko na ngang lumipad sa Amerika eh...kaso wala akong pera!
Luke: (Matatawa ng kaunti tapos seryosong magsasalita) Binigyan ko na nga ng baril na may silver bullets si Claire. Akala ko mababawasan na ang patayan noong magpakasal ang itinakdang Lobo at ang itinakdang Bampira.
Mark: Tsk...tsk..tsk...walang nangyari kungdi dumami ang kaguluhan. Wala pa akong isang taon sa serbisyo ganito na ang hinaharap ko...
HIHINTO SA PAG-UUSAP ANG DALAWA SA PAGPASOK NG KANILANG HEPE.
Hepe: Umatake nanaman ang mga bampira...(titingin sa sahig tapos titingin kay Luke) sa bahay mo Luke.
Luke: (Tatayo sa kinauupuan at patakbong lalabas sa pintuan) Claire...
Hepe: (Haharangin si Luke) Dinukot nila si Claire, wala pang balita kung ano ang nangyari sa kanya...
Luke: Pero bakit? Ano ang kailangan nila sa asawa ko?
Hepe: Sa tingin ko, ikaw ang kailangan nila Luke. Walang alam si Claire tungkol sa mga lobo\'t mga bampira pero isa ka sa iilang mga mortal na nakakaalam sa tunay na nangyayari ngayon...
Luke: Hahanapin ko si Claire!
Mark: Pero pare, saan natin hahanapin ang asawa mo?
SETTING: Sa bahay ng mag-asawa. Pinag-aaralan ni Luke ang gulo sa bahay nila. Naghahanap ng kahit na anong pwedeng maging clue kung saan dinala ng mga bampira ang kanyang asawa.
Mark: Pare, manghingi na tayo ng tulong sa mga Waya o di kaya kay Lucille Zaragoza.
Luke: Papaano naman tayo makakalapit sa mga yun? (Mapapa-iyak) Sinabi ko naman kasi sa kanyang dapat palagi niyang katabi yung baril na binigay ko sa kanya eh.
Mark: Pare, mga bampira ang dumukot sa asawa mo kahit na siguro tayo yun pare madudukot din tayo alam naman natin kung gaano sila kalakas.
Luke: Hindi ko alam kung ano ang gagawin ko Pre...bakit si Claire?
Mark: Konting pasensya lang Pre makikita din natin ang asawa mo...
BIGLANG PAPASOK SI CLAIRE
Claire: Akala mo ba ganoon lang kadaling patayin ang isang kagaya ko Mark? Hindi ako umiinom ng dugo ng tao, ano ba ang nagawa kong kasalanan sa iyo? Bakit mo ako gustong patayin? (Titingin sa asawang si Luke) May ipagtatapat akong lihim sa iyo mamaya Mahal ko.
MAPAPATULALA SI LUKE
Mark: Ikaw! Ikaw ang pumatay sa kapatid ko!
Claire: Huwag mo muna akong husgaan! Hindi mo pa alam ang lihim...
Mark: Tama na ang kasinungalingan! Mamamatay ka ngayon bampira!
SUSUGOD SI MARK KAY CLAIRE MAKIKITANG MAGIGING DILAW ANG MGA MATA NI MARK HABANG MAGIGING PULA NAMAN ANG MGA MATA NG MAY PANGIL NA SI CLAIRE....
Nagsimula na ang paghahanap sa nilalang na nagtataglay ng kapangyarihan ng santelmo ang kakayahang tawagin ang apoy, mula sa matandang siyudad ng Cebu ay isinilang ang kambal na lalake na pinangalanang Troy at Marcus pinalaki sila ng kanilang butihing inang si Rita kahit na wala silang ama.
Habang lumalaki ang dalawang bata ay mabilis na kumikilos ang dalawang makapangyarihang pwersa na nagnanais na makuha ang mapagpalang nagtataglay ng santelmo. Ang mga taong ahas na nagkukubli sa kanilang magagara at pormal na kasuotan ay maingat na umiikot sa buong bansa upang matukoy ang lokasyon ng santelmo, nagtataglay sila ng kakaibang lakas pisikal at mahahabang kuko at sa bawat kagat ay kamatayan ang naghihintay dahil sa bangis ng kanilang lason, pinamumunuan ng isang makapangyarihang pulitiko na nagtatrabaho sa opisina ng presidente. Hinahangad ng mga taong ahas ang kapangyarihan ng santelmo upang ialay ito sa sagradong Trono ng Sawa upang mabuhay ang kanilang dakilang pinuno na si Bakunawa at muling maghasik sa lupa upang ibalik sa mga taong ahas ang pamumuno sa mundo.
Sa kabilang panig ay hindi magpapahuli ang mga kakaibang nilalang na may kakaibang kapangyarihan na tinatawag na mga Mistiko, isang grupo ng mga tao na may kakaibang kakayahan na dumedepende sa kanilang lakas ng pagiisip mula sa mga abilidad ng telekenismo ay umuunlad sila sa pagsasamo ng mga elemento upang gamitin sa kanilang mga kalaban, ang apoy ang isa sa mga mahihirap na elemento na tawagin at iilan lamang sa mga batikang matatandang mistiko ang may kakahayang isamo ito sa sandaling panahon, tanging ang pinagpala ng santelmo ang malayang makakatawag sa elemento ng apoy at hulmahin ito sa mas malakas na bahagi ang Kidlat upang pumuksa sa diyos ng mga ahas na si Bakunawa, ito ang kadahilanan kaya mahigpit na iniutos ni Leon ang pinuno ng mga mistiko ang masusing paghahanap sa taong nagtataglay ng santelmo, bukod sa kanilang lakas ng pagiisip nagtataglay ang mga mistiko ng mga espesyal na kuwintas bilang instrumento upang lumakas ng tatlong beses ang paggamit ng isang abilidad o elemento.
Habang sa pagunlad ng kapangyarihan ng mga mistiko ang mga taong ahas naman ay may kakayahang magparami sa loob lamang ng maliit na panahon, nagumpisa na ang paghahabol, sino sa dalawang pwersa ang magtatagumpay sa kanilang mga mithiin, lingid sa kanilang kaalaman ay dalawang tao ang nagtataglay ng kapangyarihan ng santelmo.
There was once a beautiful princess, so lovely that men kill each other.
One night, the Devil’s Prong struck her in the chest, slowly taking away her Life.
Then came her Fairy Godmother, with the Last Magic to put her to slumber for hundred years.
Only a Prince’s Kiss would awaken the beautiful princess.
An inscription at the bottom of the worn and torn page showed some details – 1826 Tundun. I had recently enticed a university professor to translate the page written in Spanish, with a vow to surrender it to the Historical Institute once I determined its authenticity and authorship.
Weird. It’s a nineteenth century Sleeping Beauty. Not some fairy kind of tale. A dark tale.
It was just five days ago when I found and stashed this paper from the murder scene of a young college student in the vicinity of Tondo. As a rookie detective, I shouldn’t have kept this vital information. I was afraid that my colleagues full of machismo would just make a wipe out of this clue.
I saw it with keen eyes, sticking between the blood-soaked mattress and the bed frame, like a tongue mocking the city police. It wasn’t drenched with blood. The killer must have carefully placed it there unnoticed. However, I think the killer wanted it found. Found by someone with keen eyes for details.
The paper was parched, of old age. It was brittle and browned. Whoever wrote it in 1826 must be an intelligent Filipino, for he has learned well the tongue of his conquerors, or maybe he was a Spaniard.
Tundun – must be Tondo in 1826, where Sleeping Beauty lies dead, for the second time.
Beautiful princess. Real beautiful even in her death. Not so peaceful though - violent.
One night. Yeah, when evil strikes the evilest.
Devil’s Prong. It struck me that Satan, the Devil, whatever evil it was, have a trident. Three. The young kolehiyala have two prick marks in her chest. A viper could have done it but the volume of the blood in the bed sheet suggested otherwise. The author used “prong” so it could be two or three.
Fairy Godmother. Last Magic. Clueless. It didn’t make any sense. Not even hundred years. But, the ways the two terms were capitalized to emphasize something – they must be important.
Prince’s Kiss. The science in me told the truth – she would never wake. I saw her body in the morgue and had discussed the painful details with the M.D.
There could be two warring men in my view – the Devil or the killer and the Prince. They fought over the girl and lost her forever. Is it really possible that she would wake up with a kiss. Who’s the Prince? John Lloyd?
That night, I dreamt of John Lloyd. Every lady’s dream guy.
To be continued...
She shouldn’t have gone and spent the whole morning gathering the black circular berries of the duhat with Lusing.
Not when the resulting incident is the family cauldron empty and screaming to be filled with cooked food for the family lunch; not when the midday sun is almost at the centre of the sky, not when the basket of firewood is empty!
Now, alone and hungry despite eating handfuls of the offending fruit, Estring gathers the dried, fallen branches of wood lying scattered around her inside the dense and silent forest. She knew, if the repeated warnings of the village elders were to be believed, it was not a good time to be out among the ancient trees of the jungle. In fact, it was believed to be dangerous.
Yet, she knew her family has to be fed. If only she was conscious of the time then this would not have happened.
Well, she might have remembered, had it not been for Lusing’s penchant for spying on the Spanish mestizos that were guests inside the gobernadorcillo’s mansion just beside the clump of duhat trees on the edge of the village.
Muttering to herself, she continued to bend after each couple pf steps to get hold of yet another dried branch.
If only Oloy, her younger brother would grow up faster so that the manly work in the household would finally be delegated to him. Then she could finally learn to be a lady, perhaps snare a mestizo in the process.
“A lot of ifs”, she whispered to herself as she grabs another branch and adds it to the armful that she was already carrying.
Oblivious to her, eyes were following her every move...uncanny and inhuman eyes that were invisible to her, malicious eyes that were repulsed at the mere sight of her. The eyes of a murokpok!
“Law-ay(pangit)...law-ay...law-ay! Sino itong pangit na ito? Hmp, tao? Ang amoy ng kanilang napapanis na dugo ay umaalingangas ... masakit sa ilong ko. Alam nilang di sila dapat gumagala gala sa tirahan ko pag ganito ang oras...”, a whispery raspy sound emanated from the enkanto’s closed mouth, so faint that it was carried by the wind even before Estring’s ear could pick out the meaning.
Had Estring been gisted with keener vision she would have seen themalevolent spirit sitting crouched on a huge protruding root of a gigantic tree, apelike with appendages too long for that of a human. Its glowing red eyes fixed on her like she was some foreign morsel to be devoured. Had she been able to see, then she would have fled, and she would have been safe from the enchanted pebble that the murokpok angrily threw at her.
The murokpok’s aim was sure, and the small stone travelled the small distance to where Estring was bending to obtain yet another fallen branch. It hit her! Right at the centre of her back and without knowing why, she doubled over in pain.
A blood-curling cry came out from her mouth, for a split second she heard the sound of inhuman laughter...in that instance the realm of the supernatural was opened.
As the venom of the cursed pebble penetrated her skin, into her insides; deep into her blood stream and rushed through her heart, straight unto her forehead rendering her immobile as the pain double and tripled.
In her almost unconscious state, she still heard the thunderous cacophony of an unnamed sound that rumbled from a place so far away yet so near; that had she been able to move, she could have reached out and touched the air that seemed to vibrate in that unfamiliar spot.
The murokpok was looking at Estring, a grin plastered on its face. Its sinister bulging eyes red and piercing through the distance as its heartbeat translated into a curse bursting through its mouth and entered the girl through the portal that the pebble opened.
“Mamatay ka sana...hihihihihihihih!”
Estring’s body seemed to be inflamed yet it was not the hot searing pain of fire but more like a thousand acute bruises has suddenly appeared from all over her body. Her forehead was especially painful, it throbbled and vibrated like there was something that was attached there and is being pulled with all the might of an invisible hand. All she did was whimper, as soon as the pebble hit her, all energy has left her will.
In her mind’s eye she saw it clearly, her immobile body lying in a fetal position on dried cracked leaves, the newly gathered firewood scattered all around her and her head surrounded by a hazy fog of light that pulsed and pulsated; it seemed to come from a point just above the area where her eyes met. Slowly, the light extended from where it came from the fog began to take shape, roughly first but soon it took a more human form and as it almost solidified, her vision transferred to the point of view of the human fog.
More clearly now, Estring saw her prone form on the ground straight from the eyes of the mist-like figure hovering directly above her, connected to her forehead by a glowing string of light. She knew that it was her dungan (soul/consciousness) that was seeing her damaged mortal flesh from above the ground. Surprisingly, it was a spirit with a manlier form than her own feminine form. Maybe because of the masculine responsibilities that she had to face then her spirit took the stronger figure.
The deep rushing of air suddenly intensified and sucked Estring’s weightless soul. From the human world, it entered into the supernatural dimension and all was shrouded in shadows that even the midday sun’s ray was muted and faint.
Estring could not do anything. So for a long time she was there, lying helpless on a bed of dead leaves, in the company of dead tree branches, her mortal flesh dying. Still, the light throbbed in her forehead, yet, fainter as her spirit travelled further and further.
The sun lingered at the center of the sky for an instance and slowly it began its inevitable descent into the sea. In a lone hut somewhere at the edge of the forest, a family was waiting in vain for Estring. A fear began to seep into their hearts, perhaps an instinct that a member was in trouble. As the darkness of the night faintly colored the sky with black, a mother and a small boy trudged the path through ominous trees and spreading shadow.
“Estring! Maryosep anong nangyari sayo? Tulong! “, came a mother’s cry.
“Oloy, tawagin mo si Tasyo...na enkanto si Estring!”
A loud crunching sound travelled farther into the deepest part of the forest as the boy’s fear driven legs pushed through the dried leaves underneath him. Tears unstopping in its flow from his eyes, the image of his sister’s unmoving body was frozen in his mind.
“Tyoy Tasyo...si Ate..si Ate Estring!”
Tasyo, the old hermit healer saw the boy rushing towards him and knew that his services was needed. Getting an assortment of leaves and other unnamed paraphernalia from a bamboo table, he hurried through the door and met the incoming child.
No words were needed, the eyes of Oloy spoke an onslaught of emotions that Tasyo rushed forward to the direction from where the boy came from.
What met him when he came to the spot where Estring fell filled him with fear. He knew enkantos have made a dwelling of the area around them and from experience, these malevolent spirits were protective of their habitat. He prayed that he could save the girl but without even touching her, he knew it would be a hard task in front of him.
The bruises that covered Estring\'s body was beginning to blister and her skin became feverishly hot to the touch. The only sound was a sort of wheezing sound as if air could barely travel into her lungs. Her mother was beside herself with worry, although she was not hysterical, she was showing signs of being very close.
With the adept of somebody who is used to doing the undertaking, Tasyo began to lay down an assortment of ingredients need to decipher the sickness that has suddenly assaulted the unmoving girl.
Dried, unfamiliar leaves from some forgotten shrubs, powdery crystals and minerals with pungent odour, bottles of dark colored liquid with body parts and exotic animals were suddenly strewn on the bed of leaves. The old man was mumbling strange incantations and Latin sounding spells that was slowly increasing in tempo and volume. The silence of the afternoon calm inside the forest was disturbed by not only his sound but the deafening throb from each of their heartbeats.
From a place so detached from the human world, Estring\'s dungan was feeling a pull towards the direction of the Baylan yet, it was so faint that it was almost unfelt...insignificant.
All it could do was squirm in some imagined pain as if it was still flesh and blood and not just spirit.
The Babaylan\'s enchantment ritual was approaching a fast crescendo! In his concentration, he was oblivious to the crowd that was beginning to form all around him. Oloy has called their father and relatives. They were all lamenting, yet, a hopeful air could be felt; Tasyo\'s sureness in healing was legendary.
The dungan felt the pull once more. Stronger this time. It was getting more and more conscious of its surroundings, getting stronger, maybe, aided by the powers that was gathering around the old man. It soon knew that it was somehow guarded by seven malignant shadows that for some reason, the dungan knew guarded seven dark passageways that it had to pass through before it could go back to the human world. It was the seven gates of the netherworld that was legendary in the elders\' tales meant to scare little children. So it was true after all.
Tasyo suddenly became alert. A deafening stillness was felt by all those in attendance. In fear, the people peered around them as if expecting somethings lurking behind the shadows created by the trees, they looked on as the healer raised a long sharp knife and muttered hex-like discourses. The knife fell in an instant, guided by his ample strength and plunged into his palm.
Blood oozed out, yet, it was black and thicker than the blood of mortal men.
From the twisted roots of one of the gigantic trees, the murokpok shrieked...and fell to the ground.
Although words still escaped Tasyo\'s mouth, the people soon knew that he has entered into a trance. His body unmoving like that of a perfectly made statue of some sort. An invisible glow burst forth from his own forehead and sped to the direction of the girl\'s dungan in the spirit world.
There, the seven specters approached the dungan with a deadly purpose, wanting to end the battle that started when the Baylan began his incantations.
Yet, all of a sudden, another spirit form entered through the seven entrances, that of Tasyo; it is his own dungan.
Dodging and advancing back and forth, attacking and defending; the dark apparitions and the Babaylan\'s essence fought for Estring.
When suddenly...
From the ground...Estring\'s mouth opened in a scream.
The dungan was pulled back into her body.
The ritual was done.
The villagers cheered as Tasyo slumped unto the forest floor in exhaustion.
All is well once more.
As night fell, the villagers trudged home, the weak girl in the arms of her father, weak but alive. Tasyo aided by the men.
From where the murokpok fell, unseen by human eyes once more, a stirring was beginning, for yet another Estring!
SI GIRO ISANG BAMPIRA NA WALA NG INATUPAG KUNDI SUMALI SA LIBANGAN NG MGA KAIBIGAN NIYANG BAMPIRA NA PUMATAY NG MGA TAONG LOBO PERO NAGBAGO ITO NANG MAKILALA NIYA SI BILLY ANG BAGONG LIPAT NA ESTUDYANTE SA KANILANG ESKWELAHAN AT NAGING MATALIK NIYA ITONG KAIBIGAN,LINGID SA KAALAMAN NILA ANG KANILANG MGA LAHI AY MAGIGING HADLANG SA KANILANG PAGKAKAIBIGAN.ISANG ARAW HABANG PUMAPATAY SINA GIRO AT NG MGA KAIBIGAN NIYA NANG ISANG TAONG LOBO AY NAKITA NI BILLY NA PINAGTUTULUNGAN ANG KANYANG KALAHI HINDI NAGDALAWANG ISIP SI BILLY NATULUNGAN ANG KANYANG KAPWA LOBO NAGLABAN SINA GIRO AT SI BILLY LINGID SA KAALAMAN NI GIRO AY SI BILLY PALA ANG KANYANG KALABAN NA NASA ANYONG LOBO LAMANG.NABARIL NI GIRO SI BILLY PAGKATAPOS NIYA ITONG BARILIN BIGLANG NAGBAGO ANG ANYO NI BILLY AT SINABI SA KAIBIGAN \"KAHIT NA BINARIL MO AKO IKAW PARIN ANG AKING MATALIK NA KAIBIGAN ISA NALANG ANG AKING KAHILINGAN YUN AY PROTEKTAHAN MO ANG MGA KALAHI KO KUNG NAIS MU LAMANG AYOS LANG SAKIN KAHIT HINDI MO GAWIN,PAALAM KAIBIGAN \\\".TINUPAD NI GIRO ANG HULING HILING NI BILLY. , HINDI NAMULING PUMATAY SI GIRO NG ISANG TAONG LOBO ,PAGKATAPOS NG ILANG TAON MAY NAKILALANG BAGONG KAIBIGAN SI GIRO NA SI LEO .NALAMAN KAAGAD NI GIRO NA ISANG TAONG LOBO SI LEO DAHIL SA PAGKAKAPAREHO NILA NI BILLY NA PAREHONG MATALAS ANG PANG AMOY . ISANG ARAW NIYAYAYA SI GIRO NG KANYANG MGA KAIBIGAN NA PUMATAY MULI NG TAONG LOBO LINGID SA KAALAMAN NILA,NARIRINIG NI LEO,ANG PINAG UUSAPAN NILA \"HINDI AYOKO NANG PUMATAY PA NG INOSENTENG TAONG LOBO ,WALA NAMAN SILA GINAGAWANG MASAMA SA ATIN AH\\\"SAGOT NI GIRO. \"SILA ANG KALABAN ATING LAHI GIRO,SILA ANG PUMATAY SA AKING MAGULANG\" \"BAKIT ANG BUONG SANLOBOHAN BA ANG PUMATAY SA IYONG MGA MAGULANG?HINDI NAMAN DI BA KAYA WAG MUNANG IDAMAY ANG IBANG LOBO\"SAGOT NI GIRO \"BAKIT HINDI KANAMAN DATING GANYAN PRE DAHIL BA YAN SA NAMATAY MONG KAIBIGAN EH WALANG KWENTANG KAIBIGAN NAMAN YUN EH TSAKA ISA PA LIMANG TAON NA ANG NAKAKALIPAS DI MO PARIN MAKALIMUTAN ANG WALANG SILBI MONG KAIBIGAN!\"SAGOT NG ISA PA NIYANG KAIBIGAN . DAHIL SA SAGOT NG KAIBIGAN INATAKE NI GIRO ANG KANYANG MGA KAIBIGAN NGUNIT MASYADO SILANG MARAMI PARA MATALO NIYA ANG MGA ITO. TINULUNGAN NI LEO SI GIRO , \"LEO AKO NALANG ANG BAHALA DITO UMALIS KANA AYO KO NANG MANGYARI ULIT ANG NANGYARI SA MATALIK KONG KAIBIGAN\\\\\\\"ANG SAGOT NI GIRO \"AYO KO GIRO PARA SAN PA ANG PAGKAKAIBIGAN NATIN KUNG HINDI KITA TUTULUNGAN!\"ANG SAGOT NI LEO NAPATAY NILA ANG DALAWANG KAIBIGAN NI GIRO NGUNIT NABARIL NG NATITIRA NILANG KALABAN SI GIRO NAGING DAHILAN NG PAGKAMATAY NI GIRO . \"GIROOOOOOOO!!!!!!!!!!\" ANG SIGAW NI LEO SA GALIT NI LEO NAPATAY NIYA ANG HULI NILANG KAIBIGAN. \"PAALAM KAIBIGAN!,BILLY NATUPAD KUNA ANG HULING HILING MO KAIBIGAN ,PAAALAM!!!\" ANG HULING SALITANG BINIGKAS NI GIRO. THE END.
Sanggol pa lamang si Biboy nang iwan sya sa bahay-ampunan ng kanyang mga magulang.Doon na sya nagka-isip at nagkaroon ng matatawag na pamilya. Hindi tulad ng ibang mga bata, si Biboy ay hindi pala-kaibigan at hindi rin pala-ngiti. Sampung taong gulang pa lamang sya ngunit ang pagtingin nya sa mga bagay-bagay ay higit na sa kanyang edad. Seryoso at malawak kung mag-isip kung kaya’t hindi na sya maunawaan ng ibang mga bata. Kumbaga, sya ang buhay na patunay na “man can be an island!”
Isang umaga, kung saan magsisimula ang bagong kabanata ng buhay ni Biboy. Napili sya ng mag-asawang Villanueva upang maging bagong parte ng kanilang pamilya. Hindi magkaroon ng anak ang mag-asawa kung kaya’t naisipan nilang mag-ampon. Ngunit hindi mababakas sa mukha ni Biboy kung nais nyang sumama o manatili na lamang sa bahay-ampunan. Nang araw ding iyon, naisama ng mag-asawa si Biboy at binigyan nila ito ng bagong pangalan, ang dating Biboy ay naging Robert Villanueva. Hindi itinuring na iba ng mag-asawa si Robert. Itinuring nila ito na para bang nagmula ito sa kanila. Ngunit napupuna ng mag-asawa na hindi man lamang nagtatanong si Robert tungkol sa kanila. Naisip nila na mas mabuti na rin yon dahil hindi pa ito ang tamang panahon.
Sumapit na ang ikalabing-walong taong gulang ni Robert ngunit kagaya pa rin sya ng dati, hindi pa rin sya nagbabago at mistulang inilalayo ang loob sa mag-asawa. Kinagabihan, kinausap ng mag-asawa si Robert sa kanilang salas na sa kabila ng mga papeles at dokumento ay hindi pa rin opisyal ang kanilang pagiging magulang nito sa kanya. Ngunit mukhang alam na ni Robert ang ibig sabihin ng mga magulang nya.
August 15, 2011, Wednesday, eksaktong tatlong buwan at labinlimang araw ang lumipas nang mapatay nina Lia at Mateo si Lucas, alam na alam na ng buong mundo ang tungkol sa mga Lobo at Bampira ngunit di pa alam ng lahat kung sino ang mga Lobo at Bampira sa lipunan dahil nawala lahat ng files at mga listahan ng mga Pilipinong Taong-Lobo noong minsang bumagsak ang kapangyarihan nila noong Tagong Buwan, sinunog kasi iyon ng mga Bampira. Ang mga Bampira rin ay di makapaglabas ng listahan ng mga Bampirang Pinoy sa Pilipinas dahil naiwala o di kaya\'y sadyang sinira iyon ng mga rebeldeng bampira na noo\'y pinamumunuan ng yumaong bampira na si Imelda.
Itong araw ding ito ay nasa auditorium sina Jim at John, matalik silang magkaibigan, higit pa sa kapatid ang turingan at parehong bente anyos, 4th year college sa Ateneo de Davao University, ang kurso nila pareho ay Entrepreneurship.
May activity sa auditorium ang lahat ng 4th year Entrep. students ng ADDU, busy ang lahat ng mayroong biglang sumigaw sa labas ng gusali. Malapit lang sa exit ng auditorium ang dalawa, tiningnan nila ito at nagulat sila sa kanilang nakita.
\"Akala ko tapos na silang lahat!?!\" tanong ni Jim sa sarili, gulat na pinapanood ang pag-atake ng mga nilalang na ginawa ni Lucas, mga mabalahibong halimaw na mukhang mga taong daga na napag-tripan ng mga adik na doktor, dalawampu sila lahat.
Isa lang ang pumasok sa isip ng binata, \"Alam kong may iba pang mga Lobo o Bampira na lalaban sa kanila, di ako dapat ilabas ang pagiging Bampira ko, di ako tatanggapin ng mga tao dito, lalu na si John.\"
Ngunit walang gustong magpakabayani, takot na si Jim, di alam kung ano ang gagawin. Biglang may pumasok sa utak niya. \"Noong buhay pa si Lucas ay di ako nakalaban sa mga halimaw, halos lahat sila ay nasa Maynila, konti lang dito sa Davao. Gusto kong tumulong, eto na pagkakataon ko, papatunayan ko na di kami masasamang nilalang dito sa mundo.\"
Biglang tumapang si Jim, sakto na naka-itim siya, ang porma ng mga astig na Bampira. Biglang pumula mata niya at lumabas ang mga pangil ng isang nilalang na umiinom ng dugo.
Kumuha siya ng dalawang pilak na punyal na tinatago niya sa kanyang bulsa, tumakbo at sinigawan ang mga halimaw.
\"HOY, AKO KALABANIN NINYO!\" hamon ni Jim sa mga halimaw at buong tapang na hinarap silang lahat, mabuti nalang at nakainom siya ng dugo ng baboy ilang minuto bago ang laban ngunit masyado silang marami, lima lang ang napatay niya at katakot-takot na mga tadyak, sipa, at suntok ang natikman niya.
Linapit ng isang halimaw ang kanyang bibig sa leeg ni Jim, akmang kakagatin ito ngunit natahimik ang lahat ng may narinig silang alulong.
Ang lahat ng mga estudyante, na noo\'y nasa labas na ng auditorium at gulat na may halong takot na nanonood ay napatingin sa isang banda, mas nagulat sila sa kanilang nakita.
Nakatayo si John, dilaw ang mga mata, mahahaba ang mga kuko, itim ang mga ito, astig na astig siyang tingnan sa puti niyang t-shirt.
\"Tulungan na kita, Jim.\" galit na wika ni John at tumakbo ng ubod ng bilis ngunit mabagal iyon kumpara sa bilis ng bampirang si Jim.
Walang awang pinagkakakalmot ni John ang mga halimaw habang nakatakas si Jim sa kamay ng mga halimaw. Nagtulungan silang dalawa, nagtalikuran para harapin ang mga halimaw, lima rin ang napatay ni John. Lubos ang galit ng mga halimaw, sampu nalang ang naiwan sa kanila, magagaling kasi si Jim at John. Lima ang lumaban ni Jim at lima rin ang lumaban kay John.
\"PALIT-BALAT MODE!!!\" pabirong sigaw ni John at bigla siyang naging isang malaki at puting lobo, wala siyang awa na pinaglalapa ang mga kalaban niya. Si Jim naman ay naglabas ng kanyang galit, \"PARA \'TO KAY MS. SAM IMPERIAL NA PINATAY NG PINUNO NINYONG SI LUCAS!!!\" crush kasi ni Jim si Sam kahit hindi pa bampira ang binata.
Ayos na sana ang lahat ng mayroong panibagong mga halimaw na lumabas, dalawampu rin sila, tigsa-sampu ang kinalaban ng magkaibigan.
Mabilis na natapos ni John ang mga kalaban niya habang nahihirapan si Jim, may isang halimaw na nagbantang umatake kay Jim mula sa ibabaw ng binata. Agad na lumundag si John para patayin niya iyon, ngunit pagkatapos na pagkatapos niyang mapatay iyon ay may isang halimaw na sumunggab sa kanya at ibinalibag siya sa poste ng kuryente na nasa isang tabi lang. Nakuryente si John na noo\'y anyong Lobo at humandusay sa lupa.
Saktong mga panahong iyon ay napatay na ni Jim lahat ng mga halimaw ngunit ang gulat na naramdaman niya noong nakita ang mga halimaw ay wala sa gulat na naramdaman niya noong nakita na si John na naghihingalo. Agad siyang tumakbo papunta sa isang kalapit na classroom para kumuha ng kurtina na pambalot sa kaibigan, alam kasi niya na malapit na itong mag-anyong tao ulit at wala itong damit, at tama nga siya, naging tao si John, mabuti nalang at balot na ito ng puting tela bago pa man ito tuluyang maging tao.
Agad na kinarga at dinala ni Jim si John pamunta sa clinic ng paaralan, gulat at di maka-imik o galaw pa rin ang mga estudyante sa mga nangyari habang bumalik naman si Jim sa auditorium para kumuha ng mga damit ni John kung meron man, salamat sa Diyos at meron. Kinuha niya sa bag ng kaibigan ang isang dilaw na tsinelas, isang brief na puti, isang asul na shorts at isang t-shirt na berde. Dinala lahat iyon ni Jim sa clinic para bihisan si John.
Pagkatapos bihisan ay nagkaroon ng malay si John. \"Salamat sa pagiging loyal at pagiging kaibigan ko, Jim, pasensya na at di ko naipagtapat ang buo kong pagkatao, baka kasi di mo ako matanggap.\" mahinang sinabi John, bakas ang paghihingalo sa katauhan niya.
Tumulo ang luha ni Jim, ganoon din si John, sumagot siya sa kaibigan, \"Pasensya rin at di ko kayang magtapat sa iyo, salamat din sa pagiging loyal at pagiging kaibigan ko through the years, pero sana \'wag kang mamatay, ikaw lang nakakaintindi sa akin at ikaw lang ang nagiisa kong kaibigan.\" pakiusap ni Jim ngunit huli na, wala na si John.
Napahagulgol si Jim, karga niya ang bangkay ni John, umiiyak na lumabas papunta sa school grounds ng ADDU.
\"BAKIT GANYAN KAYO, BAKIT DI NINYO KAMI TINULUNGAN, TAKOT BA KAYO DAHIL BAKA DI KAYO MATANGGAP NG MGA TAO DITO!?! NGAYON WALA NA ANG KAIBIGAN KO!?!\" iyon lang ang tanging sigaw ni Jim, tuloy tuloy pa rin ang pagtulo ng mga luha mula sa kanyang mga mata, di alintana sa kanya na nakalabas pa ang mga pangil niya at pula pa ang mga mata niya habang ang mga naduwag namang mga Bampira at mga Lobo ay lumuha, either pula o dilaw ang mga mata nila noong mga panahong iyon, nakokonsyensya o di nama\'y hiyang hiya sa mga sarili.
THE END
Payapang namumuhay ang mga Engkanto sa sinumpang gubat ng Barasa, dito sila ay tahimik at hindi natutunton ng mga mortal na tao, Malaya silang nangangaso ng kanilang mga makakain dahil sa dami ng mga hayop sa gubat na ito, sila ang naatasang magbantay sa mahiwagang gubat na may nagkukubling madilim na nakalipas, at sa kabilugan ng buwan ay namumula ang kanilang mga mata at nagiging isa sa kalikasan na kung saan magtataglay sila ng pambihirang lakas ng katawan upang maging mas epektibong mangangaso, lingid sa kanilang kaalaman ay may nagmamatyag mula sa malayo.
Mga berdeng balat na tila kaliskis na kay kunat, armado ng isang magarang sibat natunton na sila ng mga Sireno na mula sa dagat ng Amihan na katabi lamang ng gubat ng Barasa, isang anino mula sa malayo ang nagmamasid sa sitwasyon, pula na mata at tila may masamang hangarin.
Sa kaharian ng Balyeno ang teritoryo ng mga Sireno ay may nawawalang isang sirena, inuutos ng hari ang kanyang mga piling mga sundalo upang umahon sa lupa at hanapin ang nawawalang dalaga, at natunton na nga nila ang lupain ng mga Engkanto, akmang lulusob na ang tropa ngunit isang makisig na binata ang sumulpot sa kanilang harapan, pula ang mata at winagayway ang isang kwintas, agad itong nakilala ng isang sireno dahil ito ay sa kanya na binigay niya sa kanyang kasintahang nawawala. Paano mo nakuha yan? Tanong ng sireno, Wala na ang nilalang na nagmamay-ari ng bagay na ito, kanina lang ay inalay na namin siya sa aming diyos ng kagubatan.
Nagalit ang mga sireno at lumusob sa binata, ngunit sadyang malakas ito at madali silang nalupig, iilan lang ang nakatakas at nagsuplong sa hari ng Balyeno. Ang mga animal na iyon!!! Simula sa puntong ito ay dinedeklara ko ang digmaan laban sa mga taga Barasa, habang sa gubat ay malayang umalis ang binata na pula ang mata na isang bampira pala, nalinlang niya ang mga Sireno na kabilang siya sa mga Engkanto dahil sa pula ang kanyang mata, dahil dito ay masisira na ang payapang pamumuhay ng mga Engkanto.
Dahil sa nalalapit na pagatake ng mga Sireno sa kanilang gubat isang nilalang sa puso ng gubat ang nagising, isang halimaw mula sa kailaliman ng sinumpang gubat ng Barasa ang nabuhay dahil sa naipong poot at galit ng mga Sireno, ang halimaw na pinangalan sa mismong gubat na kanyang naging libingan ang Barasa ay nanganganib na muling makawala sa mundo upang maghasik ng kamatayan sa lahat.
Sa kabilang banda ay naging matagumpay ang misyon ni Elias na isang bampira na makakuha ng dugo ng isang birheng sirena.
*Via Dolorosa is a Catholic tradition that commemorates the agony and grief of Christ as he carried the cross until his crucifixion. This procession of statues and images of the way of the cross is a Lenten custom that is practiced by Roman Catholics all over the Philippines.
**The story following is based on a true account. Names of people and places and some parts of the story had been changed to protect the privacy of those involved.
Good Friday, April 15, 2011
The road was dusty.
Swirls of dried and clinging powdered mud whipped from the ground as hundreds of mostly slippered feet disturbed its rest on the rough ground. The slippers, mostly flip flops were undistinguishable. Almost all were covered with the gray of the dust.
The religious trudged on, some holding on to the cable wires that connected several flower filled carts bearing decorated statues of wooden saints and images of Christ’s way to the cross; a few, even costumed in shiny silk robes that described the apostles. Several others were in the cotton smocks of altar boys. From somewhere in the back, the monotonous female drone of a prayer is being echoed by all the rest joining the procession.
Ang landas ng Pagdurusa,
na tinahak ni Hesus, namatay siya upang tayo\'y matubos
Langit ay nilisan niya \'pagkat pinili niya tayo,
Ang landas ng pagdurusa, ay laan sa Kalbaryo
The procession was solemn, or mostly so except for the few young ones who were there for the chance to whisper sweet nothings to other young ones.
One more bend and the procession entered the church grounds. The sun has finally settled behind the volcano, the foot of which was where the barrio was located. The darkness of night was finally creeping in. The statues, with their ghastly lights were left on the streets outside the compound for the onlookers and penitents to gaze upon during the night’s bisita iglesia, the people milling around like a flood of souls all there for the sole purpose of being pious.
The procession has ended, for most at least. But for others, those that were tasked to do church work during the next days of Lent, it was just rest. These went on to the local high school grounds right at the back of the church. To rest, dinner and to ready themselves, some need to assist in the church visiting hours later in the night.
The school was dark.
Except for a few rooms where fluorescent lights were lit, the grounds were shrouded by shadow. Eerie shapes and night sounds of crickets and other nocturnal creatures lent the school a peculiar ambiance. Trees bent with age and leaf-less because of the unrelenting summer heat added to the sinister aura.
In one of the darkened rooms a slight shuffle was heard by invisible ears, small tentative movement from a young girl of fifteen. With hesitation, she moved forward into complete darkness. Listening, her eyes dilated as she peered into the darkness only to see nothing. Although, she knew she had to be there. A whisper has commanded her to be there.
“You came…” a male voice whispered in her ear. She only felt the littlest touch of air but she could not feel a physical presence of warmth.
“Thank you,” the voice continued as everything went blacker; if it was even possible to shut out light where there was none.
After awhile, the girl’s eyes opened once more. She sat up and slowly rose from where she fell on the cemented floor when she fainted. Slowly, she walked out of the room and walked purposely into one of the lit rooms where the rest were eating.
She just stood at the doorway and looked at everyone, lingering on the elder ones as if seeing them more interesting than the youths.
“Where have you been Anita? Get your plate and have dinner, we need to go to church in a bit,” someone mentioned after seeing her standing there. But she just looked at the older lady and slowly smiled.
“Charlie wants to tell you to pray for him,” Anita blurted out all of a sudden. The lady, the one that spoke earlier looked at the girl, suddenly speechless.
“He says that he wants you to know that he is all right.”
Everyone looked at her then, not a few with mouths open and gawking at the young girl. Almost all thinking that she could not have known Charlie, the lady’s son. He died five years ago, when the girl was about ten.
“Anita,” the lady stammered, “that is not a good joke.”
“I am not Anita. My name is Rafael.”
Someone gasped as a plate dropped to the ground, spilling food all over. Anita turned her head and looked at the elder boy.
“How are you Nico, we used to be classmates.”
Everyone was silent, the food on their plates completely forgotten as all stared at the young girl who has suddenly bothered them with talks of those that has been dead for years from that barrio. Rafael, the boy the girl’s voice claimed to be was a teenaged boy from that same school who died of tetanus more than ten years ago. She couldn’t have known him, couldn’t have heard of him. His memory has long been replaced my more current histories of those that were busy with their own lives.
But the girl continued to talk. She was mentioning random names of dead young people that died much too young for their time. Talking about them as companions and entities that were not dead but living yet.
Somebody told others about what was happening and soon more people were filling into the room. Others listening in on the girl’s voice that has suddenly began to have a more masculine timbre.
“It is Rafael’s voice,” someone blurted out.
To those who knew the boy, they swear that the Anita was displaying Rafael’s actuations; inflecting words with phrases and small sounds that reminded them of those that were of who he claimed to be.
The young spirits he said were all there, trapped in some space within the volcano. All of them tasked to stop the eruption that has been continuously predicted, all of them young when they died.
He spoke of a boy who died in an accident with friends, he talked of one who was taken when the volcano coughed up ash, he spoke of others that were known to those in assembly; names and details that could not have been known to Anita.
“I would like to go home, and sleep on my bed,” the young man’s voice broke a little bit as he said it, as if he wanted to cry. “I miss my bed.” Not a few of those around him had tears streaming across their faces.
“It’s good that I was able to visit today. Any other day and I would not have been able to come. It’s just not allowed. In fact, I had a hard time coming today.”
All those around him were listening intently. Most of those around were speechless and eyes were filled with questions that were not voiced out. With a little smile on Anita’s face, Rafael just looked at those in attendance; sometimes at a particular face for a little longer than the rest – to this his smile deepened, like he was greeting long lost friends.
Somebody went with him. Anita’s steps filled with purpose as she took the familiar twisting roads into Rafael’s house. A place the girl has never been to. Rafael’s family was in tears. But the girl just went inside, straight to where Rafael’s room used to be and fell asleep. Rafael’s mother sat by the bedside and looked on.
“She is tired,” Rafael said when he awoke. “I cannot stay longer. But please pray for me. Please pray for all of us there. Do not ever forget. My grave has not been cleaned in awhile, maybe if you remember about me and not just focus on my youngest sister then you might find time. It’s not just me; there are a lot of us. Tell their families, and tell everyone. We can still feel. Remember us, Please!”
There was silence, as if Rafael was thinking and his mother was speechless.
“How is Stacy?” referring to an old girlfriend.
“She is married now, with a child.” The mother answered.
“I know, just tell her please, that I still remember,” with that Anita’s eyes filled with tears and as the drops flowed on her cheeks Rafael’s voice continued.
“She tired, I don’t have time. Goodbye mother, I love you! And tell Anita thank you for me, we’ll be fetching her soon.”
A cold wind wrapped around all those that were watching. Anita slowly closed her eyes as Rafael’s mother and sister cried. Nobody said a word as the breeze left through the windows and the girl dropped to the floor in a faint.
It was Black Saturday and Rafael has moved on. But he is still watching, along with all the others who continue to watch over us.
Luciana von Gier, CEO of the renowned Gier Industries, located within the busy district of Makati, was a ruthless woman. The only daughter of a retired German ambassador and a Filipino opera singer who performed in the Lourdes Pavilion, Luciana had it all: wealth, fame and power. Since birth, life had been served to her not on a silver platter, but on a golden, jewel-embedded, ornate one. Groomed to inherit the perfume industry of her parents, Luciana became a sophisticated and well sought-after socialite, like many of the sons and daughters of major international companies often seen either in the Upper East Side of Manhattan or in the lavish hallways of the New York Palace.
Taking the reins of Gier Industries after the death of her cancer-infected mother, of whom her father preceded in the afterlife, Luciana became one of the many icons of modern-day business. Such was her popularity at being at the top, while looking freshly young and beautiful and possessing an indefinite amount of potent charm that made her an enigma through the eyes of the Filipino populace.
It had never occurred to them of the event that had happened a year ago, in the month of October, of which the famous Luciana von Gier had departed the world of the living and took up the mantle of the undead. Rumors mention a lot of possibilities of what happened to her that night. Some were witness to the actual event, others merely talented storytellers, twisting the truth with hearsay and molding it into something worth telling.
But there was one rumor of which held the greatest possibility of what really happened that night.
The whispers of men spoke that Luciana had called for a meeting with the board of trustees. She had been eager to speak to the board members regarding a possible merger with another famous and successful company. The board had approved of her plans and notified the latter company, of which a small delegation had been sent to meet with Luciana and her advisors.
On the day of the meeting, October 13, 2007 to be exact, Luciana and her men met with the company’s delegation, which was said to comprise mainly of four people, of whom no one knew about. There were a lot of tidbits of truths and half-truths regarding these four people, but all of which spoke of a tall, young and handsome gentleman who had a complexion like the moon and eyes so bewitching, so enchanting that no one could rebuke his words.
When the meeting had ended, the delegation having left, and with Luciana having announced the success of the merger, those who closely worked with her but was not with the board or her advisors, duly noticed the absence of said advisors. They had also begun to notices changes within their ranks and with their leader.
Some of Gier Industry’s workers, especially those who were in the upper echelon, were said to have either mysteriously disappeared or recently died. Luciana von Gier had also begun to look…inhuman. Accounts of her started to describe the woman as looking pale and waxy and with crimson lips. Some have also began to state that the workers were starting to speak of having seen the CEO wander around at night, and even glimpses of shining red eyes. There were even detailed mentions of Luciana being seen by her workers in mirrors, in cracks between doorways and in the reflections of window panes, often with feral blood-like eyes and a wicked grin, displaying elongated canines.
These chilling and shadowy accounts began to circulate throughout the company, often sending workers to become superstitious. When more members of the upper ranks began to go missing, some had the courage and the fortune to resign and leave the company. Those who remained, however, had also been seen placing crucifixes, rosaries and Bibles on their tables, or their drawers or even in their bags. Nobody left the building in solitude, often exiting in groups of four and five and even in the company of a trusted police guard. Even the sound of the CEO’s name brought chills to the workers.
This happened for an indefinite amount of time, draping a blanket of fear around the Gier Industry building in the heart of Makati. Such was the widespread terror that some even began to take up arms and become vigilantes. They began to take matters into their own hands, and planned to disclose the terrifying enigma that was Luciana von Gier.
One night, when the moon was high and full, these vigilantes had followed Luciana to her home. The next day, these men were no longer seen among the living.
Today, however, the spooky character of Luciana von Gier had long been declared dead, or interminably missing. With the CEO’s sudden disappearance, and a lack of system due to the absences of the board and advisory, Gier Industry fell into ruin and faded into the annals of history. No one really knew what happened, but once again, rumors slithered their way into the general populace.
Some said that Luciana was killed, or assassinated. Others said that Luciana merely went into hiding and left her multimillion companies into shambles. Few even remarked that Gier Industry had incurred a large debt and was unable to pay, thus explain the absent Madam von Gier and the devastated industry.
Yet, one rumor, met with skepticism and open laughter more often than not, remained. This rumor, or rather account, was believed to be the truth regarding the fall of Luciana von Gier. More so at the fact that this account, this special account, was recorded by the witnesses of Gier Industry on the very last night of the business’ existence.
This account was written by von Gier’s own secretary, of who survived the events of Gier Industry and refused to disclose her name.
Said account was written as:
January 21, 2009
I fear that this may be the last time I write in this journal. Ever since I became Madam von Gier’s secretary, it brought only terror and foreboding into my life. My co-workers tell me that they have seen Madam in the most unusual places, with the most unusual of circumstance. Even my friend, her name I cannot and will not say, said to me that she saw Madam von Gier behind her while she was powdering her face in the company lavatory. She said that no one was in the room, and when she looked up the mirror, she saw Madam, her eyes red, and her mouth in an evil smile.
Oh God, I can feel goosebumps running up my arms. I can’t stay there, with me feeling as if someone is watching me even when I turn to find no one there.
Tomorrow, I will resign immediately. I can’t stay there anymore. Not after what happened a while ago.
I was just finishing up my papers when Madam, tall and menacing in her black dress, stood before my desk and said that she would be meeting someone.
“Ang pangalan niya ay Enrique Varquez, a representative from Waya Incorporated.” She had said, looking down on me with her shining red eyes and a smile that looked better on the Devil. “I want you to send him directly into my office, and after that, I wish to speak with you, alone. Meron akong importante na sasabihin sa iyo.”
I was really terrified. Speak with her? Alone? The thought made me sweat! All I could think at that time was that when Mr.Varquez arrived, I would leave the building immediately.
I followed up on my word. The moment the receptionist on the bottom floor announced the arrival of the Waya Incorporated representative, I packed my bag, replaced my heels with sneakers and placed pepper spray inside my pocket. When Mr. Varquez arrived, I had stood up to greet him.
He was a handsome man, who looked to be about in his thirties. He was dressed impeccably in a three-piece suit, his hair combed back. He looked tense, and his handshake was very strong. I directed him to Madam’s room, and as I was about to turn to leave, I swore that his charming brown eyes flashed yellow.
That was probably the reason why I ran towards the elevator, arrived at the first floor and took a taxi to my home. I never looked back.
This was the last account of which contained Luciana von Gier. And to put more fear into the account, the day after this record was made, January 22, 2009, was the day Madam von Gier was declared missing.
The only question remaining is: what happened during the meeting of Luciana von Gier and Enrique Varquez, the representative of Waya Incorporated?
Whoever said “sleep on that” was a totally accurate person. I was able to reboot my sleep-deprived brain from the long stretch of the Tondo murder investigations.
The investigation team would soon place it on the shelves of cold cases. I’m not certain if it was from lack of evidence. I jus took the one clue we will ever get. I was still on the chase definitely, unsure of what to do if I caught the Devil.
The revelation caught my eye when I got off the bed at noon and inspected the paper for the nth time. The blank page – the back page – wasn’t really blank at all. I found tiny ink marks at the bottommost which read, Property of Estate of Maria Salome de los Salvadores, Alicia, Isabela, based on my magnifier. The ink marks were not 1826; the handwriting was, though. Keen eyes.
I started surfing the social networks, tried every search engines, searched the local crime database, scanned government documents, to no avail. I called up a friend from the past who’s from Alicia. The name wasn’t familiar. Dead end.
Try to contact the local library, they keep a house of ancient papers dating back to Spanish era. By the way, it would be nice to have dinner sometime. The first phrase interested me. The latter hurt both of us – we never got the chance to what modern friends say – catch up.
I easily got connected to the local library and posed as a researcher cum donor – I have a lot of educational books in tow, thanks to my weekly visit to charities.
I travelled in the night of Friday, a dizzying bus journey in winding mountains and ravines. At noon, I met the custodian, an old likable lady. I would have bought cookies if she’s selling one.
The library custodian toured me around the small room with lots of rain-soaked manuscripts. It must be a sorrow for her to see the written history and culture of Filipinos dying in her very eyes. She offered to give them to me for study, safekeeping or delivery to the Institute. I would love to give these dying letters a revival, ironically and aptly, a Prince’s Kiss.
She told me what I wanted to hear. Being the information centre of her town, with a database in her brain, she located the old family who claimed a modern name – Salvador. According to my cookie lady, they have settled in the far-flung plains north of here. They were rich, low profile and apolitical.
I drove the rented car to the exact place the librarian gave me. The mansion was startlingly modest with hints of ancient Spanish and native Iloko. I was received by the family maid and waited for the house owner. I was more amazed and dazed as I point my eyes over the gallantry of the antiquities. I have a quick feeling that I’m in the right place.
My keen eyes caught a small portrait of a lady dressed in overly puffed sleeves. She was a beauty. The parasol did not hide her coiffed shiny black hair. I did not expect the Salvadors to be of pure Filipino descent. I thought they were mestizas.
An old lady broke my thought. The mestiza imposed her aristocracy over me by asking my unexpected presence. She was of Spanish descent with aristocratic features. I apologized for the unexpected visit and handed her the torn manuscript page.
She offered me sweets and tea in the receiving room full of Mahogany pieces. She wasn’t unpleasant after all, just cautious. She told me that generations after generations, the Salvadors kept away from an unseen enemy. The manuscript belonged to them and she wondered how it got to the crime scene, miles away from these plains. The manuscript was actually a diary, published and lost in circulation centuries ago.
I was startled and all the more baffled. A diary? True story blanketed in fiction? Someone in her house might be using the story to commit murder with style.
As if to clear my thoughts, she launched into her family history.
In 1926, her aunt, then 34 years old, saw in her own eyes the horrors of their secrets. Maria Salome was dying at the exact age of 100. Her aunt was tasked to take care of her great aunt, who from the ripe age of 15 was brought into coma with an attack to her chest – two bite marks of the Devil. Maria Salome never had the chance to wake up even for a second. She’s alive and slowly dying and aging.
The diary author, Lauro Astudillo, was a suitor of Maria Salome, who heart-broken and grieving of her condition wrote the published fiction – Sleeping Beauty in Spanish. The Prince was Claudio Escriva-Reyes, who wasn’t around to give her the wake up call. They believed that his presence would bring her back to life. The Kiss never happened.
It was a tragedy. I still didn’t get the Devil’s motive in making us chase after him. I didn’t see the connection also. I only got the idea that someone in the household was recreating the scene.
I thanked her and she offered me to stay for the night. To satisfy my cat’s personality, I asked the lady in the portrait. She did not disappoint me, it was Maria Salome. Apparently, their generation was a pure clan of Filipinos. The descendants married Spanish folks.
As I feel my way to the luxurious room, I felt weird and out of place. The fear gradually crept to my veins and I felt cold. Lauro is alive! A eureka would be an over-acting shout, but it’s a discovery nonetheless. The handwriting both dates back to 1826 and are the same, whoever forged it must be a good artist who invented picture editing tools. How could that be? It has been less than two centuries when it all happened.
Out of the dark corner of the room, near the window, a clap sounded. Perfect!, the voice called. I never thought a rookie cop would get this far. Then steeping out of the dark, a man with red eerie eyes and cold-white skin threatened me with a flash of fangs.
The Devil’s Prong! I felt dizzy I must be dreaming. A vampire is a folklore. A fiction.
I stood frozen as his glowing presence overtook the paleness of his skin. I have no idea if Spanish people looked pale this close. He moved around the room with an easy and smooth dance of a preying panther.
Let me introduce myself, he bowed. Señor Lauro Astudillo.You are such a smart cat! I sent the message not to your street dumb colleagues but to my archenemy, my rival for life. Ironic, he laughed heartily. A rival for “life”. More Satanic laughs as I still stood frozen.
Now, the dinner is ready. He lunged over me as I pray for my soul. I knew it would be my last few seconds. I can’t pray for salvation. But salvation came. A man of equal feature and strength toppled Lauro out of the window with a crashing sound.
I still stood frozen.
Year 2000, October 10. Umiiyak si Paolo, isang kinse anyos na binatilyo na tama lang ang kagwapuhan at ang height ngunit maputi, umiiyak siya dahil nagulpi na naman siya ng mga kaklase niyang si Cillio at mga kabarkada nito. Karamay ni Paolo ang kaibigang si Eduard na matyagang nagpapagaan ng loob ng pobreng kaibigan. Sinamahan ni Eduard pauwi si Paolo.
Dumating sila sa bahay ni Paolo sa Malate, nagkasalubong sila ng half-brother ni Paolo na si Lino, maputi, bente-singko anyos na pogi at matangkad sa gate ng bahay nila.
“SINONG GUMAWA NITO SA ‘YO!?!” galit na sabi ni Lino. “DIBA SABI KONG ‘WAG MO SILANG PANSININ AT AWAYIN, BAKIT NAKIPAGSUNTUKAN KA PA RIN SA KANILA!?!” dugtong nito, nanggagalaiti sag galit na pang-impyerno ang bagsik.
“Kuya… sobra na sila----” sagot ni Paolo pero din a iyon nadugtungan pa dahil sumigaw ulit ang kuya niya, this time, daig pa ang pagsabog ng bulkan.
“ANG TIGAAASSS NG ULO MOOOOOOO!!!!”
Tahimik lang si Eduard sa tabi pero puno na ng takot ang dibdib niya, baka kasi pagalitan din siya ni Lino, nagtagal muna siya doon ng ilang minuto, patuloy sa paghagod ng likod ni Paolo, patuloy na pinapagaan ang damdamin ng kaibigan. Hinintay muna niyang humupa ang galit ng kuya ng kaibigan niya at nagpaalam na rin ito sa kanila.
Pagkaalis ni Eduard ay naging tahimik ang bahay nila Paolo, di sila nag-usap ng kuya niya, hanggang dumating ang hapunan at hanggang matulog ang magkapatid sa kani-kanilang mga kwarto.
Malungkot at umiiyak sa kama si Paolo “Kung may kakayahan lang sana akong lumaban,” sabi ni Paolo sa sarili, “di na nila ako aasarin.” Dugtong ng binatilyo, umiyak siya hanggang siya ay makatulog.
Gumising si Paolo ng maaga, naligo, nagbihis, at pumunta sa kusina para mag-almusal, noong mga panahong iyon ay naka-upo si Lino, sa isang upuan.
“May sasabihin ako sa ‘yo, Paolo, makinig ka. Alam kong masama ang loob mo sa akin, pero talagang di tama na pumatol ka sa mga kaklase mo.” wika ni Lino, hindi na siya galit pero bakas ang pagiging seryoso sa tono ng boses niya.
“Ayos lang iyon kuya, hahabaan ko na lang ang pasensya ko ------” naputol ulit ang pagsasalita ni Paolo, bigla kasing tumayo ang kuya niya mula sa kinauupuan niya at lumakad papunta sa kanya, bigla niya itong hinawakan sa dalawang balikat.
“Pero hindi porket di mo sila papansinin ay hindi ka na lalaban, masama ang mundo, Paolo, matutulungan kitang malusutan ang kasamaang iyon kung papayag kang lumaban.” gigil na gigil si Lino ng sinabi niya iyon, nanlilisik ang mga mata niya.
“Hindi kita maintindihan, kuya.” Nagulat siya, iyon lang ang naging reaksyon ni Paolo, nagkaroon ng nerbyos ang dibdib niya.
“Gusto mo bang umangat sa buhay, hindi apihin ng iba at magawa lahat ng gusto mo?” tanong ni Lino. “Kaya kong gawin iyon, at kaya mo rin kung papayag ka, alam kong gusto mo ito, pagkakataon mo ng umangat sa buhay, Paolo.”
Nawala ang nerbyos sa dibdib ng binatang si Paolo. Naisip niya ang mga masasakit na nangyari sa buhay niya, ayaw na niya itong mangyari pa, matagal siyang nag-isip, at sa wakas, sumagot siya.
“Oo, gusto ko, wala na akong pakialam kung anu man ang mangyari, tinatanggap ko, kuya.” Sagot ni Paolo, alam niyang masama iyon pero tinanggap niya, saying din ang pagkakataon. Tama ang hinala ni Paolo sa kuya niya, iba nga ito sa lahat. Noong mga panahong iyon ay agad na naging pula ang mga mata ni Lino at lumabas ang pangil ng pagiging isang imortal na nasa kaloob-looban ng nakatatandang kapatid.
TO BE CONTINUED…
Masayang masaya si Paolo, nagagawa na nga niya ang mga gusto niya, bukod sa marunong na siyang lumaban, nakapatay ng limang lobong sundalo, at malaya sa pamumuno ni Magnus (si Lino at Paolo ay di nagpapasa-ilalim ng kahit na sinong matatandang bampira), ay nagagamit niya ang pagiging bampira para maka-score ng mga magagandang babae, kahit menor de edad pa ito.
Inilihim ni Paolo ang kakayahan niya sa lahat, kahit kay Eduard habang sabay na nagbalak na gantihan ang mga kaklase niyang umapi sa kanya ---- si Cillio at ang mga kaibigan nito.
Tumunog ang bell para sa recess, bumili ang ating binatilyong bida ng isang softdrink at sinadyang banggain at tapunan ang bagong uniporme ni Cillio, at syempre, umastang hindi daw niya ito sinasadya. Nagalit si Cillio at pinagbantaang suntukin ang batang bampira, hinawakan niya ang kwelyo ng uniporme ni Paolo at inilapit niya ang kamao niya sa mukha ng bampira. Habang nangyayari ang eksenang ito, tahimik ang mga ibang estudyante, halos di makagalaw ang lahat at nerbyos na nerbyos sa kung anu mang mangyari, kasama na doon si Eduard na dahan dahang lumakad papalapit kay Paolo na handang lumaban para sa kaibigan.
“STOP IT!” sigaw ng isang babae, lumingon ang lahat, teacher pala nila ‘yon, nakatayo at galit sa mga nangyayari sa harap niya, “Don’t you know that that is rule violating!?!” dagdag pa niya.
“Teacher, eto kasing tangang ‘to eh, binuhusan ng softdrink ang uniporme ko, bago pa naman ito.” rason ni Cillio, tumango naman ang lima niyang kaibigan.
Tea---cher, di ko po iyon si---sinasad—ya.” sagot ni Paolo, perpektong perpekto niya ang arte niya, mukha talaga siyang takot, pero ang di nila alam, luto na ang paghihiganting plano niya.
“Osha-sha, say sorry, Paolo, and tigilan n’yo ‘yan, may klase pa tayo, tigil na.” utos ng teacher nila, sinunod naman ito ng dalawa, pero nagbanta si Cillio at mga kaibigan nito na bubugbugin nila ito kapag oras na ng uwian sa likod ng paaralan nila. Galak na galak ang ating bida dahil sa banta ng kaklase niya, oras na daw ng paghihiganti, kaya, sinadya niyang di sumama kay Eduard at nagdahilan na may gagawing iba, nagtagumpay siya sa pagsisinungaling niya. Dumiretso si Paolo sa lugar kung saan naghihintay sina Cillio at ang mga kasama nito, sila lang dalawa ang nasa lugar na iyon.
Sa likod ng eskwelahan nila sila nagkita-kita ang mga magka-kaklase, naka-yuko ang ulo ni Paolo habang galit na paparating sina Cillio.
Hindi na nagpatumpik-tumpik pa si Cillio at tumakbo siya para suntukin si Paolo, ngunit bago pa man mangyari iyon ay tiningnan na ng mga pulang mata ni Paolo ang kulay kayummaging mata ni Cillion at nag-utos na: “Hindi ka gagalaw, papanoorin mo lang ang mga kaibigan mong pahihirapan ko, at di ka iimik.” Tumawa ng malakas si Paolo habang hangal na sinusunod ni Cillion ang mga utos niya. Binalak ipagtanggol si Cillion ng mga kaibigan niya ngunit isa-isa silang nasaktan: ang isa ay napaulanan ng sangkatutak na suntok, ang isa ay mga malalakas na sipa, ang isa ay sinakal at tinapon sa pader ng paaralan nila, ang isa naman ay kinagat at ininuman ng dugo.
Nag-iisa na lang si Cillio at inilapit ni Paolo ang mata nito sa kanya sabay sabing: “Pagkatapos kitang kagatin ay lalakad ka paalis dito at makakalimutan mo ang mga nangyari ngayung hapon.”
Agad na kinagat si Cillio sa leeg ngunit di ininom ni Paolo ang dugo nito, bagkus ay hinayaan niya lang itong umagos paalis sa sistema ng katawan ni Cillio, pagkatapos noon ay umalis na si Cillio na parang walang nangyari.
Aalis na sana si Paolo ng may isang bagay na tumalon mula sa bubong ng paaralan nila, pamilyar ito sa kanya --- si Eduard, dilaw ang mga mata at mahahaba ang mga kuko!
Imbes na kalabanin ni Eduard si Paolo ay nagsalita lang ito.
“Pao, masama ‘yan, ‘wag mong sirain ang buhay mo sa kapangyarihan at paghihiganti. Huwag kang pumunta sa maling daan.”
“Lobo ka!?! Kung ga’non, hindi mo ako masasaktan, Eduard, unti unti ko nang nakakamit at hustisya, katarungan, at kasiyahan sa mundong ito, dahil ‘yan sa kapangyarihan ko.” natatanging sagot ni Paolo, bakas ang pinaghalong malisya at galit sa mukha niya.
“Kasiyahan, hustisya, at katarungan ba ang tawag mo dito? Mas lulubog ka dahil diyan sa pinaggagagawa mo, Pao, nagiging katulad ka na nila (sabay turo sa mga kaibigan ni Cillio), dito sa karera ng buhay ay dapat tayong magtiis, magsakripisyo, magsipag, at higit sa lahat ay lumaban ng patas. ‘Wag mong daanin sa dahas, Pao, di ka sasaya, hindi ka ba nakokonsyensya?” tanong at paliwanag ni Eduard, tumutulo ang luha niya noong mga panahong iyon habang si Paolo ay nakaramdam ng kakaiba. Nakaramdam si Paolo ng di maipaliwanag na kalungkutan, pagkahiya sa sarili, at higit sa lahat, konsyensya mula sa mga nagawa niyang mali, unti-unting tumulo ang mga huna niya at biglang nagdilim ang paligid…
“GUMISING KA NAAAAAA!!!!”
Ang sigaw na iyon ang nagpagising sa natutulog na si Paolo, panaginip lang pala ang lahat, nasa harapan niya ang kuya niya, strikto ang mukha nito.
“Maligo ka na at may pasok ka pa sa eskwela.”
Agad bumangon si Paolo at sinunod ang kuya, pero bago mangyari iyon ay hinarap muna niya ang kuya niya at sinabing: “Napagisip-isip ko kuya ang mga sinabi mo, tama ka, di dapat ako pumatol kina Cillio, at dapat, sa buhay, na-realize ko, kung lumaban ka, dapat patas, dahil maghihirap ka kung hindi.” Nagpasalamat si Paolo sa kuya, hinalikan ito at pumunta ng banyo para maligo.
“Mabuti naman at natuto ka rin, ok lang ‘yon, ‘wag mo na ulit gagawin ‘yun ha.” Sagot ng kuya niya na sinagot naman ni Paolo ng “Opo.”
Pumunta si Lino sa kusina para tapusin ang niluluto niyang dinuguan, ngunit iba ang naging aura nito. Humarap siya sa isang salamin na pula ang mata… at may mga pangil sa bibig.
“Sayang, Paolo, ibabahagi ko pa naman sa iyo ang kapangyarihan ng isang imortal na meron ako, sayang, inihahanda pa naman kitang maging isang bampira.” iyon lang ang sinabi ni Lino habang umiinom ng dugo mula sa sangkap na niluluto niya para sa almusal nilang dinuguan na ‘yun pala’y dugo ng tao.
THE END
Daang taon na ang nakalipas ng naglaho ang mga bampira. Maraming Taong Lobo ang piniling manirahan ng normal kasama ng mga tao, kabilang na rito ang pamilya nila Edz, Nikkie, Inna, Chelo, at Ching pati narin ang iba pa nilang mga kaibigan. Si Edz ay 22 years old isang bago- bagong ganap na taong lobo pa lamang. Una siyang nakapagpalit-balat ng siya’y tumungtong siya ng edad na 21 doon mismo sa studio kung saan siya nagtratrabaho. Si Nikkie naman ay 23 years old isang taon ang tanda kay Edz at nagtratrabaho bilang nursing class part-time lecturer sa feu. Sina Inna na isang licensed nurse, Chelo na isang hotel manager, at si Ching na isang lecturer sa isang kolehiyo sa maynila ay magkakasamang nagtratrabaho sa maynila. Because of their busy schedule weekends nalang kung sila’y magkita.
One of their trips to Nueva Ecija, it was Friday night nang napagkasunduan nila na sa Cabanatuan nalang dumaan para daanan si Edz. Past 10:00 pm na ng masundo nila si Edz sa Cabanatuan. Dala nadin ng pagod at gutom, kumain muna sila sa isang fast food chain na kanilang nadaanan. Pagkatapos nilang kumain at magpahinga, masaya nilang tinahak ang daan pauwi. They were singing, laughing and shouting inside the car, they were very happy as if it’s the last time nilang magkakasama. Sa kahabaan ng tulay ng Valdefuente ay may nakita si Nikkie na lalaking nakatayo sa gitna ng tulay at malapit na itong masagasaan. Pinindot ni Nikkie ang busina ng sasakyan. Pero hindi pa rin ito natitinag sa kanyang pagkakatayo. Minabuti nalang niyang ihinto ang sasakyan bago pa nila itong masagasaan. Lahat sila ay bumaba ng sasakyan para tingnan ang lalaki. Napansin nila na tumatawa ito habang nakatingin sa kanila. Ganon na lamang ang pagkabigla nila ng makita nila na pula ang nanlilisik na mga mata ng lalaki at mayroon itong matutulis na pangil na handing kumagat sa kaninuman. “BAMPIRA” sigaw ni Edz, Pero huli na ang lahat nang napansin nila na hindi pala nag-iisa ang lalaki , may apat pa itong kasama na nakapalibot sa kanila. Kahit labag sa kanilang lahat, napilitan silang lumaban nang hindi nagpapalit-balat, dahil pinangako nilang sabay ng pamumuhay ng normal ay hindi na sila magpapalit-balat para narin sa ikaliligtas nila mula sa panganib na dala ng mga tao na hindi tanggap ang nga katulad nila sa lipunan.
Lumaban sila sa abot ng kanilang makakaya. Sa gitna ng labanan naalala ni Edz ang suot niyang kwintas na may pendant na hugis patalim na gawa sa pinaka purong pilak na nakasilid sa espesyal na sisidlan upang maiwasang masaktan o mapaso sila na may suot nito. Pinasadya nila ang kwintas para sa ganitong pagkakataon . “guys ang kwintas!!” sigaw ni Edz sa mga kaibigan. Kasabay ng pagbuhos ng ulan ay ang kanilang tagumpay, pero huli na ang lahat ng makita nila si Ching na may saksak sa dibdib at kagat ng bampira sa leeg nito at wala ng buhay sa likod ng kotse.
Kabi-kabila na naman ang pagsalakay ng mga bampira sa mga tao at taong lobo. Kasabay nito naging aktibo nadin ang mga mandirigmang lobo para pangalagaan ang kanilang lahi. Napagdesisyunan ng mga magkakaibigan na tumulong din sa pagpuksa sa mga bampira, at para mabigyan nadin ng hustisya ang pagkamatay ng kanilang kaibigan. Tutulong sila ng hindi nalalaman ng iba pang taong lobo. Pinangunahan ni Owen ang kanilang grupo, si Owen na matalik din nilang kaibigan. Siya ang pinaka-matanda sa kanilang grupo. Siya ay nagtratrabaho bilang pulis na handang magtanggol sa mga tao at sa kapwa niya taong lobo. Tinuruan sila ni Owen kung papaano humawak at gumamit ng iba’t ibang klase ng baril, kung dati rati puro pagsasaya lang ang dahilan kung bakit sila umuuwi tuwing weekends, ngayon ginugugol nila ito sa pag-eensayo at bukas silang matutrunan ang iba’t ibang paraan para paghandaan ang mga laban na haharapin nila. Laking pasasalamat nila kay Owen dahil bukas ito ituro sa kanila ang kanyang nalalaman, hindi nagging madali sa kanila ang mga naunang laban nila sa mga bampira dahil sa kakulangan narin ng mga sandata at sa kakulangan din sa bilang. Sa tulong narin ng isang kamag-anak ni Owen na kabilang sa mga lobong inilikas ng mga sundalong lobo sa syudad nalaman nila ang mga pangitain ng gabay at kung saan susunod na susugod ang mga bampira. Ang sumunod nilang ingkwento ay sa isang pre-school. Hindi nagging madali ang labanan na iyon dahil sa isang maling galaw nila buhay ng mga batang nandoon ang mailalagay sa panganib. Di sila nag-iisa sa labanan na iyon, nagulat sila ng malaman nila na isang taong lobo rin pala ang teacher na si Elisha. Pinagtanggol ni Elisha ang batang si Joshua mula sa bampirang gusting kumagat sa kanya, nalaman kasi ng mga ito na lobo ang batang si Joshua. Tumulong si Suzane sa pagtatanggol sa kapatid na si Joshua. Ganon ganon nalang nyang ihinagis ang dalawang bampirang nakahawak sa kapatid.
Dahil sa takot na mangyari ulit ang nangyari sa pre-school napagpasyahan nila Elisha at Suzane na sumali sa kanila, sa kagustuhang ipagtanggol ang nga taong mahahalaga sa kanila. Napapadalas nadin ang kanilang laban. Nahihirapan nadin sila dahil malalakas na din ang mga bampira na kanilang kinakaharap, kaya nagisip nadin sila ng mga paraan para makakuha ng mga sandata na gagamitin nila sa mga susunod nilang mga laban. Naisip ni Owen ang mga taong maaaring tumulong sa kanila. Si Lt. Francis Galapon na isang air force official. Walang naaksayang oras sina Edz at Nikkie agad-agad nilang pinuntahan si Francis sa tinitirahan nito. Dahil bukas ang pinto pumasok nalang ang dalawa ng hindi kumakatok, dahil sa inakala ni Francis na mga bampira ang pumasok agad syang nagpalit-balat. Ganon nalang ang pagkabigla ng dalawa ng malamang isa rin palang taong-lobo si Francis. “Sandal,sandali.!!!hindi kami masasamang tao.” Sigaw ni Nikkie kay Francis na nooy nahimasmasan na at nagbalik na sa anyong tao. “Naparito kami para hingin ang iyong tulong” sabat ni Edz habang inaabot sa kanya ang tuwalya na nakita niya sa upuan na malapit sa kinatatayuyan niya. Habang nag-uusap ang tatlo ay may dalawang babae na pumasok sa pinto, nagulat sila ng madatnan na may dalawang babaeng kausap si Francis. Nagtaka si Aireen kung sino ang dalawang iyon at ano ang pakay nila sa kaniyang boyfriend, at ganoon pa ang ayos ni Francis na nakabalot lamang ng tuwalya. Naging maagap si Albert at agad niyang ipinakilala sa ang dalawa niyang bisita kina Aireen at Jenyfer, silang dalawa ay kasamahan ni Francis sa air force bukod pa sa fiancé niya si Aireen. Bilang pagbibigay galang tumayo sila Nikkie at Edz at sabay abo’t ng kamay sa dalawa. Nagulat nalang sila ng biglang umilaw ng dilaw ang mga mata ng dalawa sabay tawa, “Hi, taong lobo din kami tulad ni Francis at ninyong dalawa, so pano bayan….we belong” sabi ni Aireen habang nakikipagkamay sa dalawa.
Kung hindi naging madali ang mga nauna nilang laban, ngayon hindi na sila gaanong nahihirapan dahil kompleto na sila sa mga sandata at nadagdagan pa ang kanilang bilang dahil sumali na rin sa kanilang grupo sina Albert, Aireen at Jenyfer. Nagpagawa na rin si Edz ng mga kuwintas na katulad ng suot nila para ibigay sa mga bago nilang kaibigan. Sabay-sabay silang naghahanda para sa pinakamalaking laban na haharapin nila, napagkasunduan nilang lusubin nila ang kuta ng mga bampira ng buong Nueva Ecija. Masusi nilang pinaplano ang gagawing paglusob. Halos araw-araw silang nagsasanay dahil hindi lang isa, dalawa o sampung bampira ang kanilang kakalabanin kundi isang lupon ng mga bampira. Sa ganap na 10:00 ng gabi ng araw ng Biyernes nila itinakda ang paglusob dahil narinig nila nung nakaraang araw na sa araw na iyon gagawin nila ang kanilang pagpupulong para paghandaan ang paglusob sa mga taong lobo sa buong Nueva Ecija.
Dahan-dahan nilang pinasok ang bakuran ng isang lumang warehouse na di kalayuan sa bayan ng Cuyapo kung saan nagkuta ang lahat ng bampira sa buong probinsya. Si Edz ang unang pumasok sa loob ng mismong warehouse nagdaan siya sa butas mula sa itaas ng warehouse. Mula sa itaas tumalon siya pababa at sinimulan ng barilin ang mga bampirang nandoon. Silver bullets ang gamit nilang mga bala para siguradong mamamatay ang sino mang bampirang matamaan nito. Sa harap naman dumaan sila Owen, Nikkie, Elisha, at Suzane. “SURPRISE!!” sigaw ni Nikkie habang papasok sa loob habang nakatingin na mistulang nang-iinsulto sa mga bampirang nakakakita sa kanila. Tulad ni Edz gumamit din ng baril ang ilan sa kanila at ang iba naman ay sumugod agad at gumamit ng punyal na gawa sa pilak para saksakin kung sino man sa kanila ang humarang sa dinaraanan nila. Sa bandang likuran ng warehouse dumaan sina Francis, Aireen, Jenyfer, Inna, at Chelo. Puno na ng aksyon ang loob ng warehouse, suntukan, sipaan, saksakan, at barilan ang nangyayari. Sa di sinasadyang pangyayari natamaan ng ligaw na bala si Elisha, nakita ito ni Owen “Elisha!!”sigaw ni Owen habang nagmamadaling tumatakbo papunta kung saan naroroon ang sugatan at nakahigang kasamahan. “Hayaan mo na ako, at tulungan mo sila”. Sagot ni Elisha kay Owen. Agad na sumaklolo si Inna sa dalawa “Owen ako na dyan tulungan mo nalang sila, ako na ang bahala kay Elisha!”, “Inna iligtas mo siya, huwag mo siyang pababayaan” may pag-aalalang tinig ni Owen. Napalapit na si Owen kay Elisha kaya ganoon nalang ang kanyang pag-aalala.
Isang nurse si Inna kaya alam niya ang dapat na gawin sa ganoong pangyayari. Dahil sa nangyari kay Elisha nag-uumapaw ang galit ni Owen at dahil don agad siyang nagpalit-balat, madali niyang naibabalibag at napapatay ang mga bampira na nakakaharap niya gamit lamang ang kanyang matatalim na ngipin. Sa kabilang banda ng warehouse magkasamang nakikipaglaban sina Chelo at Aireen ng makita ni Chelo ang gustong gawin ng isang bampira kay Aireen ,kaya bago pa man masaksak ang kaibigan, nabaril na niya ito. Nagulat si Aireen sa nangyari . “Tnx, you saved my life.” Sambit niya kay Chelo. At nagpatuloy sila sa paglaban sa mga bampira. Abala rin sa labanan si Nikkie , hindi niya tuloy napansin na may papalapit na bampira sa kanyang likuran at sinaksak siya sa balikat. Naging maagap si Nikkie at bago pa man maibaon ng bampira ang panaksak , hinablot agad niya ang kanyang kwintas at agad na naitarak sa dib-dib ng bampira. Dala na rin ng pagod ang ilan sa kanila ay sugatan na din at kulang pa sa bala. Kailangan ng lumaban nina Francis, Edz, Owen, Inna at Jenyfer ng lakas sa lakas ng bampira.
Patakbong sumugod si Edz sa mga bampirang nakatayo sa di kalayuan sa kanila at bago pa siya makarating sa mga ito ay nakapagpalit-balat na siya. Nakagat ni Edz ang hita ng pinuno ng nga bampira at patakbong kinaladkad ang katawan ng bampira at nang bibitiwan na niya iyon sa pag-aakalang wala itong buhay, biglang sinipa niya si Edz at nang tumilapon si Edz sa di kalayuan dahil sa laks ng sipa, agad niya itong pinuntahan at sasakyan at nang sasaksakin na siya ng bampira, nakarinig na lamang ng putok ng baril si Edz na siya namang kinamatay ng bampirang sasaksak kay Edz. Nang tiningnan niya kung sino an gang nagligtas sa buhay niya nakita niya si Suzane na nakahiga na may hawak na baril. Sugatan din si Suzane nakahiga sa gilid at kasama si Elisha na kanina’y natamaan ng ligaw na bala. “Ang galling mo, akala ko katapusan kona kanina,salamat ahhh!!” nakangiting sabi ni Edz kay Suzane. Sa huli nanaig padin ang kabutihan. Ang kaninang pagod ay napalitan ng saya at sa wakas mababalik nadin nila ang katahimikan sa buong Nueva Ecija.
“Sorry kayo naunahan naming kayo, pinaplano nyo palang pasugod na kami!”. Masayang sambit ni Edz sa mga naiwang abo ng mga nasawing bampira. Nagtawanan silang lahat sa sinabing iyon ni Edz. May ngiting dinalaw nila Edz, Inna, Chelo, at Nikkie ang puntod ni Ching. Nabigyang hustisya na nila ang pagkamatay ng kanilang kaibigan. At ang mahalaga sa lahat tahimik nanaman ang magiging pamumuhay ng mga magkakaibigan at ng buong Nueva Ecija. Pero ang tanong na naiwan sa kanilang isipan, “Hanggang kalian kaya ang katahimikang iyon?”
ITUTULOY...
Si Emay ay kinse-anyos na binatilyo na walang takot na lumakad papasok sa lugar na iyon. Bakit naman siya matatakot kung alam niyang sa lugar na iyon makakamit ang kasiyahan?
Ang lugar na iyon ay weird at puno ng mga taong astig tingnan sa mata, at nakaitim pa.
Walang takot si Emay kahit weird ang lugar na iyon, dire-diretso sa paglalakad ang binata na nakangiti. Sa likod niya ay may dalawang lalaking nakasunod sa kanya, ang isa ay may napaka-maitim na balat at isang lalaki na pogi na may American accent mag-ingles. Hindi kalaunan ay nakarating sila sa isang kwarto na may nakatayong isang middle-aged na lalaking tisoy na naka-polong maitim. Nagsalita ang lalaki.
\"Raphael, James, kami na ang bahala rito.\" sabi ng lalaki.
\"Sige po, pinunong Magnus.\" sagot ni Raphael, ang lalaking maitim ang balat sabay takbo, hindi nagulat si Emay noong sa isang kisap-mata\'y bigla lang silang nawala. Lumapit ang lalaki sa kanya.
\"Emay, ako si Magnus. Kung magiging magkakalahi man tayo, ako ang pinuno mo, handa ka na?\" tanong ni Magnus, nakangisi siya at nag-iba ang itsura niya, naging pula ang mga mata niya at nagkaroon siya ng pangil.
\"Oo, oras na para gumanti at magkaroon ng kapangyarihan ang tulad ko.\" ang tangi at simpleng sagot si Emay ngunit punong puno ng kasamaan. Inilabas niya ang leeg niya at ipinikit niya ang kanyang mga mata. Nakaramdam siya ng dalawang matutulis na bagay na tumusok sa leeg niya at nagdilim ang lahat.
Gumising si Emay na nakapalibot ang mga bampirang nasa lugar na iyon, nagpasalamat, at sumama sa ibang bampirang mambibiktima ng tao. Ang hindi alam ng mga bampira doon ay balak ni Emay na mamuhay mag-isa, ayaw magpa-alipin kay Magnus kaya nagkuta siya sa ibang lugar.
Ang unang ginawa ni Emay pagkatapos magkaroon ng perpektong kuta ay maghiganti sa mga kaklase niyang nang-api sa kanya. Nagsuot siya ng itim na polo, itim na pantalon, itim na rubbershoes, at itim na maskarang gawa sa tela, \'yun bang ginagamit ng mga rebelde sa bundok. Handa na ang batang bampira para maghasik ng lagim
Naglalakad ang isa sa mga kagalit niyang classmate na si Lyle, sinundan niya ito hanggang sa pumasok sa isang tagong lugar para umihi.
Pagkatapos na pagkatapos umihi ni Lyle ay biglang kinagat ni Emay ang leeg nito at ginawa itong bampira. Habang tulog pa ang kawawang biktima ay nag-iwan ng manuscript si Emay na nakasaad ang mga paraan kung paano gumawa ng sunblock vampire version, babala na dapat di magbabad sa init ng araw kung wala kang sunblock na gamit, ang mga paraan ng pamumuhay ng isang bampira, ang pangalan ng manuscrip ay BAMPIRA KA NA!
Nagtago si Emay sa tabi, pinapanood si Lyle na basahin ang manuscrip. Hindi ito naniwala at tumakbo siya papalayu sa lugar na iyon, nagulat na lamang siya at bumilis ang takbo niya. Bago pa malaman ni Lyle na bampira NA NGA TALAGA siya ay nasunog at naging abo na ito.
Tumawa si Emay sa nasaksihan niya, simula na ng paghihiganti para sa kanya. Marami pang ginawang bampira si Emay na mga kaaway niya, kagaya ni Lyle, bigla bigla niya lang itong ginawang bampira, ang ilan ay napatay ng mga taong lobo, ang ilan ay namatay sa kamay ng mga ka-angkan ni Magnus, ang ilan ay napaso sa pilak, konti lang ang nabuhay.
Kalaunan ay naging libangan na niya ang biglaang pambibiktima sa mga tao, ang ilan ay bigla lang niyang ginagawang bampira, at ang pinakakawawa sa lahat ay iyong mga taong kinagat niya ang leeg ngunit hindi inubusan ng dugo, bagkus ay hinahayaan niya lang itong tumulo palabas ng katawan ng mga biktima niya.
TO BE CONTINUED...
Lahat ay may katapusan ngunit hindi iyon alintana kay Emay, patuloy siya sa pambibiktima ng mga walang malay at kawawang tao.
Naglalakad ang binatilyong bampira sa isang kalye nang matanaw niya ang dalawang babaeng nag-uusap habang naglalakad mula sa kabilang dulo ng kalye, sa tingin niya ay mga katulad niyang kinse-anyos din ito. Nagbalak siyang lapitan ang dalawa at bigla siyang nagulat sa mga nakita niya, sina Kathryn Bernardo at Julia Montes pala ang makakasalubong niya, nagbalak siyang kausapin muna ito bago biktimahin.
Mali ang akala ni Emay, kamukha lang pala ng dalawang dilag ang mga bida sa Mara Clara, dahil ang pangalan ng kamukha ni Kathryn ay Samantha o Sam habang ang kamukha naman ni Julia ay Lia.
Hindi nagtagal, nagbunyag si Emay sa totoo niyang pagkatao, lumabas ang mga pangil nito at pumula ang mga mata. Sinuntok niya ang dalawang babae at tumilapon sila sa malayo, lumapit si Emay una kay Sam para biktimahin ito ngunit nagulat siya sa nakita niya, pula ang mata niya at nagkaroon ito ng pangil.
\"Ako si Samantha Imperial, anak ni Magnus Imperial na gumawa sa \'yong bampira, humanda ka na sa katapusan mo!\" galit na sabi ni Sam, tumakbo siya ng mabilis para patayin si Emay ngunit nakarinig siya ng alulong, napalingon siya. Sa likod niya, nakatayo si Lia, nakalabas ang mga kukong itim at dilaw ang mga mata.
\"Tulungan na kita, Sam.\" nakangising sagot ni Lia, tumakbo siya patungo kay Emay at pinagkakakalmot ang lalaking bampira, tinulungan ito ni Sam.
Sinubukan niyang lumaban ngunit di niya kaya ang lakas ni Lia at galing ni Sam, sumuko ito.
\"Dapat, kung mambibiktima ka, dapat alam mong lumaban, dahil baka bampira o lobo ang mabibiktima mo! TANGA!\" sigaw ni Lia sabay lapat ng kanang palad nito sa mukha ni Emay, nakaramdam ang lalaking bampira ng nakakapasong init sa mukha at nagdilim ang lahat.
\"HOY, NAPANO KA!?!\" sigaw ni Lyn, pinsan ni Emay.
Nalaman ni Emay na nasa sala siya ng bahay nila, nakaharap siya sa telebisyon nila.
\"Grabe, \'insan, lakas ng imagination ko, na-imagine ko na bampira ako at nambibiktima ng tao, tapos si Kathryn Bernardo si Samantha tapos si Julia Montes si Lia, sinubukan ko raw sila biktimahin ngunit napatay nila ako.\" tulalang ulat ni Emay, mukhang nasa kaharian pa rin ng imahinasyon ang binata habang tumawa naman ng malakas si Lyn.
\"Ano \'yan? Imortal na Mara Clara version!?! ADIK KA!\" reaksyon ni Lyn na aliw na aliw sa pagtawa, \"Tumigil ka na diyan at last episode na ngayon ng Imortal, malapit ng magsimula, abangan ng Mara Clara.\"
\"Ay, oo nga pala, sige, tahimik na tayo, excited na ko!\" galak na sabi ni Emay habang nagsimula naman ang intro music ng Imortal.
THE END!
Sa malayo at tagong nayon sa Mindanao na tinatawag na Islang buhangin, ay naninirahan ang mga espesyal na uri ng mga aswang na tinatawag na Balasik, sa baryo na ito halos nakatira ang buong lahi ng mga balasik at payapang namumuhay ayon sa kanilang gusto, bagamat mga aswang ay hindi sila kumakain ng mga mortal na tao, kada linggo lamang sila kumakain at nagsasagawa ng mga pista tangan ang kanilang mga alagang hayop upang kanilang pagsaluhan, sa umaga sila ay anyong tao ngunit sa gabi ay nagiging tila kulay asul ang kanilang mga balat at nagbabago sa anyong bayawak, nagtataglay ng hindi masukat na pisikal na lakas, sila ang tinuring na pinaka malakas na aswang sa buong bansa.
Sa kabilang dako ay nakarating na si Elias sa kanyang destinasyon, dito inabot niya sa isang pang bampira ang nakuhang dugo ng birhen ng sirena, at sa loob ng isang mansion ay hinarap niya ang misteryosong nilalang na nagtatago sa kadiliman, Magaling Elias! Ngayon ay mabubuhay na natin ang panginoong Debora mula sa kanyang pagkakahimlay.
Una ang dugo ng Bakunawa na aming binuhay mula sa pagaalay ng santelmo, Pangalawa ang dugo ng birheng sirena mula sa kaharian ng Balyeno, At ang huli ang dugo ng isang makapangyarihang Balasik na nagkukubli sa baryo ng Islang buhangin, Pagsamahin ang tatlong sangkap at ialay sa libingan ng ating panginoong si Debora, at muli siyang mabubuhay upang maghiganti sa mga taong lobo at bampira na pumaslang sa kanya. Ano!? Sambit ni Elias, Niloko mo ako! Ang sabi mo ay galit ka lang sa mga taong lobo, Galit na bulyaw ni Elias, ngunit mula sa dilim ay lumabas ang nagtatagong nilalang at ipinakita ang kanyang sarili, ang pinuno ng mga Mistiko na si Leon, Wala ka nang magagawa uubusin ko ang lahat ng salot sa mundong ito, mula sa kanyang kapangyarihan bilang mistiko ay tinapos niya ang buhay ni Elias sa pagsamo ng elemento ng yelo at kinulong ito, gamit ang kanyang espada ay binasag niya ang estatwa na yelo at nagkapira-piraso ito.
Tinawag ni Leon ang mga malalakas na Mistiko kabilang ang santelmo na tumapos sa bakunawa upang magsagawa ng pagpupulong, dito ay naghanda si Leon ng bitag sa mga kasamahan, nagulat na lang sila ng lusubin sila ng mga taong ahas nang gabing iyon nalupig ang mga mistiko at mismong si Leon ang tumapos sa santelmo gamit ang isang patalim habang lumalaban ang santelmo sa mga taong ahas. Naging malaking pakinabang ka sa aming mithiin banal na santelmo ngunit sa pagkakataong ito ay wala na ka nang silbi sa aming mga plano, si Leon ay kabilang sa grupo ng mga taong ahas, ngunit tao ay malaki ang galit at poot niya sa mga taong lobo at bampira dahil pinaniniwalaan niyang ito ang pumaslang sa kanyang mga magulang noong siya ay bata pa lamang.
Isang mistiko ang nag-aruga sa kanya at tinuruang gumamit ng kapangyarihan, ngunit sa sa kaloob-looban niya ay ang mithiing makapaghiganti sa mga nilalang na tumapos sa buhay ng kanyang mga magulang. Nang gabing iyon ay nagtipon ang lahat ng mga taong ahas sa kanilang mansyon upang magbigay pugay sa pinuno nilang si Fausto. Ang huling natitirang sangkap upang buhayin ang panginoon nating si Debora ay abot kamay na natin, natunton na ang lugar ng mga Balasik, Iniuutos kong ang lahat ng mga mandirigma ay maghanda upang tugisin at ubusin ang buong lahi ng Balasik sa baryo ng Islang buhangin, pagmamalaking utos ni Fausto.
Kung sa palakasan ay talo ang mga taong ahas laban sa mga Balasik, ngunit nagtataglay ang mga taong ahas ng mga mababagsik na lason na kayang magpatumba kahit na isang malaking hayop, at kung sa dami ang paguusapan ay talagang dehado ang mga balasik sa laban. Habang nagtatalumpati ang pinunong si Fausto ay may nagmamasid na taong lobo mula sa malayo at nakikinig sa kanilang mga plano.
Sa mga panahong wala pang mga taong lobo, nabubuhay ang mga bampira bilang tagapangalaga ng sangkatauhan. Binigyan sila ng kakaibang lakas at bilis, kasama na rin doon ang kanilang pagiging imortal. Ang kanilang ginagampanang tungkulin ay ang pagpuksa sa mga masasamang tao sa pamamagitan ng pag inom ng mga dugo nito.
Ilang libong taon na ganito ang naging kalakaran hanggang sa may isang bampira na bumago ng lahat. Siya ay si Seth. Naisip niya na kahit kailan ay hindi nila kailangang paglingkuran ang mga mahihinang nilalang na tinatawag na tao. Dahil sa mas malakas siya sa mga kapwa niya bampira, nagawa niyang patayin ang sino mang tututol sa kanyang kagustuhan.
Si Seth ay may itinuturing na kapatid, ito ay si Ceres. Tulad niya ay malakas din ito. Kahit pa alam niyang hindi nito sinasang ayunan ang kanyang paniniwala, hindi rin naman siya nakakarinig ng pagtutol mula dito kaya hindi niya ito itinuturing na kaaway.
Sa bawat buwan, inaalayan silang magkapatid ng mga tao. Ang dugo ng mga alay na ito ang kanilang iniinom. Isang beses, napansin ni Seth na mas marami ang hinihiling na alay ni Ceres kesa sa kanya. Naisip niya na baka nagpapalakas ito at baka siya ay kalabanin nito kahit na anong oras. Dahil likas siyang maingat, hindi muna niya ipinakita na may napapansin siyang kakaiba dito, bagkus ay lihim na lang niya itong inobserbahan.
Sa isang pagkakataon na si Ceres ay tumanggap ng alay, lihim niyang pinanood ito. Napag alaman niyang hindi pala nito pinapatay ang mga alay sa kanya. Ang bawat isang alay ay iniinunan nga niya ng dugo ngunit kaunti lang, pagkatapos ay pinapatakas pala niya ito. Hindi maganda ang naging tingin ni Seth sa mga pangyayari, kaya noon din ay napagdesisyunan niyang ituring si Ceres bilang kaaway.
Inatake niya ito noong oras ding iyon. Hindi naman nakahanda si Ceres kaya nasugatan siya ng malalim ni Seth. Walang naging pagpipilian si Ceres kundi ang tumakbo at magtago.
Kasama ang kanyang alagang lobo, tumakbo ng tumakbo si Ceres hanggang sa halos mawalan na siya ng malay. Malalim ang pagkakabaon ng espadang pilak sa kanya at pakiramdam niya at malapit na ang kanyang katapusan. Nagsisimula nang magdilim ang kanyang paningin ng naramdaman niyang may humugot sa espada mula sa kanyang dibdib. Inilapit ng kanyang tagapagligtas ang mukha nito sa kanya.
\\\"Alam kong wala pa sa plano mo ang mamatay, ako man ay ganoon din. Gusto mo bang tulungan kita?\\\"
Madumi ito at talaga namang mukhang gusgusin, ngunit naramdaman ni Ceres ang kakaibang kapangyarihan na tinataglay nito. Tiningnan niya ito sa mata.
\\\"Kung sasabihin kong oo, ano naman ang kapalit?\\\" Pilit niyang nilalabanan ang matinding tukso na nag aaya sa kanya na sumuko at mamatay na lamang.
\\\"Ibibigay ko sa iyo ang pangalawang buhay, kapalit ng pagiging imortal mo.\\\" Ngumiti pa ito at lumabas ang mga nangingitim na ngipin nito.
\\\"Gagawin mo akong tao?\\\" Sana naman ay matapos na ang usapang ito... Tama na ang sakit na nararamdaman ko.
\\\"Masasayang ang pagliligtas ko sa iyo kung gagawin lang kitang tao. Bibigyan kita ng kakayahang labanan ang iyong kapatid sa pamamagitan ng pagpapalit ng iyong anyo.\\\" Mabilis ang paglabas ng dugo mula sa kanyang dibdib at nahihirapan na siyang huminga. Mahirap paghilumin ang sugat pag nakarating na sa puso. Mahinang tango na lang ang naisagot ni Ceres sa kanyang tagapagligtas.
Nagsimula itong magsasayaw at magpapalahaw. Ang kanyang alagang lobo ay nahiga lang sa kanyang tabi habang ang matandang babae ay umiikot sa kanila. Pinanood lang ng lobo ang matanda, tila ba iniintindi ang ginagawa nito. Nagliwanag ang katawan ng matanda at bumata ang itsura nito. Ang madungis na anyo ay napaltan ng kakaibang kagandahan. Si Ceres naman ay nararamdaman ang sarili na lumulutang, umiikot, umiikot ng mabilis na mabilis hanggang sa hindi na niya makita ang paligid sa bilis, hanggang sa huminto ang lahat, pati ang paghangin sa paligid.
Nakita ni Ceres ang sariling katawan ay hindi na sa tao kundi sa isang lobo. Naluha siya at naisip na ito na pala ang kapalit ng kagustuhan niyang mabuhay.
\\\"Huwag kang mag alala. Babalik ka rin sa dati mong anyo. Ngayon ka lang ganyan dahil sa unang palit balat mo. Nangangako akong babantayan kita panay, anak ko.\\\"
Nagtatanong ang mga mata ni Ceres ng tingnan niya ang babaeng kausap niya.
\\\"Nagmula sa galit ko sa mga tao ang paglikha ko sa mga bampira. Pinabayaan lang akong gawin ang mga bampira dahil sinabi kong magiging tagapag tanggol sila ng mga tao, ngunit ang katotohanan, nais kong gumawa ng isang nilalang na papatay sa mga taong masasama, hanggang sa maubos ang mga tao sa mundo, dahil sa ang paniwala ko, ang lahat ng tao ay may potensyal na maging masama. Sa ginawa kong iyon, naubos ang aking lakas. Noong una, inisip ko na tama ang aking ginawa, ngunit huli na ng gustuhin kong bawiin ang pagkakagwa ko sa mga bampira. Wala na akong lakas na natitira upang maging posible iyon. Ang pagliligtas kong ito sa iyo na lang ang tanging paraan upang maiayos ko ang lahat.\\\"
\\\"Ngayong kinuha ko ang iyong imortalidad, binigyan naman kita ng kakayahang magkaroon ng anak sa isang tao. Kasama rin ng pagkuha ko ng bagay na iyon sa iyo ay ang isang pangako na darating ang panahon na matatapos din ang kaguluhang ito. Kapag ako ay nawala, tawagin mo na lang akong Inang Buwan\\\" Hinawakan niya ang pisngi ng lobo at nagliwanag ng maliwanag na maliwanag. Halos mabulag si Ceres sa sobrang liwanag at biglang naglaho ito.
Tumingala siya sa langit at nakita niya ang isang liwanag na nasa kalangitan. \\\"Inang Buwan...\\\" naiusal ni Ceres sa kanyang sarili...
MASSKARA
*Bacolod City’s Masskara festival is the city’s way of celebrating its charter celebration. Observed every 3rd week of October it has grown from a simple ritual of spreading cheer into a tourist attraction that is attended by both foreign and local visitors every year. Distinct because of the colorful and glittering masks worn by the street dancers, it manages to transform the usually quiet streets of Bacolod into a fantasy paradise of revelry and dazzling costumes.
The blare of the music was intoxicating.
A cacophony of drumbeats assailed all ears; a sea of moving people all packed and gyrating to the music of the samba coming from numerous speakers installed all over. Beer bottles and plastic cups liter what one might see of the streets, the little glimpses that escape the flood of feet of the crowd. Everywhere are youthful faces full of mirth and the fake joy induced by liquor. Laughter and unintelligible mutterings of thousands mix with the music; the mingled scent of sweat, beer and the smoke from grilled chicken and whatnots complete the assault on the senses. It was the ultimate street party. It was the night of the Masskara festival; where bodies rippling in their youth dance with other bodies, some even unknown to them.
The revelry started as soon as the sun set, when the main street was cleared of traffic and stalls and stages appeared like mushrooms, when the revelers came in twos and threes and then in droves. And that was hours ago. The free flowing beer, music and food dictated the actions of everyone now. Even they themselves could not understand nor control the push that propelled them to continue dancing. It’s just like that every year. The madness has overtaken one and all again. Much like the famed mardi gras of the Caribbean.
Everyone was donned in glitters and the sequins; a multitude of colors in all fabric; tulle, silk, lace. Not a few wore masks of smiling faces. All bedecked in jewels that the streets mirrored the myriad stars that twinkled across the warm October skies, made more brilliant by the strobes and the led lights.
Though the street was brightly lit, the nearby buildings that lined the main thoroughfare were swathed by darkness; all the more obvious by the contrast of brightness. The shadows flickered and wavered like scarecrows at midnight blown by an incessant wind. It was here that a small sound started, hardly heard at all even by the lone man standing nearby facing the wall, faintly whistling a tune to the beat of the samba; a thin string of pee watering the wall he faced.
The sound came again. A small rustling sound, much like that of a small rodent shuffling beneath fallen dried leaves. This time it was a little louder that the string of pee stopped and the man turned around suddenly.
“Wha…who is there?” he shouted a little loudly into the shadows. But no sound came as a reply. Instead, the darkness became even blacker if that was even possible. The shadows collecting like ebon mist as if covering some vile entity. It happened so fast and could have been a trick in the eye of the intoxicated man. In haste, he zipped up his pants and staggered slowly to peer closer from where he thought he heard the sound.
“Hello,” he whispered this time. His voice was a little unsteady.
“Hello,” came a reply. Curious, he stepped further into the shadows.
Darkness shrouded him. Blank dark walls surrounded him, even as the blast coming from the music but a few feet away seemed like its coming from too far. He stared into the blackness warily before inching forward. Further, he can see a vague shape; a faintly standing shape of something.
He stopped short.
It was a woman. She was slender, and from what little he can see, she was dark-haired and no taller than his shoulders, and pretty, with an ageless quality that he could not even put any age at all to her. Her face too smooth but her dark eyes were too wise for youth. It was dark, but he can still see her clearly, in fact, he can see details all of a sudden; her deep blue dress cut short above her knees, wisps of her hair falling across her face, a smudge of dust across her cheeks.
“You scared me,” he said. Looking at her with eyes suddenly made sober. He could not take his eyes from her. Surprisingly, he did not even question was she was there. It was as if he knew she was supposed to be there. Like, he was waiting for her and suddenly she came.
She smiled at him and it was like the sun. Brighter even than the tacky electric lights that lit the streets just behind him. He dropped his eyes all of a sudden unsure of what to say. He felt the touch of her warm hands on his and when he looked up he saw her looking at him intently. Bright green eyes. He was speechless and drowned in them as she slowly took his hands and guided him back into the streets and the revelry that continued to consume everyone else.
The next hours became a blur to him. His attention focused on the mysterious girl was suddenly his companion for the night. He could not get enough of her, the brilliance of her eyes, the glitters that seemed to exude from her skin, the tinkle of her laugh, the way she looked at him across the crowd as she spun in dance while holding on to his hands like a lifesaver. She was one and she was all of the night. Even as she sipped beer from the bottle that he held. He forgot everything else. He had only her.
Soon, the streets began to clear; the crowd, slowly stumbling home as the faint outline of the coming sun lit the skies. She held him then, held him in her arms as his nostrils were assailed by the heady minty scent of her. He closed his eyes. Too drunk of her to do anything else but feel her in his arms. Breathing in the memory of her as she clung to him as if in desperation.
He might have slept. There in the middle of the streets already empty of people. When he opened his eyes to the warm rays of sunlight, he was alone. Still standing up, his arms wrapped around himself.
There was no sign of her; only a memory, of a night of fantasy, of a night of laughter, a night of joy, and a night that shall remain with him in his dreams. He turned around to go, wiping at the moisture that has suddenly appeared on his cheeks he though he heard a whisper.
“Goodbye.” He turned around and felt a warm wind whip at his face like a caress as a single blue petal fluttered in the wind.
Nais mo bang makakita?
Ang iyong mga mata?
Ng masuri ng mabuti
Ang hindi mo maturingnang himala?
Buksan ang iyong mga mata
Heto ang alaala.
Maraming mga bagay
Sa gayuma\'y maari makuha
Ang sangkap maaring asa kalikasan
Ang iba\'y kailangan punlaan.
Ang Sangkap.
Tatlong singkong may mata
Dalawang tinik ng makahiya
Ang bagay na susuriin
kuhanan ng isang hibla
Karayom na asa palad
Hamog ng umagang nagbabadya
Lalagyang maaring pakuluan
Apoy ng matinding nakaraan
Sangkutsang di nabili sa mambabarang
at isang kutsarang di kinainan
Ang Paraan
Ang singko ay pagsamahin
Buhuling mabuti gamit ang hibla
Ibaon ang tinik sa kanilang gitna
Sugatan ang iyong daliri ng karayom
at patakan ng dugo ang tinik na asa mata
Lutuin ang maliit na susi
sa hamog na nailikha
Wag hayaang lumipas ang apoy
Hanggang kung anong matira
Hanguin ng walang sabi sabi
At iyong ilagay sa kutsara
Bigkasin ang asa talata trenta\'y tres
At lunukin ang katas ng mamera
Babala
Kung ang iyong makikita ay hindi kaaya-aya
Ihanda ang sarili sa matinding pagtitiwala
Makikita mo ang kapaligirang nakatago
At ang mga anino sa tunay na anyo
Kung ang nais ay tagumpay na hindi makuha-kuha
Wag gamitin ang gayuma sa huliing pagkakataon lamang
Pagkat sa huli
Nakatakda na
Ang pagkabulag ay sa tao hinirang
Nais mo bang lumakas?
Ang iyong mga bisig?
Ng humawak ng sandata
sa isang nasawing pag-asa?
Itikas ang iyong tindig
Heto ang palaala.
Maraming mga bagay
Sa gayuma\'y maari makuha
Ang sangkap maaring asa kalikasan
Ang iba\'y kailangan punlaan.
Ang Sangkap.
Sandata na ginto
Sa simbahan natatagpuan
Niluluhuran ng madla
Dinadasalang ng sangkatauhan
Isang punyal mula sa Paraiso
Tinuring lamang na pampatay
Sa isang gubat pumitas ng buhay
Kamay ng isang oso
At puso ng isang delubyo
Sa bagyo ng nakaraan
Dito\'y nalipasan
Isang basong nainuman
ng isang kaibigang merong tapang
Luha na nagmula
Sa isang batang naulila
Ang Paraan
Ang Sandatang ginto
Gawing hapag ng maitim na pakay
Ihiga ang punyal dito
At simulan ang paglamay
Ang kamay ng oso ay sugatan
Ang puso ng delubyo ay ingatan
Sa sandaling lumipas ang hudyat ng pagtatapos
Ang baso\'y gawing pangkubli
Sa spiritong magpapakita
Mula sa matinding huni
Ihalo ang luha at sa pang-apat na gabi na itinala
Ihanda ang mga kamay at ibabad sa natira
Babala
Kung ang iyong lakas ay hindi kaaya-aya
Ihanda ang sarili sa matinding pagtitiwala
Magagamit mo ang lakas sa kung ano-ano
Para sa peligrong nakapalibot sa iyo
Kung ang nais ay tagumpay na hindi makuha-kuha
Wag gamitin ang gayuma sa huliing pagkakataon lamang
Pagkat sa huli
Nakatakda na
Ang lakas na itinakda sa tao lamang
Ay tunay na mahina
Part One – THE DREAM
*At the conclusion of the Imortal series, we were witness to the final battle where the combined forces of the werewolves and vampires succeeded in winning over the evil fiends. We knew that the entities were conceived when the lupine blood in Lucas reacted to the vampire bite hence creating a new and stronger breed of monsters. Lia and Mateo were finally free from the vicious prophecy that had been following them and for awhile life was perfect. Raising their daughter, a child conceived with unique parentage, she is the only one of her kind; both werewolf and vampire – twice immortal.
As the years passed and the humans began to forget the sacrifice of the immortals to save them from the malevolence of Lucas’ kind, tension arose as the mortals again feared that the immortals will rise up and enslave them. Too adapted to their peaceful existence, the two immortal species again went into hiding until they were once more stories and tales told in fear and hushed admiration.
It had been ten years since the last news were heard of Mateo and his family.
In a world shared by mortals and the hidden beings that are immortal, what force will ultimately unite everyone when one lives in fear and the other lives in hunger? Where will one run when the shadows that lurk in corners might be ones that see him as a means to survive?
Saan ka magtatago kung ang bawat sulok ay may nakakubling…PANGIL?
Mailene woke up screaming.
It was a dream. The same nightmare that has plagued her night after night for the past three days, nightly visions that started the night she turned eighteen.
She looked around her, struggling to control her fear. Telling herself…trying to convince herself that it was merely a dream…that she was just tired…that everything will be alright. The room was as she remembered it, as it has always been since she started living there; bare walls of a light ivory, a small window that she knew would show her the vegetable plots behind her house had there been light outside, a small table at the side, a stool and her small cabinet half covered with hand drawn sketches – little masterpieces that she has made. Her own private gallery. She glanced at the aged alarm clock on the table and knew even before she even saw the luminous dials the exact time.
3:15 a.m.
Just like the last three nights.
She tried to remember the dream. And like an onslaught of visions it came to her, more vividly that even the dream was.
In it she was standing on top of a stone outcropping, alone and right in front of her was a deep ravine. Far below, although she could not see bottom except for the swirling mist that looked curiously like cotton, was the sound of waves crashing into stone. It was the middle of the night, she almost felt the moon above her although there was nothing but dark clouds above. She could see clearly a few feet around her though she was thinking that she should not be having such clear visions as if it was day. She was all alone but even in the dream she could feel eyes looking at her. Could feel a malevolent presence that she knew was just waiting among the shadows that seemed to be circling her, further away where the ring of light that envelops her have not pierced.
She took a step closer to the edge of the ravine and glanced down, peering into the distance to see the bottom but all she could see far below, where the mist continued to swirl in unnatural concentric circles was a soft reddish glow beginning to throb as if behind the swirls are tongues of fire leaping silently and waiting for her to fall.
Scream suddenly pierced the stillness of her dream, cries of help one on top of the other that it seemed incoherent. She took a step back but a sudden gust of wind pushed her forward towards the abyss. But there was a wall in front of her, like there was an invisible glass that stops her from falling into the glowing pit. Unable to stop herself, she looked downwards once more and from the smoky covering a faint figure was rapidly approaching her. Covering her mouth in her own scream, the figure came closer.
It was a huge dog. For a second she thought that it was misshapen and the back bent as it struggled to climb the almost impossible incline but as it got closer she realized that something or someone was clinging at the back of the wolf – for the lupine shape was a wolf now that it was more distinct. As if frozen, she could only watch and wait as the bloody animal labored to come closer; the strange weight behind it prone and still.
She could feel her fear, can smell it even as sweat poured out from her pores. Her heart thumping inside her chest cavity as the wolf and its bundle came nearer. At the back of her mind she knew she was dreaming and that if only she could move then she would wake up. She willed herself to make movement, any movement but her body stayed as she was; head a little bent, body a little hunched over the edge as the danger came nearer.
The wolf’s claw went over the edge and scraped the ground a few inches where her bare feet lay, sending a rain of pebbles back towards the pit. She could now see that what the wolf was carrying was a little child, a girl with black wavy hair. The girl was still, deathly and pale from what skin she could see.
The canine continued its climb, oblivious to her; like she was not even there. And with a last burst of strength the wolf gripped the stone wall of the ravine and hauled its body and the child towards Mailene’s body…through her body. She screamed as the monstrous form of the beast went through her and fell quiet on the ground beneath her feet. The child thrown a few feet further.
A sob escaped her throat, her heart beating in a staccato of uncontrollable spasms. Slowly she turned. The wolf was obviously dead, its fur matted with dried blood; parts of its flesh mangled and bleeding wounds covered its body. The child was stirring.
Silently, she watched as the child stood slowly, turned and screamed as it saw the dead wolf.
The child looked at her. She realized, though the wolf went through her as if she was merely smoke or air, the little girl was seeing her. Looking into her eyes and in a surprisingly strong voice intoned, “Remember me!”
Mailene woke up after that. Three nights she has dreamt the same dream over and over again. It was the first time that she was even able to recall the dream but she was sure that it was the same; the ravine, the glowing and swirling mist, the wolf and the child that somehow could see her. and her waking up at exactly 3:15. She knew it had to mean something.
She reached for the glass of water that she knew was on the table. In the semi darkness, she reached out never bothering to even glance towards that direction; knowing exactly where it was. But what she touched was not glass but something furry. She recoiled and reached instead to the lamp, its shape dark and solid to her eyes.
Mailene screamed for the second time that night. The glass was still there, no longer filled with water but with something crimson that she knew was blood. Beside it was a severed claw of a wolf.
Darkness took over…
-to be continued-
BABAYLAN FESTIVAL
*The Babaylan Festival is celebrated by Bago City, Negros Occidental to commemorate its Charter Celebration during the month of February. It is a unique festival showcasing the artistry of the people with a street dance cum arena performance featuring original storylines based on local themes and visayan myths and legends. These performances also highlight live instrumentations and chants as part of the over-all presentation.
**The Babaylan is a character in Philippine mythology and culture. Known as a healer or shaman, weaver of tales, keeper of songs, and spiritual leader of the ancient villages, they are still known today as the herbalists and native witch doctors. They are also mysterious entities that hold the key to the bridges between the mortal and the supernatural. It is said that the very first babaylan or baylan was an effeminate man and that in some tale that he still lives within the realm of fantasy; an immortal.
It was almost 3 pm.
The narrow street of the city was filled with people. The sidewalks twice thick with families watching as the dancers passed by, all gyrating to the beat of the bamboo instruments and makeshift drums covered with cow or buffalo hide. The scent of sweat prevailed but nobody noticed. Children, some too young to even be by themselves peered through parents’ legs just to have a glimpse of the colorful costumes. The dancers filled the middle of the streets, arms and legs spread out in a myriad display of indigenous dance steps.
A child, a dancer, was limping badly.
He stumbled at the last bend of the street dance. Right before the coliseum where the final performance was to be held appeared at the dead end of that street. He stepped on the trailing cloth of his costume. Now, the seat of his red pajama-like pants was torn and his knees bleeding where the hard cemented street scraped some of the skin off. His fellow dancers could not do anything, the judges were everywhere and one slip would cost them needed points; some of his other mates did not even notice him falling. So dance he did. A smile plastered on his face even if the pain was slowly getting to him; that and the unrelenting heat of the tropical sun. He was thinking about not smearing his mascara or smearing his lipstick as he bit back a cry, those thoughts among others
He winced as he maneuvered an especially difficult move. But still he did not stop, the two months of nightly practice remembered. It was so close to the finish, that was what made him swallow the pain in and continued to dance with the music that has become very familiar to him during the course of the rehearsals, in fact, he was not listening to that anymore, could not listen as the pain became almost unbearable. Curiously what he can distinctly hear was the ticking of the cheap wristwatch strapped to his wrist, hidden underneath his long sleeved costume that he forgot to take off before the performance. He can hear the sounds of the seconds as they travel the face of the watch, counting out the time. The sound became deafening to him. He looked around but he was very sure that the rest could only hear the music that was being played. Only he can hear the ticking. Suddenly, a slightly different sound came. The hour sound. It was 3 in the afternoon. Then suddenly blackness.
It was pitch black, such a complete darkness that he stumbled again, not only because of the sudden gloom but because of surprise. This time when he got up he completely forgot to dance. He just stood there, on the long narrow dirt road that was not where he should be. And he was all alone. He looked around and began to be afraid.
“Come,” came a voice from further ahead of him. It was gentle somehow, and though his fear ebbed a little, it was not enough to propel him to move forward. It was as if his legs, fluid in dance just moments ago has become paralyzed and stiff.
“Come,” the voice came again.
He did not know where he got the courage to step forward but step he did. Further and further into the shadows although at each step everything became somewhat lighter, like a light grew brighter with each passing step. He could not see where the light came from; it was as if the air itself was glowing all around him.
A sudden unwelcome thought came to him. “Am I dead? Did I die while dancing in the streets?” The stillness around him felt different when he thought that, it was as if the place where he was, was laughing at him; like it knew what he was thinking.
Soon it was light enough for him to see where he was. It was a cave of some sort. Dry, cracking stones surrounded him. Beneath his feet is dust and here and there he found dead things; a dead rat, its fur dried and the clawed feet bent, a dead bird, its feathers ghastly white in this place of solitude, and a dead centipede…or what he thought of as a centipede for this one was more that three feet long.
It was eerily quiet; except for the beating of his heart that sounded like gongs to him.
“I am a friend,” a voice directly behind him spoke. Turning around all of a sudden he saw a young man standing where awhile ago there was none. He has the face of a beautiful youth, smooth skin and dark eyes slightly turned up at the sides like they were smiling. He was so handsome that he looked feminine somehow.
“Am I dead?” the boy asked but no answer came. The man only smiled at him and dropped down on his knees in front of the boy.
Surprised, the boy could only look as the stranger touched his scraped knee. The fingers were warm and tender. But the little wound stung as if a dozen tiny needles were pushed into the still bleeding cut all at the same time. The boy cried out in pain, unable to stop himself, he closed in eyes.
The pain was there and then it was not. As suddenly as it came there was nothing to feel. Stunned, the boy opened his eyes and staggered not for the first time that day.
He was nearing the end of the street. He was in between steps on the dance that he was sure he was not in a moment ago. He stopped. Astonished to find himself right back on line with the other dancers.
Taken aback, he looked down. Towards his torn costume where he can see his knee unblemished and unbroken.
This story happened during the Spanish Era, ang panahon ng pananakop ng mga Kastila sa Pilipinas.
Si Francesca ay isang anak mayamang dalagita nila Dona Alessandra at Don Luisito Villalobos na kilalang mga mayamang negosyante na naninirahan sa Laguna. Para bang sila na yata ang pinaka mayaman noon sa kanilang lugar. Kaya nga napaka swerte talaga ng anak nilang si Francesca,their only child,because she will be the only one to inherit those properties of her parents.
Halos nasa kanya na lahat. Siya na maganda,mabait kahit medyo maluho pero di sakit sa ulo sa mga magulang niyaat napaka madasalin talaga dahil ipinamana sa kanya ng mga magulang niya ang pagkakaroon ng malalim na pananampalataya sa Diyos..Matalino at higit sa lahat mayaman.
Pero ang angkan nila ay ang kilalang isa sa magagaling kumalaban sa mga Espanyol dahil sa maling pamamalakad at pang-aabuso nito sa mga Pilipino kaya naman mainit ang mga mata sa kanila ng mga ito pero kahit anong gawin ng mga Espanyol ay hindi nila mapabagsak ang kanilang angkan sapagkat makapangyarihan at maimpluwensya ang kanilang angkan subalit tila nabaliktad ito sa isang kaganapang sumira sa buhay ng kanilang pamilya at ni Fracesca.
Nagalit si Don Luisito at Dona Alessandra dahil sa kalakalang Galleon dahil ang mga negosyanteng Pilipino,magsasaka at magingisda ay nalulusi dahil sa kadayaan ng mga Espanyol kaya naman nag protesta sila at sinubukang isabutahi ang sakim na Gobernador Heneral Lozada na isa sa nandaraya at kurakot na opisyal pero hindi sila nagtagumpay at kinulong sila at nahatulan ng kamatayan.
1863,ang taong hinding hindi makakalimutan ni Francesca at labis itong napoot sa mga Espanyol dahil pinugutan ng ulo ang kaawa-awa niyang mga magulang at mismong nakita niya ang kaganapang iyon. Labis itong napuno ng galit,lungkot at poot .
\"Wala na rin naman akong kwenta at bakit nabubuhay pa ko sa mundong ito ha?! Araw araw kong pinag darasal sa Iyo na makalaya man lang ang mga magulng ko sa kulungan pero ano, pinaasa Mo lang ako! Kung kinuha mo rin lang si Mama at Papa, bakit di Mo nalang ako sinama?! Bakit Mo sila hinayaang mamatay..Bakit hindi na lang ako! Bakit! Sabihin mo!\"
Dalawampung taon na ang nakalilipas pero lubusan pa rin ang galit at pag luluksa sa puso niya.Hindi na siya natiis nang matalik niyang kaibigan na si Imelda.
\"Bakit hindi moa pa tanggapin na wala na sila?Ang mga magulang mo?\"
\"Hindi ako maaaring tumigil hangga\'t hindi ko pa sila maipag higanti.Gawin mo lang akong katulad mo at magiging masaya na ako.\"
\"Matalik kitang kaibigan Francesca.Hindi ko kayang gawing isang halimaw ang sarili mo.\"
\"Pero iyon lang ang paraan para maipag-higanti ko ang pagkamatay nang mga magulang ko!Sana maintindihan mo ako!Yun..Yun lang ang kaya kong gawin..Yun lang..\"muli nanamang tumulo ang luha sa mga mata ni Francesca.
\"Hindi kaya nang konsnsya ko na gawin kang katulad ko pero, kung iyan ang desisyon mo, humanda ka na sa panibagong buhay mo bukas.\"naging pula ang mga mata ni Imelda kasabay nito ang pag litaw nang matalim niyang pangil at kinagat na nitong bigla si Francesca.
1883,isang balita ang lumabas sa Dyaryo,namatay ang dating Gobernador Heneral na si Lorezo Lozada ng Laguna at ang mga Guardia Civile na natagpuang patay at ang nasabing dahilan ng pag kamatay ay pag kaubos nang dugo at sinasabing hayop-gubat daw ang nakapatay sa mga ito.
\"Imelda,salamat sa tulong mo,ngayon pwede na akong mamahinga.Salamat muli kaibigan\"
\"Wag!\"hinablot ni Imelda ang patalim na pilak pero huli na at binawian na nang buhay si Francesca at tumulo ang mga luha ni Imelda.
\"Paalam na, kaibigan\"
THE END
*About a year ago, I was introduced to an author that has since then inspired me. Neil Gaiman has opened up the doors to worlds beyond my wildest imagination. His Sandman collection has been a gateway for me to the idea of writing. I know I am miles away from the genius that is Mr. Gaiman but this short story is especially written as a tribute to Sandman and the master that discovered the doorway to the dream world.
A sudden gust started from the west.
Hot and dry, the wind coiled like a venomous snake, scattering the arid desert sand as it hurried towards nowhere; what it scattered settled in its wake. Nothing else stirred; even the clouds, usually frolicking like sheep in the pasture that is the sky, was absent; the searing hot sun, fiery and blinding. Even the sand dunes were still. There was nothing there. Empty and devoid of life…except for the old gray man half covered by the sand that camouflaged him from any other eyes; had there been any.
Weak from thirst, the man struggled to rise, sweeping half closed myopic eyes all around him. His brows wrinkled in a frown as if he was surprised to find out where he was. But the confusion lasted only a second. With a sigh, he started to rise, taking small, tired steps towards the east; where in the distance the wind continued to stir the otherwise motionless sand.
The sun’s relentless heat enveloped him. His breath coming in short ragged spurts, his mouth dry. His throat felt swollen, and his lips cracking. There was no moisture, not even sweat; any, immediately evaporated. He can see water in a distance, far and untouchable but he knew it was just a trick in the eye; a mirage of sorts.
He pushed himself to continue walking, small deliberate steps towards the east although he does not know what was there. He just knew he needed to go somewhere else otherwise he will dry up and be baked like a husk in no time. He laughed at himself, “I am probably going mad.”
He felt moisture on his lips, without thinking he licked it and tasted the metallic tang of blood, his cracked lips bleeding. But it dried up soon enough; at least his tongue felt a little moisture. He tried to laugh again but there was nothing there, even his attempt at a laugh sounded like a croak. He was so dry. He felt weak, tired and defeated. He fell to the ground once more. And darkness took him.
It was tender.
A touch gripped his wrinkled hands. Somehow, it was cool and welcome that he tentatively opened his eyes. It was a girl, a little girl seemingly unaffected by the heat that ravaged everything around him. She was a sight, in pale pink ruffles and eyes glinting of knowledge. She smiled at him, and to his thirst blinded vision it was like a drop of water.
“What is greater than what is above us all?” her voice was akin to tinkling bells.
“Greater than the power that has dried everything into nothingness.” The fingers of her right hand were tight around his own and the ones from the other hand gently closed his eyes shut. He just let her, feeling the touch of her young hands were like life anew. But suddenly they were no more. Without opening his eyes, he knew he was alone once more.
He mumbled to himself, repeating the question that the child whispered. He knew it was important, somehow. What could be greater than God? It has to be God. That was what she meant when she said what is above us all.
It started as little drizzles.
Suddenly, the rain came in torrents. Eyes still closed he felt the fat drops drenching him. It did not surprise him, the years of solitary isolation in this desolate wasteland have prepared him of the shifting environment; one moment a desert the next the rains.
When he finally opened his eyes, the water has risen if only a little. Looking around, he almost wished to see the desert once more but what he saw was stark gray stones back dropped by equally gray clouds that were not there awhile ago. But time could have passed while he had his eyes closed; this cursed place had its own essence of time.
Looking towards the heavens he shouted, “What is out there?” only silence answered back.
At the edge of his vision, he saw a movement. It surprised him; there was clearly something there, even when the rain was coming in thick sheets making everything hazy and blurred.
It moved again, what he saw was a shadow that loomed darker than the grayness around him. It scurried towards the cover of yet another water drenched stone.
Tentatively, he started to follow. His steps labored and deliberate as the rushing waters of the flood that reached his knees pushed him backwards. It was like walking through thick muck, and his movements in slow motion. Rainwater continued to shower him on all sides. His hair now stuck to his scalp like limp black seaweeds peppered with gray. His clothes plastered on his frail frame.
He could no longer see movement except for what seemed like buckets and buckets of water being driven towards him from all directions; drops hitting the water at his waist bouncing back towards his face.
It could have been hours since the rain started or it could have been minutes … or seconds; but that was unimportant. He was wet and still mumbling to himself the incomplete riddle that the girl back in the desert presented to him. He knew…how he wished it was…that the answer would finally save him from this accursed land; a land that could only exist in a nightmare, a bad dream that has been real for him since he can remember.
A vague memory came to him. An unwelcome memory of a young man, what he must have been, with it came the faint scent of a heady weed and a sort of giddiness that came to him. But like smoke it was forgotten, although a touch of something forgotten continued to caress the edges of his mind as he continued to mumble, trudging towards where the movement was, through the rain and floodwater that continued to rush at him. He was desperate. He was drenched. He sobbed.
He could not take one more step so he stopped. Head held down, with his hands covering his face he sobbed. Hard, heart wrenching sobs of a man conquered, but by what, he cannot seem to remember.
It was brutal.
The hand that suddenly gripped at his shoulders, strong hands that locked on to what muscle he had there. It was painful that he forgot his weeping and cried out because of the physical pain, looking towards where the owner of the hands should have been standing behind him.
There was nothing there, only, the pressure still remained.
The flood waters rose all of a sudden, as if a dam was released. In seconds, the chest-high waters climbed. With a start, he barely managed to close his mouth with a sudden intake of air before he was submerged, and the water just continued to rise. Beneath the rushing and swirling water, he struggled to hold his breath. In the silence of the murky depth he heard a distinct whisper.
“What is darker than the shadows of darkness, more ebon than the soul that has forsaken the light?”
Unable to stop himself, he gasped, swallowing water as he gagged; the echo of the riddle reverberated within his semi conscious mind as darkness once again took over.
It was spicy, seasoned and sweet.
The smell of food assailed his nostrils. His stomach grumbled in protest as his senses told reminded him that he has not eaten for how long, he can not even remember. Slowly, he opened his eyes and gawked at what was in front of him.
He was sitting at the head of a huge table spread out in front of him was a feast. A roast pig laid out right in front of him; fruits, sweet bread and almost everything that he could dream of.
Without thinking he grabbed a mango, smelling the sweet aroma of the fruit’s skin. His mouth watering as he imagined how it would taste. Without hesitation, he bit into the golden produce and felt the trickle of juice and pulp on his chin. It was sweet, succulent and divine. He was praying that this place was heaven and wishing that it will not disappear on him like all the rest of the places he has been to. Without even remembering how he devoured the rest of the fruit he noticed that he was holding the seed, reaped of every meat. Dropping the seed, he grabbed a chicken leg and gnawed on it.
Satisfied that everything will not disappear on him, he ate a little slower. Although in his hunger, he had no regard on how he was eating the banquet; he was gobbling up everything that he was able to get inside his mouth, bits and pieces of food all over his face.
He almost choked, but he grabbed the goblet filled with a sweet smelling liquid and drank from it. Then attacked what he could lay his hands on once more.
As much as he pushed everything in his mouth, he could not satisfy himself. It was as if he was even getting hungrier with each bite.
I am still famished, and I have to eat faster unless this all go away, he thought, stuffing more and more into his mouth.
A sharp pain like a pin prick of a needle hurt his lips. Dropping the apple he was holding, he felt where he felt the pain. Something was wriggling on it, a soft, pliant something the length of his nail but slimmer. Holding his finger near his eyes he saw that it was a worm. A white, squirming worm had bit him. He squished it between his fingers and felt a small pop as the worm oozed a greenish pus-like juice that gave off a cloyingly sweet rotting odor.
He noticed the apple that he dropped and it was covered with more of the wriggling maggot, in fact, all of the fare laid on the table were a mass of writhing insects like carcasses left in the sun for too long. The scent of rotting flesh and decaying vegetables wafted towards him making him gag.
He can taste the sour flavor of vomit, but before he was able to retch it out, he felt his face tingling with the squirming of hundreds of the maggots feeding on the putrefying bits of food that was almost covering his face.
He screamed. Not only because of the horror that has enchanted the feast but because he can see little children suddenly sitting with him on the table, eating the decaying food.
With the echo of his screams loud in his ears, the child nearest him mumbled through the food that it was stuffing into her mouth. “What does those without have, yet, those with a king’s pocket could never have?”
The riddle, it all comes back to the riddle.
He stood up and ran towards the open doorway that he just at that moment saw across the table. He found himself on a field of grass, further he could see a long wall of bricks separating him from whatever lay on the other side. He was alone again, in a place that had nothing but shadows.
As he was standing there wondering, everything shifted again. This time he was in a dark cavern of stone, in front of him was a giant chair carved into the living stone. And there sat a pale, lean man looking at him silently. Waiting for him.
“Who are you?” trembling the old man whispered.
“I am your dreams,” was the only answer.
“What do you want from me?”
“Answer the riddle and ill give you back what you had.”
The old man looked at the figure sitting in front of him. He felt empty, tired and defeated though he did not know how he came to be in a contest with this entity. He was not thinking straight, and he knew that much as he wanted, there was not answer that came to him.
“I don’t know,” he whispered, a sob frozen in his throat. “I don’t know what is greater than God, more evil than the Devil, the poor has but the rich can never have. I don’t know.” As he dropped to his knees, his shoulders shaking with grief.
The riddler looked at him with a glint of triumph in his dark eyes, a smile slowly brightening his otherwise grim face.
“The answer is what you will get. That is what you deserve for defying the realm of dreams, for trying to control what should not be yours, for inducing yourself to a stupor that is not of my own making. They call me Morpheus, this, the dream world is my realm.”
The old man knew what the lord of dreams was talking about; it was all he could do as he whimpered in loss.
Sandman just continued to look at him and the world slowly tilted for the old man as he whispered the answer, “the answer to the riddle is NOTHING! There is nothing greater than God nor more evil than the devil. There is nothing that the poor has and nothing that the rich needs.”
With a cry, the old man was plunged into total darkness as he fell into an abyss that seemed without end. For a long time, he fell, thinking that he was nothing, just like the Sandman said.
With a start, he opened his eyes. His once more youthful hands covering his tear streaked eyes. He was knee bent and naked inside his room. The clutter around him just like he remembered it from what he felt was eons ago. In front of him, on the floor, are almost burnt out sticks of the drug that he has been taking for the longest time.
He shook his head, his heartbeat palpitating in his chest, he sound of the electric fan making a mechanical if natural sound to his otherwise unnatural breathing. He was covered with sweat, the sour scent of unwashed body drifting towards his nose.
He tried to cover his nose, but as his fingers touched the entrance of his nostrils, he felt the tiny bit of something stuck there. Picking it, he looked more closely and saw the wriggling body of a maggot.
He screamed.
Si Voughn ay isang 17 years old na magaaral mula sa isang University taking up Theatre Arts. Mahal na mahal niya ang pagarte at pagpeperform. Ibang ligaya ang nararamdaman ni Voughn sa tuwing siya ay nasa entablado. Ang liwanag ng Spotlight, ang init ng costume, ang ingay ng mga manonood, iyon ang nagbibigay sa kanya ng kakaibang high. Para sa kanya, bisyo na ang pagpeperform. Lagi niyang nakukuha ang mga lead roles. Marahil, magaling talaga siya. Marami ang naiinggit sa kanya, paano ba naman maging sa pagawit at pagsayaw, siya ang laging napapansin. Ngunit marami ang nagtataka, bakit sa tuwing magkakaroon ng celebration after ng bawat pagtatanghal, palaging hindi dumarating ang \\\\\\\"Lead Star\\\\\\\". Baka nahihiya? Pero si Voughn yun, malabong iyon ang dahilan...
Isang gabi habang umuulan, pauwi na ang mga co-actors ni Voughn, kakatapos ng practice nila para sa Phantom of the Opera (ang susunod nilang itatanghal), nang pigilin ng mentor si Voughn. \\\\\\\"Voughn, ikinalulungkot kong sabihin, kailangan mo munang iwanan ang role mo sa play na to.\\\\\\\" Nagtaka si Voughn, \\\\\\\"Bakit po? Pangit po ba ang performance ko?\\\\\\\" Sumagot ang mentor, \\\\\\\"Hindi yon, pero baka kasi nalimutan mo ang rule no.6 natin: dapat ay walang failing grades ang bawat actors, kundi matatanggal sya sa org.\\\\\\\" Gulat na gulat si Voughn, ng malaman niyang ang prof. niya pa sa Art Class ang nagbagsak sa kanya.
Noong gabi ring iyon, tinungo ni Voughn ang condo unit ng kanyang prof. Lumuluha. Galit na galit. Pula ang mata. Paglabas na paglabas ng kanyang prof. mula sa CR, sinunggaban niya agad ito nagsabing: \\\\\\\"Good evening prof. kamusta na yung grade ko sayo? Balita ko hindi raw maganda, at hindi ako masaya doon...alam mo bang dahil dyan sa 5.00 na binigay mo sa akin, matatanggal ako sa Theatre Org? Hindi pwede yon haha...\\\\\\\" Natakot ang prof. dahil aware siya sa mga kuwentong bampira at lobo sa syudad, at alam niyang wala siyang magiging laban sa kanila. Sinakal ni Voughn at inangat ang kawawang guro at sabay nagwika, \\\\\\\"Papalitan mo ang grade ko. Hindi mo ako ibabagsak. At ipagsisigawan mo sa mentor ko na ako ang best sa Art Class...\\\\\\\" Pinalitan ng prof. ang grade ni Voughn, sinend na ang file sa school registrar, at sigurado na ang pagpasa ni Voughn. Ngunit dahil sa kahihiyang naramdaman, pinatay pa rin ni Voughn ang guro niya. \\\\\\\"Pasensya na prof ah, hiniya mo kasi ako, pero salamat pa rin sa grade na to, wag ka magalala, ire-reserve kita ng puwesto sa play. Bye prof...\\\\\\\" At dali-daling umalis si Voughn dala ang saya na hindi siya papaalisin sa Org. Nag-iwan siya ng isang painting sa pader, isang larawan ng bampirang galit. Ginamit niya ang dugo ng prof bilang kanyang pintura.
Pinatunayan niyang pati sa art, siya ang nangunguna.
Walang sinumang nakakaalam na ang hinahangaan nilang performer ay isa sa mga naunang bampira dito sa bansa, isang mapanganib na bampira na puwedeng umatake sa isang iglap lang. Pero kahit bampira siya, hindi siya umiinom ng dugo ng tao, isa siya sa mga bampirang dugo ng hayop ang iniinom, ngunit handang kumitil kung hindi makukuha ang gusto. Isa lang ang tanging makakapigil sa kanya, ang kakambal niyang si Vito, isa sa mga naunang Lobo sa bansa.
Sa araw ng play, kakaibang galing at talento ang ipinakita ni Voughn, hinangaan siya ng lahat ng nakapanood. Napuno ng palakpakan ang auditorium ng university nila.
\\\\\\\"Wala ng hihigit sa akin, ako ang pinakamagaling...\\\\\\\" winika ni Voughn ng pabulong...
-Wakas-
Madilim sa eskenitang pinasukan nya!
Bahagyang tumahimik ang mundo sa biglang liko ni Eugene. Wala na ang ingay ng mga taong nagsisipagmadalian sa pag-uwi sa kani-kanilang mga tirahan, wala na rin ang mga busina ng mga nagsisikipang dyip na nagpupunuan ng pasahero at wala na rin ang mahihinang ilaw ng mga poste na nakahilera sa main road. Wala na rin ang tunog ng mga paang naghahabol sa kanya. Sa sandaling iyon, wala siyang marinig kundi ang mga hingal niyang pilit na tinatago. Yun lang at ang kabog ng kanyang dibdib.
Madilim ang makitid na alley, deretcho sa isang dead end.
Nanginginig ang batang patuloy na pumasok sa pansamantalang pinagtataguan. Ni hindi nya makayang lumingon para tingnan kung wala na talaga ang panganib. Mabilis ang kanyang mga hakbang, ang mga mumunting daliri’y nangangapa sa basang dingding para malaman man lang kung anu ang dinadaan niya. Mga pintong sarado.
Di niya alam kung ano ang mga laman nito, ngayon lang siya nakagawi sa parteng ito ng lungsod. Sa kanyang naaalala na hindi naman ganun karami. Ilang araw pa lang ang nakakalipas nang nagising siyang walang maalala, walang makilala. Maliban sa pangalan niya. Eugene.
Ang alam niya lang ay kailangan niyang tumakbo. Palayo sa mga taong humahabol sa kanya gabi gabi, nawawala pag araw ngunit biglang nagsusulputan pagsapit ng dilim. Sino sila, hindi niya alam. Wla siyang maalala.
Diretso siya sa dilim. Gusto niyang masuka sa mga naapakang basang bagay na hindi niya makita ngunit alam niyang hindi ito ang oras na mandiri. Kailangan niyang makatakas.
“Ayun siya,” sigaw ng isang lalaki sa likuran niya.
Biglang napalingon ang bata, at sa liwanag ng kalyeng pinanggalingan nakita niya ang hugis ng mga taong pilit na humahabol sa kanya.
Napahinga ng bigla si Eugene. Ni hindi niya namalayang pinipigil pala niya ang hininga.
Biglang dinakma ang knob ng pintuang nakakapa sabay bukas ito, wala nang ibang iniisip kundi ang makalayo sa panganib na pumapalapit.
Liwanag. Nakakasilaw na liwanag ang sumalubong sa kanya. Gamit ang kamay na puno ng dumi, wala siyang magawa kundi takpan ang mga matang parang sasabog sa sakit sa biglang liwanag.
“Wag po,” aniya. Kahit na wala tao siyang kasama sa pinasukan niya. Wala ring taong pumasok kasunod niya.
Unti-unting dinilat ni Eugene ang mga mata. Bahagyang nawala ang pagkakasilaw niya, at doon pa lang niya nakita na nasa isang silid siyang walang laman maliban sa isang hagdanang papaakyat sa second floor.
Umakyat siya, dahan dahan. Hindi niya maintindihan pero alam niyang kailangan niyang umakyat patungo sa iisang saradong pinto.
Binuksan niya ito, dahan dahan.
“Kanina ka pa namin hinihintay,” sabi ng isang tinig mula sa madilim na kwarto.
Wala na ang takot kay Eugene, sa halip parang unti unti niyang naaalala ang mga nakalipas na kanyang nalimutan. Isang ngiti ang bumuo sa kanyang mukha. Ngiting punong puno ng ngiping unti-unti ring tumutubo sa isang mukhang unti unting humahaba.
“Andito na ako,” aniya. Bago pa natapos ang kanyang pagbabagong anyo. Isang malaking lobo, nakaharap sa isang mas malaki pa.
“AWWWOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO,” sabay takbo ng dalawa pababa, papalabas.
May mga bampirang kaaway na dapat turuan.
Awwwwwwwwwwooooooooooooooooooooooooo!!!
*The Mudpack Festival is celebrated during the weekend nearest June 24 at the Mambucal Mountain Resort in the Municipality of Murcia,Negros Occidental. Not only does it commemorate the Feast of St. John the Baptist, but it also honors the spirits of Mount Kanlaon as a sign of thanksgiving. It is celebrated with rituals and the use of the differently colored clay found around the resort. The resort features seven natural waterfalls, cold and hot fresh mountain springs and a number of swimming pools together with forested areas and other natural attractions. Mambucal Resort is also known as the commune for natural spirits and other entities.
The mud was blue.
Well, not really blue like the sky on a clear sunny day or the blue of the deep clear ocean, more like an ashen bluish gray; but still more blue than grayish. And it was the first time Erik has seen clay that color.
He took a small lump from the bucket and spread it on his palm. It felt like clay, and smelled like clay too when he took a sniff; smearing not a few of the wet mass on his nose. With a small grimace, he tentatively smudged a little on his naked chest.
Splat!
Dripping wet clay hit him on his stomach and dripped on his white Speedos, staining the pristine spandex in red. A giggle sounded behind him. He did not need to turn to know that it was his sister. Twin sister to be exact and as he looked at her, it only confirmed his initial thought. But instead of being mad he bowed over in laughter.
The usually vain and poised Anika is covered from head to toe with clay the color of pottery. She even had her hair blotched with the stuff.
“What?”
“You look like a vase.”
“Well look around you, you’re the one that looks weird.”
Looking around him he realized that everybody else was covered with a myriad display of colorful clay. In fact, he could not recognize any of the other members of the group they are in; some beginning to dance to the tempo of countless drums being beaten by other painted beaters.
All of a sudden he felt half a dozen pairs of hands ran all over his body, smearing clay that it took only a moment for him to be equally covered. It was cold, slimy, soggy and totally feeling free. An exhilaration that he never expected took him and like hundreds of others, he took to the earthly beat that continued to throb like a living entity. He felt one with all the trees that surrounded them, one with the gently flowing stream that filled the pools of the resort, one with the birds that though not seen could be heard amongst the branches way above the reveling youths.
The hours of the day rushed towards the setting sun. From behind the ceiling of leaves that met thickly feet above the frenzy, what was sunny and bright slowly faded into the darker indigo of night. Torches and lamps were lit all around the continuing madness. Laughter rang all around, and the mud continued to be splotched to more bodies as more and more people came.
Anika was intoxicated. With a warm bottle in hand she sat on a tree stump by the spring pool and gazed at the untiring dancers that frolicked in front of her. Her vision swam. Not only because of the number of SanMig lights she has consumed but because of the tumult of excitement that the festival has awakened in her. She was tired but not too tired to leave yet, she only meant to rest her eyes for a bit.
She must have fallen asleep. When she opened her eyelids the night was complete. From the gaps of the dark foliage above her, she saw the thin wisps of clouds that hid the brightness of the moon. The dancers had moved on further from her although the sound of the drum beats was still heard.
There was a rustle behind her. Faint, and she would not have heard it if she had not been too close. She turned and all she saw was the shadows of the gigantic trees that ringed the resort, big and ancient trees that were the beginning of the forest. There was nothing there but as she was about to turn, a shadow blacker than the rest stepped forward and moved towards her. Anika never even had a chance to be afraid as the light from a nearby torch lit the apparition.
A small boy stepped out of the shadows, maybe a hand shorter than her. And he was not covered in clay. The absence of the smear made him look naked even if he was wearing some sort of breeches that was not clear in the dim light. Peering at him, she saw the glint of tears streaming down his smooth cheeks.
“Help me,” came a meek voice.
Silently, without really knowing why, she held her hands to the boy. He went to her and she gathered him in her arms oblivious to the mud that smeared on him.
He sobbed. Hard painful sobs that made him tremble in her arms. Her clay covered hands smoothing out his hair, the muddy mess covering his fine dark hair with reddish highlights.
“Shhhhh, everything is alright now,” she murmured.
“I am afraid,” the boy meekly said looking up towards the leafy ceiling.
“There’s nothing to be afraid of.”
“The moon!”
She looked up. By some weird coincidence, the beat of the music went louder; a thunderous tattoo that echoed the weird throbbing of her heart. The boy was looking up towards the heavens and as she looked up, the moon was slowly coming out of hiding lending the forested area with an eerie silvery glow.
The boy’s sob suddenly became screams. Unearthly shrill screams that rent the night air. Anika was pushed so hard that she fell on her back end, frozen in wonder as the boy arched his back, obviously in so much pain. The light of the moon bathing him with ethereal light.
Anika could do nothing but watch. No one seemed to have heard the screaming, although it has escalated to a pitch that was impossible to disregard.
The water from the nearby spring was bubbling. Small, simmering bubbles rose from its depths and rapidly became much like a boiling cauldron.
The boy was writhing in pain but at the same time he was struggling to crawl towards the restless water. The girl could only watch in wonder and fear, her eyes the only witness to the unnatural occurrence in front of her; she could not even blink her eyes much was the impossibility of what she was witnessing.
They said, the old people, told of stories of spirits communing with mortal. The stories from childhood came back to her in a rapid rush.
The boy touched the water and the ear piercing shriek stopped. In a fluid motion Anika saw him jump into the spring but as he entered the surface a change happened. It happened so fast, and the last she saw of him was a wide tail splashing water, drenching her.
She sat there and gawked. Eyes frozen on the suddenly still spring. Mouth open in wonder.
That’s how they found her hours later. Shivering near the clear pool of the natural spring, eyes open and staring, jaw dropped, rivulets of drying mud covered her body. And her mind forever stilled by what she has witnessed. No body will believe her if she told them, if, she could even talk again at all.
Inside were stories, hand written by countless individuals, the handwriting almost incomprehensible in some places, yet, the old man could have told you its contents, word for word, pause after pause.
The scribbles were heirlooms passed on from generations to generation, year after year...tales to tell the little children.
Slowly, with trembling fingers the old man opened the tome and lovingly caressed the pages and with a soft soothing voice he began his tale as the winds howled outside the window and the leaves continued to fall with the storm.
\"Once upon a time. Three million years before man started to take steps in this world, a war raged among the heavens. The angels, as we call them, fought with each other. Some were good. Some were bad. And in the end, as the thunder roared and lightning lit the skies, the bad ones fell. Fallen from the grace of whoever was up there. But as they fell, some realized their faults and cried to the voice up high while still others were stubborn and continued to be bad. Mea Culpa, the enlightened ones cried.
Mea Culpa...My Fault!
But it was too late. Their wings scattered with the wind like millions of white leaves as their bodies fell to the ground, to the mud, and as they touched the earth for the very first time they became untouchable.
Their grief and hatred continued to nurture year after year, their powers might have become lesser when they fell but they remained immortal. Walking among the earth. Invisible to the naked eye. Their souls were unclean as they remain unforgiven...and they are still here...\"
The little boy\'s hand clasped the old man\'s; trembling in fear. In his mind, he imagined entities lurking in corners looking at him, meaning him harm.
\"Shhh, do not be afraid little one. I am here and this is just a story...\" the grandfather said as the child suffered a glance towards the window and saw that night was black and complete.
\"Millions of years passed and the fallen ones continued their existence, now, among other things that had started to live among the Earth; animals, and soon humans.
The people did not see these immortals although a few could tell of their presence. And sometimes, a rare handful even saw glimpses of the invisibles. But, nobody has dared claim that they have seen them for real.
But they were there nonetheless. You\'ll know it, the stench of their grief and envy of the human soul stinks like crushed insects. The wind even whispers their presence. They are the tingling sensation at the back of your neck, the goosebumps on your skin, when the hair on our arms stand on end and if you listen very carefully, you can hear their faint whispering...
Mea Culpa!
Be careful. Do not touch them, they\'ll make you sick.
And so, a long time ago, in a place not far from here, the Fallen lived. For a time, no humans shared their place of abode. It was in a time when the last was vast and the people were few. Yet, time managed to multiply human race and the land became too small for everyone.
Little by little, the mortals who did not know of the existence of the unseen invaded the land of the Fallen and a village sprouted where there was none before. The Fallen watched and waited for just a touch, they were waiting for someone to harm.
And the village, as expected, grew and grew. The people went about farming and hunting as a means of livelihood unmindful that there existed with them beings that were not there. The hatred of the Fallen was growing with the population, as if each man is another reason to hate. And with that, reason began to diminish from their thinking. They started to bring slight mischief to individuals. Barely discovered by the mortals, this did not satisfy the need of the Fallen for humanity\'s pain.
So, one day, a very unfortunate day, the Fallen, dissatisfied with the petty troubles they started, touched the humans with their deadly touch. The children were the first to get sick, their cries filled the air with pain and suffering. Their ails passing with the innocently cool breeze of the mountains. One by one, the young ones fell...
Not a few mothers, unmindful of their own suffering, for they too were touched, ran to the village healer to question the reason behind the epidemic that was sweeping the village.
A cure needed to be found...and fast.
Consulting with the spirits that guided the healer, he found out that the root of a shrub they used as spice would be an effective weapon to combat the inexplicable disease.
Men and women were seen looking for the ginger root and these were used in a ceremony that started to cure them all.
Unseen by them, the Fallen were watching, not knowing that they would be sent away.
When the healer was ready, he made a sign of a cross on the forehead, a cross on both wrists, a cross on the feet and the healer\'s breath...the village was cured.
That day, were the people able to see the Fallen, they would have witnessed so many fleeing from their village, the immortals did not understand the pain that the humans were able to cause them.
But, that was before. Now they still live, here among us.
So, be prepared little one, they are everywhere.\"
The wind continued to howl outside the window as the old man closed the book and slowly walked away from the child\'s room, the story would teach his grandson to be brave. And as the child slowly slept, untroubled in slumber, he clutches a piece of dried up ginger...
Beside him, a Fallen watches unseen...and waits!
I was outside, in the woods
It\\\'s so beautiful out here
There are pine trees around me filled with snow
It\\\'s winter and I love this season
There are no other human around me
I was alone, watching sunset
It is the end
The end of the day
Another day was ended
I felt sad because I\\\'m alone
I felt sad, sad because it\\\'s getting dark
And I have no one to hold to
No one to be with
But Mr. Moon gave me light, gave me hope and strength to face the night
Then I saw a pathway but I do not know where it\\\'ll lead me
So I just stayed where I was, in the middle of the forest
I can hear the owls
The nocturnal ones..great!
Wait! Why am I outside?
Where is my home?
Oh, I forgot, this is my home
I lived a life without any human beside me
14 years of being alone
Experiencing happiness throughout the teardrops of the angels from above
I was contented. I said I was contented.
But wny do I feel like something is missing?
A man, a woman, and a child
They are blured pictured in my mind
Something like a past
Wait! A past? I do not have a past!
For me it is always today.
I don\\\'t wanna remember that past
I hate Past!
14 years of existence
14 years of happiness
14 years of sadness
14 years of being strange
Who am I? I do not know my name or where I came from
But I do know my age, the years of my existence here in the woods
Who are you? What are you?
You missing piece of me
Everyday I\\\'m in search of your presence in the darkness
But until now I cannot find you
Because I don\\\'t know you
I\\\'m a weird.
Searching for a thing I don\\\'t know.
Blured pictures. Strange memories.
That makes me crazy
It\\\'s so dark Mr. Moon could you please make the light brighter?
There, that\\\'s enough. Thank You Mr. Moon
It\\\'s so strange. Why do I feel so uneasy?
Ouch! I cut my finger with the knife on my right hand
Blood.
Red Blood.
My blood dropped on the snow on my feet and mixed up with it
Then I remembered the past that I was trying to forget
The truth, I remembered it now!
War because of me
Dead people because of me
And a crying child because of me
I curse my memory!
For humans, night is the end of the day
But for me, night is the start of my everlasting life!
Now, creatures with fangs are around me
My eyes turning red
My Nails becoming claws
My Fangs existing
This is my story.
My daily routine.
Twelve Midnight is here
Now get ready for us - Vampires of the society
‘When will the sakura flowers bloom?
They bloom when they are in their mountain homes
When will the sakura flowers smell fragrant?
When the laughing seven-year-old child plays
When will the sakura flowers dance?
When the singing seven-year-old child sleeps
When will the sakura flowers wilt?
When the dead seven-year-old child ascends’
![\"\\"\\\\"Description:\\"\"](\"\\"\\\\"file:/C:/Users/MARIAN%7E1/AppData/Local/Temp/msohtmlclip1/01/clip_image001.gif\\\\"\\"\")
Flashback to time she was misunderstood, she was hated by the villagers of the village. Her mother pleaded with them not to kill her, but the villagers did not believe her mother. Instead, they led her mother into a steep hill, made her slip by accident, and killed her without a purpose. Saaya was made to suffer; she was locked in the temple, with the villagers believing she was a demon. All of it happened by her just bringing back a butterfly in her dear hands…
Useless people useless people
No one will remember you when you are dead
I really loved you
But you have sinned
Yumie, her cousin, never believed that she was a demon. She broke the rules of the villagers by visiting Saaya in the locked temple (she can pick the lock) and bringing her everything she needs. She leaves before the villagers open the temple to see if Saaya is growing more and more beautiful each day. Indeed she was. Yumie knew Saaya’s secret alongside with Saaya’s father. Saaya is a fox’s child, literally, a gumiho. Her mother’s mother is also a gumiho, which also explains that Fumiko, Saaya’s mother, is also a fox. By the time Saaya was ten, the changes took charge. She can hear voices from far away; jump higher than normal people, etc. All of these changes in Saaya were never noticed by the villagers. All they thought was that Saaya was a demon and must be extinguished immediately.
My love is now bleeding,
Decorating the whole world into a red one
I can’t go on without you
I can’t go on without you
Biting my lips and wiping away of tears of blood
One day Yumie was caught, and was executed to death. Her head was buried away from her body, and they never gave her a proper burial. They placed her body on a large crest, buried it and took her head to the mountain where they also killed Fumiko. They threw the head into the depths of the cliff, where they made sure it was never to be found.
The news headed straight to Saaya. She knew by then that her grieving and mourning must take place nowhere but the temple. She pleaded and begged the villagers to let her see her father once, for she feared that her father might be the next.
And she was right. Her father sneaked into the temple by night. But the villagers were aware of her father’s presence, and stoned him to his death.
Her father’s death traumatized Saaya. She could barely move.
Finally, the villagers got sick of keeping Saaya in the temple. But they were afraid that when Saaya gets loose, she might as well kill them all.
To bury the sin they’ve done and keep it a secret, they buried Saaya alive…
But Saaya cursed them before she died: ‘呪われた人間が、私は死んでも、あなたのすべてのための私の憎悪は続行されます！\\\\\\\' (\\\\\\\'Cursed humans, even if I die, my hatred for all of you will continue on!’)
Sure enough, her grudge awoken her from the dead and brought terror to the villagers…
Their houses burned down into ashes and unknown diseases began spreading throughout their village, killing many and leaving others sick and dying…
Soon, Saaya rose from her grave, scaring all of them to their deaths. ‘悪魔！悪魔は私たちを得るようになってきた！\\\\\\\'(\\\\\\\'The devil! The devil has now come to destroy us!’) They chorused.
Saaya, now heartless, began slaying them one by one…
‘だけでなく、あなたの人々が生きる権利を持っている！どのような生き物はあなたを取り囲む約！あなたが私たちを虐待し、私たちの種の最後のオフが終了したら、今度は死ぬ必要があります！’(‘Not only you people have the right to live!!! What about the living creatures surrounding you?! You have abused us and disrespected our kind, now you must die!!!’)
Wiping off my tears of blood for the one I loved...
Himiko found her, lying lifeless upon the ruins of the city. ‘ワンタッチ、あなたは人生に戻されるよ！’(‘Just one touch and you’ll be brought back to life!’) Laughed Himiko. Saaya’s pale, cold and lifeless body experienced warmth yet once again.
‘あなたは誰ですか？!’(Who are you?!) Saaya said once she stood up.
Himiko touched Saaya’s bloodied garments, and chuckled. ‘HAHAHA、私が参照してください。あなたは前にこの世界での使用があるのです。しかし憎悪はあなたの良心を引き継ぎ、あなたの同情を下に下げた。’(‘Hahaha, I see. You do have a use in this world before. But hatred took over your conscience and lowered down your pity.’) Himiko turned away from Saaya’s daring look. ‘それは私のためではなかった場合、そのような、、あなたが生きているではないだろう私を見ないでください。’ (Do not look at me like that, if it weren\\\\\\\'t for me, you wouldn\\\\\\\'t be alive.)
‘どのように私はあなたを信頼できますか？’(‘How can I trust you?’) Saaya sat by the nearby lake, washing the blood off her clothes. ‘あなたは私を信頼できるかどうかさえわからない。あなたが知っているいつでも私はあなたを殺すかもしれない、多分あなたの肝臓またはあなたの心を食べる。それは我々gumihosは何をすべきかです。’ (‘You don\\\\\\\'t even know if you can trust me. I might kill you anytime you know, maybe eat your liver or your heart. It is what we gumihos do.’)
‘私はほとんどそうしないれますのでご安心しています。あなたは私にあなたの人生を借りている。あなたが私を殺すなら私の人生はあなたと絡み合っているために、あなたは、同様に一緒に死ぬだろう。’ (‘I am pretty much assured you won\\\\\\\'t. You owe your life to me. If you kill me, you\\\\\\\'ll die along as well, for my life is intertwined with yours.’)
Centuries have passed ever since that day…
、決して忘れないだろう...’ (‘Takabe-senpai, I will never forget you...’) Ayame said to the warm air surrounding her. The essence of Saaya now surrounded the room. Ayame left in a hurry to tell Akira and the others that Saaya has now ‘ascended with the master’…
Out of nowhere, the tune continues to hum alone…
‘When will the sakura flowers bloom?
They bloom when they are in their mountain homes
When will the sakura flowers smell fragrant?
When the laughing seven-year-old child plays
When will the sakura flowers dance?
When the singing seven-year-old child sleeps
When will the sakura flowers wilt?
When the dead seven-year-old child ascends’
<
PANGKALAHATANG PAGSUSULIT
TUNGKOL SA KASAYSAYAN NG MGA TAONG-LOBO AT NG MGA BAMPIRA
PANGALAN: _________________________________________________EDAD:_____________
I. KAALAMAN SA MGA PANGYAYARI
PANUTO: BILUGAN ANG TITIK NG TAMANG SAGOT AYON SA NAPANOOD NA MGA PANGYAYARI SA TELESERYENG LOBO AT IMORTAL.
1.) ANO ANG TAWAG SA MGA MAKAPANGYARIHANG NILALANG NA KAYANG MAGPALIT NG KANILANG ANYO MULA SA PAGIGING TAO HANGGANG SA MAGING MGA MABABANGIS NA LOBO?
A. TAONG-LOBO C. DRACULA
B. BAMPIRA D. MULTO
2.) ANO ANG TAWAG SA MGA ITINUTRING NA MGA HALIMAW NA MANINIPSIP NG DUGO, MATATALAS ANG MGA PANGIL, MABIBILIS, MAY KAKAIBANG-LAKAS, AT KAYANG KONTROLIN ANG MGA ISIP NG MGA TAO?
A. TAONG-LOBO C. DRACULA
B. BAMPIRA D. MULTO
3.) KAILAN DUMATING ANG MGA BAMPIRA SA ATING BANSA?
A. 1521 C. 1572
B. 1986 D. 1898
4.) ANONG LAHI NG MGA BAMPIRA ANG DUMATING SA ATING BANSA?
A. PILIPINO C. HAPONES
B. AMERIKANO D. KASTILA
5.) SINO ANG NANAY NI LYKA ORTEGA?
A. ELEANOR BLANCAFLOR (LADY ELLE) C. LUCILLE ZARAGOSA
B. GABRIELLE DIZON D. NESSA RAYMUNDO
6.) ANONG ORGANISASYON ANG MORTAL NA KALABAN NG KONSEHONG WAYA NA KUNG SAAN AY UNTI-UNTI SILANG PINAPATAY HABANG NAGKAKAHATI-HATI ANG PAGKAKAISA NG MGA PUTTING LOBO AT NG MGA ITIM NA LOBO?
A. WOLVES COUNCIL C. LUNA COUNCIL
B. SANGRE INC., D. ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINES
7.) SINO ANG PUNONG-BANTAY NG WAYA COUNCIL BAGO MAGING PUNONG-BANTAY SI LYKA ORTEGA?
A. LIA ORTEGA C. NESSA RAYMUNDO
B. ELEANOR BLANCAFLOR (LADY ELLE) D. ALEC
8.) SINO ANG DIYOS NG MGA PUTTING LOBO?
A. REMUS C. LYKA
B. ZEUS D. ROMULUS
9.) SINO ANG ITINUTURING NA HULING BANTAY NG HULING SIGNOS NG PULANG BUWAN, NA SIYANG ITINUTURING NA ISANG KAKAIBANG PANGYAYARI SA BUWAN NA UUBOS SA LAHI NG MGA TAONG-LOBO?
A. ROMAN RODRIGUEZ C. LYKA ORTEGA
B. NOAH ORTEGA D. GABRIELLE DIZON
10.) SINONG BAMPIRA ANG KUMAGAT KAY MAGNUS IMPERIAL?
A. SAMANTHA IMPERIAL C. ROMAN RODRIGUEZ
B. LYNDON D. IMELDA FONTANILLA
11.) SINO ANG ITINUTURING NA IKALAWA SA PINAKAMATANDANG BAMPIRANG NABUBUHAY?
A. ROMAN RODRIGUEZ C. LYDIA
B. MAGNUS IMPERIAL D. IMELDA FONTANILLA
12.) SINO ANG ITINUTURING NA PINAKAMATANDANG BAMPIRA SA PILIPINAS?
A. ROMAN RODRIGUEZ C. LYDIA
B. MAGNUS IMPERIAL D. IMELDA FONTANILLA
13.) ANONG CONGLOMERATE COMPANY ANG ISA SA MGA PINAKAMAHALAGANG SEKTOR NG ATING LIPUNAN KUNG SAAN LAHAT NG MGA NAGTRATRABAHO DITO AY MGA TAONG-LOBO?
A. LUNA INC. C. CLUB SANGRE
B. WAYA INC. D. ABS-CBN
14.) KAILAN ISINILANG SI LYKA R.-ORTEGA?
A. MARCH 17, 1990 C. OCTOBER 3, 1960
B. DECEMBER 11, 1985 D. APRIL 29, 2011
15.) KAILAN NAMATAY SI LYKA R.-ORTEGA?
A. MARCH 17, 1990 C. OCTOBER 3, 1960
B. DECEMBER 11, 1985 D. APRIL 29, 2011
16.) ILAN TAON SI LYKA ORTEGA NANG SIYA AY MAMATAY?
A. 27 C. 29
B. 28 D. 30
17.) ILANG TAON SI LIA ORTEGA NANG MAMATAY ANG MOMMY NIYA?
A. 4 C. 6
B. 5 D. 7
18.) ANO ANG TRABAHO NI LYKA ORTEGA NANG SIYA AY PUMASOK SA “HOUSE OF ELLE”?
A. FASHION ASSISTANT C. MARKETING CONSULTANT
B. EXECUTIVE OFFICER D. FASHION DESIGNER
19.) ANO ANG BUONG PANGALAN NI LYKA ORTEGA?
A. LYKA ROSA-ORTEGA C. LYKA RAYMUNDO-ORTEGA
B. LYKA REYES-ORTEGA D. LYKA RIVERA-ORTEGA
20.) KAILAN IPINANGANAK SI LIA R. ORTEGA AT ANG KANYANG KAKAMBAL NA NAMATAY MATAPOS PASABUGIN ANG KOTSE KASAMA ANG TATAY NIYA NG ISANG DI NAKILALANG BAMPIRA?
A. NOVEMBER 25, 1973 C. DECEMBER 11, 1985
B. MARCH 23, 1984 D. OCTOBER 3, 1960
21.) ANONG MINERAL ANG NAKAKAPAGPAWALA SA KAPANGYARIHAN NG DALAWANG LAHI?
A. TANSO C. PILAK
B. GINTO D. BAKAL
22.) ANONG SAMAHAN ANG BINUO NG MGA BAMPIRA SA ILALIM NG PAMAMAHALA NG PAMILYANG IMPERIAL NA NAGHAHANDA SA ITINAKDANG PANAHON NG MULI NILANG PAGBABALIK SA BUHAY NG MGA TAONG-LOBO?
A. TWILIGHT CLUB C. FANGS CLUB
B. VAMPIRES’ CLUB D. CLUB SANGRE
23.) ANO ANG TAWAG SA DI PANGKARANIWANG OKASYON SA MGA TAONG-LOBO NA KUNG SAAN AY PAPATAYIN ANG MGA O ANG NAHULING BAMPIRA SA HARAP NG LAHAT NG MGA TAONG-LOBO?
A. DOKTRINANG KAUTUSAN C. PUBLIC EXECUTION
B. MALAKIHANG DIGMAAN D. MEETING OF THE COUNCIL
24.) ANO ANG TAWAG SA MGA NILALANG NA KAAGAPAY NG MGA TAONG-LOBO KAHIT SAAN SILA MAGPUNTA NA MAY KAKAYAHANG MALAMAN ANG NAKARAAN, KASALUKUYANG PANGYAYARI, AT PATI NA ANG HINAHARAP?
A. GABAY C. BAMPIRA
B. DIYOS D. KAAGAPAY
25.) SINO ANG GABAY NI LYKA R. ORTEGA?
A. JETHRO KABIGTING C. TRIXIE
B. ENRICO KABIGTING (TIKBOY) D. CLARISSE ZARAGOSA
26.) ANO ANG PALAYAW NA IBINIGAY NI NOAH ORTEGA KAY LYKA ORTEGA NANG SILA AY BATA PA?
A. OLA C. ULAY
B. OSANG D. BARAKA
27.) SINO ANG KASINTAHAN NI GABRIELLE DIZON NA TUMULONG UPANG HINDI MATULOY ANG PAGSABOG NG BOMBA?
A. NOAH ORTEGA C. ELEANOR BLANCAFLOR ELLE
B. ALEC D. ROMULUS
28.) SINO ANG LALAKING GUMANAP NA NOAH ORTEGA SA TELESERYENG LOBO?
A. SAM MILBY C. JOHN LLOYD CRUZ
B. PIOLO PASCUAL D. CARLOS AGASSI
29.) SINO ANG GUMANAP NA ELEANOR BLANCAFLOR ELLE O LADY ELLE SA TELESERYENG LOBO?
A. VIVIAN VELEZ C. PILAR PILAPIL
B. ANGEL LOCSIN D. NINA DOLINO
Isa itong kwento maraming taon na ang nakalilipas. May isang baryo na kinatatakutan puntahan ng mga tao dahil sa kababalaghang nagaganap dito. Meron daw tila anghel ngunit dugo ng tao ang kanyang ikinabubuhay, ito ay isang bampira. Tuwing gabi, ito ay naghahasik ng lagim.
Ayon sa sabi-sabi itong bampira na ito ay may pak-pak na tila kalangitan tuwing gabi, may maamong mukha na tila isang anghel mula sa langit kaya sino mang lumapit sa kanya ay iibig na at aamo na sakanyang kagandahan, ang tawag sa kanya ay “ Anghel sa dilim “. Lahat ng tao sa baryo ay kilala siya ngunit walang nangahahas na siya’y kalabanin dahil sa takot, at wala ring nakakaalam kung bakit siya may pak-pak.
Ayon kasaysayan ng mga bampira, ang mga bampirang may pak-pak ay isa sa pinakamalalakas sa lahi ng mga bampira, kaya nilang tumanda at ipasa ang lakas ng kanilang pak-pak sa kanilang magiging supling . Isa ito sa pinakamatitinding naging katunggali ng mga lobo libong taon na ang nakalilipas. Naubos ang lahi nila dahil na rin sa digmaan na naganap sa pagitan ng lobo at bampira, ang iba nakaligtas at napagbigyan mag lahi ulit, ngunit dahil na rin sa abilidad nilang lumipad, nagdesisyon ang mga lobo na ubusin sila at walang itira sa gayon mga bampirang lupa na lamang ang kanilang makakalaban.
Ngunit isang mag asawa ang matalinong nailayo ang anak nilang lalaki bago pa sila salakayin ng mga lobo. Si Jaime ang bampirang may pak-pak ang natitira na lamang sa kanyang lahi, nabuhay man siya sa dilim, sariwa pa rin sakanya ang pagmamahal ng kanyang mga magulang at ng kanyang mga kalahi. Lumayo siya, nagtago upang hindi mahanap ng mga lobo.
Kinakatakutan siya ng lahat sa baryo dahil isa daw siyang demonyo na may pak-pak. Libong taon na siyang nabubuhay ng mapayapa sa baryo, Masaya siya kahit alam niyang gusto siyang patayin ng mga tao sa paligid niya.
Isang araw bulong-bulungan ng mga tao ang natagpuang katawan ng tao na wak-wak ang tiyan, tumaas ang kanyang balahibo, natatakot siya, “Alam na ba nila? Nahanap na nila ako? Ang mga lobo, nandito sa ligtas kong baryo” ang wika ni Jaime sa kanyang sarili. Nag-empake siya, inayos niya lahat ng dadalhin niya dahil kailangan niya ng umalis at magtago. Kinagabihan ng paalis na siya nagulat siya sa kanyang mga bisita, isang lobo at isang bampira.
“Jaime….” Sabi ng bampira.
“kilala mo ako?” tanong niya.
“Oo.. ako ito si Kristina.” Ala-ala ang dumaloy sa isipan ni Jaime, si Kristina kababata niya, isa sa mga anak ng iba pa niyang kalahi. Saya at poot ang naramdaman niya ng maalala ito. Saya dahil hindi siya nag-iisa, poot dahil kasama ito ng isang lobo.
“ taksil ka! kasama mo ang lahing umubos sa atin! “ galit sa tinig niya.
“hindi, hindi ako taksil, tapos na ang digmaan, ang mga lobo at bampira ay iisa na ngayon, hindi na naten kailangan magtago Jaime. Tapos na ang lahat mabubuhay na tayong lahat ng mapayapa.” Sabi ni Kristina. Isa-sang nagbabaan ang natitira pang mga bampirang may pak-pak.
Namangha si Jaime, saya ang humaplos sa kanyang puso. Maraming nakaligtas at magsasama-sama na silang lahat. Maipag-papatuloy na nila ang pagbuhay muli sa lahi nilang akala niyang matagal ng nalipon ng mga lobo. Mag-hahari ulit sila sa alapaap. Ang mga bampirang may pak-pak
“At doon nagtatapos ang kwento ng lahi natin apo.” Wika ni Jaime sa apo niyang 16 na taong gulang.
“ eh, lolo kaylan ko po ba makukuha ang pak-pak ko?”
“sa tamang panahon apo, sa tamang panahon..at ibinilin ko sa iyong ama na gusto ko ipamana sayo ang kagandahan ng aking pak-pak apo.”
“ James, pagod na yang si Papa at Mama. Pagpahingahin mo na sila.” Wika ng Panganay ni Jaime at Kristina.
“halika na kayo ‘lo, ‘la, mahaba pa ang lalakbayin niyo.”Makahulugang wika ni James. Ipinasok niya ang lolo’t lola niya sa kwarto ng mga ito. “ Magpahinga na po kayo” Wika ni James sa gumagaralgal na tinig at pagkatapos ay lumabas.
“Kristina tara at lumipad na sa himpapawid at huwag ng bumalik pa. “
“paano ang mga iiwan natin Jaime?” tanong ni Kristina.
“malalaki na sila. Tapos na ang oras natin, gusto ko ng magpahinga Kristina” huling salita ni Jaime.
Isang araw si Tom ay nakatambay sa kanto ng Kanto Buntisan. Habang nakatambay ay kumakain siya ng cornick. Pag uwi niya ay nag inuman sila ng mga kaibigan niya. Nang matapos ang inuman, lasing na lasing si Tom, napadpad siya sa ibang lugar. Kinabukasan ay naalingpungatan siya sa isang mabahong amoy, nakakasulasok na amoy ng mga patay na tao, makikita niya ang mga pugot na tao. Di siya makatayo dahil siya ay nakatali. May nakita siyang parang taong nagdaan. Nang makita ay napansin niya ang susi ng lock ng kadena na nakatali sa kanya. Naka wala siya. Sinundan niya ang yapak ng nakita niya. Napunta siya sa isang kwarto na may mga bote. ITUTULOY...........
SA MUNDO NG LIRA
Ang mundo ng Lira ay dating tirahan ng mga bathala kasama ng mga immortal katulad ng mga Bampira, Lobo at mga Minotauro, sila ay mga nilalang na may kalahating tao at kalahating toro na pinamumunuan ni Haring Eos at Reyna Olalia.
Ang kanilang pamumuno ang nagwakas sa lahi ng bampira at lobo. Ipinatapon ang mga lahing ito sa daigdig ng mga tao dahil naniniwala sila na magiging payapa ang buong mundo ng Lira kung wala ang dalawang lahing ito.
Nagkaroon ng dalawang anak na prinsesa si Eos at Olalia. Sa pagsapit ng kanilang takdang edad ay pinagkalooban sila ng natatanging biyaya. Ito ang kambal na reliko ng Daigdig at kalawakan na nagmula kay Ouranos (Bathala ng Liwanag) at Gaia (Bathala ng Mundo) .
Ang bawat reliko ay nagtataglay ng kapangyarihang makalikha at makawasak. Ang mga bagay na ito ay nakatakdang ibigay sa magkapatid na prinsesa nasi Luna (ang bunso) at Nerissa (ang panganay).
Dahil sa mga biyayang ito, napanatili ng mga prinsesa ang kanilang pisikal na kagandahan kasama nang naitago nito ang mga itim na mata, sungay, pangil at mabalahibong pangangatawan na taglay ng isang Minotauro.
Naniwala ang lahat na magiging payapa, maayos at maunlad ang mundo ng Lira. Ngunit nagkamali ang lahat. Nag hari ang kasakiman, inggit at galit sa puso ni Prinsesa Nerissa at nagawa niyang paslangin ang kanyang Amang hari at Inang Reyna upang pamunuan ang kanilang daigdig. Ngayon ay hawak niya ang isa sa kambal na biyaya ang makapangyarihang reliko ng kalawakan. Nag dulot ito ng pagkasira at pagkagunaw ng mundong kanilang pinangangalagaan. Mula sa kanyang katauhan ay nagbunga ito ng muling pagkabuhay ni Erebos ang Bathala ng Kadiliman.
Pagkawasak, Kaguluhan at Katapusan ang siyang sumakop sa kanilang mundo. Si Prinsesa Luna nalang ang natitirang pagasa ng Lira, dahil nasa kanya ang kakambal ng reliko kaya tadhana na ang nagdala sa kanya upang wakasan ang kasamaan na bumabalot sa puso ng kanyang mahal na kapatid. “Buhay ni Prinsesa Nerissa ang kapalit ng lahat ng ito”, dahil ito lang ang huling paraan upang matalo si Erebos ang Bathala ng Kadiliman.
Sa pagsasanib ng kambal na reliko, naniniwala si Prinsesa Luna na ito ang magbabalik muli ng kaayusan at kapayapaan sa kanilang natatanging mundo. Ngunit ang kaalaman ni Prinsesa Luna ay hindi pa sapat upang matalo si Prinsesa Nerissa, kaya nag tungo siya sa daigdig ng mga tao sa paniniwalang doon niya matutunan ang pag gamit ng kanyang biyaya ang reliko ng daigdig.
SA MUNDO NG MGA TAO
Kasalukuyang nagdadalang tao si Aling Dolores, wala na siyang katuwang sa buhay dahil namatay na ang kanyang asawa nasi Leo dulot ng malubhang sakit. Minabuti niyang bisitahin muna ang puntod ng kanyang asawa.
May nangyaring di inaasahan…
Isang malakas na lindol at hangin ang naganap, daang daang bulalakaw ang nagsibagsakan galing sa kalawakan, isang matingkad na ilaw ang tumama sa katawan ni Aling Dolores at iisang bulong ang kanyang narinig “Luna ang ipapangalan mo sa akin, Ako ang itinakda ng panahon at pagdating ng araw haharapin ko ang mga tungkulin na dapat kong gampanan” . Biglang bumagsak si Aling Dolores at nawalan ng malay.
Naganap na ang tadhana, isang babaeng sangol ang isisilang ni Aling Dolores na may natatanging talino at kakayahan at ito ay si Luna ang Prinsesa ng Lira at sa pagtungo niya sa daigdig ng mga tao ay muli niyang makakaharap ang mga Bampira at Lobo na ipinatapon ng kanilang lahi kasama na dito ang pagtupad sa kaniyang nakatakda.
Ang SENAKULO ay isang kwento na ang kabutihan laban sa kasamaan na inspirasyon ko na hango sa iilang kasaysayan ng Pilipinas na idinagdagan ko lamang ng kaunting haka-haka na hango din sa teleseryeng IMORTAL na may iilang pangyayari na may pagka-alamat. Ang kwentong ito ay nagsimula sa pagitan ng gobyerno ng mga tao, mga alagad ng batas ng mga taong lobo at mga bampira at mga teroristang rebelde ng mga mutants sa makabagong panahon. Noong unang taon ng 1945, nagapi ng mga pinagsanib ng puwersang Pilipino-Amerikano sa pakikipaglaban laban sa mga hapon at nagtapos ang ikalawang digmaang pandaigdig nang pormal na nakipagkasundo ang dalawang panig para sa kapayapaan. Makalipas ng isang taon,naging pangulo si Pres. Manuel Roxas sa panahong iyon na doon nagsimula ang lahat ng pangyayaring ‘di inaasahan sa lugar ng sentrong kabisera ng Pilipinas. Nagtatag ng mga tao ang bagong republika ng Pilipinas sa ilalim ng pamamahala ng estados unidos o komonwelth pagkatapos ng WWII at sumapi sa UN ng taong iyon. Nagpasa ng batas ng mga mambabatas na War Damage Act para ayusin ang Pilipinas sa sinapit ng digmaan. Nagkasundo ang mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo na poprotektahan nila ang mga tao laban sa mga mananakop o sumisira ng kapayapaang ninanais ng mga tao, mga bampira, at taong lobo. Kaya’t nagtatag ang mga taong lobo ng isang malaking hukbong sandatahan at nagtatag ng mga bampira ang kapulisan na katulad ng mga tao na ipagtatanggol ang kapayapaan at mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo pati na ang Pilipinas laban sa mga kaaway nila, nagsanib ang tatlong tagapagtanggol ng mga tao, mga taong lobo, at mga bampira para madagdagan ang kanilang puwersa laban sa mga kaaway nila. Ngunit, lihim na din na nagtatag ang mga mutants na lihim na nakalusot sa Pilipinas na sinamantala ang mga tao na abala sa paglalabanan na ang kanilang lihim na pugad o kampo nila ay sa mga liblib na lugar na kung saan na hindi pa napupuntahan ng tao, ng bampira o ng taong lobo na walang nakakaalam ang mga lugar na iyon maliban lamang sa mga mutants kahit kalian. Nagdaan na ang mga panahon na bumabangon muli ang Pilinas sa sinapit ng digmaang dumating sa bansa, hanggang sa naging pangulo na si Pres. Ferdinand Marcos noong ika-30 ng disyembre 1965 na doon nagrebelde ang mga tao laban sa gobyerno ni marcos na doo’y sinamantala ng mga mutants ang pagkakataong iyon upang lasunin nila ang hubad na kaisipan ng mga tao na maghasik ng kadiliman sa bansa at sumapi sila (mga tao) sa kanila (mga mutants) para labanan ang mga kapwa tao nila, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo na humahadlang sa kanilang mga layunin na sakupin ang bansa lalo na ang buong mundo ng mga tao, mga bampira, at taong lobo at gawin silang mga mababang uri ng mga nilalang at ang mga mutants naman ay mga matataas na uri at pagaaalipinin sila (mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo) hanggang sila’y mamatay sa pagka-alipin nila (mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo). Nangyayari na ang ‘di dapat mangyari sa nabanggit at doon nagsimula ang labanan sa pagitan ng pinagsanib ng puwersa ng mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo at mga mutants kasama na nila ang mga sumapi sa kanila ng mga taong nilason nila (naging mutants na ang mga taong kanilang (mga mutants) biniktima) na naging mga sindikato sila (dating tao na mutants ngayon) at gumagawa ng mga kalabagan sa batas. Gayun din naman, nagkaroon ng digmaang sibil sa bansa na pinakamadugong digmaan kaysa sa sinapit nilang ikalawang digmaang pandaigdig sa bansa na kung saan na hindi maipaliwanag ang kaliwa’t kanang patayan, mga krimen, at ang pagkawasak ng mga kapaligiran dahil sa gumagamit na din ng mga mutants ang mga ninakaw nilang mga sandata ang mga sasakyang pandigma ng mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo sa pamamagitan ng paggayuma sa mga tao gamit ang kanilang hipnotismo, kaakit-akit na itsura nila, at mga bagay na sigurado na kakagatin ng mga tao ang kanilang mga napakamabulaklaking mga salita na kung kaya’t nagkaroon na ng mga pagkakataon na magtanim sila ng kadiliman sa bansa at sa buong mundo at maaani nila ang kanilang mga layunin. Marami sa mga tao, mga bampira, at mga taong lobo ang nagbuwis ng buhay nila upang maibalik sa dati ang bansa gayundin sa mga mutants na nagbuwis din ang kanilang buhay upang makamit nila ang kanilang mga layunin. Nang mgtatapos na ang digmaang sibil, unting-unti nang sumuko ang mga kaaway sa gobyerno at sila’y pinarusahan at ang mga hindi ay sila ay patuloy sa pakikipaglaban laban sa gobyerno. Umabot ang digmaang sibil ng halos dalawang dekada sa panahon ni marcos na kung saan na nagdeklara siya ng batas militar dahil sa malawakang rebelyon at krimeng nagaganap sa ilalim ng pamumuno niya at natapos ang digmaang sibil nang bumaba sa puwesto si marcos at pagtanggal sa batas militar sa bansa dahil sa Pebrero 22-25, 1986 Rebolusyong EDSA 1 na sa sumunod na pangyayari ay ang tuluyang pagkalipol ang mga mutants at ang tuluyang pagbigay ng kalayaan ng mga taong lobo at mga bampira sa mga tao, gayundin naman, tuluyang umalis na ng bansa ang mga taong lobo at mga bampira para sa kapakanan ng mga tao isang araw bago maganap ang 1986 na Rebolusyong EDSA 1 (Pebrero 22-25, 1986) bago na kasunod na ang pangyayari na naibalik na ang demokrasya at kapayapaan sa bansa sa pamumuno ni Pres. Cory Aquino (na naging unang babae at ika-11 na pangulo ng Pilipinas noong Pebrero 25,1986-Hunyo 30,1992) sa pagtatapos ng Pebrero 22-25, 1986 Rebolusyong EDSA 1 at sa sumunod na taon na pormal nang naibalik na ang demokrasya na naitatag ang 1987 Saligang Batas noong Pebrero 2, 1987 hanggang sa kasalukuyan. Hindi nagpapatalo ang mga kabutihan laban sa kasamaan dahil sa bandang huli nananalo sa unang pagkakataon ang kasamaan pero sa huling pagkakataon ang kabutihan pa rin ang nananaig o nagtatagumpay. †WAKAS†
He gazed out of the open window from his condominium unit located high on the 23rd floor. The structure towered over the business district of the city, looming in darkness and embraced by the aftermath of dusk. The night was beautiful, or at least he thought it was. It captivated him: the essence of darkness only illuminated by a singular heavenly body called the moon. The moon was his goddess. She was his illumination in the night, a symbol of enlightenment and guidance. She was the embodiment of power; his lover amongst the ruins. Other than that, the city was amazing. The dance of neon lights and the orchestra of traffic was what he loved the most. Marvelous. He smiled while taking a final wisp out of his cigarette. His tall, slender form glided across the room to the table where he put out his cigarette stick on the ashtray. He buttoned the coat to his three-piece suit and stroked his fingers through his long, glossy black hair, making sure his locks were kept in place. He took one last glance at the window before heading for the door.
His name was Victor. Apparent in his name, his game was winning. He was a victor, and his namesake commanded that failure was never an option. Failure was not even in his vocabulary. Not in his life, nor in his immortality. Victor was neither lycan nor vampire. He was a breed of his own; the product of an underground cult, created to form a hybrid in a desperate attempt to merge both races of lycans and vampires into a peaceful union of immortal beings. A union where both races could walk together, if not in acceptance, at least in tolerance.
Victor\\\'s story dates back to more than 300 years ago. Fresh off a ship from Madrid, Spain; he had been sent to Philippine shores to spread the Word of Lord. Victor was then a man of God, until he was enticed into the De La Fuego family; a household of peninsulares visiting the Philippines on a certain \\\"business trip\\\". The De La Fuego\\\'s did mean business: only to be payed in blood. The infamous vampiric family of ancient age took the naive priest into their household and converted him into one of them, with the honor of having the first of the De La Fuego vampires to press his fangs against his vein. He then became Victor De La Fuego, champion of the fire: Hell\\\'s inglorious knight.
And when the De La Fuego\\\'s left, the island was his buffet. It was more than easy for Victor to satisfy his hunger. The late night patrons of faith held easy prey for him as he trapped them in the confession booth to indulge in his otherworldly fetish. This went on for the longest of time with no one to ever suspect the parish priest of the disappearance of numerous men and women. He would have the head of the indio who accused him. Victor was ever-so-cunning, no normal person could find a reason to blame him nor a stain of guilt on him. Yet, amidst the carnageous turmoil that Victor had dealt from his unearthly diet, an extremist sector of a prestigious secret society had been watching him. They knew what was going on in the bowels of the island. And they knew of the war between the werewolves and the vampires. They had a plan.
They were a secret society of both races of immortals and mortals in union. They wanted to put a stop to the war of the factions, and they deemed Victor as the key to their plan: to create a hybrid of both races. There were only two ways to create the superbreed: through natural birth and through transformation. Victor was a candidate. Only a vampire created from the ancient lineage could survive a bite from a lycan. And only a vampire created from the ancient lineage could have the blood of both races flow in his veins.
The lycans of the society attacked Victor as he waited for dinner in the confession booth. He put up a struggle, but they were too much for him. All four wolves prowling and pouncing upon him took a bite on every limb that was open for opportunity. He clawed and scratched, but found himself on his knees before he could even touch one of them. He choked on the air that was entering his lungs. A vampire never needed oxygen, but the lycan gene caused him to gag. He needed the air. He needed to breathe. He could feel the rage in his veins, the lycan blood surging through him. He could see the memories of one lycan to another through him. He witnessed the society and what they had in store for him. His lips were numb. His eyes were burning. Victor was in pain, a pain that not even death could pacify. He was transforming. He was mutating. He was alive. And he was one of both races. Victor lost consciousness. The lycans followed suit in what they were ordered to do. Unconscious, he was presented to the tribunal elders of the vampire and lycan races.
However, the tribunal of both factions thought otherwise towards the plan of the society. They shunned upon the presentation of the hybrid. He was awakened and brought to his knees before them, bound by chains. He was judged. He was condemned. They deemed the being unfit for the world. The Earth was not ready for this superbreed to walk amongst its inhabitants, whether living or immortal. He was a disgrace to the blood of both races. He was made an example of by both tribunals. They marked his body to express their utmost disgust. They branded him, a mark he would bear in shame until the end of his days. The letter A was burned into Victor\\\'s flesh. He was made as the symbol of the end with that sole letter. A for Annihilation. A for Armageddon. And finally, the representation that hurt Victor more than the burns he sustained from his branding, A for Abomination.
And it was then that Victor finally understood. This is what the indios felt. The discrimination of color. The racial turmoil. It saddened Victor to witness that the only time that both immortal races had displayed unity was in their attempt to destroy him. They gnashed through his flesh and clawed at his skin. Both races, both his brethren, attacked hand-in-hand at the creature which they deemed unfit for the world. The members of the society were held back, not allowed to stop the cruelty of the tribunal. The poor creature who had every opportunity and capability to fight back chose not to. It was not his time. He will take them all, but not yet. They left him in the mountains for the beasts to finish off. Any member of the society would be destroyed by the tribunal if they were to aid their fallen creation, the creation in which they held the utmost pygmalion prior to his defeat.
Victor was aware of all this. The rage of the lycan and melancholy of the vampire within him drove him to get back on his feet. The forest was his refuge, the mountain was his home. He gathered all the strength he could in the wilderness to create the beast that he was, for one day he would rise again and destroy the elders that had judged him. He would rise once more, not as lycan nor as vampire, but as the beast that he was. He accepted his fate. He embraced his monstrosity. He is the champion of the fire, Hell\\\'s inglorious knight. Failure was never in his vocabulary, not in his life nor in his immortality. He would be the epitome of the end, for that was what they judged of him. He would not fail. For one day, he would not be the only one of his kind.
More than 200 years later, his dream had been fulfilled. The offspring of a lycan and a vampire had been rumored to have sprung to life. Fear from the underworld was in the scent of every immortal being walking the Earth. Victor was pleased. It was his time. Glancing at the window, before heading for the door, Victor stood still. He looked to the floor and took a breath of air. He shut his eyes and clenched his fists. The lights flickered as he exhaled. He opened his eyes; the whites were gone. All that was left was black: the darkness of the night exploding in his soulless body. He had released the beast from within. Victor ran for the window and leapt out of it, arms behind him and head-first, plunging 23 floors to the ground. His feet hit the floor and he stood upright, whites back in his eyes. He walked towards the busy crowd and the bustling streets, the city in which he now lived in. Victor smiled with only one thought on his mind:
\\\"You will be mine, Malia.\\\"
Bagong lipat, ang mag-iinang Ysabelle,Adrian, at James. Halos di malaman ni Ysabelle ang uunahin dahil sa dami ng aayusing kagamitan sa bawat area ng bahay.
“Ring! Ring! Ring!”
“Hello? O Jackie, napatawag ka?” pagsagot ni Ysabelle sa telepono.
“Kamusta ang bagong lipat? Solve na ba kayo diyan?” pag-aalalang tanong ng kaibigan.
“Hindi pa. Hindi ko alam kung papaano aayusin ang mga gamit rito tapos etong siAdriangalit pa rin sa akin.” kwento ni Ysabelle.
“Bakit ba galit na galit sa’yo siAdrian?” may pagdududang tanong ni Jackie.
“A.. e.. kasi… Uhm gawa nga nung paghihiwalay namin ni Sergio. H-hindi nya yon matanggap. Iniisip nya na ako ang may gawa. Ay! Naku yung niluluto ko! Pa-pasensya na kasi marami pa akong gagawin.. sige!” paiwas na paalam ni Ysabelle sa kabilang linya.
“S-sige bye!” sabay pindot ni Ysabelle sa cellphone.
Sa kusina habang naghihiwa ng gulay na gagamitin para sa kanilang hapunan, bumalot ang tension sa loob ng kusina. Lumakas ang ihip ng hangin galing sa bintana. Nagpatay-sindi ang ilaw sa lugar kung nasaan si Ysabelle.
“ Nasaan ako?! Bakit ang dilim-dilim?! Sino ba ako?! Tulungan mo ako!! Parang-awa mo na!” ang sigaw ng boses batang babae.
“Huh! Sino yan ha? Magsalita ka! Sino ka?!” takot na takot na pagsigaw ni Ysabelle.
“Ikaw lang ang nakakakilala sa akin. Ikaw ang makakasagot sa tanong na iyan.” tugon ng boses batang babae na humihingi ng tulong.
“Te-teka ano ba ‘to? Stress lang ba ako? Sino ka ba?! Magsalita ka…. Huhuhuhuhuhuhuhuhuuhuhu…” pagsusumamo ni Ysabelle sa misteryosang boses batang babae.
“Maaalala mo rin kung sino ako…” at nawala na ang tensyon sa paligid ng kusina.
“Huhuhuhuhuhuuh…..” umiyak nang umiyak si Ysabelle. Narinig ito ni James, bunsong anak ni Ysabelle.
“Ma, b-bakit ka umiiyak?” tanong ni James sa ina.
“W-wala naman… na-na-na-s-s-stre-ss lang ako…” nanginginig na pagsagot ni Ysabelle.
“Dinadalaw na yan ng karma nya kaya ganyan…” nakakalokong pagsingit ni Adrian, panganay na anak ni Ysabelle na may galit na maaaring makasakit.
“Kuya, ano ka ba? Nakita mo nang takot na takot si Mama e ganyan pa ang sagot mo!!!” galit na pagsagot ni James sa kapatid.
“Wala kang nalalaman sa kanya. Hindi mo sya lubos na kilala! Pag nakilala mo sya… baka ikaw pa ang unang mang-iwan sa kanya!” malalim na sagot ni Adrian.
Sa isip ni Ysabelle, “B-bakit ganito sa akin siAdrian? Ina pa rin ba angturinnya sa akin?”
“Sanadi ka na lang sumama sa amin Kuya!Doonka na lang kay Papa. Magsama kayong dalawa!” galit na tugon ni James kayAdrian.
“Mamamatay si Mama pagka-iniwan ko sya… may dahilan kung bakit nangyayari ang mga bagay na ito.” at umalis na sya.
Dinala ni James ang ina sa kwarto. Nakatulog sila doon. Si James ay payapang natutulog habang si Ysabelle ay dinalaw ng pangarap na sasagot sa kanyang mga tanong.
“Na-nasaan ako? Anong lugar ito?” nagtatakang tanong ni Ysabelle.
“Kamusta ka?” bati ng isang lalaki na may magandang mukha, nanlilisik at namumulang mga mata, mga pangil na nag-aabang ng dugong magpapakumpleto ng kanyang personalidad.
“Sino ka? Anong klaseng nilalang ka?!? May mga pangil ka! Gu-gusto mo akong kainin no?! WALA KANG MAKAKAIN SA AKIN!!!!! WALA KANG MAKUKUHA SA AKIN!!!!!
“Meron akong makukuha sa’yo na minsan mo nang ipinagkait sa akin! MANGYAYARI LAMANG ANG SALITA NG ORAKULO KUNG MAPAPATAY KO ANG MGA ANAK MO SA MORTAL NA LALAKENG YON!!!!! ”
“ Anong ipinagkait na makukuha mo sa akin? Ang dugo ko?!? HINDI MALASA ANG DUGO KO! AT SAKA SUBUKAN MONG SAKTAN ANG MGA ANAK KO, DI KITA MAPAPATAWAD!!! HINDI BALENG SI SERGIO ANG PATAYIN MO, WAG LANG ANG MGA ANAK KO!!!! SINO KA BA TALAGA HA?! ?”
“AKO, SINO AKO? AKO LANG NAMAN ANG UNA AT DAPAT MONG MINAHAL!!!!”
“ANO? AKO LANG NAMAN ANG UNA AT DAPAT MONG MINAHAL?!? HINDI AKO HALIMAW PARA MAHALIN ANG TULAD MO!!!!!”
“ISA KANG HALIMAW! PAREHO KO, PAREHO TAYONG UMIINOM NG DUGO NG TAO! PAREHO TAYONG PUMAPATAY! PAREHO!!!” hinagpis ng bampirang may bahid ng galit at paghihiganti.
Natulala si Ysabelle. Hindi nya malaman kung bakit ito nangyayari… Sino ang batang babae na humihingi ng tulong sa kanya? Sino ang lalaeng ito na sinasabing naging bahagi ng kanyang nakaraan?
Nagising si Ysabelle. Panaginip lang ang lahat. Pagtayo nya, hinanap ang kanyang anak.
Pinuntahan ito sa kani-kanilang kuwarto. Wala sila doon. Namutla at tumindig ang kanyang balahibo. Naramdaman nyang may nakamasid sa kanya. Naamoy nya ang malansang amoy na dugo ng tao.
Nang maamoy nya iyon, nanginig ang buo nyang katawan. Humaba ang mga kuko ng daliri ng kanyang mga kamay. Lumitaw ng dahan-dahan ang kanyang mga pangil at ang mga mata’y naging pula na katulad ng pagkapula ng dugo ng tao. Higit sa lahat unti-unti nyang nagugustuhan ang amoy ng dugo ng tao. Hinanap ng kanyang matalas na pang-amoy ang amoy ng dugo na nagpapanginig ng laman nya.
Nakita na lamang nya na ang dugong nangangamoy ay galing sa kanyang anak na si James. Unti-unti nang inuubos ng lalaking kausap nya sa pangarap ang dugo sa katawan ng walang kaawa-awang anak na nakatingin sa kanya.
“Totoo nga ang sabi ni Kuya… Di pa kita lubos na kilala… Yan pala ang tunay na ikaw… Gayunpaman mahal ka pa rin namin ni Kuya. Mawala man kami dito. Mananatili ang pagmamahal naming ni Kuya sa iyo….” At nalagutan na ng hininga si James.
“Mama….” Mahinang tawag ni Adrian kay Ysabelle.
Si Adrian ay sinisipsipan ng dugo ng batang babae na syang humuhingi ng tulong sa kanya noon pa man.
“ M-ma-ma-bu-ti na ang ganito… Ligtas ka na Mama… sumama ka na sa kanila…. Sila ang tunay mong pamilya….” At nalagutan na rin ng hininga ang kaawa-awang si Adrian sa kamay ng batang babae na ipinalaglag noon no Ysabelle para makasama ang mortal na kanyang minahal.
“Siguro naman ay naaalala mo na ako… Ako yung sanggol sa sinapupunan mo noon na pinalaglag mo para makasama ang mortal na mas pinili mo keysa sa amin na tunay mong pamilya!!!”
“Patayin mo na rin ako!!! Napakalaki ng kasalanan ko sa inyo… Sana ako na lang ang pinatay nyo… ako ang nagkamali. Wala silang kasalanan……” pagsisising pahayag ni Ysabelle sa batang babae.
“Mahal kita kaya ko’to ginawa. Gusto kong makasama ka… kayo ni Ama. Babalik sila sa iyo… sa takdang panahon… Kaya sumama ka na ulit sa amin ni Ama…”
At sumama si Ysabelle sa mag-amang bampira na noo’y iniwan nya… kasama ang mga bangkay ng magkapatid na balang araw ay mabubuhay na masaya kasama ang mga imortal na katulad nina Ysabelle.
Pilit mang baguhin ang mapait na nakaraan, pilit mang takasan ang madilim na mundo… habangbuhay itong manggagambala at magsasabing… eto ka… eto ang mundo mo… Mundo ng Walang Hanggan..
*END*
Taong 1886.
Nilisan nina Cuaresma at ng kanyang ina at lola ang kanilang baryo. Pitong-taong gulang pa lamang noon si Cuaresma ngunit angat na agad ang kanyang kagandahan, kagaya ng kanyang ina at ng kanyang lola. Maraming dayuhang prayle ang naaakit sa kanila at ginagawa ang lahat upang maangkin sila katulad ng pangangako ng katanyagan at karangyaan. Ngunit dahil sa taglay na moral at prinsipyo, hindi kailanman nagpadala ang kanyang ina at ang kanyang lola sa kagustuhan ng mga prayle. Dahil dito, inakusahan silang mga mangkukulam ng mga nasabing prayle. Ganap noon ang pagsunog o di kaya\\\'y pagbigti sa mga pinaghihinalaang mangkukulam at kampon ng kadiliman sakanilang baryo, kaya\\\'t napilitang tumakas patungong bayan ang tatlo kahit walang katotohanan ang paratang. Napakaraming magagandang kababaihan ang binawian ng buhay noon dahil sa nasabing paratang ng mga prayle.
Nang makarating sa bayan, namasukan ang ina at lola ni Cuaresma bilang mga kasambahay para sa mga Sawyer na isang mayamang dayuhang pamilya. Malaki ang mansyon ng mga ito ngunit kakaunti lamang ang mga bintana, hindi kagaya ng ibang mga gusali sa bayan. Ang nasabing mga amo naman ay puros mga dayuhan at magaganda. Matatangkad, may malaporselanang kutis, matatangos na ilong, mapupulang labi, nagniningning na mga mata, may malalim ngunit buong mga boses; mga karaniwang katangian ng mga dayuhan na dinagdagan pa ng misteryosong mga ora. Tuwing gabi lamang kung makita at makausap nila ang mga amo kaya\\\'t hindi maiwasan ni Cuaresma ang mag-usisa tungkol sa mga ito, lalo na sa pinakabatang miyembro ng pamilya na si Mary.
Bagama\\\'t anyong dalagita na may edad labindalawang-taong gulang, si Mary ay pawang matanda na kung mag-isip at makipagusap. Sa kanya natutunan ni Cuaresma kung paano kumilos at manamit ng tama, pati na rin ang magsalita sa wikang french, kastila at ingles. Bihira kung lumabas ng bahay si Mary kaya\\\'t naging libangan na nito ang turuan si Cuaresma at kwentuhan ng mga bagay tungkol sa mundo. Kung lumalabas naman si Mary, palaging may nakasunod ritong apat na binatilyo na pawang may edad labing-apat hanggang labing-walong taong gulang. Sa buong pamamalagi ni Cuaresma sa mansyon, sa tuwing ganitong pagkakataon lamang kung makita niya ang apat na iyon; animo\\\'y mga anino na lumilitaw lamang tuwing lalabas ng mansyon si Mary at maglalahong parang bula oras na si Mary ay makabalik. May isa sa apat na iyon ang palaging may nakatakip sa bibig at ilong habang may isa naman na palaging may bitbit na malaking baul na hugis kabaong sa kanyang likuran. May isa sa kanilang apat ang may buhok na kasing pula ng apoy habang may isa namang may hanggang balikat na maitim na buhok.
Isang gabi, nakabunggo ni Cuaresma ang binatilyo na may hanggang balikat na maitim na buhok nang tangkain niyang sundan si Mary hanggang sa silid-tulugan nito. Biglang naging pula ang pinaka-gitna ng mga mata ng binatilyong iyon! Nabalutan ng kulay-pilak na balahibo ang mukha at buong katawan nito at napuno ng malalaking pangil ang bibig pagkakita kay Cuaresma. Halos mapaiyak ang batang babae sa takot pero hindi naman siya sinaktan ng binatilyo na noo\\\'y anyong malaking aso na at hindi tao. Ikinuwento niya kinabukasan sa kanyang ina at lola ang nasaksihan ngunit ipinag-kibit-balikat lamang ng mga ito ang istorya at sinabing panaginip lamang niya iyon.
Lumipas ang ilang taon ngunit nanatiling bata ang itsura ni Mary Sawyer at ng kanyang mga magulang. Nakasanayan na ni Cuaresma ang kakaibang mga tagpo sa mansyon at ipinagpatuloy na lamang ang gawain niya bilang kasambahay. Maganda ang naging pagtrato ng mga Sawyer kay Cuaresma at sa kanyang ina at lola kaya\\\'t napamahal na rin ang buong pamilya sa kanya; sapat na upang makuha ang buong tiwala at katapatan niya.
Hanggang minsan ay isinama ni Mary si Cuaresma ng lumabas ito ng mansyon. Magkahalong takot at saya ang naramdaman ng labing-pitong taong gulang na si Cuaresma dahil ito ang unang beses na makikita niya ang ginagawa ni Mary at ng kanyang apat na bantay. Sumakay sila sa isang saradong karwahe na minamaneho ng isa sa apat na bantay. Nang bumaba sila, sinalubong agad ng isang grupo maliliit na bata si Mary at ginayak na sumama sa kanila. May entablado sa isang bakanteng lote sa gitna ng maliit na baryong iyon. Umakyat si Mary kasama ang apat na bantay doon sa entablado. Ipinakilalaniya sa mga tao ang mga kasama niya; si Pilak ang may itim na buhok na hanggang balikat; si Guinto ang may takip sa bibig at ilong; si Tanso ang may kulay apoy na buhok; at si Kopra ang may dalang malaking baul na hugis kabaong. Inilapag ng apat na bantay ang mga dala nilang lalagyan at binuksan ang mga iyon. Si Kopra ang pinakahuling nakapaglabas ng instrumento na sa sobrang laki ay kailangan pa niyang umupo mahawakan lamang ang ulo niyon. Dahandahang hinawi ni Kopra ang malalaking kwerdas ng instrumento gamit ang isang kawayang patpat at nagsimula na ring tumugtog ang tatlo kasunod niya. Umawit si Mary at napahanga ang lahat ng mga tao na naroon.
Pasikat na ang araw ng magising si Cuaresma. Wala siyang ibang maalala sa mga pangyayari ng nakalipas na gabi bukod sa pagsakay sa karwahe at sa pag-awit ni Mary. Kung paano silang nakauwi at kung paano natapos ang magdamag ay hindi niya matandaan. Minabuti na lamang ni Cuaresma na kalimutan na ang pag-aalala at harapin na lamang ng masigla ang buong araw. Lingid sa kanyang kaalaman, naging usap-usapan sa bayan ang misteryosong pagkamatay ng mga tao sa isang maliit na baryong di kalayuan sa kanila nitong nagdaang gabi lamang. Naubos ang dugo ng karamihan sa mga bangkay habang nawawala naman ang mga laman-loob ng mga bata. Ilang araw pa ang nagdaan at paulit-ulit ang nangyayari sa iba\\\'t ibang maliliit na karatig baryo ng bayang iyon. Walang makapagsabi kung sino or ano ang salarin dahil walang natitirang buhay para magsalaysay. Bukod sa mga usap-usapan, naging normal na para sa mga tao ang mga ganoon pangyayari dahil ilang taon na rin iyong nagaganap sa bahaging iyon ng kuapuluan.
Sa di inaasahang pagkakataon, namataan at hinuli ng mga gwardya sibil ang ina ni Cuaresma habang namamalengke ito sa pamilihang bayan isang araw. Kabilang pa rin sa listahan ng mga pinaghihinalaang mangkukulam ang kanyang ina at kitang-kita ni Cuaresma nang sunugin ito ng buhay sa isang plaza kaharap ang taong bayan. Agad namang ikinamatay ng kanyang lola kinagabihan ang karumaldumal na sinapit ng anak noong umaga. At katulad ng dalawang naunan, kabilang rin si Cuaresma sa mga pinaghahanap ng mga dayuhang prayle kaya\\\'t ipinagutos ng mga Sawyer na manatili na lamang sa puder nila ang dalaga.
Ilang linggo makalipas ang pagkamatay ng ina at lola ni Cuaresma, nagdiwang ang buong bansa dahil sa unang pagkakataon ay niawagayway ang bandila nito sa Cavite II el Viejo. Sa pamumuno ng isang Heneral Aguinaldo, ang lahat ng bilanggo ay pinalaya at ang lahat ng kasalanan ay kinalimutan upang patuluyin at itaguyod naman ang isang bagong rehimen. Ang lahat ng marangya ay itinuring na traydor at inagawan ng kayamanan at kapangyarihan, kabilang ang mga Sawyer. Sinunog ng mga katutubo ang mansyon sa kalagitnaan ng tanghali at kinitlan ng buhay pati mga kasambahay. Walang natira kundi abo at ilang kalansay na nakahimlay sa loob ng mga kabaong na nasa loob ng mansyon.
Taong 2011.
Abala ang lahat sa paghahanda ng mga lamesa at dekorasyon para sa nalalapit na kapistahan ng serbesa sa isang siyudad sa NCR sa pangunguna ng isang malaking kumpanya. Iba\'t ibang grupo ang handang makilahok sa tugtugan at sayawan. Matanda. Bata. Lalaki. Babae. Lahat gustong makisaya. Isa sa mga alalay ang nag-aayos ng mga upuan nang may biglang sumalpak na flyer sa kanyang mukha. Inalis niya yoon at binasa ang nakasulat...
PRESENTING
TONIGHT\'S GUEST ARTIST
CRYPTIC-PROVERB
featuring:
Mary \"Lapida\" Sawyer for lead vocals
Pilak for lead guitar and keyboards
Guinto for rhythm guitar
Tanso for drums
and
Kopra for bass
Managed and handled
by world renowned teenage wiccan
Ms. Cuaresma
\"Prepare For The Fusion!\"
Few years after the world knew about the vampires and werewolves,many old vampire families were killed because of the mysteriuos moonstone.A vampire man named Leander was ordered to kill the keeper of the moonstone by the Ministress Maria of Ministry of Blood.Once he killed the keeper his parents will be free from imprisonment.
When he got in the Town of Ria just then he realized that a protector may have been protecting the keeper.At first,he was very determined that he will find the keeper but a distraction came,love
He met a beautiful girl named Zakaria.She had biege skin and a twinkling eyes.She knew that Leander was avampire but leander did\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt know that Zakaria is the keeper of the moonstone.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Why did\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt you tell me about this?!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"he roared.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"I was scared!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"I should have know better!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"he said.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"You are a threat to my nation!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
Leander was about to kill her when a big brown wolf stopped him.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Is he your protector?\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
She nodded.
Faster than the blink of an eye Leander vanished.
The protector of Zakaria was named Lance.At that time when zakaria\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'s heart needed love he fulfilled it.They became couple but one night Zakaria saw Leander\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'s face in her dream.She opened her eyes and saw Leander in her room.The next second,they started kissing.
She chosed Leander but Lance was there protecting her.After 9 months,she gave birth to a perfect baby girl she named Zakary.After she gave birth she died.Leander had no choice but to bite her with his venom.So he did.But insted of becoming alive she turned into a cold stone like the moonstone inside her.Zakary was protected by the pack of Lance-Sirius,Jen,Daryl,Kyle and Vincent from the dangerous Danags.
She was hid in an island where nobody knows.The next morning,Zakary was 10 years old!
Mean while,Ministress Maria was killed by a Danag named Alondra.Danags took over the Ministry of Blood and sent out a 4 powerful Danags named Yeasel,Josh and Casper to kill the daughter of Zakaria.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"How those that happened?\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"asked Lance.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"I do\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt know.Zakary is a half-vampire,half-keeper.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"said Leander.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"May be it is her ability!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Someone is coming!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"said Jen.
Leander inhaled and smelled the scent of a Danag.Sirius carried Zakary and in an blink of an eye a frantic chase happened.Yeasel chased Sirius.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"What\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'s happening?\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Zakary asked.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Nothing!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
Out of nowhere,Yeasel came out and bit Sirius with her venom turning him into ashes.Zakary stood up and Yeasel was about to bite her when Ministress alondra came and said:
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Do\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt kill her.She can save our nation.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"From what?\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"asked Yeasel.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"From the Dark Moon.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
Zakary was imprisoned in a secret prison where she met her protector-Carlo.Carlo was a werewolf at first he do\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt know why they were caugth but realized that Zakary will be used to absorb the power of Moon.
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"We need to escape!\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"he said.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"Quickly.Tomorrow is the Day of Dark Moon.\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
But they did\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'nt realized they were riding an airplane going Italy.After an hour, they found themselves in a island where the castle of the vampires\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\' stood.She was brought to in top of an hill:below the hill was a valley filled with dozens of thousands of wolf and hooded vampires.Ministress Alondra joined her and yelled:
\\\\\\\"I now present to you the Heiress of Moon,The keeper of the Moonstone!\\\\\\\"
The werewolves howled and the vampires laughed.
Zakaria saw her dad and Lance with jen in the crowd.
\\\\\\\"She will be our ridicule to the moon!\\\\\\\"
All of a sudden,the moon made a terrible sound that annoyed the crowd.The sound had no effect on Zakary.After a second,the moon released e jet of green fire that hits the heart of zakary.Suddenly out of nowhere at least 50 wolves saved Zakary with them was Carlo,they were the Omega Wolf!The sound vanished and also the green jet of light.
The battle begun!At least 50 Danags fight off with the Omega Wolf.In just a matter of second everyone was fighting:Claws vs. Claws,Fangs vs. Fangs and Fangs vs. Claws.So,Zakary did the unthinkable,she used her power.She moved like a puppet master controlling each muscle of everyone and controlling Ministress Alondra.She killed Alondra in a one single moved of her hands.Everyone stopped from fighting and gave respect to the most powerful half-vampire they ever known.
~END~
Few years after the world knew about the vampires and werewolves,many old vampire families were killed because of the mysteriuos moonstone.A vampire man named Leander was ordered to kill the keeper of the moonstone by the Ministress Maria of Ministry of Blood.Once he killed the keeper his parents will be free from imprisonment.
When he got in the Town of Ria just then he realized that a protector may have been protecting the keeper.At first,he was very determined that he will find the keeper but a distraction came,love
He met a beautiful girl named Zakaria.She had biege skin and a twinkling eyes.She knew that Leander was avampire but leander did\'nt know that Zakaria is the keeper of the moonstone.
\"Why did\'nt you tell me about this?!\"he roared.
\"I was scared!\"
\"I should have know better!\"he said.\"You are a threat to my nation!\"
Leander was about to kill her when a big brown wolf stopped him.
\"Is he your protector?\"
She nodded.
Faster than the blink of an eye Leander vanished.
The protector of Zakaria was named Lance.At that time when zakaria\'s heart needed love he fulfilled it.They became couple but one night Zakaria saw Leander\'s face in her dream.She opened her eyes and saw Leander in her room.The next second,they started kissing.
She chosed Leander but Lance was there protecting her.After 9 months,she gave birth to a perfect baby girl she named Zakary.After she gave birth she died.Leander had no choice but to bite her with his venom.So he did.But insted of becoming alive she turned into a cold stone like the moonstone inside her.Zakary was protected by the pack of Lance and the siblings of Leander from the Danags.
She was hid in an island where nobody knows.The next morning,Zakary was 10 years old!
*May mga taong sadyang hindi mo makakalimutan, unang tingin mo palang talagang tatatak na sa puso mo, magtataka kung bakit ang bilis ng tibok ng puso mo kahit hindi mo pa sya nahahawakan o nakakausap, ito daw ang masasabi mong PAGIBIG. Yan ang laging kinukwento ng tata ko kapag hindi ako makatulog, ganyan nya kasi minahal ang nana ko, pero namatay sya ng pinanganak ako,sa lahi namin malas daw ang magka anak ng babae dahil pag ito ay umibig sa isang purong tao pagkasilang nya sa anak nya ay mamamatay sya na parang bula, na isang alala nalang ang matitira… tama! Hindi kami bilang sa mga tao, kami ay klase ng immortal na mababang klase, bakit? Dahil ang mga angkan ko piniling mabuhay sa isang gubat at kung saan kami ang klase ng immortal na maaring umibig sa purong tao ngunit mamamatay ang babae tao man o immortal pagkasilang nya sakanyang anak..ngunit si tata na isang tao ay iba ang pananaw , gusto nya makapag aral ako sa normal na paaralan, tinuruan nya ko at pinasok nung ako ay bata pa, palipat lipat kami ng tahanan dahil hinahanap kami ng aming lahi, lalo na ang aming pinuno.at ngayon sa bago naming tirahan, kami ni tata ay nanirahan malapit kila uncle jake, na isa ding immortal, may anak sya na lalaki na si Michael, ang kababata ko…
“Nang Makita ko ang papasukan ko dito sa kolehiyo sa aming lungsod talagang napahanga ako, ngayon lang ako nakakita ng malaking paaralan, malalaking gusali at napakaraming tao. Pakiramdam ko kumpletong kumpleto na ko, isa akong purong tao!” napangiting habang pinagmamasadan ang unibersidad…
“bakit di kapa pumapasok? Bayad na ang pagpasok natin,salamat sa tata mo, tara na hanapin natin ang room mo.”
*Si tata ang nagbayad sa pangtuition ni Michael, tulad ni tata isang tao din si tito jake at napangasawa ay isang immortal, lumayo din sila dahil ayaw nila ng pamamalakad ng aming lahi, sabi ni tata kapag daw umabot na ko sa edad na bente singko anyos ay pakakasalan ko daw ang anak n aming pinuno dahil ako ang napili na pakasalan ang panganay nyang anak dahil kamukha ko ang aking ina na dating minahal ng aming pinuno ngunit pinili ang aking tata. Si tata ay galing sa isang mayaman na pamilya, ngunit tinakwil sya ito ng sumama sya sa aking ina, ngunit sa sipag ng aking tata ay nakapagipon sya at eto ang aming ginagastos.
“Sandy, heto ang room mo, hindi tayo magkaklase kaya dadaanan nalang kita mamayang uwian ha? Doon pa kasi ko sa kabilang building.” Sabi ni Michael.
“Oo sige akong! Magkita tayo mamaya.” Napatulala sakanyang bagong room.
(pumasok na si sandy sa kanyang room at naghahanap ng upuan)
“Bago ka lang dito?” tanong ng isang babae kay sandy.
“ha? Oo! Bago lang po ko dito.” Nakayukong sabi ni sandy.
(hindi napansin ni sandy na nakatingin sakanya ang lalaking pinapantasya sakanilang lugar dahil sa angkin nitong kgwapuhan, at kayamanan na si Claude)
“Kaya pala ganyan ang pananamit mo eh, san mo ba kinuha yan? Sa baol ng lola mo?” tumatawang sabi ni jessa, na kilala sakanila dahil sya ang pinakamaganda at hinahangad ng mga lalaki sakanyang angking kaseksihan.
“Kaysa sa suot mo na parang hindi papasok sa paaralan kundi para lang magpasikat” galit na sabi ni sandy sabay alis sa harapan ni jessa.
“Yan ang bagay sa mga taong papansin.” Natawang sabi ni claude habang tinitignan si jessa.
“Papansin ka daw jessa oh, mukhang ngayon lang may lumaban sayo ha?” asar ni Ralph na kabarkada ni claude.
“Ayun at walang nakaupo.” Dali-daling umupo si sandy na parang batang na eexcite na sa magiging klase.
(at biglang dumating ang kanilang Professor)
“May bago kayong kaklase, Introduce yourself Miss.” Sabi ng professor.
“Opo.” Naeexcite na tumayo at papunta sa harapan.
(pinatid ni jessa si sandy kaya naman napahiga ito bago pa pumunta sa harapan)
“Ang tanga naman!” habang tumatawa.
(Tumayo at tinignan si jessa ni sandy)
(napansin ni claude na nagiba ng kulay ang mga mata ni sandy)
“Are you okay miss?” Tanong ng professor.
Napapikit si sandy at sinabing “opo mam.” At idinalat ang mga mata.
Nagtataka naman si claude dahil balik na sa normal ang mata ni sandy.
ØAT NG MATAPOS NA ANG KLASE…
“Nasan na kaya si akong?” habang hinhintay sa loob ng room si Michael.
“sige mauna na kayo pare,” sabi ni claude sa mga barkada nya.
“paano mo nagawa yon?” tanong ni claude.
Lumingon at nagtataka si sandy “ako ba ang tinatanong mo?”
“tayo lang naman dalawa ang nandito” at nilapitan si sandy.
“ha? Anong tinatanong mo? Anong pano ko nagawa” nagtatakang sabi ni sandy.
“ nagberde ang mata mo kanina, tapos pumikit ka lang naging black na, wala naman akong alam na contact lens na may ganong effect?”
Kinabahan si sandy at biglang tayo. “nagkakamali ka lang. aalis na ko” at nagmadaling umalis si sandy.
ØAT SA BAHAY…
“Hindi naman sya mukhang vampire para maging ganon, wala namang ganon na nag eexist, sa mga palabas lang yun… pero pano nangyari yun? Anong klaseng tao sya?” bulong sa sarili habang nakatapat sa computer.
ØAT SA BAHAY…
“Hindi nya pwedeng malaman dahil baka mapahamak si tata, walang kapangyarihan si tata tulad ko kaya di nya mapoprotektahan ang sarili nya kung sakaling ipagkalat ng lalaki na yon. Anong gagawin ko!” nagiisip na si sandy.
ØKINABUKASAN…
“Oh? Wag mo na ko ihatid sa building ko akong, dito nalang tayo magkita mamaya sa gate… sige na” sambit ni sandy na kinakabahan.
“Sabagay mabilis naman memorya mo eh, sige kita tayo mamaya.” At umalis na si Michael.
Napahinga ng malalim si sandy at nasabi sa sarili “ anong gagawin ko?”
“Hindi ka naman bampira diba?” tanong ni claude na nasa likod ni sandy.
Nagulat at napalingon “ano bang sinasabi mo ha? Pwede ba? kung trip mo kung asarin tulad ng babae sa klase tigilan mo na ko!” naasar na nasabi at biglang napahinto dahil sa may naramdaman na paparating na panganib.
Nagtataka sa reaksyon ni sandy. “anong iniisip nya?” pabulong ni claude.
“malandi talaga yang babaeng yan, si claude pa ang target nya ha?” habang pinagmamasdan si claude at sandy.
“Kawawa naman ang mga bata.” At biglang tumakbo paalis.
“kawawa?” nagtataka. Sinundan si sandy.
“What? Saan sila pupunta? Damn!!!” galit na galit na si jessa.
ØAT SA ISANG LUGAR NA DAANAN NG SASAKYAN…
“Nasan sya? Bakit ang bilis nya tumakbo” hinihingal na sabi ni claude nang napansin si sandy sa gitna ng highway… “anong ginagawa nya don?”
Nakatayo sa gitna ng highway at pumikit, nakita ang magsasalpukan na school bus at isang Flammable truck. “malapit na” idinalat ang mata.
Nagulat si claude ng makitang nagkulay pula ang mata ni sandy. “kulay pula naman… pano nya nagagawa yon?” napansin ang papalapit na truck na pagewang gewang ang galaw papalapit kay sandy. “Magpapakamatay ba sya?”
Tinignan ni sandy ang nagmamaneho ng truck at pinatulog ang lasing na driver sa pamamagitan ng kanyang tingin sa mga mata nito at tinulak ang truck paatras. “aahhhh!!!” “kailangan mo huminto dahil ilang Segundo nalang padating na ang bus” “aahhhh!!!” hirap na hirap na itulak ang track
Biglang pumasok sa track si claude upang tulungan si sandy.
Napansin si claude sa loob “anong ginagawa mo dyan?”
“hindi ko alam ano ang plano mo pero kahit gano kapa kalakas kelangan ihinto ang makina para huminto ang truck… nasan ba yon…”
“sira ang makina ng truck kaya hindi matigil ng driver, ilang Segundo nalang nandito na nag school bus… ahhhhh!!!!”
“ililigtas nya ang mga bata? Pano nya nalaman?”
“hindi kami tao.” Biglang sumulpot sa tabi si Michael.
“pano ka nakapunta?” nagulat na nagtataka na si claude.
Hinawakan lang ni Michael ang manubela at bigla ng huminto, ilang Segundo narin at dumaan na ang school bus ng walang disgrasyang naganap.
“Mabuti at dumating ka…”hinihingal na nasabi ni sandy…
“ngayon mo lang ginamit ang kapangyarihan mo kaya hindi kapa ganon kabihasa.”
“Anong klaseng tao kayo?” bumaba sa truck at tinignan si sandy.
“Sandy, walang dapat makaalam nito… umalis kana, ako na bahala dito.”
“Wag!” sigaw ni sandy. “tinulungan nya ko, at kasalanan ko dahil di ako nag iingat, ang turo sakin ni tata na ang pamilya namin hindi papatay ng inosenteng tao!”
(tinitignan ni claude si sandy)
“pero sandy, sa oras na malaman ng isang tao, alam mo na ugali ng tao na ipagkalat ang mga kakaibang bagay.. pano kung…”
“Makakaasa kayo sakin na walang makakaalam nito” sumbat ni claude.
Napatingin si sandy kay claude “Salamat” at napangiti na nasabi ni sandy.
*Simula noon ay naging close kami ni claude,pinakilala ko na din sya kay tata, at nagustuhan nya si claude. Mabuting tao daw sya dahil nakikita nya sa mga mata nito,ilang bwan din kaming naging magkaibigan ni claude,hindi sya nahihiyang samahan ako kumain kahit na lagi akong nakasaya… ngunit ng naging malapit ako kay claude lumayo naman sakin si akong, at nabalitaan ko na lumipat na daw sila ni uncle jake, nalungkot talaga ako noon, mabuti nalang at nandyan si claude, hanggang sa…
“Nasan ba si claude? Sabi nya nandito lang sya sa room…” at biglang bumukas ang mga ilaw at may malaking piano kung saan tumutugtog si claude at kinantahan si sandy habang may bumabagsak na petals, na parang ulan ng rosas…
Natapos ni claude ang sandaling alay na kanta para kay sandy at lumapit sa kinatatayuan ni sandy…
“Sa susunod pa naman ang Kaarawan ko ha? Bakit ata may surprise ka sakin?” napapangiting sabi ni sandy.
“Nung una palang kitang nakita, alam ko mamahalin na kita…”
Nagulat si sandy at tumulo ang luha “mahal mo ko?”
“oo sandy! At bago ko to aminin sayo kinausap ko ang tata mo, sinabi nya sakin ang mga posibleng mangyari satin pero hindi kita bibitawan laban sa mga pagsubok na nakalaan satin,” hinawakan ang mukha ni sandy…
“sandy… would you be my GIRLFRIEND” naiiyak na sinabi ni claude…
Napaiyak si sandy at biglang niyakap si claude… “YES!”
At hinigpitan ni Claude ang yakap sa minamahal nya na si sandy.
*Yon ang pinaka masayang nangyari sa buhay ko ang mahalin ng isang purong tao ng walang alinlangan at tinanggap ng buong buo ang tungkol sakin. Alam ko madami kaming pagdadaanan, kung baga sa libro Introduction palang to dahil marami pang chapter an gaming haharapin. Ngayon pa na papalapit na ang kaarawan ko at ipakikilala na nya ko sakanyang pamilya. Pero hindi ako bibitiw, panghahawakan ko ang sinabi nya na mahal nya ko, sapat na yon para lumaban, sapat na yong dahilan para gawin na tong panghabangbuhay.”
By: Missai :)
SUICIDE LETTER
By: John Dean Yap
“Buong tapang na tumatakbo sa kagubatan, bit-bit ang aking baril..
Halos mabaliw ako at gusto pang tumapos ng mga terorista.”
Isang lampara ang nakatirik sa isang sulok ng maliit na kwarto, makikita ang alikabok at kalumaan ng mga gamit, ang lampara ang nagbibigay ng liwanag sa madilim na silid.
Mula sa isang lumang lamesa katabi ng lampara ang isang piraso ng lapis at isang piraso ng lumang papel.
Nagising si Ismael na tila balisa, malakas ang ihip ng hangin at nanlamig ang kanyang pakiramdam, bumangon siya’t mabilis na kinakapa ang kama patungo sa mesa- nang maabot ito hinawakan ang lapis agad na nilisan ang higaan at umupo sa isang upuang kahoy.
Dinarama ng mga palad ni Ismael ang papel at inaalis ang mga alikabok, hinipan ito- at sinimulang magsulat.
‘Habang isinusulat ko ito alam kong
malapit na ang aking kamatayan.’
Napatingin si Ismael sa bintana, nag-aalinlangan siya, at bakas sa sirang mata ang lungkot na nadarama.
Nilingon ang papel at itinuloy ang pagsusulat.
‘Isang lihim ang aking itinago at pilit ko na sanang
kinalimutan, isang lihim na alam kong babago
sa kalagayan ng mundo.’
Dati akong sundalo, ngayo’y retirado at na wala nang saysay,
Malayo na sa siyudad, bulag at hindi na magawang makapagsalita,
ang lapis at papel na lamang ang nagsisilbing aking bibig-
sa mga bagay na nais ko sabihin at sa mga bagay na hindi ko noon sinabi.
Tinatalasan ni Ismael ang pakikinig sa pagilid, hirap na siyang makarinig habang binibilisan ang pasusulat.
“Taong 1979, unang araw ng nobyembre, nakatanggap ng liham ang gobyerno ukol sa pagdakip sa dalawang dayuhan. Nagsagawa ng lihim na pag-atake ang presidente at ipinadala ang militar sa mindanao. ang aming target doon, ang grupo ni apo abu-makdal na siyang dumakip sa dalawang dayuhang pari.”
“Isang daan at walong pu’t apat kaming mga sundalong pinadala, sa gitna ng laban nakita ko ang husay ng aking mga kasama, nakita ko ang bangis at lupit ng kanilang pakikidigma.
Walang sinasamba, walang kinatatatakutan, lahat mahuhusay- lahat mga perpektong sundalo.
Lumipas ang ilang oras patuloy ang laban sa gitna ng madilim at mapunong kagubatan, hinahanap ang dalawang pari, tinutugis ang mga terorista.
Ang mga hiyawan at putok ng malalakas na baril lamang ang aking nadidinig, habang tumatakbo bitbit ang aking baril hindi ko iniinda ang maputik at makitid na daan.
Isa lang ang aming misyon dito ang maibalik ng buhay ang dalawang pari.
Patuloy ang pagtakbo, patuloy ang pakikipaglaban, sanay akong lumaban marami na akong napagdaan ngunit hindi ko maintindihan na habang tumatakbo ang oras ay mayroong mga luha akong nadarama, mga luha na mula sa aking dalawang mata.
Nakita ko ang isang kalaban agad kong sinuntok at pinaputukan- hindi ako naaawa kinuha ko ang patalim sa aking paanan, mabilis ko itong itinusok sa kanyang dibdib, kahit alam kong siya’y patay na. ‘ kailangan kong matapos ito! Kailangan kong pang mabuhay!, hindi ako maaring mamatay dito, mananalo kami alam kong nasa amin ang tagumpay!
‘Sa kanan! sa kanan! nandun ang isa!’
Baril, bala, patilim, lakas..
Lahat ng paraan mayroon kami- patayin ang lahat, walang ititirang buhay, kami ang magwawagi!”
Ang mga ngiti sa akin ay makikita. Lumingon sa paligid at hinahanap ang ibang kasama, para akong baliw na may saya at sabik pang tumapos ng mga terorista, ang aking palad ay gusto pang pumatay -ang aking mata ay tila nanlilisik sa galit. ‘Hahaha! Nasaan kayo? Magpakita kayong lahat!’
Ngunit wala na ang lahat, katahimikan na ang bumabalot sa gubat.
‘Nasaan na kayo!? Mga kasama! ‘ Natakot ako nang makita kong ako nalang ang natitira sa madilim na gubat, nanayo ang aking mga balahibo.
Nakaramdam ako ng kakaiba- isang pakiramdam na ngayon ko lang naramdaman.
Isang terorista ang nakatayo sa king harapan- nakangiti siya. Nanlambot ang aking mukha, alam kong siya ang may gawa, ang pumatay sa lahat.
Tumakbo ako papalayo sa kanya, tumakbo ng tumakbo sa takot.
Hindi siya normal! ..
Isang halimaw!..
Isang bampira!
Napatigil si Ismael sa pagsusulat nang maramdaman niyang may hapdi at kirot sa kanyang leeg, ang kagat ng nakalipas ay muling ng naging sariwa.
Pinigilan ng kanyang kaliwang kamay ang dugong lumalabas mula dito.
“Matagal ko nang nadidinig sa kwento ni Heneral felipe ang tungkol sa mga bampira, sabi nila ang mga ito ay alamat nalang at di na nabubuhay pa, si Heneral felipe at ang ibang pang may matataas na posisyon sa gobyerno ay mga taong lobo.. Ngunit ito’y lingid sa kaalaman ng mga ordinaryong tao .
Tumutulo ang ilang dugo patungo sa papel. Habang lumuluha na rin si ismael.
“Hindi nila alam! Hindi ko sinabi sa kanila ang nakita ko sa mindanao..
Nakagat ako ng bampira ngunit di ako pinatay, may sinabi siya sa’kin bago lumisan.”
“ kapag sinabi mo o isinulat ang iyong nakita dito
babalikan kita at papatayin, ngunit kapag inilihim
mo angpanyayaring ito unti-unti kang makararamdam
ng tatlong karamdaman, mula sa aking mga kagat.
Una -ay hindi mo na makakawang makakita,
ikalawa -hindi ka na makapag-sasalita.
At ikatlo..
mawawala na ang iyong pandinig.”
Nakabibinging katahimikan mayroon sa silid, ngunit sa ikinikilos ni Ismael bakas sa kaniya ang takot.
Naramdaman niya na mayroon nang nakatayo sa kanyang likuran.
Malamig na pakiramdam na tila may katabi na siyang bangkay.
Ang kaba at mga luha ang nangibabaw sa kanya, hindi na siya nagtanong at hindi na nanlaban pa, nanatiling nakaupo sa kanyang upuan habang hawak hawak ng mahigpit ang lapis kasabay ng tumutulong mga luha.
Sumigaw si ismael at sinabing:
ISMAEL
Alam kong darating ka!
Mabilis at lihim na nilukot ni Ismael ang sinulatan papel- palihim na ibinato sa ilalim ng kama.
Nagsalita ang bampira, ngunit paunti-unti nang naglaho ang pandinig ni Ismael, hindi nya narinig ang tinig nito.
Nagkalat ang mga dugo sa buong silid..
Habang marahang nagpapatay-sindi ang nakatirik na lampara.
-The end-
SUICIDE LETTER
By: John Dean Yap
“Buong tapang na tumatakbo sa kagubatan, bit-bit ang aking baril..
Halos mabaliw ako at gusto pang tumapos ng mga terorista.”
Isang lampara ang nakatirik sa isang sulok ng maliit na kwarto, makikita ang alikabok at kalumaan ng mga gamit, ang lampara ang nagbibigay ng liwanag sa madilim na silid.
Mula sa isang lumang lamesa katabi ng lampara ang isang piraso ng lapis at isang piraso ng lumang papel.
Nagising si Ismael na tila balisa, malakas ang ihip ng hangin at nanlamig ang kanyang pakiramdam, bumangon siya’t mabilis na kinakapa ang kama patungo sa mesa- nang maabot ito hinawakan ang lapis agad na nilisan ang higaan at umupo sa isang upuang kahoy.
Dinarama ng mga palad ni Ismael ang papel at inaalis ang mga alikabok, hinipan ito- at sinimulang magsulat.
‘Habang isinusulat ko ito alam kong
malapit na ang aking kamatayan.’
Napatingin si Ismael sa bintana, nag-aalinlangan siya, at bakas sa sirang mata ang lungkot na nadarama.
Nilingon ang papel at itinuloy ang pagsusulat.
‘Isang lihim ang aking itinago at pilit ko na sanang
kinalimutan, isang lihim na alam kong babago
sa kalagayan ng mundo.’
Dati akong sundalo, ngayo’y retirado at na wala nang saysay,
Malayo na sa siyudad, bulag at hindi na magawang makapagsalita,
ang lapis at papel na lamang ang nagsisilbing aking bibig-
sa mga bagay na nais ko sabihin at sa mga bagay na hindi ko noon sinabi.
Tinatalasan ni Ismael ang pakikinig sa pagilid, hirap na siyang makarinig habang binibilisan ang pasusulat.
“Taong 1979, unang araw ng nobyembre, nakatanggap ng liham ang gobyerno ukol sa pagdakip sa dalawang dayuhan. Nagsagawa ng lihim na pag-atake ang presidente at ipinadala ang militar sa mindanao. ang aming target doon, ang grupo ni apo abu-makdal na siyang dumakip sa dalawang dayuhang pari.”
“Isang daan at walong pu’t apat kaming mga sundalong pinadala, sa gitna ng laban nakita ko ang husay ng aking mga kasama, nakita ko ang bangis at lupit ng kanilang pakikidigma.
Walang sinasamba, walang kinatatatakutan, lahat mahuhusay- lahat mga perpektong sundalo.
Lumipas ang ilang oras patuloy ang laban sa gitna ng madilim at mapunong kagubatan, hinahanap ang dalawang pari, tinutugis ang mga terorista.
Ang mga hiyawan at putok ng malalakas na baril lamang ang aking nadidinig, habang tumatakbo bitbit ang aking baril hindi ko iniinda ang maputik at makitid na daan.
Isa lang ang aming misyon dito ang maibalik ng buhay ang dalawang pari.
Patuloy ang pagtakbo, patuloy ang pakikipaglaban, sanay akong lumaban marami na akong napagdaan ngunit hindi ko maintindihan na habang tumatakbo ang oras ay mayroong mga luha akong nadarama, mga luha na mula sa aking dalawang mata.
Nakita ko ang isang kalaban agad kong sinuntok at pinaputukan- hindi ako naaawa kinuha ko ang patalim sa aking paanan, mabilis ko itong itinusok sa kanyang dibdib, kahit alam kong siya’y patay na. ‘ kailangan kong matapos ito! Kailangan kong pang mabuhay!, hindi ako maaring mamatay dito, mananalo kami alam kong nasa amin ang tagumpay!
‘Sa kanan! sa kanan! nandun ang isa!’
Baril, bala, patilim, lakas..
Lahat ng paraan mayroon kami- patayin ang lahat, walang ititirang buhay, kami ang magwawagi!”
Ang mga ngiti sa akin ay makikita. Lumingon sa paligid at hinahanap ang ibang kasama, para akong baliw na may saya at sabik pang tumapos ng mga terorista, ang aking palad ay gusto pang pumatay -ang aking mata ay tila nanlilisik sa galit. ‘Hahaha! Nasaan kayo? Magpakita kayong lahat!’
Ngunit wala na ang lahat, katahimikan na ang bumabalot sa gubat.
‘Nasaan na kayo!? Mga kasama! ‘ Natakot ako nang makita kong ako nalang ang natitira sa madilim na gubat, nanayo ang aking mga balahibo.
Nakaramdam ako ng kakaiba- isang pakiramdam na ngayon ko lang naramdaman.
Isang terorista ang nakatayo sa king harapan- nakangiti siya. Nanlambot ang aking mukha, alam kong siya ang may gawa, ang pumatay sa lahat.
Tumakbo ako papalayo sa kanya, tumakbo ng tumakbo sa takot.
Hindi siya normal! ..
Isang halimaw!..
Isang bampira!
Napatigil si Ismael sa pagsusulat nang maramdaman niyang may hapdi at kirot sa kanyang leeg, ang kagat ng nakalipas ay muling ng naging sariwa.
Pinigilan ng kanyang kaliwang kamay ang dugong lumalabas mula dito.
“Matagal ko nang nadidinig sa kwento ni Heneral felipe ang tungkol sa mga bampira, sabi nila ang mga ito ay alamat nalang at di na nabubuhay pa, si Heneral felipe at ang ibang pang may matataas na posisyon sa gobyerno ay mga taong lobo.. Ngunit ito’y lingid sa kaalaman ng mga ordinaryong tao .
Tumutulo ang ilang dugo patungo sa papel. Habang lumuluha na rin si ismael.
“Hindi nila alam! Hindi ko sinabi sa kanila ang nakita ko sa mindanao..
Nakagat ako ng bampira ngunit di ako pinatay, may sinabi siya sa’kin bago lumisan.”
“ kapag sinabi mo o isinulat ang iyong nakita dito
babalikan kita at papatayin, ngunit kapag inilihim
mo angpanyayaring ito unti-unti kang makararamdam
ng tatlong karamdaman, mula sa aking mga kagat.
Una -ay hindi mo na makakawang makakita,
ikalawa -hindi ka na makapag-sasalita.
At ikatlo..
mawawala na ang iyong pandinig.”
Nakabibinging katahimikan mayroon sa silid, ngunit sa ikinikilos ni Ismael bakas sa kaniya ang takot.
Naramdaman niya na mayroon nang nakatayo sa kanyang likuran.
Malamig na pakiramdam na tila may katabi na siyang bangkay.
Ang kaba at mga luha ang nangibabaw sa kanya, hindi na siya nagtanong at hindi na nanlaban pa, nanatiling nakaupo sa kanyang upuan habang hawak hawak ng mahigpit ang lapis kasabay ng tumutulong mga luha.
Sumigaw si ismael at sinabing:
ISMAEL
Alam kong darating ka!
Mabilis at lihim na nilukot ni Ismael ang sinulatan papel- palihim na ibinato sa ilalim ng kama.
Nagsalita ang bampira, ngunit paunti-unti nang naglaho ang pandinig ni Ismael, hindi nya narinig ang tinig nito.
Nagkalat ang mga dugo sa buong silid..
Habang marahang nagpapatay-sindi ang nakatirik na lampara.
-The end-
ako si Louie Chavez , isang studyante , 18 taong gulang. ulila...
nangyari ang lahat noong nagtrabaho ang mga magulang ko sa HOUSE OF ELLE,
tandang tanda ko pa ang lahat, 9 na taon ako noon, lagi akong sinasama nila
mama\'t papa sa trabaho ..
isang araw .. Nawala nalang ang mama at papa ko, hinanap ko sila....
inikot ko ang buong opisina nang nakita ko ang isang Halimaw,
nakakatakot! isa syang mabangis na lobo. Matatalim ang kanyang mga kuko,
at ang babangis ng kanyang mga pangil. Nasa tabi ng halimaw
ang mga magulang ko, wala akong nagawa , nanood lang ako sa mga
pangyayari.
\"wag po .. Ligtas po ang sikreto niyo samen.. wag po .. wag po..\"
\"huli na ang lahat , nakita nyo ang di niyo dapat makita ..
sayang naman Mrs. Chavez, magaling ka sana..\"
Pinatay niya ang magulang ko! Hindi siya naawa..
kitang kita ko ang takot ng nanay ko , tumakbo ako palayo sa
halimaw , nang may nabangga akong isang lalaking nakaitim,
Tinitigan niya ko.. di ko na alam kung anung nangyari pagkatapos...
pag gising ko, nakita ko nanaman yung lalaki,
\"aalagaan kita , ng parang sakin.. hinding-hindi ka nila masasaktan\"
Lumaki akong may galit sa mga halimaw na pumatay sa mga magulang ko,
gusto kong gumanti .. pero lumaki akong sakitin, naging hadlang to
sa pag hihiganti ko.
OCTOBER 16 1995, inataki ako , sinugod ako sa hosital..
\" dok, anu na pong mangyayari sa anak ko?!\"
\"pasensya na Mr. Chavez, pero huli na po ang lahat, hndi niya na po
kakayanin. mabuti na pong mag paalam na ho kayo sa kanya.\"
Hindi! hindi pwede, ayoko pang mamatay! hanggang nabubuhay pa ang
halimaw na pumatay sa mga magulang ko, hinding hindi ako pwedeng mamatay!
gusto kong sigawan yung doktor na pinabayaan lang ako ditong mamatay!
parang awa nyo na .. \"Pa, ayoko pa mamatay, wag niyo kong hayaang mamatay..\"
bulong ko sa isip ko.. Napaluha nalang ako .. di ako makapagsalita..
\"Nak, di ko gustong gawin sayo \'to.. pero alam kong gusto mo pang mabuhay..\"
KINAGAT NYA KO!! hiniwa nya ang kamay nya at pinainom ako ng dugo...
di ko alam kung anung nangyayari, pero pakiramdam kong uhaw na uhaw ako!
parang ngayon lang ako nakainom sa buong buhay ko!
Nagising akong uhaw na uhaw , sabik sa dugo. Nakita ko si Tay Fred ,
nakatingin sa kin...
\"tay! anung nangyari , bat ganto ang pakiramdam ko..? parang di ko na
ramdam na may sakit ako, Dugo! gusto ko ng DUGO!!! \"
\"nak, ito inumin mo..\" binigay nya sakin yung basong may dugo..
\"dugo yan ng hayop, inumin mo ng matanggal uhaw mo.. di ko gustong
gawin to sayo, pero ito nalang ang paraan para mabuhay ka.. ISA KA NG
BAMPIRA LOUIE! \"
hindi ko alam kung anung naramdaman ko, pero tuwang tuwa ako!
naging malakas ako, sa tingin ko kaya ko ng patayin ang mga Pumatay sa
mga magulang ko!
~ to be CONTINUED!!!!!
Ang bahay na dati’y puno ng saya.
Ngayon ay nabalot na ng lungkot.
Si Andrew na kamamatay lang ng Nanay Elma niya, ngayon ay mag-isa na lamang sa buhay.
Mag-isang haharapin ang bawat hamon.
Mag-isang hahanap ng solusyon sa bawat problemang darating.
20 years old na si Andrew at graduating na ito sa college, at HRM ang kinuha nitong kurso.
Simple. Mabait. Magaling makisama.
Ilan lamang ito sa mga mabubuting katangian niya.
Pagdating naman sa babae? Torpe!
Isang dakilang torpe!
Kaya’t ang mga babae na mismo ang lumalapit sa kanya.
Pero hindi niya ito pinapansin dahil alam niyang hindi naman seryoso ang mga ‘to at pinagtitripan lamang siya.
Sa kagustuhang makapagtapos ni Andrew ay naghanap siya ng paraan para masuportahan niya ang kanyang pag-aaral.
At sa awa ng Diyos ay kinuha siya bilang isang janitor ng isang pribadong paaralan.
Janitor sa umaga. Student naman sa gabi.
Nakasanayan naman niya ang ganoong klaseng set-up.
Isang gabi habang nagwawalis siya sa corridor ng school ay may nakita siyang isang babaeng estudyante.
Nakatayo ito sa bandang dulo at tanging ang likod, at mahabang buhok lang nito ang masisilayan gawa ng nakaharang na haligi.
Nilapitan ni Andrew ang babae para tanungin kung ba’t di pa ito umuuwi gayong pasadong alas diyes na ng gabi.
Mestiza. Maamo ang mukha, pero may lungkot sa mga mata ang nakita ni Andrew nang tuluyan na siyang makalapit dito.
Katrina. Katrina ang pangalang binigay ng babae.
Madaling nakuha ni Andrew ang loob ng dalaga. Nakuha niya ang kiliti nito sa tulong ng mga nakakatawang biro niya. Sa tuwing magkikita sila ay dinadalhan siya ni Andrew ng pagkain pero parati itong tumatanggi at busog pa daw ito.
Masaya si Andrew sa bawat minutong kasama niya si Kat.
Kulitan. Tawanan. At maging asaran man. Madali silang nagkagaanan ng loob.
Sa tatlong sunod-sunod na gabing pagkikita nila ni Kat ay napaisip-isip si Andrew kung bakit laging gabi ito kung umuwi at hindi ito nagpapahatid kahit hanggang labasan man lang.
Kung bakit ang lalim ng iniisip nito. Kung bakit parang may inaabangan ito.
Isang gabi sa kanilang muling pagkikita ni Kat ay napansin niyang may bitbit na lumang newspaper at libro ito.
‘Yon din ang gabing gustong ipaalam ni Andrew ang malalim na pagtingin niya para kay Kat.
At Booom!!!
Walang atrasang sinabi ni Andrew ang kanyang nararamdaman. Masayang-masaya siya dahil hindi niya inaasahang yayakapin siya nito.
Pero laking gulat nalang ni Andrew na ang pagyakap palang ‘yon ay yakap ng pagtanggi.
Napayuko si Kat at inabot ang isang newspaper at yearbook kay Andrew.
Nagtaka naman ang binata kung ba’t inabot sa kanya ang mga bagay na ‘yon. Napuna niya na 1936 ang yearbook. Sinimulan niyang buksan ‘yon, hanggang sa marating niya ang isang page na larawan ng isang babae.
At nakumpirma niya ngang si Kat ang babaeng nasa larawan nang mabasa niya ang pangalan sa baba: KATRINA SANDOVAL, CLASS VALEDICTORIAN.
Hindi makapaniwala si Andrew sa kanyang natuklasan. At habang nakatulala siya ay ipinaliwanag ni Kat ang lahat sa kanya.
A day before her graduation, nagahasa pala at pinatay ito ng isang grupo ng mga lasing na kalalakihan. Kaya pala siya pabalik-balik sa paaralan na ‘yon at hindi pa natatahimik ang kanyang kaluluwa sa kadahilanang gusto niyang makuha ang diploma niya.
At naging malinaw kay Andrew ang lahat. Nabasa rin niya ang isang article sa lumang diyaryo tungkol kay Kat at kung ano ang nagyari dito.
Naging malungkot ng mga sandaling ‘yon si Andrew. Ngayon lang kasi siya naging matapang sa pag-amin ng kanyang nararamdaman sa isang babae. At sa kasamaang palad, sa babaeng hindi pa pwedeng mahalin.
Sa mga nagdaang araw, naging matamlay si Andrew. Hindi niya lubos maisip na nakikipagkita pala siya sa isang patay na, at ang malala pa nito, natutunan niya itong mahalin.
Mahigit apat na araw na hindi nakipagkita ang binata kay Kat. Pero isang gabi pinuntahan niya ito dahil na-miss niya ito ng sobra. At gaya ng dati, naabutan niya ito sa ganoong kalagayan.
Malungkot.
Pero nag-iba ang mukha nito nang makita siya. Nginitian siya nito. God knows kung gaano niya kamahal ang babae.
Si Kat na mismo ang lumapit sa kanyang kinatatayuan. Niyakap siya nito. Pero sa halip na magsalita ay hinila ni Andrew si Kat.
Nagtaka naman ang dalaga kung saan siya dadalhin. Tuluyan namang binuksan ni Andrew ang silid at napansin niya, na sa Auditorium siya dinala nito. Pinaupo siya ni Andrew sa isang upuan sa banding gitna at umakyat ito sa stage. Hinawakan nito ang hindi gumaganang mic.
“1936 Class Valedictorian, Katrina Sandoval!” biglang sigaw nito.
Natawa si Kat at kanya namang sinakyan ang ginagawa ni Andrew. Umakyat din siya sa stage at kunwari’y nagpasalamat, sabay pagtanggap sa kanyang diploma. Napansin rin niya na totoong diploma ang inabot sa kanya. Kumpleto ang detalye at may lagda ng dean.
Habang nagpapasalamat siya kuno ay bakas sa mukha niya ang labis na kasiyahan. Marami siyang pinasalamatang tao. Ikinabigla naman ni Andrew sa bandang huli ng kanyang speech.
“And lastly, kay Andrew Mendoza. Isang mabuting tao. Tunay na kaibigan. Salamat sa pagmamahal. Salamat dito”
Napaluha si Andrew sa bahaging ‘yon. Tuluyang lumapit si Kat sa kanya at binigyan siya ng isang mahigpit na yakap.
“Ito ang pinakamasaya kong araw. Ikaw ang bumuo nito. Salamat Andrew. Dahil sa ginawa mong ‘to, pwede na. Pwede na akong manahimik. Salamat at nakilala kita. Salamat at di ka natakot i-approach ako nung una mo akonog nakita. Eh di sana, hindi ‘to mangyayari.”
“Happy Graduation.” ang tanging nasabi ni Andrew.
‘Yon ang huling pagkikita ni Andrew at Kat. ‘Yon din ang huli nilang pag-uusap. Nakumpirma ni Andrew na ‘yon na ang huli at katapusan ng lahat dahil sa tuwing maglilinis ito ng corridor ay wala na ang babaeng binalot ng kalungkutan. Masaya si Andrew dahil kahit papano ay may natulungan siya. Natatawa nalang siya sa tuwing maisip niya ang oras na kung saan nagtapat siya ng nararamdaman niya kay Kat. Hindi niya tuloy lubos maisip na may minahal siyang isang taong matagal na palang pumanaw.
Ang lahat-lahat ng mga pangyayaring ‘yon ay insinarili na lamang ni Andrew at itinuring na isang magandang kahapon.
Mabilis lumipas ang panahon. Nakuha ni Andrew ang kanyang inaasam. At ‘yon ay ang maka-graduate at matapos ang college.
5 years after naging manager siya sa isang Resto Bar pero zero pa rin ang lovelife nito.
At habang may kung anong kakulitan ang tumatakbo sa kanyang isipan nang araw na ‘yon, nagising naman siya sa reyalidad nang makita niya ang isang babaeng muntik nang madulas.
Pakkk!!!!!
Nagkalat at nagsiliparan naman ang mga bitbit nitong mga papel at libro. Mabilis naman na pinuntahan ni Andrew ang babae at tinulungan ito sa pagdadampot ng mga nahulog nitong gamit.
May isang bagay na nakakuha ng atensyon niya. At ‘yon ay ang larawan ng isang pamilyar na babae. Ngayon lang din niya napansin na may hawak itong 1936 yearbook. Ang yearbook na nahawakan din niya 5 years ago.
Nang okay na ang lahat at tuluyan na silang makatayo, laking gulat ni Andrew na ang babaeng kaharap niya ay kamukha ng babaeng minsan na niyang minahal.
Mapa-mata man, labi at ang haba ng buhok nito ay kuhang-kuha. Nakatitig lang dito si Andrew at di niya napansin na kinakalabit na pala siya ng babae.
“Kuya…Kuya…Salamat po. Okay na po ako.” sabi nito.
“Ah ganun ba? Okay. Next time mag-ingat ka ha!?” ang nasabi ni Andrew.
Tango nalang ang ginawa ng dalaga bilang pagtugon sa paalala nito sa kanya.
Nakatalikod na ang babae at nang akmang buksan nito ang pinto para tuluyan nang lumabas ay tinawag siya ni Andrew.
“Miss, sandali!” tawag nito.
“Bakit?”
“Pwede ko bang malaman pangalan mo?”
“Katrina.! Katrina Sandoval.”
Labis na nagulat si Andrew sa narinig.
“Ako nga pala si Andrew. Nice name.”
“Salamat. Thanks to my lola. Sige, I should go. Thank you ulit and nice meeting you, Andrew.” J
VYKRO CRIMEA
Ni: John Dean Yap
Malamig ang kapaligiran, makikita ang buwan na mala-kulay pula kasama ng nagtatabihang mga ulap. Sa lakas ng ihip ng hangin ay tinatangay nito paisa-isa ang mga tuyo’t na dahon sa kalsada. Makikita sa kalsada ang nakatayong street sign na yari sa bakal, niyuyugyog ng hangin ang street sign na may nakasulat na ‘Leadermind St.’
katahimikan ang mayroon sa isang silid, makikita ang mga papel at lapis, kulay asul, pula, at berdeng pintura, sira sirang mga paint brush at limang canvas cloth na nagkalat sa sahig.
Mahimbing na natutulog ang isang binatilyo, nakusot ito ng leather black jacket, lumang asul na pantalon at sapatos na walang nang sintas.
Makikita sa kanyang kanang kamay ang asul na pinturang naninigas na, habang hawak ang isang lapis na bagong tasa.
Marahang namulat ang magkabilang mata ng binatilyo, na parang naninibago sa kanyang kapaligiran. Tiningnan ng binata ang kanyang kanang kamay na may pintura, bumangon siya at kinamot ang ulo.
GRANDO
Gabi na pala! Paulit ulit nalang..
Nakakasawa na..
Isinuot niya ng maayos ang kanyang sapatos, kinuha ang dalawang sintas na nasa tabi at inilagay sa mga butas nito. Tumayo ang binata at kinuha ang mga papel na nagkalat sa sahig, paisa-isang pinupulot.
GRANDO
Ako nga pala si Grando Giure- isa akong artist, nagsusulat rin ako,
mahilig rin sa musika, pero ang gusto ko
tagalang gawin.. ay ang magpinta..
Inilagay ni Grando ang mga papel sa ibabaw ng lamesa na yari sa kahoy na kapapahid lang at nangangamoy barnis pa.
GRANDO
Bukod sa pagiging artist...
Nakita ni Grando ang mga pinturang wala ng takip, lumapit siya rito upang takpan. Nakita niya ang mga takip nito sa ilalim ng kanyang kama.
Habang inaabot ang mga takip ay nahulog mula sa bulsa ng kanyang leather jacket ang isang itim na baril..
GRANDO
..isa akong..
Fourth kind..
Pinulot ang baril at itinago sa likod ng pantalon.
Muling inabot ang mga takip at agad na tinakpan ang mga pintura.
GRANDO
Miyembro ako ng Vykro Crimea,
isang grupo ng mga fourth kind sa silangang
bahagi ng Antipolo, ang grupo ay nagsimula noong 1656.
Muling tiningnan ni Grando ang kanyang kwarto, napailing at lumabas ng pintuan.
GRANDO
Kada buwan- Humuhuli kami ng isang
bampira at isang taong-lobo..
Naglakad si Grando sa kalsada, malakas ang ihip ng hangin at nagdaraan sa kanya ang mga tuyo’t na dahon.
Mula sa kaliwang bahagi ng kanyang kupas na pantalon, kinuha ang isang stick ng sigarilyo at lighter, sinindihan ang sigarilyo at inilagay sa kanyang bibig.
GRANDO
Tinatanong at inaalam ang kanilang
paniniwala sa mundo..
Dahan-dahang niyang ibinubuga ang usok ng sigarilyo na nagmumula sa bibig.
GRANDO
Kapag hindi ko nagustuhan
ang kanilang aspeto..
Sa kanang kamay, tiningnan ang relo.
GRANDO
Pinapatay ko ang isa..
Muling hinigop ang puos ng sigarilyo at pinitik papalayo ang yosi sa gitna ng kalsada, tumilapon at nasagasaan ng mabilis na nagdaang trak.
Naglakad pabalik sa kanyang maliit na kwarto.
Nag-ring ang pulang telepono, nagulat si Grando.
Hinawi ang kanyang itim na buhok na tumatakip sa noo.
Agad na sinagot..
GRANDO
Si Grando ito..Sino ito?..
LUNA
Gran, pumunta ka hide-out ngayon,
nakahuli sila Vashnu at Ellena
ng dalawang Waya.
GRANDO
Waya? Merun na kong nahuling isa kahapon,
Patayin nyo na yan- Isa pang sangre kailangan ko luna.
LUNA
Patayin? Baka magsisi ka?
Yung isang waya maganda perception,
maaari nating gawing..
.. Fourth kind.
Napangiti si Grando ngunit may lungkot sa mata.
GRANDO
Huh! Katulad ng ginawa nyo kay mika?!
LUNA
Yan na naman ba tayo Gran?.. Matagal ng patay si mika..
Pinunasan ang luha.
GRANDO
Sige, papunta na ko dyan.
-To be continue..-
Bata pa lamang si Christian ay nararanasan niya na ang iba’t ibang pakiramdam sa kanyang paligid. Panonood ng kung anu-anong out of this world shows sa TV ang lagi niyang pinapanood kaya kung anu-anong bagay ang pumapasok sa isip niya.
One day, kasama ang mga classmates niya after their specialization at SPA ( Special Program in the Arts ), nanood sila ng sine about other living things in this world. The objective of the film is to study about undiscovered super natural living things in this world specially for the students.
Naisipan nilang mag-camping in a place where in wala pang masyadong nakaka-discover. Kakaiba ang feeling niya in that place, hindi niya maipaliwanag ngunit sigurado siya na umiiral na naman ang malikot na imahinasyon niya. Feeling niya may ibang nilalang bukod sa kanila.
Dahil sa pagiging conscious niya, he decided to go outside and what happening.
For the 2nd time, sa pagiging conscious niya, nakakita siya ng bakas, hindi ito bakas ng kung ano mang ordinaryong hayop o ordinaryong tao.. He follow that marks at nakita niya ang isang nilalang naa may dalwang pangil, dilaw ang mga mata, mahaba ang mga kuko, balbunin at kakaiba ang taglay na lakas.
Tumakbo siya papalayo hanggang makarating siya sa kanilang camp, 2 days na pala siyang nawawala at hinahanap. Di niya alam kung paano iyon nangyari ngunit sigurado siya na wala pang ilang saglit ang lumipas ng lumabas siya ng camp.
Kinunsulta siya ng kanyang mga magulang sa isang professional about their son’s condition, last day pa siya hindi kumakain , laging nakatulala, at lagging nagrereserch about something different after their camping.
Patagong ipinagpatuloy ni Christian ang pag-rereserch tungkol sa nakita niya at sa wakas may nakita siyang isang file that describes what he saw. Nakalagay sa file na noon pa mang BCE ( Before Common Era ), may na-diskubre ng iba’t ibang nilalang tulad ng Bampira, Taong Lobo, Lobo at pinaghalong lahi ng Bampira at Taong Lobo.
Medyo luma na ang file dahil early 1980’s lang nadiskubre ang computer at mga website. Ngunit lumabas sa file na pinaghalong lahi ng isang Bampira at Taong Lobo ang nakita ni Christian dahil may katangian itong bampira at taong lobo, maaaring at hindi malayong anak ng isang bampira at taong loboang nakita niya.
After his research, nakuntento na siya sa kanyang mga nakita at lubos niya itong naunawaan. Bumalik ang kanyang sigla at bumalik siya sa pag-aaral, he shared his experience with his friends at nagbigay aral ito sa kanya.
Nalaman niyang may iba pang nilalang sa mundo ang dapat madiskubre at pag-aralan. Dito man sila galling sa’tin, maging sa IBANG MUNDO.
Bata pa lamang si Christian ay nararanasan niya na ang iba’t ibang pakiramdam sa kanyang paligid. Panonood ng kung anu-anong out of this world shows sa TV ang lagi niyang pinapanood kaya kung anu-anong bagay ang pumapasok sa isip niya.
One day, kasama ang mga classmates niya after their specialization at SPA ( Special Program in the Arts ), nanood sila ng sine about other living things in this world. The objective of the film is to study about undiscovered super natural living things in this world specially for the students.
Naisipan nilang mag-camping in a place where in wala pang masyadong nakaka-discover. Kakaiba ang feeling niya in that place, hindi niya maipaliwanag ngunit sigurado siya na umiiral na naman ang malikot na imahinasyon niya. Feeling niya may ibang nilalang bukod sa kanila.
Dahil sa pagiging conscious niya, he decided to go outside and what happening.
For the 2nd time, sa pagiging conscious niya, nakakita siya ng bakas, hindi ito bakas ng kung ano mang ordinaryong hayop o ordinaryong tao.. He follow that marks at nakita niya ang isang nilalang naa may dalwang pangil, dilaw ang mga mata, mahaba ang mga kuko, balbunin at kakaiba ang taglay na lakas.
Tumakbo siya papalayo hanggang makarating siya sa kanilang camp, 2 days na pala siyang nawawala at hinahanap. Di niya alam kung paano iyon nangyari ngunit sigurado siya na wala pang ilang saglit ang lumipas ng lumabas siya ng camp.
Kinunsulta siya ng kanyang mga magulang sa isang professional about their son’s condition, last day pa siya hindi kumakain , laging nakatulala, at lagging nagrereserch about something different after their camping.
Patagong ipinagpatuloy ni Christian ang pag-rereserch tungkol sa nakita niya at sa wakas may nakita siyang isang file that describes what he saw. Nakalagay sa file na noon pa mang BCE ( Before Common Era ), may na-diskubre ng iba’t ibang nilalang tulad ng Bampira, Taong Lobo, Lobo at pinaghalong lahi ng Bampira at Taong Lobo.
Medyo luma na ang file dahil early 1980’s lang nadiskubre ang computer at mga website. Ngunit lumabas sa file na pinaghalong lahi ng isang Bampira at Taong Lobo ang nakita ni Christian dahil may katangian itong bampira at taong lobo, maaaring at hindi malayong anak ng isang bampira at taong loboang nakita niya.
After his research, nakuntento na siya sa kanyang mga nakita at lubos niya itong naunawaan. Bumalik ang kanyang sigla at bumalik siya sa pag-aaral, he shared his experience with his friends at nagbigay aral ito sa kanya.
Nalaman niyang may iba pang nilalang sa mundo ang dapat madiskubre at pag-aralan. Dito man sila galling sa’tin, maging sa IBANG MUNDO.
About a world of magic where a country called Liro is being constantly invaded by other kingdoms.
One day the king decide to save his son from danger and told his enri name Jerode to sent Malud, his son to his brother Genror.
A few years later, the small village of Madar where Malud is sent, was attacked by a group of nirans. Genror died in a tragedy so Malud was left alone on his quest to claim the throne.
He then headed to the nearest town named Isondor just above Madar and met an enri named Jaskar, soon Malud became Jaskar\'s master.
The next day, Malud found out about the skolrades in Isondor so they escaped underground in an enchanted carraige.
When they reached Inra, another village, Malud met Fatin, another enri and a human named Gasid. there Malud learned the banned magic called Necromancy. There, he saw the future. But then the village was suddenly attacked by Skolrade so the four of them escaped the village. On their way to the City called Doorm, they met a bunch of dwarf-elves seeking for help and protection.
Malud agreed on helping them cross the river safely.
Isang tahimik at masaganang lahi noon ang mga taong lobo, sila ay nabubuhay ng ayon sa kanilang nakagisnang patakaran. Kadalasang sila ay sinasabing pala kaibigan sa ibang mga uring nilalang at taga bantay ng kalikasan. Tulad din ng ibang lahi, binubuo sila ng pinuno at mga mga mandirigma na namumuhay sa sinaunang paraan na naniniwala sa isang babaylan, Ang taga takda at taga basa ng tadhana ng isang taong lobo.
Sa kabilang banda, Ang lugar ng iba\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t ibang elementona kilala sa tawag na Weaf continent ang paboritong puntahan ni Odesa, isang maganda at makapangyarihang babae ng sinaunang taong lobo. Dito ay nakakaramdam sya ng katahimikan at kasiyahan. Dito rin sya nakakakilala n maraming kaibigan at nakakatagpo ng mga paboritong mga lugar. Ngunit wala sa kanyang kaalaman na sa lugar ng gubat ng Amatos mababago ang kanyang mundo at kasaysayan ng mga lahi.
Matalik na magkaibigan noon sina Victor, na isang bampira na kilala bilang lahing vicar at Draco na prinsipe ng Horonian. Dahil sa kanilang pagkakaibigan kung kaya\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t binuksan ni Draco ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa lupain ng Horonian, ang lugar ng mga nilalang na naiiba dahil sa kanilang sungay at gumagamit ng elementong apoy. Hindi naging hadlang ang kanilang kaibahan upang maging masugid na magkaalyansa. Ngunit tulad ng mga naunang samahan ng magkaibang lahi, mag-uugat at magtatapos ito sa kanilang pagkakaiba.
Sa Gubat ng Amatos kung saan paboritong magsanay at magpalitan ng kaalaman nina Victor at Draco ay di inaasahang makikita at mabibihag ni Odesa ang mga mata ng prinsipe ng Horonian. Sa unang pagkikita ay iibig si Draco sa babaeng lobo at di nya na gugustuhing mawala ito sa kanyang paningin. Ang labis na pagkahumaling ni Draco kay Odesa ay magtutulak sa kanya upang bihagin ito at itago sa kaharian nila. Doon ay aankinin nyang parang pag-aari ang babaylan ng mga taong lobo, at sa kanyang pagmamahal, kasakiman ang iiral.
Ngunit ang kahibangan ni Draco ay labis na tututulan ng kaibigang si Victor. Susubukan nyang kumbinsihin si Draco sa naging desisyong nitong bihagin ang babaeng lobo. Ngunit bigo sya.
Sa madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor sa bihag ni Draco awa at pagmamahal na unti unting magtutulak sa kanya upang tulungan ito. Ang madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor kay Odesa ay ikagagalit ni Draco lalo na\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t napapansin nyang nagkakaroon ito ng pagtingin sa dalaga at mapapatunayan nya pa itong lalo dahil tatangkain ni Victor na itakas ito at ibalik sa kanyang angkan.
Subalit ang pagtatangka ni Victor na patakasin si Odesa ay hindi papahintulutan ng hibang na si Draco kung kaya\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t ipapasarado nya ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian upang di na muli pang makabalik si Victor at maisagawa ang kanyang plano.
Ang agarang pagsasara ng lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian ay matutuklasan ni markus, ang malupit na pinuno ng mga Vicar na ama ni Victor. Kung kaya\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t isusumpa nyang magiging mortal nang kalaban ng kanilang lahi ang mga Horor.
Samantalang, sa mundo ng mga taong lobo ay labis na nagaalala sa pagkawala ng kanilang babaylan ang pinuno ng mga sinaunang Waya, kung kaya\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t aatasan nya si Nemea, ang taong lobong kilala sa kanyang pambihirang bilis at matalas na pang amoy. Na magtungo sa Wingdom (ang lugar s Weaf kung saan matatagpuan ang mga nilalang na may pakpak at gumagamit ng elementong hangin) at doon hanapin si Avestra na isang Harpy na bantay ng kagubatan at namumugad sa Giant Forest, upang tulungan syang hanapin ang kaibigang si Odesa.
Lubhang makapangyarihan ang pag-ibig ng isang nilalang. Kahit ang mga pinuno at nakatatanda sa lahi ng Vicar ay di maawat si Victorna bumalik sa Horonian sa kahit anong paraan upang makuha si Odesa. At sa pagkakataong iyon labis itong ikinatuwa ni Hector, ang sakim na kapatid ni Victor na mataas ang paghahangad sa katungkulan ng ama.Gagamitin nya ang sitwasyon upang maagaw ang atensyon ng amang si markus sa kapatid.
Bilang matalik na kaibigan ni Odesa ay sinuyod ni Avestra at Nemea ang mga lugar sa Weaf at mahanap ang kaibigan. Hndi nagtagal ay natunton nila ang kinarororonan ni Odesa at nalamang nasa kaharian ito ng hibang na si Draco. Sa Galit ng mga taong lobo sa ibinalita ni Nemea ay agad silang nag-isip ng paraan upang mabawi ang kanlang babaylan sa kamay ng mga Horor. Ang mga Taong Lobo na kilala sa kanilang prinsipyo at kabutihan ay magiging malupit sa pagkakataong ito uan bawiin ang isang importanteng nilalang ng kanilang angkan.
Katulad ng mga taong lobo, nagpupuyos din ang damdamin ni Victor na makarating ng lihim sa Horonian at mabawi si Odesa. Doon ay madadatnan nya ang isang hinang hina at halos malagutan na ng hiningang minamahal.Makakaramdam siya ng labis labis na pagsisi na di nya naitakas noon si Odesa sa kasakiman ng dating kaibigan.
At gaya ng kanyang layunin, pinakawalan ni Victor si Odesa sa pagkakagapos at tinulungang makalabas sa madilim na silid ng kaharian, ngunit darating si Draco upang pigilan siyang muli. At sa pagkakatong ito ay maglalaban sila sa kanilang kanya kanyang kagustuhan. Darating naman ang mga Lupon ng Taong Lobo na aatake sa Horonian at sa inaasahan, susupilin nito si Draco. Ngunit sa pag atake ni Orestes kay Draco, mananaig pa rin ang pagkakaibigan sa puso ni Victor at sasalagin ang atakeng dapat sana ay sa hibang na si Draco na madudulot sa kanya ng matinding pinsala at pagkamatay.
Babalik sa gunita ni Draco ang alalaala nila ni Victor at matatauhan ito sa matagal na pagkahibang. Ang labis na galit ay magtutulak kay Draco na tapusin ang mga Taong lobo na naging dahilan ng pagkamatay ng kaibigan. At sa kagustuhan na rin ay patatakasin na lamang niya si Odesa bilang kabayaran sa kanyang kasalanan dito.
Ang digmaan ng 2 angkan ay di inaasahang magbubukas ng mga panibagong alitan sa kanya kanyang mundo. at tanging ang babaeng ugat nito lamang ang magiging susi sa maaring pagkakaayos nito. Maraming alitan ang mabubuo. Ang galit ng mga Taong Lobo sa Horonian na lumapastangan sa kanilang lahi. Ang galit ng mga Vicar sa mga Taong lobo na pumaslang sa anak ng kanilang pinuno at ang galit ng Horonian sa Wingdom dahil sa pagtatatraydor sa kanilang lahi.
Samantalang ang pagmamahalan nina Victor at Odesa ay magbubunga ng isang di pangkaraniwang sanggol. Lalaki ang bata sa puder ng mga taong lobo ngunit hindi nito mapipigil ang dugong Vicar na lumalamon s dugo ng sinaunag Waya sa kanyang katawan. Kung kaya\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\'t kailangan siyang ilayo ng kanyang ina at dalhin sa mundong malayo sa kinagisnan nya at maging masama, ang mundo ng mga tao.
Sa paglaki ni Berga sa mundo ng mga tao, makikilala nya ang isang kagaya nyang uri... ang mga Sangre kung saan may misyon syang pumatay sa sanggol na itinadhana upang maging destroyer at balak gamitin ng tiyuhing si Hector upang maging makapangyarihan sa mga lahing Vicar at iba pang lahing Bampira sa pamamagitan ng pagsipsip sa dugo nito.
Isang tahimik at masaganang lahi noon ang mga taong lobo, sila ay nabubuhay ng ayon sa kanilang nakagisnang patakaran. Kadalasang sila ay sinasabing pala kaibigan sa ibang mga uring nilalang at taga bantay ng kalikasan. Tulad din ng ibang lahi, binubuo sila ng pinuno at mga mga mandirigma na namumuhay sa sinaunang paraan na naniniwala sa isang babaylan, Ang taga takda at taga basa ng tadhana ng isang taong lobo.
Sa kabilang banda, Ang lugar ng iba\\\'t ibang elementona kilala sa tawag na Weaf continent ang paboritong puntahan ni Odesa, isang maganda at makapangyarihang babae ng sinaunang taong lobo. Dito ay nakakaramdam sya ng katahimikan at kasiyahan. Dito rin sya nakakakilala n maraming kaibigan at nakakatagpo ng mga paboritong mga lugar. Ngunit wala sa kanyang kaalaman na sa lugar ng gubat ng Amatos mababago ang kanyang mundo at kasaysayan ng mga lahi.
Matalik na magkaibigan noon sina Victor, na isang bampira na kilala bilang lahing vicar at Draco na prinsipe ng Horonian. Dahil sa kanilang pagkakaibigan kung kaya\\\'t binuksan ni Draco ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa lupain ng Horonian, ang lugar ng mga nilalang na naiiba dahil sa kanilang sungay at gumagamit ng elementong apoy. Hindi naging hadlang ang kanilang kaibahan upang maging masugid na magkaalyansa. Ngunit tulad ng mga naunang samahan ng magkaibang lahi, mag-uugat at magtatapos ito sa kanilang pagkakaiba.
Sa Gubat ng Amatos kung saan paboritong magsanay at magpalitan ng kaalaman nina Victor at Draco ay di inaasahang makikita at mabibihag ni Odesa ang mga mata ng prinsipe ng Horonian. Sa unang pagkikita ay iibig si Draco sa babaeng lobo at di nya na gugustuhing mawala ito sa kanyang paningin. Ang labis na pagkahumaling ni Draco kay Odesa ay magtutulak sa kanya upang bihagin ito at itago sa kaharian nila. Doon ay aankinin nyang parang pag-aari ang babaylan ng mga taong lobo, at sa kanyang pagmamahal, kasakiman ang iiral.
Ngunit ang kahibangan ni Draco ay labis na tututulan ng kaibigang si Victor. Susubukan nyang kumbinsihin si Draco sa naging desisyong nitong bihagin ang babaeng lobo. Ngunit bigo sya.
Sa madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor sa bihag ni Draco awa at pagmamahal na unti unting magtutulak sa kanya upang tulungan ito. Ang madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor kay Odesa ay ikagagalit ni Draco lalo na\\\'t napapansin nyang nagkakaroon ito ng pagtingin sa dalaga at mapapatunayan nya pa itong lalo dahil tatangkain ni Victor na itakas ito at ibalik sa kanyang angkan.
Subalit ang pagtatangka ni Victor na patakasin si Odesa ay hindi papahintulutan ng hibang na si Draco kung kaya\\\'t ipapasarado nya ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian upang di na muli pang makabalik si Victor at maisagawa ang kanyang plano.
Ang agarang pagsasara ng lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian ay matutuklasan ni markus, ang malupit na pinuno ng mga Vicar na ama ni Victor. Kung kaya\\\'t isusumpa nyang magiging mortal nang kalaban ng kanilang lahi ang mga Horor.
Samantalang, sa mundo ng mga taong lobo ay labis na nagaalala sa pagkawala ng kanilang babaylan ang pinuno ng mga sinaunang Waya, kung kaya\\\'t aatasan nya si Nemea, ang taong lobong kilala sa kanyang pambihirang bilis at matalas na pang amoy. Na magtungo sa Wingdom (ang lugar s Weaf kung saan matatagpuan ang mga nilalang na may pakpak at gumagamit ng elementong hangin) at doon hanapin si Avestra na isang Harpy na bantay ng kagubatan at namumugad sa Giant Forest, upang tulungan syang hanapin ang kaibigang si Odesa.
Lubhang makapangyarihan ang pag-ibig ng isang nilalang. Kahit ang mga pinuno at nakatatanda sa lahi ng Vicar ay di maawat si Victorna bumalik sa Horonian sa kahit anong paraan upang makuha si Odesa. At sa pagkakataong iyon labis itong ikinatuwa ni Hector, ang sakim na kapatid ni Victor na mataas ang paghahangad sa katungkulan ng ama.Gagamitin nya ang sitwasyon upang maagaw ang atensyon ng amang si markus sa kapatid.
Bilang matalik na kaibigan ni Odesa ay sinuyod ni Avestra at Nemea ang mga lugar sa Weaf at mahanap ang kaibigan. Hndi nagtagal ay natunton nila ang kinarororonan ni Odesa at nalamang nasa kaharian ito ng hibang na si Draco. Sa Galit ng mga taong lobo sa ibinalita ni Nemea ay agad silang nag-isip ng paraan upang mabawi ang kanlang babaylan sa kamay ng mga Horor. Ang mga Taong Lobo na kilala sa kanilang prinsipyo at kabutihan ay magiging malupit sa pagkakataong ito uan bawiin ang isang importanteng nilalang ng kanilang angkan.
Katulad ng mga taong lobo, nagpupuyos din ang damdamin ni Victor na makarating ng lihim sa Horonian at mabawi si Odesa. Doon ay madadatnan nya ang isang hinang hina at halos malagutan na ng hiningang minamahal.Makakaramdam siya ng labis labis na pagsisi na di nya naitakas noon si Odesa sa kasakiman ng dating kaibigan.
At gaya ng kanyang layunin, pinakawalan ni Victor si Odesa sa pagkakagapos at tinulungang makalabas sa madilim na silid ng kaharian, ngunit darating si Draco upang pigilan siyang muli. At sa pagkakatong ito ay maglalaban sila sa kanilang kanya kanyang kagustuhan. Darating naman ang mga Lupon ng Taong Lobo na aatake sa Horonian at sa inaasahan, susupilin nito si Draco. Ngunit sa pag atake ni Orestes kay Draco, mananaig pa rin ang pagkakaibigan sa puso ni Victor at sasalagin ang atakeng dapat sana ay sa hibang na si Draco na madudulot sa kanya ng matinding pinsala at pagkamatay.
Babalik sa gunita ni Draco ang alalaala nila ni Victor at matatauhan ito sa matagal na pagkahibang. Ang labis na galit ay magtutulak kay Draco na tapusin ang mga Taong lobo na naging dahilan ng pagkamatay ng kaibigan. At sa kagustuhan na rin ay patatakasin na lamang niya si Odesa bilang kabayaran sa kanyang kasalanan dito.
Ang digmaan ng 2 angkan ay di inaasahang magbubukas ng mga panibagong alitan sa kanya kanyang mundo. at tanging ang babaeng ugat nito lamang ang magiging susi sa maaring pagkakaayos nito. Maraming alitan ang mabubuo. Ang galit ng mga Taong Lobo sa Horonian na lumapastangan sa kanilang lahi. Ang galit ng mga Vicar sa mga Taong lobo na pumaslang sa anak ng kanilang pinuno at ang galit ng Horonian sa Wingdom dahil sa pagtatatraydor sa kanilang lahi.
Samantalang ang pagmamahalan nina Victor at Odesa ay magbubunga ng isang di pangkaraniwang sanggol. Lalaki ang bata sa puder ng mga taong lobo ngunit hindi nito mapipigil ang dugong Vicar na lumalamon s dugo ng sinaunag Waya sa kanyang katawan. Kung kaya\\\'t kailangan siyang ilayo ng kanyang ina at dalhin sa mundong malayo sa kinagisnan nya at maging masama, ang mundo ng mga tao.
Sa paglaki ni Berga sa mundo ng mga tao, makikilala nya ang isang kagaya nyang uri... ang mga Sangre kung saan may misyon syang pumatay sa sanggol na itinadhana upang maging destroyer at balak gamitin ng tiyuhing si Hector upang maging makapangyarihan sa mga lahing Vicar at iba pang lahing Bampira sa pamamagitan ng pagsipsip sa dugo nito.
Isang tahimik at masaganang lahi noon ang mga taong lobo, sila ay nabubuhay ng ayon sa kanilang nakagisnang patakaran. Kadalasang sila ay sinasabing pala kaibigan sa ibang mga uring nilalang at taga bantay ng kalikasan. Tulad din ng ibang lahi, binubuo sila ng pinuno at mga mga mandirigma na namumuhay sa sinaunang paraan na naniniwala sa isang babaylan, Ang taga takda at taga basa ng tadhana ng isang taong lobo.
Sa kabilang banda, Ang lugar ng iba\\\'t ibang elementona kilala sa tawag na Weaf continent ang paboritong puntahan ni Odesa, isang maganda at makapangyarihang babae ng sinaunang taong lobo. Dito ay nakakaramdam sya ng katahimikan at kasiyahan. Dito rin sya nakakakilala n maraming kaibigan at nakakatagpo ng mga paboritong mga lugar. Ngunit wala sa kanyang kaalaman na sa lugar ng gubat ng Amatos mababago ang kanyang mundo at kasaysayan ng mga lahi.
Matalik na magkaibigan noon sina Victor, na isang bampira na kilala bilang lahing vicar at Draco na prinsipe ng Horonian. Dahil sa kanilang pagkakaibigan kung kaya\\\'t binuksan ni Draco ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa lupain ng Horonian, ang lugar ng mga nilalang na naiiba dahil sa kanilang sungay at gumagamit ng elementong apoy. Hindi naging hadlang ang kanilang kaibahan upang maging masugid na magkaalyansa. Ngunit tulad ng mga naunang samahan ng magkaibang lahi, mag-uugat at magtatapos ito sa kanilang pagkakaiba.
Sa Gubat ng Amatos kung saan paboritong magsanay at magpalitan ng kaalaman nina Victor at Draco ay di inaasahang makikita at mabibihag ni Odesa ang mga mata ng prinsipe ng Horonian. Sa unang pagkikita ay iibig si Draco sa babaeng lobo at di nya na gugustuhing mawala ito sa kanyang paningin. Ang labis na pagkahumaling ni Draco kay Odesa ay magtutulak sa kanya upang bihagin ito at itago sa kaharian nila. Doon ay aankinin nyang parang pag-aari ang babaylan ng mga taong lobo, at sa kanyang pagmamahal, kasakiman ang iiral.
Ngunit ang kahibangan ni Draco ay labis na tututulan ng kaibigang si Victor. Susubukan nyang kumbinsihin si Draco sa naging desisyong nitong bihagin ang babaeng lobo. Ngunit bigo sya.
Sa madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor sa bihag ni Draco awa at pagmamahal na unti unting magtutulak sa kanya upang tulungan ito. Ang madalas na pagdalaw ni Victor kay Odesa ay ikagagalit ni Draco lalo na\\\'t napapansin nyang nagkakaroon ito ng pagtingin sa dalaga at mapapatunayan nya pa itong lalo dahil tatangkain ni Victor na itakas ito at ibalik sa kanyang angkan.
Subalit ang pagtatangka ni Victor na patakasin si Odesa ay hindi papahintulutan ng hibang na si Draco kung kaya\\\'t ipapasarado nya ang lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian upang di na muli pang makabalik si Victor at maisagawa ang kanyang plano.
Ang agarang pagsasara ng lihim na lagusan ng mga Vicar sa kaharian ng Horonian ay matutuklasan ni markus, ang malupit na pinuno ng mga Vicar na ama ni Victor. Kung kaya\\\'t isusumpa nyang magiging mortal nang kalaban ng kanilang lahi ang mga Horor.
Samantalang, sa mundo ng mga taong lobo ay labis na nagaalala sa pagkawala ng kanilang babaylan ang pinuno ng mga sinaunang Waya, kung kaya\\\'t aatasan nya si Nemea, ang taong lobong kilala sa kanyang pambihirang bilis at matalas na pang amoy. Na magtungo sa Wingdom (ang lugar s Weaf kung saan matatagpuan ang mga nilalang na may pakpak at gumagamit ng elementong hangin) at doon hanapin si Avestra na isang Harpy na bantay ng kagubatan at namumugad sa Giant Forest, upang tulungan syang hanapin ang kaibigang si Odesa.
Lubhang makapangyarihan ang pag-ibig ng isang nilalang. Kahit ang mga pinuno at nakatatanda sa lahi ng Vicar ay di maawat si Victorna bumalik sa Horonian sa kahit anong paraan upang makuha si Odesa. At sa pagkakataong iyon labis itong ikinatuwa ni Hector, ang sakim na kapatid ni Victor na mataas ang paghahangad sa katungkulan ng ama.Gagamitin nya ang sitwasyon upang maagaw ang atensyon ng amang si markus sa kapatid.
Bilang matalik na kaibigan ni Odesa ay sinuyod ni Avestra at Nemea ang mga lugar sa Weaf at mahanap ang kaibigan. Hndi nagtagal ay natunton nila ang kinarororonan ni Odesa at nalamang nasa kaharian ito ng hibang na si Draco. Sa Galit ng mga taong lobo sa ibinalita ni Nemea ay agad silang nag-isip ng paraan upang mabawi ang kanlang babaylan sa kamay ng mga Horor. Ang mga Taong Lobo na kilala sa kanilang prinsipyo at kabutihan ay magiging malupit sa pagkakataong ito uan bawiin ang isang importanteng nilalang ng kanilang angkan.
Katulad ng mga taong lobo, nagpupuyos din ang damdamin ni Victor na makarating ng lihim sa Horonian at mabawi si Odesa. Doon ay madadatnan nya ang isang hinang hina at halos malagutan na ng hiningang minamahal.Makakaramdam siya ng labis labis na pagsisi na di nya naitakas noon si Odesa sa kasakiman ng dating kaibigan.
At gaya ng kanyang layunin, pinakawalan ni Victor si Odesa sa pagkakagapos at tinulungang makalabas sa madilim na silid ng kaharian, ngunit darating si Draco upang pigilan siyang muli. At sa pagkakatong ito ay maglalaban sila sa kanilang kanya kanyang kagustuhan. Darating naman ang mga Lupon ng Taong Lobo na aatake sa Horonian at sa inaasahan, susupilin nito si Draco. Ngunit sa pag atake ni Orestes kay Draco, mananaig pa rin ang pagkakaibigan sa puso ni Victor at sasalagin ang atakeng dapat sana ay sa hibang na si Draco na madudulot sa kanya ng matinding pinsala at pagkamatay.
Babalik sa gunita ni Draco ang alalaala nila ni Victor at matatauhan ito sa matagal na pagkahibang. Ang labis na galit ay magtutulak kay Draco na tapusin ang mga Taong lobo na naging dahilan ng pagkamatay ng kaibigan. At sa kagustuhan na rin ay patatakasin na lamang niya si Odesa bilang kabayaran sa kanyang kasalanan dito.
Ang digmaan ng 2 angkan ay di inaasahang magbubukas ng mga panibagong alitan sa kanya kanyang mundo. at tanging ang babaeng ugat nito lamang ang magiging susi sa maaring pagkakaayos nito. Maraming alitan ang mabubuo. Ang galit ng mga Taong Lobo sa Horonian na lumapastangan sa kanilang lahi. Ang galit ng mga Vicar sa mga Taong lobo na pumaslang sa anak ng kanilang pinuno at ang galit ng Horonian sa Wingdom dahil sa pagtatatraydor sa kanilang lahi.
Samantalang ang pagmamahalan nina Victor at Odesa ay magbubunga ng isang di pangkaraniwang sanggol. Lalaki ang bata sa puder ng mga taong lobo ngunit hindi nito mapipigil ang dugong Vicar na lumalamon s dugo ng sinaunag Waya sa kanyang katawan. Kung kaya\\\'t kailangan siyang ilayo ng kanyang ina at dalhin sa mundong malayo sa kinagisnan nya at maging masama, ang mundo ng mga tao.
Sa paglaki ni Berga sa mundo ng mga tao, makikilala nya ang isang kagaya nyang uri... ang mga Sangre kung saan may misyon syang pumatay sa sanggol na itinadhana upang maging destroyer at balak gamitin ng tiyuhing si Hector upang maging makapangyarihan sa mga lahing Vicar at iba pang lahing Bampira sa pamamagitan ng pagsipsip sa dugo nito.
Vampire Princess Part 1
Introduction to characters:
“The people at the Estella Mansion”
Sofia – She is a mysterious girl who transferred at Eureka School of music. She is also indifferent to other people around her and doesn’t care so much.
Physical appearance:
Height- 5 ft. flat
Hair- Long, black wavy hair
Eyes- Brown
Other details:
Age- 15 years old (maybe?)
Momoko – She is the housemaid at Sofia’s mansion. She calls Sofia, “Senorita Sofia” maybe because she likes it.
Physical Appearance:
Height: 5”6
Hair: Long black hair ponytailed
Eyes: Pure Black
Other details:
Interests: Household chores such as cleaning the portrait
Mr. Noda- He is Sofia’s chauffeur or should we say driver and guardian.
Physical Appearance:
Height: 5”7
Hair: Gray and short (normal old man cut)
Eyes: Black
Other details:
Age- 60 years old (maybe?)
Prologue
Time: Victorian Era, year 1840
Setting: A marketplace at England
It was raining heavily and there was a girl walking wearing a black gothic dress crying. Her tears combined with the rain falling from the sky. Then, she passed by a fortune teller. The fortune teller called her while looking at her crystal ball and said, “Wait, young lady”. She then stopped and looked back at the fortune teller. The fortune teller said, “I can see enormous sadness within you, your heart is blocked by many clouds which is not easy to defeat… but there will be a girl who will slash through your dark clouds and make a way to your heart…hmm…she must be your best friend”. “You know…my best friend just died”, she said looking fiercely at the fortune teller. Her brown eyes became darker. “Well, I’m sorry for my wrong guess…” the fortune teller said and she continued with her reading of the crystal ball and she continued saying “Oh my…she will slash your heart! She will kill you! You must be careful!” “Stop!” the girl said and then the rain started to stop and the sunshine lights up the place again. As she turned around away from the fortune teller her skin seems to be glitter while the sun was shining into it. The fortune teller cannot believe what she saw and she tried to blink many times to be sure she is seeing the real thing but when she look again the girl already disappeared.
Chapter 1 – Destined Encounter
Time: June 6, 2026 according to a calendar
Setting: A bedroom
A girl is sleeping in a large bed and then there’s someone who knocked at the door three times and opens the door .The woman wearing a black maid’s dress walks toward the girl and rings the bell near her ears. “Wake up senorita Sofia” she said. Senorita Sofia wake up and notices the calendar posted on the wall. “MOMOKO!” Senorita Sofia shouted at the woman and look at her angrily. “I know you hate calendars senorita and I’m sorry for that but you can’t change the fact that time goes by and it’s already your first day at school” Momoko said. “That’s not the case!” Senorita Sofia said and she get up from the bed and walks toward the door. “When I go back I don’t want to see that “thing” in here” Senorita Sofia said and left. “My, my, such a spoiled little princess” Momoko said after she left.
Time: morning, maybe 7 o’ clock a.m.
Setting: Eureka School of Music
The students are hurrying their way into class. And a girl wearing her black hair in a ponytail is running when she suddenly tripped. “Ouch!” she said. “You’re so clumsy” a voice of a boy said. She gets up and looked at the boy. “Ethan you’re so bad!” she said. “Well it’s not my fault” Ethan said. Then a black car suddenly parks in front of the school gate. An old man about 60 years of age gets out of the car and opens the door at the passenger’s seat. A girl wearing a black dress gets out of the car. The students start to crowd curious who the new girl is. “Let’s go Miho” Ethan said and went to the crowd. A little girl holding a red rose walks towards the new girl which is Senorita Sofia and she gave the rose saying “You looked like my ideal Snow White!” Senorita Sofia smiled and took the rose but then it suddenly withers. The little girl started to cry. “Don’t cry, look” Senorita Sofia said and she secretly bits her finger and let the blood drop into the rose and the rose suddenly blooms. “Wow! It’s magic!” the little girl said. “Here, it’s yours again” Senorita Sofia said and gives the rose to the little girl. “Thanks!” the little girl said and ran away. The crowd starts to chatter and Senorita Sofia just ignores them and continues walking and passes by Miho and Ethan. Miho’s face suddenly turned pale when she saw Senorita Sofia’s back. “Wait!” she said. Senorita Sofia turns around and looks at Miho. “C-Can you be my friend?” Miho asked. “No” Senorita Sofia said and walk away. “Not so friendly is she?” Ethan said teasingly at Miho. He added “Can’t you just introduce yourself first?” “Well I’ll do remember that next time” Miho said angrily and walks away. “Why is she mad? I just gave her an advice but… that girl looks familiar… I wonder where I should have seen her…” Ethan said.
Time: maybe 10 o’ clock a.m. currently break time
Setting: Classroom of Class Sonata
The students start to leave the room and go to the cafeteria. But Senorita Sofia is still sitting in her chair silently. Miho walk toward her and greeted “Hello! Remember me?”Senorita Sofia just looks at her with a blank expression. “Hey, you said you would introduce yourself first! How can she remember you she even doesn’t know your name?” Ethan said watching from his seat. “Eavesdropper!” Miho said at him. “Wait there is no “eavesdropper in the dictionary”!” Ethan shouted even if the one he’s talking to is only 5 steps away since his seat is near Senorita Sofia’s seat. Senorita Sofia suddenly stands up and glared at the two of them. “Sorry my bad, I’m Miho by the way” Miho said and forms her hand for a handshake. Senorita Sofia just looks at her hand and looks at her face. “Oh you’re from England so you must not know what a hand shake is.” Miho said. “England people are not idiots!” Ethan said to Miho. Without the two of them noticing Sofia has already left the room. “Where is she?” Miho looks around the room. “She’s as swift as the wind” Ethan said. “It can’t be…she must not be…” Miho said trembling. “What? You think she’s a vampire?” Ethan said. “No, I must change my fate, I know she’s a good girl” Miho said a quickly leaves the room.
Time: unknown but it’s still daytime, maybe 11 o’ clock
Setting: Inside an old mansion
The old man which is the driver earlier is sitting in a sofa drinking tea while Momoko is cleaning a portrait of which the girl in it looks like Senorita Sofia. “I hope she will trust humans again” The old man said. “Certainly, she will” Momoko said. “How can you be so sure?” asked the old man. “I just know” replied Momoko. “Well then, I hope you’re right” the old man said”. “I know” Momoko said and she stopped cleaning the portrait and walk towards the old man. “And I’m always sure” she added.
Time: same day, 5 o’ clock (class dismissal)
Setting: Classroom *sound: bell ringing*
“Yes! I can now go to the new donut shop near the train station! Miho, come with me!” A girl with short straight hair and a circle clip in it said while stretching her arms. “Ok Cherry, but I want Sofia to come with us too” Miho said and looks at Sofia. “Why do you know my name?” Sofia asks. “You did introduce yourself earlier” a boy with black hair wearing glasses and a dark blue vest over his uniform said. “Well then, let’s all go and walk to the train station, you too Irvin” Cherry said and steps on his foot. “Ouch! Why did you do that?” Irvin asks while his face in pain. “But, Sofia has a chauffeur remember, the black car with Mr. Noda as the driver?” Ethan said. “How did you know Mr. Noda?” Sofia asks. “Um…well it’s a long story…” Ethan said. “If it’s a long story then let’s all go to the donut shop!” Cherry said and she pushes Miho and Sofia to the door. “Wait!” Miho said. “What’s the problem?” Cherry asks. “Sofia hasn’t agreed yet” Miho said. Then they all heard a loud thump coming from a desk. “Sofia will not come” A boy with blond hair and blue eyes said. “What’s wrong Terrence?” Cherry asks. Sofia looks at Terrence and sees his worried face. “I’ll come if Terrence comes” Sofia looks at Terrence with a trusting look. “Wait, do you know each other?” Ethan asks. “She’s my…” Terrence said. “Cousin” Sofia said and looks at Terrence again with a “Let’s go look”. “Okay, I’ll go” Terrence said. “Wow! Terrence will come too!” Cherry said excitedly. “What are we waiting for?” Irvin said with a sigh. “Kill Joy” Cherry said and they all laughed.
End?
The answer is no...please look forward to the next chapters ^_^
Sa Mundong ito hindi lang ordinaryong tao ang nabubuhay sa mundo, may mga taong kung titignan mo ay tila ordinaryo lamang at tila walang espisyal sa mga taong yun. Ngunit lingit sa ating kaalaman may mga taong kung iyong titignan ay tila ordinaryo lamang ngunit ito palay may espisyal na mga kakayahan o katangian. At sila lang din ang nakakaalam sa mga tunay na nangyayari sa dalwang mundo, ang mundo ng mga tao, at ang mundo ng mga elemento na pangkaraniwang hindi nakikita ng mga ordinaryong tao.
Si Elen isang probensyana at 18 anyos, kung siya’y titignan tila walang espisyal sa kanya, ngunit lingit sa kaalaman ng mga tao si Elen ay may kakayahang makakita at makausap ang isang elementong na hindi nagagawa ng isang ordinaryong tao.
Bata palang si Elen nung panahong unti-unti n’yang na pag-alaman na mero siyang ganung kakayahan. Nag simula yun nung siya’y laging nag-iisa at laging pumupunta sa isang malaking Puno at doon n’ya rin unang nakita at nakilala ang isang kaibigan na pagka-akala niya ay isang tao din tulad n’ya, ngunit dumating din ang panahon kinakailangan ng sabihin ng kaibigan ni elen ang katutuhanan sa kanya, na siya ay espisyal at may kakayanang makipag-usap sa katulad nilang hindi tao.
Hangang nagdalaga nalang si Elen ay kasa-kasama parin nito ang kanyang kaibigab at itoy nadagdagan pa ng maraming mga kaibigan. Nung si Elen ay nag edad na ng 18 anyos ito ay nag karoon nang obligasyon na siya lamang ang nakakaalam at ang kanyan mga kaibigan. At isa lamang sa mga obligasyon ni Elen ay ang pagtawid sa mundo ng tao patungo sa mundo ng mga elemento.
I was walking in the dark forest. I saw this place a hundred times. And I kept on coming back here. I saw this big abandoned palace again and again but I never went inside it. I saw palace\'s pathway through its entrance. The pathway got a lot of lined-up torches ablazed with fire. I started walking until I reached the gate, it suddenly swung open. I was astonished. And a voice came to me. It was a woman calling my name in such sweet soft voice.
\"Aaron...\" she called.
\"Yes?\" I responded.
\"Come...\" she said again.
\"Where?\" I asked her.
\"Come... Come...\"
I don\'t know where to go so I just followed to where the voice was coming from. As I was roaming in the old palace I came to a conclusion that this palace was like the palace of the vampires like the movies I used to watch. There were a lot of bats. I was afraid, I had goosebumps but I still continued walking.
\"Come...\" she called again.
I followed her voice, and it led me to a dungeon. I searched for that woman who was calling me and something suddenly slipped on my mind. How could she knew my name? Who is she? Where is she now? A lot of question came flooding in my mind but still I wanted to find her.
\"Aaron... Come... The door is red...\" she said to me.
\'The door is red...\', did she meant...? I hurriedly searched for the red door and atlast! I\'ve found it. But wait, someone was lying on the table. A lady with long black hair. I opened the door and she called me again.
\"Aaron... Is that you?\" she asked.
\"Yes. It\'s me. Who are you? How did you know my name? Who did this to you?\" I asked her, but I couldn\'t see her face clearly.
I stood near the door. She has chains around her waist and she was tied in the table. I wanted to get her out of there. I squeezed my eyes shut and opened them again and she was gone. She suddenly appeared beside me and whispered...
\"Aaron...\" in a hissing voice.
She sounded like a snake. I looked at her and I saw her fangs. I awoke and opened my eyes and sitted on my bed. I remembered my dream. I saw a lady with two fangs. Very sharp fangs. I feel like I could die if she would bite me and thank goodness it was only a dream. I felt a sudden flurry. I looked at my windows but it was closed as well as my door. I had goosebumps again. I walked into my window and looked below. I saw a woman with long hair, I suddenly remembered that I saw her before. The dream! She was the lady with two sharp fangs! I paced two steps and I felt someone behind me. I slowly looked at that person and suddenly the lady with fangs was behind me. I walked in my window again and she was gone. I saw the lady\'s hands on my neck and she started biting me. I felt like the nails were going inside my neck. It was an excruciating pain. She dropped me and I heard her laughing and I lost my conciousness.
It was Chris\' first day of class in College. He saw this girl. Jane. Ordinary girl, no make up, middle class, nothing extraordinary about her. But there was this shimmering aura and it\'s somehow destiny that somehow he will be with her. Chris never thought that she would befriend him \'coz of his looks. She was his first crush in that school. They became friends. Eat out, night out, malling. What friends usually do. It was the last day of the semester after their finals, they planned to go swimming. That was when he realized, that he have fallen for her...
During the summer, Chris left the campus and drove his Classic Ford Mustang across the country. He was driving on a highway passing through an endless desert on his way to a vacation he’ll never ever forget.
Thoughts and fantasies are engaging in Chris’ mind on how to get an impression on this girl. Thoughts such as imagining him and her walking on a shore and stuff. The though of just looking through her beautiful eyes and the way she laughs.
Upon wondering, thinking and fantasizing, time passed by so fast that he didn’t realize where he was. Did he missed an exit or over shot his destination or something?
\" Where the hell am I?\" he said.
All he see was desert. Sand without the beach. As he looked at his watch, he reads 11:30pm. ‘ What the heck was I thinking !\" he realized.
\" That Jane was really something.\"
\"She makes time fly away\" he said to himself.
Though troubled with the time, there’s still a figment of thought of his fantasy with Jane. Not realizing that it was almost midnight on a desert highway. The temperature was awesomely cold. The heater of his car was not enough. He can still feel the coldness of the desert. He was wondering if there’s a place to stay in the middle of the highway.
As the exit approaches, he took it with no delay. Little did he know that there will be an event of inevitability waiting to happen. An unlikely event subsequently unpredictable that it cannot
be apparently predetermined. Chris didn’t know which exit he took. He just took the turn and run off. Evidently, he wasn’t aware of the fact that he’s nowhere! He felt too weak to think. His body was yielding. He desperately seeks a place to stay for the night. The once fruitful thoughts and fantasies in his mind was losing interest in fantasizing. All of his concentration was to rest immediately.
\" There’s gotta be some motels along this highway !\" he angrily said.
Anxieties, tiredness and fear. Mixed emotions is what Chris is experiencing at this point in time. He wanted to get some rest. He is so tired of driving all day.
Garou Road. That’s what the sign says. The nearest town would be 26 Miles.
\"Thank God. At last a time to rest. \" he happily said.
Suddenly, he saw a glimpse of a figure as he passes by the cemetery in the middle of nowhere. It seemed to look like an awesome height of a man. The man was staring at him. But that was all a wisp. It happened for a few seconds. Chris was still doubting on what he just saw.
\"Maybe it’s my imagination.\" he said
\"I’m too tired to be imagining things. Looks like he wanted something from me.\" he just laughed it out.
Coming out of the blue, an animal just came out of nowhere and hit the car. He side-swiped the poor thing and he just felt his balls went up to his throat. Stopped for a moment, just trying to swallow his balls back where it belongs. He looked out the road and saw nothing. He could’ve swore he hit something. All he remembers was it was running on 4 legs. He just looked nothing and nobody seems to be around. So he stepped the pedal to the metal and roared his car until he hit a 100 miles an hour.
As he was speeding through the highway he looked back at the rear view mirror and to his surprised he saw a man but he was too far to stop. His mind went blank and he was reflecting that what if the guy saw what he did? Knowing that he obviously broke the State Law in driving through the highway.
\"What that guy saw what I did ? \" he sounded worried.
\" Damn that animal !! Came out of nowhere !! Now I’m in trouble !!\" he shouted to himself.
\"Well, I’ll just have to deal with it when it comes into play. I’ll just explain it the way it just happened.\"
Chris just told himself to calm down.
He was just worried the whole trip. He was expecting a highway officer to pull him over . After the long trip, he arrived at a local motel. He was surprised that he didn’t see any cops around the place. He talked to the manager and told him that he will just be spending the night. The manager was strange looking. always smiling with an unlikely attitude coz he went to a lot of road trip and strangely, he never experienced that the manager would greet him in such a pleasant creepy manner.
As he lay in bed, he wonders how Jane is. A calm, likeable, stunning smile of a girl. All the perfect physical aspect is all he sees in her. She was not even a supermodel. But Chris stills sees the other side of Jane. Although she doesn’t know him well, Chris still sees the perfect side of her. She was the one. She was the Right One.
In the middle of his wandering thoughts of Jane, he heard a howl nearby.
\" Aaaaaawwwwwooooooo…\"
\" What the hell was that!\" Chris curiously said.
\" Aaaaawwwwwwooooo…..\"
\"What the hell was that!\" he utterly said.
Chris was so curious, he looked out the window. Scared as a stiff coz he obviously watches too many horror movies. But this is not a movie. It’s real life. There’s no vampires or werewolves nor ghosts. Or is there?
Chris looked around the surroundings. It’s midnight. Nobody was around. Little did he know that there was a silhouette in the dark shadows of the night. Somebody who was staring at him the moment the man saw him. The man was the one lurking in the cemetery he passed by the highway. He was also the man Chris saw in the rear view mirror of his car. The man stalked him the moment he saw Chris.
But what could the man saw in Chris? Why he kept on stalking him? Nobody knows… Yet.
He closed his eyes and fell asleep. As he was sleeping, a dark sillouhette showed up at his window. Lurking, staring, observing. The sound he heard came from that certain shadow. A shadow of a man. A big man maybe a towering height of 6’5’’. Bulky ripped muscles, and hairy. The man just stared at Chris while he was sleeping. Totally unaware that there was someone at his window staring.
Chris was waken by a sudden clamor. He heard a growling sound just outside the
door. A rumbling hostile sound that was just an earshot away. He got up and checked the ruckus that was happening. Little did he know that the man standing by his window, the one staring at him while he was sleeping, was the same one who makes these outcry. And little did he know that the man was undergoing a metamorphosis that seemed very painful.
The man was growling and howling in pain as he go through that experience. He looked at his hands and fingernails as they were changing. Carpals, metacarpals, fingers all elongated. His nails longer changing from nails to somewhat claws. His teeth started to change as well. All his teeth just elongated changing from normal humans teeth into pure canines. He felt his lower torso was also lengthened from the femur to the metatarsals. His knees hyper extended more like an anatomy of a wolf. The man was turning into a half man half wolf. His shoulders went broader. His lungs expanded the normal capacity his vocal cords completely gone. His eyes were yellow. Ears were pointed. His whole face expanded into a snout of a dog. Not just any dog, a wolf !!! A werewolf !!
Chris saw all these changes as he looked out his window. He knows that he would have to deal with these creature. The large werewolf was banging at his door. He knew he had to do something to kill this animal by any means necessary. The werewolf destroyed the door and as Chris and the creature were at face to face.
The dark being stared at Chris, sniffing his scent and it knew what it wanted from him. As it attacks Chris. He got hold of the creatures mouth and punched it right on the snout. But it had no effect on it. He fights for his life as he throws anything that he gets a hold on to. Until he go hold of his luggage he threw the whole thing but the werewolf just blocked it open. As his stuff hurled to the ground. He immediately saw the short sword he bought from a local Japanese bazaar and the shot gun. He tumbled acrobatically to grab the gun He cocked the gun and pointed. Pulled the trigger.
\" Damn, No shells!!\"
He played with creature until he grabbed the blade. At last he has it in his hands! The werewolf turned at in awe. For a minute, Chris realized that this creature was not entirely just a beast. He doubts that this monster even has the intellect of a human. He was curious to discover what it wants from him. Chris asks bravely what it wanted while pointing the blade at the creature. But it only answered him growls and a steady yellow eyes. He doesn’t think. It wanted to kill him. If he only knew what it wanted from him. Or he could be wrong, maybe he would be another meal to the beast. One thing’s for sure… He must kill the monster… Whatever it takes.
As he held on with the blade, he knows where to pierce and slash it. With the steady yellow eyes at it’s target, the beast makes it’s attack on Chris. The monster slashed his face. Chris attacked as well with all his might. He held his blade as if it was an extension of his limbs. He fought back with a slash on the monster\'s face. The pierce on his on the monster\'s skin made it more ferocious. It felt pain. And that was Chris\' after.
As Chris attacked, the monster got a chance to bite him on his neck. With that split of a second, reflex took advantage and sliced the monster\'s neck. He did it ! The beast was bathing in it\'s own blood ! But to his dismay, he received a massive injury to his arms and chest. Scratches, Bruises and bitten by the creature.
Loosing blood fast. There are two ways to stop the drench. Fire and Time.
\" I don’t have time.\" He grabbed 2 shells from his luggage, cut it open to get the gunpowder. He poured the gunpowder to his chest, arms and neck…. And lit the whole thing. Scream and pain hurls around the room. Chris fell down. He fainted. The pain..... There was so much pain. He blacked out. The good thing, the blood was stopped. He saved his own life for the price of the Burns and scars. If you look at him, it was horrible. No Plastic surgery can ever repair the damages from his body. Yet, He was saved.
Morning came, no one was there at the sight. No police, No ambulance. No medics. Nobody was there. As if no one knew what happened. The place was at total silence. No bus, no cars, nothing.
@
Chris was all alone, he was left to die. Not even the motel manager or owner nor tenants was even there at the sight. In fact, nobody was there. It was like your in the Twilight Zone. He got up try to find his Cell. His phone was broken from the incident. He looked for the around for the creature. No one was there, No body, no corpse. No evidence. He looked around, saw his things on the floor. Everywhere on the floor. He still has his blade. The thing that saved him from the monster. Chris knew from that moment that he will cherish the blade for as long as he lives. He will carry it wherever he will go. As for the gun, The next time he might buy an uzi. This time it should be loaded. \" I’d better be prepared at all times\" Chris thought. Although he was being paranoid, he should be. After what happened.
To be Continued.....
@
I saw her, the little child inside this mirror, I swear but no one believed me. Her face so delicate, her intentions were evil but not as evil as her damned parents, she is innocent as a child, and she never knew what is like to have a vampire father and a werewolf mother.
I am MARIA, 16 years old and love to mingle with my other friends in this old house which I vividly remember my mother told me about that they were good family friends that when I am with them no one will harm me. I am in a monastery ruled by monks and their gods. Every morning I could hear the gong screaming in my ears telling me to wake up my sleepy head. One time I felt dizzy by their chants and praises, their Guru carry me inside his dark room. I feel asleep and don’t know what happen next.
I woke up I am in this dark room, not really that dark because of that slit flaming red light shone from the corner, my eyes aches and I don’t know why. I looked away from it for a moment but my innocence is killing me, the pain, the urge to find out that flicker of light is hiding from me. I walk slowly, very slowly towards it; it seems to have a life, I move back but I want to move near it, I need to know, my mind is telling me to go that my eyes will be more satisfied with what I am about to see. When I am a foot near the thing, I touched it, the velvet clothe in crimson red run through my fingers and exposing a mirror. I saw round mirrors around the corner in the monastery but I have never seen this exceptional mirror in my whole life yet it is so familiar to me it seems that I have seen this in one of my dreams when I was a child in a different house. Maybe it was just my imagination, or maybe it is not! I run my palm to the frame of the rectangular mirror, from above it I can sense a fang, but in the monastery? Why would they keep a mirror with a fang? Maybe it was just a wolf’s fang and as I reached the left frame it was full of an art which I imagined to be a human body in any forms, I touched the lower frame and it says, MARIA. I withdraw my palms from it. Why it has fangs? Why is my name on it? Why? I never tried to explore more about the mirror because I have doubts dancing and screaming in my mind needed an answer, right away, right then. And I fainted, again!
The next day, my friend Ezekiel took me out from the dark room the Guru put me in. Ezekiel asked me what that thing is in the inner corner of the room was. I told him, it was just a mirror. But in my mind thoughts argue, just a mirror or a mirror for you to know the truth? What truth is my mind saying? Why is there other truth than that my mother told me that I should be here, in the monastery because I am safe here but safe from what thing or what situation? Ezekiel wake me up from the arguments I have in my mind, he asked me what I am thinking about when all he wanted to know is what that thing in the corner. I told him again it is just a mirror, which I thought I told him before I was blocked out with the arguments coming up into my mind. And he just gives me a nod, an empty nod, or maybe there is something he knows that I don’t.
MONASTERY, little things I remember about my mother, I was just five years old when she left me there, I have no female playmates there, I never had even if back home only my mother was my sole friend, my playmate and my everything, I barely saw my father but when he comes home, he also play with me, call me by my name and I saw him sharing whispers with my mother and they giggle and I giggle too, but don’t know what they are talking about. They took care of me, thinking I was fragile. One full moon came, my father left us and my mother hushed me to sleep and when the morning came, she took me to this big home, it looks like a palace or something full of bald men, I heard my mother say to the big bald man to take care of me, to treat me as one of his children, I thought he got more playmates for me, I tried looking around but there is no one, except that teenage boy who kept on smiling and waving at me a wooden toy to play. The last words I heard my mother told me were, I love you MARIA, and we will see you again soon! I cried a river but she never hears me, she ignores me, until she vanished, as if she is being swallowed by the fog in that mountainous area which the big palace was standing.
GURU, he took me with my wooden toy to a dark room, which he forbids the other men to enter, he told me that this room was built by my father when he came in that place and closes the room. When we are out he told that teenage boy to call Haggai. The boy run as fast as he could since the area he has to run is very far, I thought. The Guru told me not to cry when my hair will be just like them, bald at top and braided hair at tip, I never agreed at first, I was still sobbing with the thought that my mother left me and she vanished, she was eaten by the fog and will never be there soon. Then Haggai came with a razor sharp blade, it looks like a sharp knife to me that my mother won’t allow me to touch back at home, and I wept. The teenage boy gave me a wooden toy, it looks like a teddy bear I have back home, and I sobbed. But the silly smile of the teenage boy while he was clapping his hand made me smile a little, and when he covered his eyes and does a peek-a-boo moment, I remember my father and giggled. When they think I am not going to be mad at all, Haggai started to shaved my top hair, leaving a tip to be braided, they showed me a round mirror and looked at myself, I was one of them, and it felt that I belong and giggled. I saw the Guru, Haggai and that teenage boy giggled as well and they laugh and I laughed as well, with my childish laugh the teenage boy can’t help himself to laugh more. Until the Guru said that they should come inside and meditate. As a child, I saw them hum and hush and hum. I was innocent then fragile as my mother would care for me, Haggai carried me to his back and he lays my back to this clay bed covered with brown clothes and hushed me to sleep with my wooden toy.
I am reminiscing the time, the moment back when I was four but all I can remember are the times in my playroom with my mother, and in our yard with my father. I can’t remember anything to plant doubt of who am I, who my mother was or my father or what they really are, with the fangs I touched in the mirror’s frame and the name, my name on it. Even though a little bit disturbed of that mirror, I give out a sigh, a long tiring sigh and rest my back in the wooden chair Haggai made. I have my own room, as I am different to the others here, as the Guru emphasizes, I am female and they are all males, but because I am special and he knows my mother and my father that long enough and that this place was given by my ancestors to him they accepted me to be one of them. Haggai, my personal trainer, my educator, told me that he learned things from the outside of the monastery about females, since they are all males he had to seek information how to raise a female child. Haggai, taught me to eat and drink like them, meditate like them but bathe alone in my own bath room, and get dressed in my own room. When I was a child, Haggai taught me to bathe with dress on and when I get older he told me to wash in my own bathe room. One day I screamed out loud and think that the monastery was shocked but not the Guru because he might expect that it will happen. Haggai, came rushing to my room, knocked loud and asked if what is wrong. Although shy, I told Haggai, as he was like a father and a mother to me, that I saw blood in the floor of my bathe room. Haggai went off the kitchen and from there he came with a white clothe, he instructed me what to do with the thing and when each time there is still blood I would do the same thing, Haggai told me I am no longer a child, and that I have blossomed to be a lady, a perfect bud turns out to be a rose. And that teenage boy, I known to be Ezekiel, laughed while hearing Haggai telling me about being a lady, he teased me as a lady bald with long braided tip, and laugh again and again. That was when I was thirteen.
When I was fifteen, Guru called my attention, he said that he asked Haggai to go down of the mountain, out of the monastery to buy me clothes that I am supposed to wear, and he told me that Haggai also buy some books I needed to study. Haggai taught me to read and write when I was five and taught me to cook food when I was ten. The Guru told me that I should act the way I am supposed to be, a lady to a woman, he also told me that I have resemblance to what my mother looked when she was my age. Later that day, Haggai came with boxes of books, plastic bags with dress that I have never seen since I was five back home, dress I saw my mother wears. Haggai gave me the books to read, there were Biology, Speech and Dictionary, and magazines of health and other stuff of learning. I dressed myself, learned new things, a lady supposed to learn and Ezekiel stop teasing me from then on.
EZEKIEL gave me his wooden toy hoping that I will not cry when my mother left me. He do some peek-a-boo that I might cheer up when Haggai shaved my beautiful hair. He taught me how to meditate, humming and hush and humming, and learning from him that it was not just humming but it was praising of their God thanking him for all the blessings bestowed on them, for protecting them and for keeping them away from evil. Evil as Ezekiel said where those who are greedy, thinking of themselves alone, having no God but themselves and were traitor with what the Holy Book instructs the people should act, act according to God’s will, as they were. Ezekiel also told me that praising God means that they themselves are perfect, they too have sinned yet they asked forgiveness about it and they were forgiven for they are humane themselves. Ezekiel’s God became my god as well. Learning more about him in their Holy Book and that God, my God, is my protector no matter what.
Looking back the chapters of my life, I smiled, giggled, and in a few moments I feel gloomy, I can still remember my mother, my father and the playroom I was long, long ago. Ezekiel came knocking through my room’s door, I told him to get inside, I asked him to sit down, he told me that the mirror in the dark room seemed to draw his soul and couldn’t get over it and he asked me what did I knew about that mirror. I can’t believe it that we are both thinking about it, about the mirror and keep on talking about it, I started talking about the frames, the engraves my palm run through, when I am about to tell him that I felt my name engraved on the bottom frame of the mirror the Guru came in my room since the door was hanging open. He then told Ezekiel to feed the goats. Ezekiel then went on with the task the Guru asked him to do, when Ezekiel was gone the Guru asked me to follow him in the dark room. When we reached the room it was no longer dark, and it was already furnished with study table with cabinets of filled of more books to read, a soft bed in one corner covered with more elegant clothes, a small room for my clothes and sandals and shoes, and not to forget a mirror with my name on it in the bottom of the frame, I saw the a snow fur wolf with fangs, seems to be real to me, so my mind stop arguing with me about the wolf, when it was just really a design, the body I felt was just roots of trees on the left side of the frame, my name on the bottom, it is well-engraved it is so beautiful, my heart was struck by the beauty of the mirror. The right side of the frame which my palm never came through that time, was engraved with bats painted black and roses buds and fully bloomed painted crimson red, red as blood I saw when I got cuts. The Guru just looked at me when I studied the feature of the mirror; he then told me that this dark room my father built before will be my new room. I thanked him for it was so nice, and the Guru just smiled as if saying that I am always welcome. I explored my new room, the books, the bed, the small room of my clothes and shoes and the little bathe room, I thought Haggai prepared for me, it is scented with my favorite perfume, the smell of fresh petals of roses, I don’t know where it came from until I saw beautiful roses shrubs growing in the pots placed in the window pane of that old dark room. I never thought that dark room got windows, when I opened it I saw the mountain, and then I remember the fog, my mother.
...continuation of THE MIRROR
I sigh but not with relief, I remember my mother and I love her so much even until now that she haven’t shown her face with the promise that she will be back soon, that she and my father will come here in the monastery to take me home with them. Anyway I am trained by John, the disciplinarian of the monastery to defend myself from any harm, he taught me how to used the stick to defend myself from snakes, he taught me how to use the stone to give fright to the bad wolves, he taught me how to quench the flame that will start burn a place he taught me everything how not to be afraid by the evil that surrounds good people. I am strong-willed person, John made me this and with the help of Haggai’s teachings I have enough wisdom to know what is right and what is not.
The door already closed, screeched open and the fog went in, it is nearing night, the shadow of the mountains were gone, the fog grow wider, stronger, I can’t explain where the fog came from and how it can hover the giant mountains, and why it is gone when the sun came. I watched the fog, as it slowly creeps on the floor of my room, I closed the window then, I don’t want my shrubs be devoured by fog and be gone like my mother, the fog keep on moving, as if it has feet walking to the mirror in my room, the wolf, the bats, the roses, and the roots of the trees were gone, all I can see is the mirror surrounded by the fog, as if it is breathing hard and that the mirror was fighting not to be devoured. I watched closely, the mirror, the child, I saw her, she was me, I can remember, that is me, I argued with my mind maybe it was just a dream; an illusion made by the fog to make me believed that there is a child when there is not. But it felt true, it is true, there was a child, and a child was about three years old it is looking straight at me with dead kitten beside her, her hands filthy with dead kitten’s entrails, she continues with what she’s doing, ignoring that I was looking with disgust, she sits down as if she was playing with the dead kitten’s body, she reached for the eyes and put it in her mouth and chew it. I screamed but not a voice came from my mouth, I run away from the mirror through the door that now was closed, I knocked but no noise was heard, I hide helplessly under my bed and the fog came in closer, I heard it is whispering something but I can’t understand it, I can’t form a sentence from the buzzing of the fog, I think it is trying to devour me, I fought it but I can’t move, I am frozen, I felt the fog’s coldness, like that of strong winds blowing in the mountain during storm, I want to scream but I can’t, I am fighting, and I felt Ezekiel shaking my body, throw to me a pail of water just to wake me up.
Ezekiel came running from the hallway to my room, when he heard me whine as if I am carried by monsters in a dream, he saw helplessly shedding tears, and whimpers to scream out loud, but as if there is something stopping me in a dream, I am laying down unconscious in front of the mirror. As Ezekiel was telling me about where he saw me, I got this fear that there is something else about this mirror, but I paused and told myself maybe I was just influenced by how bad monsters would be by the story of darkness by Ezekiel. Maybe it was just a bad dream, a nightmare, after all every one from the monastery got nightmares like crows eat their eyes when they are sleeping, that stick to fights snakes became snakes too, and others. Maybe it was just that. But when I remember the child that eats a dead kitten, why a child? When all other nightmares from the monastery are all about animals, and why mine is about a child, who became a monster? Why?
Ezekiel disturbs my intuition, he told me that we must tell the Guru about this, but from a feeling from within, that says it might be best if it is just Ezekiel and I would know about this nightmare, made me command Ezekiel not to divulge the situation to anyone. Ezekiel somewhat grant my wishes but I felt that he does not fully agree with what I have suggested. I smell doubt, it seems odd, why I smell not feel the doubt, I feel danger but I smell doubt? Another mystery, why smell? My senses were confusing me, why I felt different after that dream, after that fog almost consume me as its meal, all things in me felt different. I wanted to ask the Guru but something is stopping me, it seems that I don’t want to know things about me, about my mother and my father, about my ancestors the Guru told me about which he knew from before. I only trust Ezekiel with the nightmare, I told him about the child, but he never believed me. I asked him to stay for a night to see that the mirror is really showing something when the fog starts to hide the frame, but it never happened, the fog just float in my room that evening, it was touching the ceiling as Ezekiel told me where it is supposed to be. I tried to insist but the fog did not go down from its place. I bid Ezekiel goodnight as he went out from my room and go to his own room. I lay down my sleepy head in my bed, my new bed. I saw the fog, harmlessly floating there in the ceiling, so quite and I fall asleep.
Another dream visit me, I was in front of the mirror again, the fog was not on the frame, it was still on the ceiling, as if it was afraid of me, it clings even the breeze tried to blow it down to go to the mirror’s edge. I saw the wolf, its fang soaked with crimson red thing which I knew was blood, in the wolf’s eyes was a picture of flame, a fire, it was moving. I looked behind me, I saw nothing but black, I looked around me and I saw myself and the mirror floating in a hollow black room, it is not dark, as if the place where I am floating in with the mirror is burning hot, as I looked down were sparkles of flame filled my eyes, the fire was burning something I see to be roses and bats, I could hear screams but not the words the voice are trying to say, it is so hot that I am almost dehydrating, I don’t fear anything I saw, I can sense that I am stronger than ever, than my mentor John have told me to be strong when facing evil. I saw the child in the mirror, she is smiling at me, and I know she can see me too, she is reaching to me, and she is opening her arms as if she wants to touch me or wanted to be carried by me. I can hear a voice, a sweet voice of a man calling her, she maybe don’t see me at all, maybe the man was her father and the sound of him makes her smile. She reached to me still, opening and closing her fist as if she really wanted to touch me, my eyes are focused to the child not until I blink an eye, I see a figure it seems to be a woman turning into a wolf, a white wolf, and shaking its head, it went to the child, and the child caress the perfect white fur of the wolf’s head, it didn’t bite her and another figure of a man, the eyes were like that of bat, black and round, he wears velvety black shirt and pants, his hair as if he has just risen from sleep, a long deep sleep, and he sits with the white wolf and the child and when he tried to look to where I am floating and watching them, I falls down, down to the fire, burning my dress but not me. But I screamed to the top of my lungs, I don’t want to be an ashes in my room, I struggled harder that someone would hear me, until Levi another monks with the same age as Ezekiel came, I could hear the humming of prayers in my dreams, I could hear Levi fighting the nightmare I got, until I woke up. I was very hot and Levi thought I got fever that he then called Guru, it is too late I am not able to stop him from telling the Guru that I am having nightmares.
Haggai gave me a tepid sponge bath thinking that I am having a high fever but I could smell the fear in Guru’s appearance. I know John, he never been afraid and so other monks, but I never know Guru that much except that he is good to me and every body else in the monastery. His fear was growing and growing and from time to time I would catch him taking glimpse to the mirror. It is late afternoon and the fog goes wider and wider, hiding the mountain again, and each time I close my eyes, a rotting roses appeared, and I open my eyes again, better wake up and tires myself than sleeping and saw unexplainable happenings in my dream. Haggai, however told me to take a nap, he also said that he will never leave my side. Trusting Haggai, I slept. Haggai seems to hum and hush again, meditating, praying for safe dreams. I slept well and woke up with no nightmares, but Ezekiel, Levi, John, Haggai and other monks were at my side they encircled me while praying and Guru was outside throwing salts around the circle and he was in it as well, the fog can’t get in the circle it was just in the ceiling, it can’t go down as if something was stopping it. I sit down on my bed, Ezekiel was awaken from his meditation, I asked him, why, he told me not to look in the mirror, I asked him again why, and all the monks was awaken, the Guru uttered a strong prayer, not the same prayer I heard from the meditation everyday, the Guru’s eyes grew from tender to fierce and he just paused there looking straight at me. I saw Ezekiel and the other monks looking at me as well, as I looked in the mirror I saw a full moon and myself floating and I collapsed.
I thought I am not dreaming, I thought it was all real that the monks really saw me fly, but when I turned around I saw Haggai, only him next to me smiling and asking me how was my dream. I just sigh, Haggai asked me if I have nightmares again, I just told him the part that I float and asked him back why I am dreaming those things, and Haggai told me it was just nightmares. I asked Haggai why there is fog and he told me because on mountains it was cold and that clouds went down from the sky, and he added that fog are safe. I asked him again if fog got spirits, Haggai answered me that only human got spirit not the fog. I ended things about the fog but I am not sure if Haggai is just making me believe that dreams are dreams and fog with spirits are just my illusion, my fantasy I am making of. Ezekiel then came and told me that no matter what God will be helping me, no matter what.
...continuation of THE FOG
Ezekiel was not allowed to be in my room; the Guru knew from him that he was the one who was telling me ghost stories that he was the one who built my imagination to creatures living in the dark. I asked Haggai to let me see the Guru and explained to him that Ezekiel have no fault because it is I who wanted to hear those stories, to let the Guru make me talk to Ezekiel but Haggai told me to leave the matter to the Guru for he knows what is best for everybody in the monastery.
I respect the Guru and his decisions of avoiding Ezekiel and not talking to him anymore, it is all Haggai that I am with. Haggai is sometimes carried away when I asked him about things, about more explanation about some things; he just kept on talking until he can tell me all topics other than what I wanted to know. Sometimes I just laugh it out, but most of the times I listened to him because with Haggai I can learn almost everything and everything mean all.
One day, I told Haggai all things about the dream, and he told me that he hears that same thing before. Then he mention something about a woman who was pregnant and was asking the Guru about raising a child, he never knew who was that woman but he just overheard the conversation of the Guru with that woman while returning the books in the shelves of the Guru’s room. After two years, the woman came again, Haggai said he never got the chance to see that woman, but he clearly hears the conversation. The woman was crying, she asked the Guru what to do with her child, she gave her a kitten and everyday the child was playing with it, until her child cried for a milk, she was not able to give the milk right away, until the woman came in the room her child was carrying a bleeding kitten and she sucked right through the neck of the dead kitten. Haggai said when he heard about the blood sucker child, he kept his mouth shut and never enter the Guru’s room again and never listens to any conversation from the Guru’s visitor. He realized that he is telling me about the blood-sucker child, same to that of my dreams, he cover his mouth and asked me if he really told me about it. I nod my head and he added that I should not tell the Guru about this or no one will be allowed to talk to me again. But Haggai came to realized as well that he is telling me to be a liar or what, so he just told me, be it, if someone ask, just answer, that he will be willing to accept the consequences of his mistakes. I told Haggai, I know what is right and what is wrong, so I reasoned out to him that he will be safe, that his secrets of sneaking to the Guru’s room would be kept.
After the prohibitions of the Guru, Ezekiel was happy to see me again, he told Haggai to just stay whenever we talk about things under the sun. Ezekiel was a good friend of mine, and from the moment I have my long hair back, and got dressed like a lady, he admired my beauty, he smiled when I talk and sometimes caught him glance at me in the meditation hall. I understood he was no prince, he was a monk. I am reading Cinderella when I was eight, knew about Snow White too, and Rapunzel and all the fairy tales love story, I am sixteen and love there always it was, it is not just about my mother and father whom I remember to love me, who treat me special as their own but it is something different I can’t explain. But still he was a monk; he will not have a love at first sight thing to me, not like those in fairy tales, impossible. Suddenly I remembered and frown; he never believes my dreams, not like Haggai, who is like a parent to me. He just doesn’t care about those nightmares I got that also came from his tall tales of creatures who lives in the dark. I ignored Ezekiel when he asked me how I am doing, I ignored him because he never believes or maybe I ignored him because I can’t have a happily ever after with him because he is a monk and I conclude for sure that I am ignoring him with the fact that he never believed and will never believe my other dreams. But Ezekiel insisted, he waved to me another new wooden thing, it is a spear, he told me to strike the fog or anything that will come in my way with the spear he made and those things will be gone. I thought he never believes. And he also give me back the protection necklace I got when I was ten, I lost it, I dropped it in the well, but when Ezekiel was given prohibition not to see me, he was also given a consequence, he was assigned to clean the well, preparation for a long rain to come. And while he was cleaning, he told me that he saw the necklace and save it that he can give it to me when the prohibition was over. A smile lit my face and Ezekiel was glad to know that I am not mad at him, I never really was mad at him. I asked him then if he believes my story, about my dream and he told me that he believes.
Haggai, noticed the way Ezekiel treated me, he told me something was odd, but he can’t define the thoughts that running to his mind, I told Haggai that Ezekiel was glad again that I am not mad at him and that he was allowed to see me after a long time. Haggai agreed but not totally. When I was reading a book under the tree with Haggai and Ezekiel, they both stood up and went near the well which I can’t hear them both. Maybe they were talking about something, that maybe Haggai will be asking Ezekiel what is it with him that he seems so different in treating me. What with all the glances and smiles that Haggai saw will be the questions to be raised to Ezekiel.
They were disturbed when I shouted, I saw a wolf on the tree, and how could it hang there? I slap my face; pinch my self, until I bleed to assure myself that I am not dreaming. I am not dreaming, it is all real, I picked the spear Ezekiel gave me earlier, and Ezekiel try to pick some stones to throw it to the gray wolf, Haggai collapsed as he was old and don’t know what to do with his fear of wolves, the wolf jump in front of Ezekiel, growling at him, and trying to eat his heart out, but when I came near the wolf it jumps up to me, I feel down, the gray wolf is talking, I can hear him, I can understand him, he told me to go, don’t stay in with the monks any longer, he said again that I should go, the others already know where I am. And it scampered from the earth to the wall and below, I run to the wall to throw the spear to the gray wolf, but it was gone. I can’t find it, maybe it slides down the mountain, the fog started to cover the trails of the gray wolf. I saw Ezekiel helplessly bleeding, the gray wolf have bitten him in his arms, but he told me he was okay, I tried to wake Haggai and he did woke up and we carried Ezekiel to my room and called the Guru. When the Guru knew what had happened back there, he asked me about what the gray wolf had told me about, as if he knew that I understood the wolf’s language. I have left with no choice, I told him everything that the gray wolf said, and finally he told me to wait for Ezekiel to be healed, and then he will be my guardian to the outside world. I am confused about the Guru’s declaration, Ezekiel? Guardian? Outside world? I tried to clarify everything but the Guru pay no attention to what I am about to utter, he simply walks out of the room as if nothing happens.
I went to Haggai’s side, when he was conscious I tried to ask him the things I wanted to know but he don’t understand either, why I talk with animals, with the wolf, and why it did not hurt me but one thing he was sure that Ezekiel will not be a monk anymore. That when the Guru decides that a monk should guard another person, he is considered to be out of monastery that he chooses his own freedom not of God’s guidance. And that Ezekiel’s pure blood was ruin of the viral substance from that of wolf, and soon if legend was real, Ezekiel will also be a wolf. I am became sad, why Ezekiel, why him? Why does the gray not bite me instead, God has plan for Ezekiel, other plan, but I am alone, I understand wolf, why not I been bitten instead and be a wolf? I am bargaining, the thought of the legend that Haggai told me about can’t get out my mind.
Three days passed, Ezekiel is still asleep, Haggai, give him bed bath as he was caring of his own son. I am worried sick, maybe he can’t tolerate the viral substance that get into his blood vessels, maybe he will die, the thought of a friend’s death made me sob. Haggai, tap my shoulder when he heard me sobbing, I embraced him and told him my worries what if Ezekiel won’t make it, what if he will die. And I cried hard, when Haggai heard Ezekiel whining, Haggai comforted me to stop crying and told me, he just heard Ezekiel whined. So we went near the bed of Ezekiel and slowly opened his eyes and tried to sit down to his bed, when he felt dizzy he lays down again. Haggai told him what happened, and he looked in his arm and said, if ever that gray wolf came again, he will kill it. Ezekiel, became delicate to violent, I never heard him say he would kill some animal for hurting him, I knew Ezekiel before but after that incident I barely knew him. Maybe it was because of the substance Haggai told me about. After an hour, I tried asking Ezekiel why he suddenly wanted to kill an animal that hurt him badly, when before he was bitten by snake but let it be and forgave it. He then told me, because it might be full when it get me that is why it doesn’t hurt me, and he will not allow that gray wolf to do so because he cared for me all this time, more than a sister, more than a monk will do. He was just trying to protect me, but I am okay now and so he is, I told him maybe the gray wolf was afraid that he must stone it to death, and Ezekiel sigh maybe it was just trying to protect himself from him as well, and he said it will let it be, but if that gray wolf will hurt me, he will not think about of his being good to animal or being monk, that he will surely kill it. Sighing with relief, I told him not to worry anymore because I will fight evil as well that I am strong like him.
The Guru came in the room, after hearing from Haggai that Ezekiel was awake, Haggai called my attention, asked me to go back in my room and prepare for the things that I will bring with me in the outside world, outside of the monastery. After packing my things, I went with Haggai to say goodbye with the other monks, Haggai is teary-eyed, and so is Levi and John together with the other monks. When we came to Ezekiel’s room, the Guru had finished his instructions to Ezekiel and he was no longer wearing a monk’s suit but a shirt with coat and pants and boots with spear and his other things in his backpack. The Guru together with other monks bid us goodbye and prayed for our journey. I felt sad, no one explained to me why I have to go away with Ezekiel, away from the monastery. No one explained to me why Ezekiel survived the ferocious wolf’s bite, why I understood the gray wolf’s language, why I have to leave the monastery, who are the others that the wolf is talking about, why I am not safe in the monastery anymore? I can’t answer all those questions, I just cried and cried, fear to discover who am I, but Ezekiel, he assured me, I will be safe with him as long as I am with him no one, not a thing could harm me.
Papauwi na ako noon mula sa school nang makita ko ang isang magarang kotse na nakaparada sa harap ng maliit naming bahay. Isang puting BMW. May dalawang naka-unipormadong lalaki sa aming tarangkahan na tumingin sa akin nang naglakad ako palapit.
“Sino kayo? Anong kailangan ninyo sa amin?” naiiritang tanong ko sa mga ito ngunit nanatili silang tahimik. Sa loob ay naulingan ko ang mahinang iyak na nagmumula sa aking tiya Lucing.
Tumakbo ako papasok sa aming bahay at doon sa sala ay nakita kong nakaupo sa sahig ang aking tiya habang may isang lalaking naka-amerikana ang nakatunghay sa kanya. Guwapo ito, tipong artistahin. “T-Tiya…?”
“Amethyst!” bulalas ng tiya ko bago takot na tiningnan ang lalaking nakatayo malapit dito. “Ano ang ginagawa mo dito?”
“Maaga kaming pinauwi sa eskuwela.” Sagot ko bago marahang naglakad palapit sa kausap ko. Buong pagkakataong iyon ay hindi ko hinihiwalayan ng tingin ang lalaking nakatingin din sa akin. Nakahanda sa kung anumang gagawin nito. Naamoy ko ang dugo sa hangin malapit dito. Isang amoy na pamilyar sa akin. Naramdaman ko ang panunuyo ng lalamunan. Nauuhaw ako.
Ngumiti ang lalaki at tila nagliwanag ang buong sala namin. “Good. You already know our craft. Hindi na ako mahihirapang turuan ka.” Anito sa tinig na tila musika.
“Hindi siya sasama sa inyo!” galit na sigaw ng tiya ko at niyakap ako. “Hindi ninyo siya kauri..!” Napasinghap ako sa tinurang iyon ng aking tiya. Kung ganoon ay alam nito ang pagkatao ng lalaking kausap. At hindi pa nito nalalaman ang munting lihim ko.
“Hindi iyon desisyon na ikaw ang gagawa, Lucing.” Ang lalaki na nanatili ang mga mata sa akin. “Alam ni Amethyst na hindi niya mapipigilan ang kanyang tadhana. Inilayo siya sa amin ng iyong kapatid, pero… tingnan mo, at natagpuan din namin siya.”
Gulat na napatingin sa akin ang aking tiya. Nakagat ko ang aking labi na tila isang batang nahuling gumagawa ng kasalanan. “Patawarin ninyo ako, Tiya.”
Lumuwag ang yakap nito sa akin. “K-kailan pa…? Amethyst, kailan pa?”
“Dalawang linggo na ang nakakaraan. Noong debut ko, tiya.” Umiwas ako ng tingin dito.
Tuluyang kumalas ang mga braso ng aking tiya sa akin. “Kanino? N-napatay mo ba siya?”
“Wala, tiya! Napipigilan ko pa ang pagkauhaw… Pero… Pero…” napaiyak na lang ako. “Hindi ko alam kung hanggang kalian ko mapipigilan ito. Uhaw na uhaw na ako, tiya…”
“Kaya kami naririto ay para sunduin na siya, Lucing.” Pukaw ng lalaki sa pag-uusap namin. “Hindi mo na siya kayang alagaan pa. Matuturuan namin siya kung paano mabuhay. Huwag ka ng mag-alala.”
Bumalik sa pag-iyak ang aking tiya, sa pagkakataong ito ay mas malakas kaysa kanina. Wala na itong nagawa nang isama ako papasok sa kotse ng lalaking nagpakilala bilang si Ismael. Ito daw ang punong-lingkod ng aking ama, si Leonard del Fierro.
Mayaman si Leonard del Fierro. May-ari ito ng isang pharmaceutical company. Ito rin ang may-ari ng isang kilalang kumpanya ng mga kotse.
Sinalubong ako ng aking ama nang makarating kami sa bahay. Tuwang-tuwa ito. Binata pa pala siya at ako ang nag-iisang tagapagmana ng lahat ng kanyang yaman.
Ipinakilala ako sa sociedad bilang si Amethyst del Fierro. Naging isang sikat na modelo. Tinuruan nila ako ng paraan ng pamumuhay ng aming mga kauri. Mga nilalalang na nabubuhay sa tighaw ng dugo ng tao. Subalit ang naging problema ay isinusuka ko ang lahat ng dugong iniinom ko. Sa tuwing iinom ako ay naiisip ko ang mga taong nakasalamuha ko noon at naging mga kaibigan ko. At kusang bumabaligtad ang aking sikmura.
Ang sabi ng aming Impo, ang pinakamatanda sa aming kauri, ay nabibilang ako sa mga Bigkis-Dugo—mga nilalang na nakakainom lamang ng dugo ng isang iniibig. Ganoon din daw kasi ang aking ama. Naiintindihan ko dahil hindi pa ako nakaranas umibig kahit kalian.
Marami akong manliligaw, mga tao at mga kauri namin. Subalit hanggang ngayon, kahit nanatiling lihim ang aking pagkatao sa madla sampu ng aming lahi, ay hindi pa rin tumitibok ang aking puso…
It is always difficult to carry guilt and regret inside you. They are a cumbersome burden that pushes you to the ground almost literally. And they make you feel them in everything you do. Sometimes, you merely get by with your life.
These were what Mark had been feeling for almost a year since he had lost one of his two best friends in a fire. He’d only been able to save April, but not Sally. She’d succumbed to the flames of her mother’s burning house.
The unsettling feeling of despair had made Mark look older than his real age of twenty-five and it had led him to the place where he was right now---a psychic’s house. He believed in these kinds of people but he knew not all of them were genuine, because if they were, and if the psychologists and the other specialists he had consulted for all these months were of real help, he should be feeling a little less burdened now. But nothing had changed. And he’d realized that he just wanted so bad to correct that event in his life. That’s just it---change the past.
The psychic’s house had nothing special about it. It was so nondescript it was bordering to being depressingly somber. It was a two-story white brick house with an almost invisible roof. From outside, it looked snug. And everything around it---the patio on the left, the dwarf tree on the right, and even the enclosing concrete fence---looked almost dead in this windy March afternoon. A foreboding.
Breathing deeply, Mark pushed the button on the gate post. He didn’t wait long for someone to show herself at the house’s door and open the gate to welcome him.
“Mark Blanco?”
“Yes. Mystika?”
The middle-aged psychic-looking woman nodded her head, offered an unexpectedly natural smile, and ushered Mark into the house. Immediately, Mark decided that the woman was likeable and unpretentious. Her being terse but polite reminded Mark of himself.
“C’mon. There’s no need to be so serious and silent just because you’re in a psychic’s abode,” Mystika said in a lively tone as Mark sat on the brown leather sofa in the living room, which Mark had guessed right as being snug. He hadn’t guessed that it was cozy though. The TV presented a scene from the romantic “If Only”. Mystika turned it off.
“I’m sorry, but I can’t get myself to cheer up even if I wanted to,” Mark said sullenly. His already small eyes were strained. He surveyed the room and didn’t see any of the weird stuff he’d expected to behold in this house.
“That’s the reason you’re here,” Mystika announced. It was a fact. When Mark had set the appointment with the psychic, he hadn’t told her why he needed to see her. But she knew. Mark guessed the reason was written all over his stressed face and drooping posture. He’s a living zombie. He’d even quit his teaching job in a private high school because he couldn’t focus.
“Yes” was Mark’s response. Yes, his depression was the reason he was there. In a minute, he was bargaining with Mystika about the method of achieving his object. She offered closure. He wanted to change the past. In the end, Mark won. Mystika knew she couldn’t say anything to sway Mark’s decision. When she said “okay”, he insisted on paying that moment.
So they began the ritual. They would call on that entity that could cheat time. It wasn’t holy. Only a few, including Mystika, knew about its questionable existence. No one was sure if it had really been summoned before. If it were a real entity, it was undoubtedly powerful, and hence, fearsome. Mystika repeated, “This creature should only be called once and your regrets should be gone after the chance it would give you.”
They used the Ouija board, which was ordinary for Mark. But the words the psychic uttered while holding his hand were painful to the ears. Their sound was very uncommon and almost unearthly. As they went, Mark’s senses gradually turned numb he couldn’t even feel the comfortable calm in the living room. His eyesight slowly dimmed that’s why he closed them. Before they’d started, Mystika had reminded him to focus, and he tried.
Two full minutes passed and everything went still. The ritual was over. Mark’s senses perked up. But he couldn’t move. The psychic was perfectly immobile with her eyes closed.
Out of nowhere, a monster materialized right in front of Mark. The horror was face-to-face with him it could swallow him whole. It was just a hair-breadth away from Mark, so he saw the details of its visage. It was human-like but its gray skin appeared too sturdy it wouldn’t be ravaged by time. Its slanted eyes were all black and cold. No hair. No nostrils. Its mouth was shut tight, but it talked.
“I know what you desire.”
The time-monster retreated and revealed its huge, hunched body to Mark. A giant gray human form with enormous wings. It took Mark by the hands and they flew to the past.
It all happened in a blink, but Mark had felt all sorts of emotions his heart could explode. And then there they were, in that harrowing moment in Mark’s life. It was exactly the same---not a less frightening; Mark’s insane alertness and energy was all there. And there was that additional thought in his consciousness that he should change what was to happen.
He felt the heat of the flames. They were fireworks in that dark disintegrating house. Suffocating smoke. Crackling noise. April was on his right shoulder like a hung piece of clothing. She was unconscious. Sally was in front of him, but there was a huge flame in between them. A steel bar was blocking the door to the room where Sally was trapped. She wasn’t screaming. It wasn’t her to panic and demand for help. But she needed help now, and she knew she couldn’t get it. Mark, though, was determined to save both Sally and April. He was about to reach for an unburned piece of timber when he was stopped short by the repulsive sight of the time-monster. It landed with a girl it held by the hand. The girl was April. They were vey near him but it seemed that April couldn’t sense him. She just vanished and Mark felt the movement of the girl on his shoulder. In that instant, he realized what was happening. April also went back in time with the help of the monster. But why?
April budged again. Then, she was on the ground standing on her own. Without any explanation, she picked the unburned piece of timber lying on the almost charred floor and she started attempting to pry the room’s door open.
“Sally, hang in there. I will save you. I won’t let you die!”
“No! April, save yourself. I will get Sally out of here,” exclaimed Mark, but his pleading fell on dead ears. He pulled April by the shoulders but she resisted. And the instant she shoved her body forward, she lost her footing and fell to the hellish fire that had crawled to where she had stood. She couldn’t get up, so the flames started creeping on her.
Before Mark was pulled out of that moment in the past, he had heard screams---cries that pierced his soul.
He was back in Mystika’s living room. He was back with tears in his eyes and with numbness that would surely be followed by anguish unimaginably heavier than before.
“Both of them died. It’s gotten worse,” Mark mumbled to the air. He was staring into nothingness.
Mystika couldn’t help him anymore, that’s what she’d said. And she had no idea whom April had gone to for summoning the monster. And Mark knew she was telling the truth---she couldn’t help him now. No amount of charms and good luck could heal him. He was good as dead. Even Mystika’s last words to him hadn’t stirred him up. “The creature would feed on your guilt and sorrow.”
So there’s a possibility that the monster would show up again. That could be good. Mark would try to bargain with the last of his strength.
And he was right. The moment he stepped into his gloomy studio apartment, he felt so drained physically and emotionally. He wasn’t surprised when the creature appeared before him out of nowhere. Its presence still made Mark shiver. Not a less threatening. Its wings were still flapping when it grinned at Mark.
Mustering all his courage, Mark spoke. “Take my life in exchange of my friends’. Change the past.”
Without the faintest twitch of its lips, the monster answered. “I will take your life…but your friends will remain dead. The grief in your heart is enough to feed me for eternity.”
Mark stared in awe as the creature started splitting into two beings. When the meiosis was complete, one monster became a featureless gray glob the shape of a human; the other one became an old man---a very old man. He said, “At last, I’m free.” And then, he dropped dead on the floor.
In a flash, the human-shaped glob glided in the air and slithered into Mark’s mouth. He felt every inch of pain as the creature entered his body. Before he had blacked out, the last thought in his mind was that he wouldn’t allow the thing to control him. He had done enough damage.
And so, for four long days, Mark fought the entity inside him. His body was mutated into that monster he so despised and feared. But he wouldn’t give up. Finally, he threatened to kill himself so they’d both die. At this, the entity bargained. It would take Mark one last time to the past so he could correct it, and in return he should surrender his body to it.
Mark’s “yes” took him back to that abhorrent scene once again. Every same painful detail was replaying, but he gave it his all to save his two friends. April was on his shoulder. He wasted no time to pry the door open to rescue Sally. It seemed unbelievably easy. April came to; Sally was out of the crumbling room.
But suddenly, Mark found himself in Sally’s previous situation. He was trapped in that burning room. The door was open, yet the flames were the sturdiest wall.
April started shrieking. She still knew what was happening because she had had a contact with the time-creature.
Guilt. Overwhelming guilt shone in April’s eyes and echoed in her cries.
The monster, in its real featureless shape, appeared.
“NOOOooo!” Mark shouted, but the glob was already possessing April’s body. When she was transformed, a deep mocking voice said, “She’s easier to control. Now they’re both mine.”
April and Sally were both the monster’s now. It possessed April, and, as Mark could see, it held Sally by a chain. Both girls were the thing’s captive.
“Sally is coming to realize what happened,” proclaimed the monster’s voice. “She will blame herself for her friends’ bitter fate, and she’s going to be a well of endless treasure to me.”
Worse. Mark knew everything was far worse now. He was going to die leaving his friends to suffer. Even his soul was screaming in incomparable agony for what he had done. He should have left everything to time. Now, there would never be a healing. The pain would be as immortal as the undying monster.
“You’re fired!”, sigaw ng isang lalaki sa lumuluhang dalagang babae. Tanggal na sa trabaho si Ana matapos mapagbintangang nagnakaw sa tindahang kanyang pinaglilingkuran. Hindi alam ni Ana kung ano ang kanyang gagawin, patay na ang kanyang mga magulang at tanging siya na lang ang pag-asa ng pito nya pang mga kapatid.
Habang nag lalakad si Ana may isang piraso ng diyaryo ang humarang sa kanyang kaliwang paa. Advertisement page ang kanyang unang tinignan. Kahit anong trabaho ay handa nyang pasukan basta’t kumita lang ng pera. Wanted Yaya, tamang tama kayang kaya ito ni Ana dahil naging katulong na rin sya dati.
Kinbukasan pinuntahan nya kaagad yung address na ibinigay sa kanya ng lalaking nakausap nya sa cellphone (contact number na nakalagay sa dyaryo). Ding dong! Ding dong! ,bumukas ang gate at isang lalaki ang sumalubong sa kanya, matangakas,gwapo at maputi ito. “Ako nga po pala si Ana, yung mag aaply po bilang katulong” ang binigkas ni Ana. “oh ikaw na pala yan,ako nga pala si Leo yung nakausap mo kahapon. Tara tuloy ka” ang sagot ni Leo kay Ana. Nang nakapasok na sila sa loob nilibot ni Leo si Ana sa buong bahay. May apat na palapag ito, may 11 silid ngunit walang mga bintana at dilaw din ang kulay ng mga ilaw sa loob ng bahay, puro antique ang mga kagamitan. Kinuwentuhan ni Leo si Ana tungkol sa kanyang mga amo. Kat at Jacob ang pangalan ng kanyang magiging amo. “ oh pano ba yan, gabi na Ana alis na ko. Diyan lang ako sa kabilang kanto nakatira. Kapag may problema ka tawagan mo lang ako” ang sabi ni Leo sabay hawak sa leeg ni Ana. “oh sige, maraming salamat mag iingat ka” sagot ni Ana na naka ngiti.
Naiwan si Ana sa malaking bahay. Dumiretso si Ana sa ref para kumuha ng maiinom. Walang mga nakalagay na tubig. Binuksan ni Ana ang freezer, puro karne ang laman nito. Nilinis ni Ana ang buong bahay para sa pagdating ng kanyang mga amo. Nang itatapon ni Ana ang mga basura tumambat sa kanya ang mga bulok at tuyong laman ng karne, dali dali nya itong itinali at itinapon sa labas.
4:30 na ng umaga at madilim pa ag kalangitan ng dumating ang kanyang mga amo. “Magandang umaga ma’am, sir ako nga po pala si Ana ang bago niyong katulong” ang masayang sabi ng dalaga. Hindi pinansin ng mag-asawa si Ana at dali-daling dumiretso sa taas bitbit bitbit ang isang plastik na tila mamasa masa pa.
Manananghalian na at hindi alam ni Ana kung ano ang kanyang lulutuin kaya umakyat muna sya upang tanungin ang kanyang mga amo kung anong maaaring lutuin. Laking gulat nya ng tumambak sa kanyang harapan ang kanyang babaeng amo na puno ng dugo ang mga kamay sipsip at at nginangatngat ang isang hilaw pang karne. Napasigaw si Ana. “Halimaw!” Alam ni Ana na hindi tao kundi isang halimaw ang kanyang amo. Dali-dali syang tumakbo sa pababa ng hagdan , ngunit na harangan sya ng lalaki nyang amo. Nanginginig ang kanyang amo na tila gutom na gutom. Tumakbo siya papataas ng hagdan at dumiretso sa isang kwarto sabay tago sa isang malaking aparador. Hawak-hawak nya ang kanyang cellphone ng mga oras nay un, naalala nya bigla si Leo kaya tinawagan nya ito. “Leo!tulungan mo ako!... hindi sila tao! Hindi tao ang mga amo ko! Halimaw sila!..Leo parang awa muna nandito ako sa isa sa mga silid na sa apat na palapag ng bahay…tulungan mo ko..” ang nanginginig at takut na takot na sabi ni Ana kay Leo. “oh sige Ana, diyan ka lang. Papunta na ko! Wag kang aalis” sagot ni Leo kay Ana. Takot na takot si Ana. Nagsisikalampagan na ang mga pinto ng bawat silid, kaya hindi niya magawang sumilip sa labas. Ilang saglit lang narinig niya ang boses ni Leo. “Ana, wag kang matakot nandito na ko”, ang sabi ni Leo. Biglang bumukas ang pinto ng aparador na pinagtataguan ni Ana. Si Leo. Bigla niyang niyakap si Leo ng mahigpit. “Leo...salamat dumating ka” ang bulong ni Ana. Napansin nya ang malaking larawang naka sabit sa pader, si kat,si Jacob kasama si Leo. Napaatras si Ana kay Leo. “Hindi, hindi! Isa ka sakanila Leo” ang naiiyak na sabi ni Ana.. “oo Ana isa ko sakanila” ang sagot ni Leo sabay kagad sa leeg ni Ana. Wala ng nagawa pa si Ana alam niyang ito na ang kanyang katapusan. “Paalam at patawad sa inyo mga kapatid ko” ang nabulong ni Ana sa sarili habang tumutulo ang kanyang mga luha.-END-
Panahon na upang magkasundo ang mga Bampira at Lobo.
Isang kakaibang Eclipse ang magaganap sa kasaysayan ng mga imortal.
Sinasabing nangyayari lamang ito tuwing sasapit ang ika labing tatlong libong taon at pinaniniwalaang magdudulot ng pagkamatay sa lahat ng lahi ng mga lobo at bampira.
Isang pulang Eclipse ang magaganap at magtatagal ng walong araw, tanging mga imortal lamang ang nakakakita at naaapektuhan nito. Sa panahon na ito ay unti unting humihina ang kapangyarihan ng mga lobo at bampira na maaring magdulot ng kanilang kamatayan.
Naniniwala silang tanging mga malalakas lamang ang matitirang buhay sa pangyayaring ito. Ngunit isa lamang ito sa mga magaganap na pangyayari na kanilang kinakatakutan, may isa pang problema na kailangan nilang harapin, ang pagbaba ni Eterna mula sa pulang buwan na magdudulot ng pagpapasakit, pagpapahirap at kamatayan sa lahi ng mga lobo at bampira.
Ayon sa matandang libro ng mga bampira, Si Eterna ang kalaban ng lahat ng imortal noong una pang panahon, labis labis ang kaniyang kasamaan, nabubuhay lamang siya tuwing sasapit ang pulang eclipse upang maghasik ng lagim at kunin ang mga puso ng mga nanghihinang lobo at bampira para sa pagaalay sa kanyang diyos nasi Erebos ang hari ng kadiliman.
Sinasabing ang puso na inaalay niya kay Erebos ay maykapalit, ito ay ang muli niyang pagkabuhay at kung makakaipon siya ng sapat na puso na nanggaling sa mga lobo at bampira ay habang buhay na siyang mananatili sa mundo ng mga imortal at ito ay bago matapos ang ika walong araw ng pulang eclipse.
Para malagpasan ang sinasabing mga pangyayari ay kinakailangang magkasundo ng mga imortal lalong lalo na ang mga lobo at bampira at magsanib pwersa upang hanapin at paslangin si Eterna. Ngunit hindi ito magiging madali sa kanila dahil alam naman natin na hinding hindi magkakasundo ang mga Lobo at Bampira.
Ang darating na pulang eclipse ang susubok sa tatag, kapangyarihan at paniniwala ng mga bampira at lobo kailangan nilang magkasundo at magsanib ng kapangyarihan upang matalo ang makapangyarihang kalaban at kung di nila gagawin ito ay habang buhay na siyang mananatili sa mundo ng mga imortal upang maghasik ng lagim at magdala ng katapusan sa lahat ng lahi ng mga bampira at lobo.
Merong isang grupo ng bampira na tinatawag na HUNTER nakikisalamuha sila sa taong mga nasa syudad.Meron din silang tinuturing na pinuno, si DRACO.Isa si draco sa mga pinakamalalakas na bampira na natitira pgaktapos ng labindalawang milyong taon.Pinagsisislbihan ng mga bampira sa draco sa pamamagitan ng pagaalay sa kanya ng katawan ng isang babae.Ngunit may isang pamilya na bampira na labag sa kalooban nila ang pagsisislbi kay draco. Ang magasawang Vencia at ang kanilang anak na si DRAKE.Pero hindi naman nila masuway ang paguutos ni draco dahil sa takot na mapatay sila nito.Isang gabi ay nagpahuli c draco ng isang babae agd agad namang nagtakbuhan ang mga bampira at isa na dito c drake.Sa kabutihang palad ay nakakita gad c drake ng isang babae sa liblib na lugar.Bigla niya itong sinungaban sa likod pero napalingon ang babae at naiwasan nya c drake.bianlikan ito ni drake at tulyan na itong nahuli.Nang dadalhin niya ang babae ay nakasalubong niya ang kanyang mga magulang at pinatapon ng mga ito ang babae kung saan man.Agad agad siyang umalis dala ang babae.Pero sinuway ni drake ang utos ng mga magulang niya.Tinago niya nag babae na nagngangalang JURIS at sa kasamaang palad ay nahulog ang loob nya dito.Lubos na pinagbabawal sa kanila ang pagmamahal ng isang tao.Napamahal na rin si juris kay drake Napagalaman ni drake na wala ng pamilya c juris.Bata pa lamang siya ng kinuha ang kanyang mga magulang ng mga bampira doon nakakuha ng tiyempo c drake na sabihin kay juris ang tunay niyang pagkatao at pinaliwanag niya ang lahat na dapat malaman ni juris kasama na ditto ang pagiging labag sa kalooban ang pagiging bampira .Agad namang tinanggap ni juris ang kaanyuan ni drake .Nalaman ni Draco ang tungkol kay drake kaya nagkaroon ng labanan ang mga hunter namatay ang mga magulang ni drake pero kapalit noon ay napatay ni drake ang kanilang pinuno.Pagkatapos nuon ay nagbagong buhay si drake at nagpabasbas siya at tuluyan ng naging tao.Naging maganda na ang pagsasama ng dalawa. Makalipas ang isang taon…. Habang nasa labas ng bahay si juris kasama si drake ay may lumapit sa kanilang isang matandang babae at nagsabing “Bakit ka nagpakasal sa isang tao?Isa kang Bampira!!
CENXIA NA PO SA STORY FIRST TIME KO LANG PO KC MAGSULAT :P
Matagal nilang tinago ang sarili sa mundo ng mga Imortal, namuhay ng normal sa mundo ng tao at pinilit kalimutan ang kanilang pinagmulan. Sa pag silang ng isang bagong lahi at sa mga bagong propesiya handa na silang ipag labang ang kanila angkan. Tapos na ang pag gamit sa kanilang kakayahan at pag abuso sa kanilang kahinaan ngayon handa na silang ilaban ang lahing pinagmulan. Sisiguraduhin nilang hindi sila ang mauubos sa labanan ng lahi sa mundo ng Imortal.
Taong 1984.
Matagal ng alam ni Maria Soledad na hindi pangkaraniwan ang kanilang pamilya. Sa kanilang dugo nananalaytay ang isang kakayahan na bukod tangi sa lahat. Ang kakayahang hanguin ang kapangyarihan ng mundo at gamitin ito kung ano man ang kanilang gustuhin. Sa kanyang pag mumuni muni bumalik ang isang ala-ala, isang tagpo na matagal nyang tinago sa sarili.
“Maria Soledad, Apo ko! Alam kung masakit tanggapin na nagmula ka sa lahi ng makapangyarihan mangkukulam pero nakikita ko na sayo magmumula ang mga pinaka makapangyarihan sa atin lahi ang magbibigay satin ng respeto sa mundong ibabaw at sa mundo ng hiwaga. Alagaan mo sila at siguraduhing mabigyan ng magandang simula para sa ikakabuti ng ating lahi.” – Huling salita ng kanyang lola bago ito pumanaw.
Mabilis na lumipas ang panahaon at nakapag asawa si Maria Soledad. - Si Martin - isang mayamang Haciendero sa Laguna. Nabuhay si Maria ng Masaya sa feeling ni Martin pero lingid sa kanyang kaalaman na ang kanyang asawa ay my tinatago rin sekreto katulad nya. Isang masamang dugo na handang gawin ang lahat para sa kapangyarihan.
Taimtim na nag hihintay si Martin sa labas ng silid nilang mag-asawa. Bakas ang pagka inip sa kanyang mukha at ang kagustuhang Makita ang una na nilang anak ni Soledad.
“Kambal Soledad! Kambal ang anak mo”
At doon kumalat ang iyak ng mga Sanggol sa buong Hacienda iyak na hindi ikinatuwa ng kanilang Ama. Na ipinagtaka ni Soledad.
“Bakit Kambal ang anak mo Soledad? Hindi to maari hindi pwedeng maging dalawa ang anak natin.” Ang salubong ni Martin sa asawa.
“Biyaya ng mundo ito Martin, Anong masama kung kambal ang atin anak magagawa parin natin silang alagaan”. Sagot naman ni Soledad.
Nagdilim ang paningin ni Martin sa narinig isang bagay na kinagulat ni Soledad.
“Sino ang panganay sa Dalawa Kunchita?” Tanung ni Martin sa katulong nag pa-anak kay Soledad.
Nataranta ang Katulong hindi alam ang gagawin, ngunit mabilis din naka balik sa pag iisip. “Ito pong nasa kanan Señor.”
Sa kanyang pag salita mabilis na kinuha ni Martin ang nasa kaliwang Sanggol at nilabas ng silid at inabot sa katulong “itapon mo tong batang to.”
Nagulat si Soledad sa narinig. Hindi man makalakad ng maayus pinilit parin makatayo ni Soledad upang habulin ang asawa at pigilan sa balak gawin sa kanilang isang anak. “Bakit mo ipapatapon ang anak natin Martin anong kasalanan ng bata?” Sigaw ni Soledad sa asawa. Dahil pinanganak mo siya ayan ang kasalanan nya.. isa tong pagkakamali isa lang dapat ang maging anak mo wala ito sa propesiya hindi to pwede, hindi pwedeng mangyari.”
“Anong propesiya? Anong Ibig mong sabihin?” tanong ni Soledad.
“Na sa dugo natin mag mumulang ang pinaka malakas sa lahi natin ng mangkukulam.”
Laking gulat ni Soledad sa narinig ang matagal nyang kinalimutang Pagkatao ay bigla na lamang bumalik sa kanyang ala-ala. Ngayon tila ba hindi nya kilala ang lalaking pinakasalan nya.. madilim ang panigin nito mga matang hayok sa kapangyarihan ngunit gayon man nakikita nya ang pagkabalisa at pag aalala.
Narinig lahat ng katulong na si Kunchita ang mga sambat ng amo. Ngayon alam nya na ang totoo hindi sya papayag na masaktan ni Martin ang mga anak ni Soledad. Nakasaad sa kanyang palad na alagaan ang mga batang ito kapalit man ay kanyang buhay.
Tama ang narinig mo Soledad sa pamamagitan n gating anak magagawa kung sakupin ang mundo ng imortal. Kapangyarihang walang hanggan.
“Kunchita amin na ang bata at ako na mismo ang tatapos sa kanyang buhay?” Sinubukang hablutin ni Martin ang sanggol sa kamay ni Kunchita ngunit mabilis nya ito naiiwas at pagkatapos sabay sabit ng mga salitang “Bathalang my likha ng lupa ibigay ang inyung lakas” sa isang iglap mabilis na tinulak ni Kunchita ang among si Martin at ito tumalsik ng malayo sa kanya.
Nagulat si Soledad sa nakita si Kunchita ay isa rin kagaya nya, ngunit bakit? Anong dahilan at andito sya.
“Soledad bilisan mo at kunin mo pa ang isa mo pang anak kaylangan mailayo natin sila sa lalaking ito isa syang itim na mambabarang” Gulo man ang pagiisip mabilis na tumakbo si Soledad pa balik sa silid nilang mag asawa ngunit nauna parin si Martin makuha ang isa pang sanggol.
Hindi Soledad! Hindi mo makukuha ang anak kong ito.. ako ang magpapalaki sa kanya at sa kanyang pag laki sya ang maghihiganti sa ating lahi laban sa lahi ng mga mapanabusong bampira.
Sa mga sandaling yun mabilis na bumuhos ang ulan kasabay ng pag iyak ng dalawang sanggol. Iyak na mag sisimula sa kanila buhay bilang individual.
Sa Europa noong taong (900 AD), sa katutubo ng Anggarack sa kaligatnaan ng kagubatan, isang batang lalaki ang pinaniniwalaang anak ng kalawakan (through transmutation of wolf & human DNA gawa ng mga nilalang na hindi taga mundo nalikha ang isang batang sanggol). Sa kanyang paglaki nakakapag-anyo siyang lobo mula sa pagiging tao at taglay ang hindi pangkaraniwang lakas at bilis. Ginawa siyang pinuno upang maprotektahan ang kanilang mga lahi. Sa paglipas ng panahon kumalat ang kanyang pagiging taong lobo sa mga taga Anggarack.
Taong 1281 sa kanlurang bahagi isang doktor ang nakalikha ng hindi pangkaraniwang sakit (virus) sa kagustuhan makagawa ng gamot upang makapagbuhay ng patay. Sa kanyang nagawa kinakain ng “virus” ang lahat ng parte ng katawan ng tao. Sa oras na kumalat ang “virus” sa katawan mamamatay ang biktima at ito’y mabubuhay sa anyo ng isang halimaw na may matatalim na pangil upang makapag-sipsip ng dugo. Kailangan ang dugo upang mapanatili ang anyo at mabuhay ng matagal ang biktima nito. Subalit tanging init ng araw ang nakakapatay sa “virus” kasabay sa pagkasunog ng katawan. Kumalat ang epidemia at marami ang nabibiktima. Tinawag ang mga taong nabibiktima nito na “Bampira”.
Taong 1589, tinugis sila ng pamahalaan at nagtago ang mga lahi ng bampira sa kalagitnaan ng kagubatan kung saan hindi nasisilayan ng init ng araw. Mas pinili ng iba na uminum ng dugo ng hayop para mabuhay kaysa mangbiktima ng tao.
Isa sa mga bampira ang nakapunta sa tribu ng Anggrack at napatay nito ang asawa ng pinuno ng mga taong lobo. Dito nagsimula ang matinding hidwaan sa pagitan ng dalawang lahi.
Sa paglipas ng panahon isang dalaga na dugong lobo ang lumikas at napaibig ng isang binata.(Ang binata ay may nananalantay na dugo ng bampira sa katawan sapagkat ang kanyang ina ay nabuntis ng isang bampira subalit hindi pa nagigising ang pagiging bampira niya).
Tinugis sila ng mga lobo dahil kamatayan ang kaparusahan kapag nagkaroon ng ugnayan ang isang lobo sa mga lahi ng bampira. At isang grupo ng mga bampira ang naniniwala na ang magiging anak ng taong lobo at bampira ay magiging pinakamalakas sa lahat.
Nilisan ng dalawang nag-iibigan ang kanilang bansa at napadpad sa Pilipinas mahigit dalawang daang taon na ang nakalipas mula ng sakupin ng mga banyaga ang lupain ng Pilipinas.
Isang tribu ng mga katutubo ang kanilang natuluyan at sila’y mainit na tinanggap at kinupkop. Ngunit sa kasamaang palad namatay ang babae sa panganganak sa sanggol na lalaki. Pinili ng ama na lumikas at iwanan ang kanyang anak sa mga katutubo upang sa kanyang pagiging bampira ay hindi na siya makapang-biktima pa.
Ngunit ang mga katutubong umaruga sa sanggol ay may mga lahi din na hindi pangkaraniwan at ang kanilang lahi ay tinatawag na mga “Aswang”.
Wakas
Isang gabi umuwi akong nag iisa. Madilim at tahimik na ang daan. Mga tahol lang ng mga aso ang naririnig ko. Kapansin pansin din ang ilaw na patay bukas sa dinadaanan ko. Nang malapit na ako sa bahay nagulat ako sa dami ng tao na nasa amin. Pumasok ako at walang kahit ni isa na nakapansin sa akin. Di ko nakita si Inay at Itay sa labas kaya pumasok ako.
Nang pumasok ako nakita ko si Inay na panay ang iyak.Si Itay naman ay halos lalabas na ang mga mata sa galit habang nakatitig ka Inay. Sobrang gulat ko ng may pumasok na mga pulis. Hinahanap nila si Inay. Nakita ko kung paano ikaladkad ni Itay si Inay sa loob ng sasakyan ng mga pulis. Napaiyak ako at nasaktan ang Inay ko.
Wala man lang akong magawa ng dakpin nila si Inay. Lalapitan ko sana si Itay pero umiiyak ito na tumitingin sa loob ng kabaong. Nang may lumapit kay Itay doon ko nalaman ang lahat.Napatay pala ni Inay ang batang nasa loob ng kabaong,punong puno daw ito ng pasa at bugbog sa katawan kaya namatay.
Di ako nagdalawang isip na alamin kung sino ang batang namatay. Dahan dahan akong lumapit at kabang kaba ang dibdib ko.Pumikit ako ng malapit na ako sa kabaong,dinilat ko ang aking mga mata. Nakita ko ang aking sarili na halos napanganga ako sa gulat.Di ko inaakala na ako pala ang batang napatay ng sarili kung Ina.Napasigaw na lang ako magdamag sa katotohanan na patay na pala ako!
Pugad ng mga mangkukulam ang baryo mapayapa,ito’y ayon sa mga naninirahan dito.Naging paniniwala na ito ng mga tagabaryo dahil sa mga kababalaghang nagaganap dito na naging bunga upang makaramdam ng matinding takot at poot sanhi ng bilang ng mga nagiging biktima nito.
Isa ang mag- inang Sonia at Baldo Krisanto sa mga naninirahan sa Baryo Mapayapa na pinag- uusapan ring isa sa mga dahilan ng mga misteryong bumabalot dito.Kaya matindi ang hinala ng mga tagabaryo na sila”y may lahing mangkukulam ay dahil sa ang mga ninuno nila’y kilala bilang mga batikan sa gawaing ito. Mag-iisang gulang pa lamang noon si baldo ng ‘di bumalik mula sa pangangaso ang amang si Enrique. Simula ng mawala ang ama ay tanging ang ina na lamang ang tumayong magulang nito. Ang tanging alam ni Sonia, baka kaya hindi na bumalik ang asawa’y sa kadahilanang nais na nitong maayos lahat at para sa paglaki ng kanilang anak ay magkaroon ito ng maayos at normal na pamumuhay.
Pagkalipas ng mahigit labinwalung taon, hindi parin nagbago ang tingin sa kanila ng mga tao. Si Baldo na ang gumagawa ng dating mga gawain ng ama, sa pagdaan ng panahon ay tanging ang isa’t isa ang nagsilbi nilang sandigan upang magpatuloy na lumaban. Isang gabi ang ‘di inaasahan ni Sonia, nagising ito sa daing ni baldo na sobrang kirot raw ng katawan nito. Pagkarinig sa daing anak, kaagad sumagi sa isip ni Sonia ang minsang pagkakamaling nagawa nito. Noong ‘di na nagbalik ang asawang si Enrique, sinubukan ni Sonia na gamitin ang itim na mahika upang lumikha ng isang nilalang na magtatanggol sa kanila sa kamay ng mga tao. Pinagsamasama ni Sonia ang mga paboritong hayop ni Enrique ng may mga buhay sa isang palayok na may kumukulong kulay berde na likido. Ito’y ang ibon na mataimtim na pinapakinggan ng asawa sa tuwing sasapit ang bukang liwayway; aso na kasakasama nitong mangaso sa kagubatan; pusa na laging sumasalubong sa kanya sa pag-uwe; puting daga na laging kausap sa tuwing ito’y naglilibang: at mga alitaptan na tinatanaw sa tuwing ipipikit ang mga mata sa gabi. Dinasalan ito ni Sonia at nang matapos, tumambad sa kanya ang isang nilalang, ito’y berde at tila isang tubig na nagkokorteng bilog. Tumalon ito patungo sa kinalalagyan ni Baldo at bumalot ito sa katawan ng bata. Nakaramdam ng matinding takot si Sonia ngunit pagkalipas lamang ng ilang segundo’y naglaho ito. Inakala noon ni sonia na walang masamang nangyari ngunit sa ngaun ay bigla itong nagdalawang isip kung ang inakala’y tama nga ba.
Isang kabilugan ng buwan, dinig ni Sonia ang hiyaw ni baldo. Sa pagdaan ng mga oras ay nasaksihan ni Sonia ang anak na nagiging isang mabangis na halimaw, lumabas ang mga matutulis na pangil na kasingbangis ng hayop; buntot na kahawig ng isang daga; mga balahibong singlago ng pusa; mga pakpak na tulad ng ibon; at liwanag nasinghalina ng mga alitaptap tingnan. Tumulo ang luha ni Sonia, sinubukan niya itong lapitan ngunit tumakbo palayo ang anak.
Walang anak na dumating sa paghihintay ni Sonia. Kalunus-lunos ang mga lumipas na araw ni Sonia sa kagustuhang masilayan na ang anak. Kasabay ng pagkawala ni Baldo, tumaas acng bilang mga mangangasong hindi na bumabalik sa kanilang mga pamilya. Muling naibaling ang sisi sa pamilya Krisanto dahil sa isang mangangasong nakaligtas at sugatang bumalik sa baryo mapayapa. Nakita daw nito ang isang malaking ibon na muntik kumitil ng kanyang buhay. Isa raw itong malaking ibon na kulay itim na may apoy na mga pakpak. Nagkaroon raw ito ng pagkakataong makatakas ng biglang dumating ang isang nakakatakot na halimaw na kahawig raw ni baldo.
Samantala, sa isang puno sa gubat ay nakaupo si balbo, nag-iisip at nagtatanong sa sarili kung bakit to nangyayari. S a kabila ng pagdaramdam ni baldo’y muling tumambad sa kanyang harapan ang malaking ibon. Agad siyang umatake ngunit nunahan parin siya nito. Dahil sa lakas nang pagkahampas sa kanya na malaking ibon ay nanghina ito, napagtanto niyang apoy ang kanyang kahinaan, matinding init na maari niyang ikamatay. Si Baldo’y naglalabas rin ng nakakamatay na liwanag na pwede mong ikalusaw pagnatamaan ka nito. Nagulat si Baldo ng bigla siyang kausapin ng malaking ibon, sinabi nitong siya ang kakambal ng amang si Enrique. Siya si Louie, Upang makamtan ang hangaring maghari sa lahat, pinagtangkaan nitong patayin lahat ng kalahi ngunit ito’y nabigo kaya isinumpa ito at ginawang isang nakakatakot na nilalang. Kinukuha niya ang kaluluwa ng bawat taong kanyang mabibiktima at nakabilang rito si Enrique. Ginagawa niya ito sa kagustuhang niang bumalik sa dating anyo dahil ang katumbas ng kaluluwa ng isang tao ay ang isang araw na kabawasan sa tatlong dekadang pagkakasumpa sa kanya bilang isang imortal. Sinabi din ni louie na matatapos lang lahat ng kababalaghang ito pag siya ay nawala ngunit pinabulaanan nitong haharangin niya lahat ng magbabalak na patayin siya. Namuhi si baldo at naglabas ito ng napakainit na liwanag ngunit nakaiwas si louie.
Samantala sa baryo Mapayapa, natanaw ng lahat ang malaking liwanag na nagmula sa kagubatan. Kaagad na tumakbo si Sonia para tuungin at alamin kung ano ang nagaganap sa dito, napagpasyahan din ng mga tagabaryo na sundan ito. Pagdating ng lahat sa gubat, nagulantang ang mga tagabaryo dahil sa nakikitang paglalaban ng dalawang nakakakilabot na mga halimaw sa taas. Halata na sa mga mata ni baldo ang matinding galit,naging dahilan ito para lumabas ang isang malaking liwanag mula sa mga palad. Tumakbo palayo ang lahat sa takot na matamaan. Natamaan ni Baldo ang tiyuhin, ngunit nagsalita ito at nagsabing ihingi na lamang nito ng tawad lahat lahat ng mga taong nagawan niya ng masama. Tumugon naman si baldo at kasabay ng paglipad ng mga abo ng katawan ni louie, lumabas rin ang mga kaluluwang nakangiting nakatingin sa kanya at sa mga maiiwan nilang pamilya. Ginantihan naman ito ng ngiti ng mga tagabaryo na may kasamang mga luha sa kanilang mga mata. Tinawag ni Sonia ang anak ngunit bumagsak ito sa lupu mula sa pagkakalipad mula sa himpapawid.
Nagpakita si Enrique sa anak gamit ang panaginip. Nagpasalamat ito sa taas dahil kahit wala ang kanyang presensiya at gabay niya ay lumaki ang anak na matapang at may busilak na puso. Binilin ni Enrique sa anak na huwag na ‘wag nitong pababayaan ang kanyang sarili at ang kanyang ina. Sa pagmulat ng mga mata ni Baldo, agad nitong nasilayan ang inang si Sonia at sinabi na simula sa pagkakataong ito ay magiging maayos na ang lahat. Pinili ng mag-inang magsimulang muli ng panibagong buhay. Natutunan ng lahat ang isang bagay na huwag nating huhusgan ang isang tao ayon lamang sa nakikita natin, may kasabihan na”,Wag mong husgahan agad kung mahaba at kung mahirap ba tawirin ang isang tulay hangga’t di mo pa naman ‘to nasusubukan..”
Wakas
It was past seven o’clock in the evening and Luke just woke up from his sleep. Hindi na niya kailangang tingnan ang orasan sa bedside table para ikumpirmang gabi na, sapat na ang dillim ng buong silid para patunayan iyon. He lazily got up and head for the window. Hinawi niya ang asul na kurtinang tumatabon doon .Tahimik ang bung kapaligiran at mangilan-ngilan na lamang ang nagdaraang sasakyan. His house was situated atop a hill at kontento na siyang tanawin ang syudad mula doon.The city life infuriate him, ayaw niya sa lahat ng maingay. Lalo pa’t malakas ang resepsyon ng kanyang pandinig kaya umaabot ang ingay mula 5 kilometer radius sa kanya. Kaya naman niyang i-block lahat ng tunog pero kakailanganin niya ng mas maraming konsumpsyon ng dugo. It’s not that he couldn’t afford it when he has all the means to do so, nagiging praktikal lang naman siya. He flexed his shoulders and massage his nape, isang buong araw din siyang nakatulog dahil kailangan niyang mag-ipon ng lakas sa gagawin niyang pagbisita sa nakababatang kapatid na nasa syudad in broad daylight. Hindi bawal sa uri nila ang araw pero iniiwasan nila hanggat maari. Nagiging mas noticeable kasi ang difference nila, with pale skin, lean body, mysterious aura and eyes that change color, tiyak na magtataka ang mga mortal sa appearance nila.
Napailing siya at tahimik na tinungo ang banyo. Hindi na siya nag-abala pang buksan ang ilaw gayong kasing linaw ng vision ng tao sa umaga ang vision ng uri nila. Pagkatapos mag-shower ay nagsuot lamang siya ng jeans at binuksan ang mini ref. Wala iyong laman kundi isang blood bag na wala pa sa kalahati ang laman. He silently cursed. Nakalimutan niyang maglagay ng stock doon. He needed to feed soon at kulangang kakarampot na dugong iyon.Gayunaman ay kinuha na din niya iyon. The scent of blood immediately reached his nose at agad na lumabas ang pangil niya. He popped the blood bag in his teeth habang patuloy siya sa pagbaba ng hagdan. Ramdam niya ang pagbabago ng kulay ng mga mata niya at nakumpirma niya iyon ng nagdaan siya sa parte ng kabahayan na puros glass panelled wall. From gray ay naging lighter pa iyon to the extent na para na iyong nagliliwanag like a predator’s eyes in the dark.
Dumiretso agad siya sa kusina at hinagis sa trash bin ang ngayon ay wala ng lamang blood bag. Bukas ang ilaw doon, siguro ay nakalimutan niyang patayin pag-uwi niya. Nagkibit- balikat siya at ipinagwalang bahala iyon, with another blood bag in mind ay agad siyang kumuha ng isa pa sa ref at without further ado popped it in his teeth.He colsed his eyes, unti-unti ng bumabalik ang lakas niya. Nakakalahati na niya iyon ng may marinig siyang kung anong nabasag. Distant ang dating sa kanya ng tunog dahil na rin sa pleasured pa ang utak niya sa consumption ng dugo. It took him some time para imulat ang mga mata at ipaling ang ulo sa direksyon na pinanggalingan ng tunog. What he saw at the far right corner of the kitchen surprised him. It’s not the shattered glass of pitcher that caught his attention kundi ang nakabasag niyon. Hell, paanong nagkaroon ng maid sa bahay niya. He couldn’t recall ever hiring someone. Mukha namang wala itong balak magtitili, naka- freeze lang ito at nanlalaki ang mga matang nakatingin sa kanya. She’s kind of gorgeous. Ipinilig niya ang ulo, wala siyang panahong i-appreciate ang problema niya. He removed the blood bag from his mouth at matalim na tinitigan ang dalaga. He tried to read her. Madali lang naman solusyunan ang problema, kailangan lang niyang burahin ang memorya nito.But there’s a problem........paano niya buburahin ang memorya nito gayong hindi siya makapasok sa utak nito?
Imposible, he’s 500 years old.......he’s an expert at this stuff!
“Hmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmn!!!” ang tunog na nagmumula sa saradong bibig ng nanganganak na si Alithea, isang taong lobo. Mag-isa sa tabi niya ang kanyang asawang si Santiago, isang vampire. Sila ang mga takdang pagkatapos marinig ang kasaysayan ng mga taong lobo at vampira ay tumakas mula sa kani-kanilang kalahi at ngayo’y nakatira sa isang liblib na lugar.
Nagsimula ang galit ng mga tao sa mga vampira at taong-lobo nang makita nila ang isang kakaibang nilalang na kagat-kagat ang leeg ng isang tao. Dahil nanghihina pa ang nilalang na iyon, nahabol nila ito at pinagtulungang patayin. Sa pag-aakalang wala ng buhay ang vampira, tinapon ito sa ilog. Dinala ng agos ang kanyang katawan sa pampang at ang dugo namn niya’y patuloy pa ring sumusunod sa rumaragasang agos ng tubig. Naamoy ng mga vampire ang buhay ng dugong tumatawag at hinanap kung saan ito nagmumula.
Natagpuan ang naghihikaos na vampira at inalis ang dahilan ng kaniyang panghihina, ang kahoy na matagal nang nakatanim sa kanyang tagiliran. Ayon sa maikling kuwento ng vampire, mag-isa siyang naglayag at napunta sa lugar na walang hayop na maaaring kainin. Hinang-hina na siya dahil sa gutom kaya naman hindi napigilan ng vampire ang kanyang sarili sa mapang-akit na amoy ng dugo ng isang tao at kinagat niya ito. Sa kabila nito, hindi niya napansin ang mga taong papalapit sa kanya at ginawa sa kanya ang ngayo’y kanyang kalagayan. Pagkatapos nito’y unti-unti ng naging abo ang kanyang katawan.
Ang mga ganitong pangyayari’y nagpatuloy dahil na rin sa walang humpay na paghahanap ng mga tao sa mga katulad nila. Sa patuloy na paghahanap ng mga mangangaso, natuklasan din nila ang mga taong-lobo.
Magkasamang inilayo ng mga taong-lobo at vampire ang kanilang tribo sa mga tao. Matagal ang pagkakaibigan ng dalawang lahi ngunit ang pag-ibig para sa kabilang uri ng nilalang ay hindi umuusbong dahil sa simpleng paniniwala na hindi magbubunga ng supling ang ganitong pag-iibigan. Gayunpaman, nagkaroon pa rin ng pagmamahalan sa pagitan ng isang taong lobo at vampire. Sa kabila ng paniniwala ng karamihan, nagbunga pa rin ang pambihirang pagmamahalang iyon at isinilang ang isang natatanging sanggol. Binigyan siya ng pangalang Heremias, simbolo ng pagbabago. Ang pagsisimula ng buhay ng sanggol ay siya rin namang hudyat ng pag-iiba ng prinsipyo ng ilang mga bampira na nakaapekto pa sa ibang miyembro ng angkang kaibigan ng mga taong-lobo.
Sa murang edad ng bata, nakakagawa siya ng mga bagay na natutunan lamang gawin ng isang nilalang kapag ito’y nasa edad ng pagiging kabataan. Kaya naman, siya’y itinuring na pinakamalakas na nilalang na nabuhay sa balat ng lupa. Marahil ay nagmula ang lakas na ito dahil sa pagkakaroon niya ng dugong taong lobo at bampira.
Nais ng mga vampira na hirangin si Heremias bilang pinuno ng dalawang lahi. Sang-ayon ang mga taong lobo sa mungkahing ito subalit higit na natuon sa kanilang atensyon ang nais ng mga bampira na gamitin ang bata sa pamumuno ng giyera laban sa mga tao na siyang patuloy na gumagawa ng paraan upang puksain ang mga bampira at taong lobo. Ngunit kahit anong pilit ng mga bampira na kumbinsihin ang kabilang panig, hindi pa rin binigay ng mga taong lobo ang kanilang pagsang-ayon.
Matibay ang paniniwala ng mga taong lobo- mas malala ang idudulot ng pagsubok kung isasagawa ang nais na paraan ng mga vampira. Ngunit ang kabilang lahi ay di na makapagpigil na sugurin ang mga tao. Mas maraming namamatay na vampira sa kamay ng mga tao. Ang mga taong-lobo’y may dalawang anyo na nagpapahirap sa paghahanap sa kanila ng mga tao samantalang konti lamang sa mga vampira ang may kakayahang mag-anyong paniki.
Dahil sa hindi mabagong kagustuhan ng karamihang vampira, pinutol nila ang kanilang ugnayan sa mga taong-lobo. Lumayo sila at inumpisahan ang unti-unting pagkitil sa mga tao. Hindi lang pagtatanggol sa angkan ang unti-unting nilang naaabot. Natuklasang higit na nagbibigay sa kanila ng lakas ang dugo ng mga tao. Nadagdagan pa ang kanilang layuning pagtatanggol sa lahat ng vampira – kung magkakaroon sila ng malakas na pinuno, maaari na nilang punan ang kanilang pangarap na maging lahing pinakamakapangyarihan.
Lingid sa kaalaman ng mga taong-lobo, dumukot ang mga vampira ng ilan sa mga babae ng kanilang tribo. Ang mga babaeng ito’y ginamit upang magsilang ng mga supling na katulad ng naunang anak ng taong-lobo at vampire ngunit ang hangaring iyo’y hindi natupad. Kung hindi vampira ang isisilang, dugo ng taong-lobo ang higit na mamumutawi sa ugat ng bata.
Sa mga pangyayaring iyon, gumawa ng paraan ang mga vampira na kunin ang musmos pa ring si Heremias sa pangangalaga ng mga taong-lobo. Dahil sa matibay na proteksyon ng taong lobo, ang kagustuhan ng mga vampire ay hindi nangyari kahit na ilang ulit nang binalak ng mga vampira na kunin ang bata.
Minsan na ring sinubukang baguhin ng mga vampire ang isip ng bata subalit ang ganitong paraan ay hindi umubra. Ipinagpatuloy ang dating paraan at nadagdagan pa ang mga buhay na nawala dahil sa labanang iyon. Nagdesisyon na ang mga vampira na maglunsad ng matinding pag-atake.
Nangyari ang labanan. Marami sa mga taong lobo ang namatay at sinunog ang kanilang tirahan. Patuloy na sinundan ng ilang vampire ang itinatakas na si Heremias. Malakas ang mga bantay ng bata kaya naman ang mga vampirang nagbalak humawak sa kaniya’y siguradong mawawalan ng buhay.
Nakalayo na ang mga tumatakas na taong lobo subalit hindi maitatanggi ng distansya na mas dumadami na ang mga vampirang lumalapit sa kanila. Nagtago ang mga taong lobo sa kuweba subalit ang dugong lumalabas mula sa mga sugat ng mga taong-lobo ay hindi nakatakas sa pang-amoy ng mga sumusugod. Nagkaroon muli ng labanan, nakatakas ang ilang mga taong lobo at nawalan na ng magtatanggol sa bata. Sa pagkakataong iyon, bago pa man maabot ng kamay ng isang vampire ang bata, natusok na rin ng sibat ang dibdib ni Heremias. Ang sibat ay hindi galing sa vampira, mula ito sa kamay ng ina ng bata na pagkatapos itapon ang sibat, nagpakamatay na rin.
..........................................“Aaaaaaaaaaaah!!!!!!!” sigaw ng nanganganak na taong lobo. Lumabas na rin ang bata at lumabas na rin sa kanyang lalamunan ang iyak na pumukaw sa pandinig ng mga malalayong vampira at taong lobo. Bumukas ang mata ng isang nilalang na natutulog.............................................
THE MEDIA
Kilala si Leon Saragosa bilang isang mahusay at magiting na mamamahayag sa mundo ng media industry. Trenta\\\\\\\'y sais na ang edad pero maagang nasabak sa kanyang larangan dahil sa hilig niyang magmasid, makibaka para sa mga inaapi, mag-kwento ng mga makabuluhang istorya tungkol sa kalagayan ng bansa at magsulat ng mga napapanahong balita. Sa kanyang murang gulang nakaani na siya ng mga kabi-kabilang parangal mula sa mga award-giving-bodies.
Simpleng tao lang si Leon. Mahilig siyang makinig sa mga opinyon at komento ng iba\\\\\\\'t-ibang tao na nakikinig sa kanyang programa sa radyo araw-araw. Alam niya kung anong mga bagay na ayaw niya at mga nasasang-ayunan niya. Marunong siyang makiramdam sa damdamin ng tao, reaksyon at panahon kaya pati sa paningin at pang-amoy, matalas si Leon. Basta\\\\\\\'t panahon sa pagbabalita at paghahatid ng ulat, nauuna siya sa lahat kaya mabilis ang takbo ng kanyang pag-iisip. “Di nakapagtatakang number one siya palagi.
Dahil sa mga di-pangkaraniwang kakayahan ng brodkaster na ito ay di naman maalis sa kanyang paligid ang mga taong namamangha sa kanya. Tuloy, maraming naiinggit na mga broadcasting networks sa kanyang departamento dahil sa kanyang pagiging “alas” sa kanyang larangan. At maliban pa dito, ay merong isang radio personality na may malaking panibugho sa kanyang pagkatao----si Edwin Mallari.
Halos ramdam ni Edwin ang napakatinding pagkaiinggit kay Leon kung kelan pa naaabutan niyang maraming karangalang natatanggap ang kilalang mediaman sa kanilang istasyon. Maraming bumibilib kay Leon na mga kasamahan nito at samahan pa ng mga hiyawan at palakpakan sa kanyang mga mahuhusay na nagawa sa kanilang news department.
Di naman mapigilan ni Edwin na mainis at ma-high blood sa kanyang mga nakitang pangyayari sa buhay ni Leon sa loob man o sa labas ng opisina. Habang nakikita niya ang pagmumukha ni Leon, para siyang natatalo sa kanyang larangan bilang isang brodkaster batay sa kanyang paniniwalang may kompetisyon sa pagitan nilang dalawa. Napapansin ni Edwin na nasisira ang kanyang mga diskarte pagdating sa paggawa ng kanyang trabaho bilang isang mamamahayag rin. “Di ko ito matatanggap!” bulong pa niya sa kanyang sarili.
Hanggang isang gabi. Katatapos lang ng programa ni Leon sa radyo at mabilis na itong nagpaalam sa mga kasamahan niya sa opisina sa istasyon. Tila nagmamadali si Leon na makaalis para siguro sa kanyang importanteng lakad. Naroon naman si Edwin sa di kalayuan at aktong sundan si Leon sa lakad nito. Tila may gusto siyang alamin tungkol sa pagkatao ni Leon para kahit papaano\\\\\\\'y may kunti siyang matutuklasan tungkol sa kanyang mga sikretong lakad at ginagawa.
Sumakay si Leon sa elevator na halatang nagmamadali. Nakita naman ni Edwin ang pagsakay ni Leon at pansin niyang pababa ito ng 2nd floor mula sa 4th floor ng gusali ng kanilang istasyon.
Biglang nagtaka si Edwin. Bakit pa bababa hanggang sa 2nd floor si Leon kung aalis na ito\\\\\\\'t nagmamadali? Naisip niyang meron pa siguro siyang puntahan doon na mga opisina at kakausaping mga personalidad.
Ganun na rin si Edwin. Sakay sa kabilang elevator at pababa rin hanggang sa 2nd floor. Plano niyang sundan kahit saan man magpunta si Leon para alamin ang paniwala niyang tinatagong sikreto ng magaling na brodkaster.
Ilang segundo pa\\\\\\\'y nasa 2nd floor na si Leon at paglabas ng elevator ay bigla siyang huminto sa paglalakad. Nakatayo siya sa gitna ng pasilyo bitbit ang kanyang mga libro na may kasama pang mga news papers at magazines sa kanyang kaliwang kamay.
Sakto namang palabas na si Edwin sa pintuan ng elevator at naabutan niya si Leon na nakatayo\\\\\\\'t nakatalikod. Nagulat naman siya at biglang kinabahan na baka mapansin ni Leon ang kanyang pagsunod sa kanyang likuran.
Timing naman kay Leon na magpatuloy sa paglalakad papuntang comfort room. Sasadya pa palang mag-CR ito bago tuluyang umalis sa gusali.
Sikreto namang sumunod nang napakatahimik si Edwin na umaasang may makukuhang impormasyon tungkol sa pagiging kakaiba ni Leon sa lahat. Balak niyang mag-imbestiga sa mga sikretong ginagawa ng mahusay na brodkaster sa kabila ng kanyang pagiging una sa lahat ng bagay. Baka kasi may makukuha siyang tip na pwede niyang i-aplay at gayahin mula sa kanya.
Pumasok na si Leon sa men\\\\\\\'s comfort room. Ilang segundo naman tahimik na pumasok na rin si Edwin para sa kanyang motibo.
Tahimik ang comfort room. Parang walang tao. Wala kang mapapansing karakas o humihingang tao sa loob ng mga cubicle ng comfort room. Paniwala naman si Edwin na may tao talaga sa loob kahit si Leon pa ang nag-iisang nag-CR kasi sa nakita niyang pagpasok nito bago siya sumunod.
Nasaan kaya si Leon? Imposible namang lumabas na ito kasi masasapul sana niyang paalis ito ng comfort room bago siya pumasok nang palihim.
Muli na naman kinabahan si Edwin na parang may kuryenteng pumapasok sa kanyang katawan. Mabilis naman ang tibok ng kanyang puso at nagsisilabasan ang makakapal na pawis nito. \\\\\\\'Di kaya siya takot? Saan naman kaya siya natatakot? Iba naman ang biglang pumasok nito sa kanyang isip.
Dahan-dahan naman niyang nilalabanan ang ganung takot na iyon na di maintindihan kung bakit nararamdaman niya iyon. Naisip niyang isa-isahing inspeksyunin ang mga cubicle hanggang sa oras na para buksan ng dahan-dahan ang pinto ng pinakahuling cubicle.
Nanginginig ang kamay ni Edwin na abutin ang pinto ng final cubicle na iyon. Dito may takot na siyang buksan ito. Isa na lang kasi ang di pa niya nabuksan at halos lahat ng mga cubicle walang tao. Kung wala si Leon dito sa panghuling cubicle, isa nang malaking imposible na ito!
Pagulat niyang tinulak pabukas ang cubicle na iyon at laking gulat na rin niyang walang tao ang cubicle na yun. Wala si....LEON SARAGOSA!
Lalong bumilis ang pintig ng kanyang dibdib. Kaduda-duda! Walang tao lahat nang cubicle sa loob ng men\\\\\\\'s comfort room....Pero nasaan na si Leon? Ni hindi niya nakitang lumabas ito ng banyo?
Dali-dali siyang lumayo sa lugar na iyon. Mabilis ang kanyang kilos para itigil na ang motibo nitong alamin ang pagkatao ni Leon. Lumabas siya ng men\\\\\\\'s comfort room na takot na takot.
Ngunit sa kanyang paglabas ay lalo siyang nasindak sa kanyang nakita.
Isang nilalang ang nasa labas pala na animo\\\\\\\'y naghihintay kay Edwin na lumabas ng CR. Mabangis. May pangil. Anyong parang malaking aso pero mas mabangis pang tingnan kumpara sa isang matapang na aso. Naninilaw ang mata at matutulis ang mga tingin nito sa kanya.
Isang lobo!
At sa kabuuang ito, si Leon Saragosa ay isang taong lobo na matagal nang itinatago ang tunay nitong pagkatao.
-end-
tungkol ito sa kwento ng tatlong estudyante na sina irukawa,yuya at koda madalas silang nag kukwentuhan tungkol sa mga bayarin nila at nang sumapit ang gabi...Ay may nag pakita sa kanilang mga panaginip yun ay si angel of spirits.At bumaba sila sa kani kanilang kwarto na medyo na ta taranta dahil sa nakita nila sa kanilang panaginip,Pinag usapan nila ang tungkol sa panaginip nila at laking gulat nang matuklasan nilang iisa silang tatlo ng mga panaginip....pero para kay irukawa at koda ay hindi na imposible yon dahil ang mga pinang galingan nila ay dalawa sa mga lahing nag lalaban saDARK WORLD.Pero sa kabila noon ay naging mag kaibigan sila,Pero para kay yuya ay hindi yon kapanipaniwala dahil isa lang siyang ordinaryong tao..Gayun paman ay silang tatlo lang ang nakaka alam ng mga pagkatao nila,Pero isang tao ang nag patigil ng kanilang usapan yun ay si angel of spirits. Laking gulat nila ng makita nila sa personal ang taong ibon na nasa kanilang mga panaginip kanikanina lamang,Tinanong sila ng angel of spirits kung maaari ba silang sumama sa kanya upang maging mga spirit capturer.At hindi naglaon ay naging spirit capturer nga sila,Ang mga manunugis ng mga dark spirits sa dark world. Nag ensayo sila upang maging mahusay na spirit capturer,At nag karoon ng maraming kalaban.Pero isang sikreto ang nag pabago ng kanilang samahan kay angel of spirits,Yun ay ang sikreto nila koda at irukawa....Nang malaman ni angel of spirits na kabilang si irukawa sa lahi ng mga masasamang ispiritu ng lobo,At kabilang naman sa masasamang lahi ng bampira si koda ay agad niya itong ipatugis sa mga ibang spirit capturer at nagdulot ito ng malaking digmaan sa pagitan ng mga spirit capturer,bampira at taong lobo. Pero ipinakita ni koda at irukawa na hindi rin sila kakampi ng mga lahing pinagmulan nila,At tila namulat ang mata ni angel of spirits. Kaya mag mula noon ay wala nang namagitang digmaan sa kanila. -THE END-
Ngayong araw na ito isasagawa ang camp ng seksyong III-J.P.A.. Lahat ay handa na,halos lahat rin ng mga kasama sa camp ay naroon na.. nag sasayawan sila at nag kakantahan..
Sa isang sulok naman naroon si gillian, nakamasid lamang at nainom ng juice sa isang pack.. Masama ang tingin nito sa mga kapwa estudyante... tumayo siya at lumabas, naiwang nagsasaya ang mga estudyante.. ang hindi nila alam may mga matang nakamasid sa kanila, mapupula at nanlilisik na animoy halimaw.. lingid ito sa kaalaman ng mga nag sasayang estudyante...
makalipas ang ilang oras sanhi ng pagod nagpahinga ang mga ito at kapwa nakaub-ob sa desk at natutulog na..
naalimpungatan ang isa sa mga estudyante na si aldrin at lumabas ng room, maya-maya pa\\\'y nakarinig ng sigaw ang mga estudyante.. nagising ang mga ito at hinanap ang pinanggalingan ng sigaw.
dahil na nga sa utos ng guro nag labasan lahat ng estudyante para hanapin ang sumigaw kanya kanya sila ng lugar na pinaghahanapan..
pero sa kalagitnaan ng paghahanap nila iba ang nahanap nila,sahalip na ang taong sumigaw ang mahanap nila isang nanlilisik na mga bampira ang tumambad sa unahan nila.
nag panic sila, may sumisigaw at may mga tumakbo na pero hindi sapat ang kanilang bilis para makatakas at makaligtas isa isang nilapa ng mga bampira ang mga estudyante hindi makalabas ang mga ito sa school dahil nakasara lahat ng puwedeng daanan nila...
duguan ang bawat pasilyo...
nagtatago naman sa loob ng library sina jelo, rustom, at peter na may mga hawak na pat pat... sila na lang lima ang natitira sa lahat ng estudyante..
halos mapatakip sila ng bibig ng marinig ang pagbukas ng pinto.. Hinanda nila ang kanilang mga sarili...
halos mapasigaw sila ng biglang matanggal ang takip na tumatakip sa kanila at ang mabilis na paglapit sa kanila ng mga ito, kasabay nito ay ang pag kagat ng mga ito sa kanilang leeg at ang pag tigil ng tibok ng kanilang puso....
mabilis na umalis ang mga bampira na kasama na ang isa sa mga estudyante na si gillian.....
_END_
Super power, we always dream of having one. In times of depression, struggle or just simply bored, we wish to have these super powers like walking over water, flying, reading someone else’s thoughts, going back to the past, teleporting, or moving things. We all know that this cannot be possible. But there are mysteries in our lives that cannot be explained just like “déjà vu” where we experience the feeling that we have witnessed or experienced a situation previously.
We all think that we know everything in this world, but unfortunately we all have limitations. Limitations like we only use 10% of our brain. If you already knew this fact then I bet you have asked yourselves this question, “What will happen if we use the other 90% of our brain?” Funny it may sound but I know a person who had used some percentage of his brain. I don’t know how much percentage he used. The numbers are too high because we cannot really calculate a percentage of infinity. I am that person, Stephen James Cadavis, the man that you can’t find in your history books, the man called God.
I was once a vice president of Christopher Knoles’ company, Francis’ father. Francis and I became best friends since second grade. Our families were close and I was like a son to his father. Recently, after his father’s unexplained death, he became the owner of the business. But things begun to change after a friend of mine and I had a car accident. We were having fun that night. All of a sudden, a guy crossed the street and I hit the brakes. Unfortunately, the brakes were not functioning and I lost control of the car. To avoid flipping over, I forced the car to run on a light post. As the car hit the light post, I thought it’s going to be ok somehow but, unluckily, the force of the impact snapped my seatbelt. I flew out of the car from the windshield and to the pavement. I landed with my head first and rolled a couple of meters. The last thing I saw was leaving her inside. I even saw a car that stopped but it took off immediately. Then all of a sudden, the car exploded. There was nothing I could do to help her get out of that flaming hell. I just watched her in tears as she struggled for her life. Then abruptly, darkness took me. I felt cold and dead. It was so quiet and I was alone.
The horrible accident kept on repeating in my head. I kept on seeing her burning and hearing her screaming as I bled to death. Then a burst of light suddenly appeared from the shadows. The light hurt my eyes. But as I slowly opened my eyes, everything was blurry. Then a voice was fading in. It’s a very familiar voice. I called her name, “Kyle”. At that moment, I discovered that it was not. It was the nurse. She ran out and called the doctor and my loved ones. Everybody was there except her. My mother approached on my rest bed and she told me, “Welcome back, darling. Our prayers are answered.” “Am I just dreaming?”, I asked her. “No. You are not dreaming.”, she answered and gently kissed my bandaged forehead. “Where is Kyle?”, I asked her. “She is gone. I am sorry darling.”, she answered anxiously. She held my hand as I cried. The doctor suddenly entered the scene and told everybody to let me rest for awhile.During that night, I dreamt about her again. I woke up screaming from a terrible nightmare. The same nurse that I saw earlier and my mother rushed on to check on me. Then, I realized that I couldn’t move my legs. I asked them what happened to me and why I couldn’t move them. The nurse told me that my body was badly hurt leaving me paraplegic from the tragic accident. “Mom, will I ever walk again?”, I asked my mother. She said, “Yes. There is still hope, James.”
The next day, I woke up seeing the suite room surrounded with fruits and flowers. It was like “Garden of Eden”. My mother told me that most of them came from Francis, my best friend. I asked her where Francis was. She said that he went to school to tell everybody the good news. “He is really a nice friend.”, I said. “How long was I sleeping?”, I asked her. “It’s been a week.”, she replied. “James, I will go home for awhile to change. Don’t worry, Candice is your private nurse and she is here to assist you. Ok?”, she added and left. I was left alone with Candice in the cozy room.
Then minutes later, she went out for awhile. I was thirsty from waiting for my mom to return and too stubborn not to call for Candice to help me. So, I tried to push my back up to reach for the glass of water over the desk at the right side of my bed. As I struggled on reaching for it, a strange thing happened. The glass moved. Disbelieving from what I had seen, I tried to do it again. I focused so hard on trying to move it but this time it flew straight to my face. I was afraid that it might hit my head and it made me close my eyes. I raised my hands to block it but, surprisingly, nothing happened. I opened my eyes and there I noticed the glass was floating in front of me. I was amazed from what I witnessed. Then suddenly, Candice went inside the room and I immediately held the glass. “What are you doing?”, she asked. “What? Oh! I am just thirsty.”, I replied. “You should have called me.”, she said and went near me.
From that day on, I secretly started practicing this new discovery. Yet it was no longer been a secret until Candice confronted me. While she was assisting me for my first exercise to walk again and my first time to step out the room, she asked me a very unusual question. “Something is bothering me, Mr. Cadavis. And I really want to know this from you.”, she said. “What is it all about?”, I responded. “I saw you the other day. You were playing with your lunch. How did you do that?”, she said. “What’s unusual with that, Ms. Tan?”, I asked confusedly. “The utensils were floating. Now, tell me. Is that what you could ordinary?”, she said. I was surprised and I didn’t know how to respond. I sat down on the floor and asked her. “Have you told anyone about this?” “No.”, she replied. “But… Why?”, I asked her again. “Because I see goodness in you.”, she said and smiled at me. She helped me stood up and took me to my room. I don’t know if I should trust her, but I felt good enough with her. Since my mother was busy with her work, Candice had been there for me every day and she took care of me. As we were about to reach the room, I kept on noticing these two policemen standing next to the door of the room where I was staying. I asked her what was really going on but she was not authorized to tell me. I was really puzzled. As we were in the room, I picked up the phone and called my mother. I tried to ask her about the two policemen outside my room. What my mother said stunned me, “I am not sure if are ready to hear this. What happened with you and Kyle was not just an accident. It was a planned accident.” “What are you talking about, Mom? You are saying that someone wanted to kill Kyle and I!?”, I said as I was shocked about what I’ve just heard. She said that the investigation was still going on.
That night, I kept on thinking on who might be the person who wanted me dead. I looked at my fist and said, “He already killed the most important girl of my life. Whoever he is, I will surely find out. I am going to use my new skills. I will make him pay.”
Three months have passed and many things had happened. Like when I was working out my legs with Candice, I suddenly felt a tingling sensation in my head. I foresaw a guy and he jumped on me. He tried to choke me to death. After foreseeing it, I knelt down and I was in pain. My nose bled and Candice helped me. She sat me on a nearby bench and called the doctor. “What happen?”, she asked. “Saw a guy and I was trying to kill me.”, I said. “What does he look like?”, she continued asking. “He was wearing blue shirt and jeans. I can’t tell who he was. It was not that detailed.”, I said. As I was sitting down near the nurses’ station, I looked at the hallway where I saw the guy. Then Gary, Kyle’s brother, showed up. He wore the same clothing like the guy that I foresaw. He saw me and he quickly approached me. Candice noticed him too. I stood up but then he ran towards me. Candice stopped him and called the guards but Gary was so strong. He pushed her to the floor and jumped on me. He tried to choke me. “You killed my sister.”, he shouted. Candice stood up and picked my cane. She hit his head so hard and broke the cane. He fell unconscious on the flooring. Candice saved my life that day. My skills were not helpful as I thought it would. Gary was taken by the police to jail. I was so confused even when I got out of the hospital. “Gary could be the person who wanted to kill me.”, I said to myself.
I was home and nothing has change except me. Candice and I became good friends while Gary was under investigation. Suddenly, a news came to me that Gary was mentally deranged when he attacked me. The death of Kyle caused him his insanity. The investigator could not tell if he was the killer because of his condition. Maybe it’s all up to me to find the truth. Even though the doctor suggested that I would not abuse myself and my mind because I am still under a 3-month-observation, I would still practice hard to improve these cool capabilities I have.
The next morning, loud conversations woke me. I couldn’t figure out where those voices came from until I focused on one of the voices. The other voices faded away. I picked my cane and followed the voice. It was so familiar. Eventually, I found the source of the voice. It came from my mother. I heard that she was looking for her keys and I tried to look for it. I found her keys under the sofa and I immediately gave it to her. “Mom, I got your keys.”, I said. “How did you know I am looking for it?”, she asked. “I heard that you were looking for it.”, I replied. “Heard? I wasn’t even saying anything.”, she said. I really heard her voice. “I really need to go.” She added and kissed on my forehead.
Few hours later, Francis came to visit me. We went to the kitchen where I gave him a drink. He said he sensed that there were some changes in me. “Whatever it is that you are sensing, ignore it.”, I told him. “Are you hiding something from me?”, he said. Since he was my best friend, I didn’t hesitate to tell him everything. He was shocked and did not believe everything that I said until I lifted my hand and pointed at the spoon. “Look what happens to the spoon.”, I said. With enough concentration, I made the spoon stood up and float. He stood up and scrutinized the floating spoon. He repetitively shook his left hand under and above the spoon expecting for a string or trick. “This can’t be possible.”, he said. “It’s difficult but not impossible.”, I replied. “So magic is really?”, he added. “I don’t know. Maybe.”, I said. “What else can you do?”, he asked. “I can somehow foresee my future and I kinda hear or read thoughts.”, I replied. “Really? You can read thoughts. So, you can read mine?”, Francis uttered and walked near me. “I can try.”, I said. So, I empty my mind and focused on his thoughts. But it’s difficult than I thought. “I am sorry. I just can’t I just discovered it just this morning.”, I apologized to him. “It’s ok. It’s better that way. I don’t want you to try that ability to me. It’s an act of violating my privacy or anyone’s privacy.”, he said. I agreed but I had already planned that I am going to improve this ability so that I would know who was behind that car accident.
The whole Saturday morning, Francis and I were having fun of experimenting with my abilities especially my ability to move and float things. Then, he thought of the coolest idea. “If you can float anything around you, it means you can float yourself.”, he said. I tried the idea and amazingly it worked. I was floating around the kitchen. Then another cool idea came in. “We could make money out of this. I will make you famous. You’ll be a hired superhero and I will be your manager.”, he said. “I rather do it for free.”, I said. He sighed and said, “What about me? I am your best friend. I don’t want to be left behind again. I don’t want that you are the only one who is having fun.” “Left behind again? Ok. You know what? I will teach you the stuffs I know. How’s that?”, I said and he smiled. “That might work.”, he said.
Every afternoon, Francis went to my house and there we planned on the things superheroes needed, like costumes, superhero names, etc. I named myself as “Omniman” and he named himself as “Apex Lass”. But there was one problem; he had difficulties on learning these powers. He told me that he didn’t need to have powers like mine to help other people. And after a month, we became famous and everybody was calling and mentioning our names. We saved people and that’s what superheroes do. But I would never forget what’s my main purpose and that’ to find out the person who’s behind Kyle’s death.
One day, Candice came to my house to check on me. I never told Candice about my new capabilities. I kept it a secret from her. Yet, since these two famous superhero crime-fighting characters came up in the public, she directly confronted me about it. “Are you the person who they called, ‘Omniman’? And, who is this ‘Apex Lass’?”, she said. I didn’t utter any word about it and change the topic. “Don’t change the subject, Stephen. We both know you are not 100% well. You are still under observation. This could complicate your condition.”, she said. I knew at that moment that she care for me but I suddenly heard her thoughts. “If you only knew, I have already fallen for you.” I was curious and asked myself, “Why am I so blind to see this? This can’t be.” I felt so glad to know that she was falling for me since I have felt the same for her. But the problem was I don’t want her to be involved in this situation. I ignored that thought that she was in love with me. I don’t want to lose another important person in my life. I never told Candice about the superhero stuffs. She was so mad at me and I never heard a single news from her the next day.
I tried to control myself to ignore my feelings for her. I still had a much bigger fish to fry. Every night, Francis and I went out to protect the city. With Francis first class equipments and his intelligent mind, he became a very powerful ally of mine. But one night, while I was flying above the city and Francis was tailing me behind with his motorcycle, I saw a vision. I lost my concentration on flying and I fell in a fast free fall. I had no idea what’s vision about but I tried to bring my mind set on stopping myself from falling. I halted my fall and hide in a dark alley. I kept reminiscing the vision. And, I saw my mother burning. I told Francis about it and we hurriedly went to my house. There I saw my mother’s car. But, as I was few meters from the door, the house blew up. The shockwave of the explosion blew me away and hit my mother’s car.
I was out of conscious after I hit the car. I could not save the important people of my life. I hated the feeling that even I already had powers couldn’t save my loved ones. In the darkness of my sub consciousness, I saw Kyle and my mother. They were pointing on a silhouette casted by a person wearing a nurse suit. It was Candice. I was puzzled why Candice was in my vision. Then I heard Candice voice and asked me, “If you are about to choose a path, which path will you choose? Is it to die as a hero or to live and see yourself becoming a monster?”
Then suddenly I woke up but my hands were tied up. I felt so dizzy and everything’s so blurry. I was drugged and isolated in a small room. “Why? Why are you doing this to me?”, I said. Afterwards, lights surrounded me and a silhouette was formed. “Blame yourself.”, a mysterious voice echoed around the room. “Candice? Is that you? Why?”, I uttered. “It seems that the drug was working very well. You can’t even read the thoughts of the person you are talking to.”, the mysterious person said. “Are you looking for Candice? Well, she is in front of you.”, the stranger added. And the eye hurting light faded and exposed Candice before me.
I felt even weaker when I saw her strapped standing on a pole surrounded with C4s. “Stop this! Whoever you are, please, stop this!”, I shouted. “I want you to witness everyone you love – die in front of you. I want you to feel what I feel when I lost everything that I have. My father showed you love and care, treated you like his own son. Do you know what’s even more hurting? I saw his last will and testament and it said that he will give you the biggest part of the company since I am not that deserving.”, he said. “Francis?”, I hesitantly said. “Finally! You have figured it out.”, he slightly laughed. “I don’t need powers like you have to bring you down. And you might ask what took me so long to kill you. Well, I thought that letting you live longer and see the day you suffer is better than seeing you dead and at peace.”, he said. “You animal!”, I shouted and struggled to be free from the tight bonds that strapped around my body. “The drugs that I injected to you is strong enough to forced you not to use your powers. Too sad, you are the only person in this world that has this capabilities and the world will never know who you really are.”, he said. “I will kill you, Francis! Arrgh!”, I shouted. “I have witnessed the death of Kyle. Oh, I was there. I knew that you saw a car that night. And… I was there when you saw your mother died. Now, any minute now, you will die with her and I no longer need to witness this one.”, he laughed. “It was so amazing. I am the only person who you can’t read what I have in mind. God is at my side. Enjoy the fireworks, Omniman.”, he added.
I moved violently to break the bonds that were stopping me from saving her. I burst with tears and said, “Why can’t I save the people I love?” “Stephen. I am sorry. He tricked me.”, Candice said. “Candice, everything will be ok. Alright?”, I said. “I will find a way. I will save us both.”, I added. “You are too weak. Your brain could not handle the pressure if you force to use your powers.”, she said. “Before we die… I want you to know that I love you.”, she cried. “No! We are not going to die.”, I said. There are a few seconds left. Then, suddenly, a pushed of adrenaline along with anger and the will to live fueled me up. The bonds that were leashed around me broke. I stood up and a very powerful aura surrounded my body. I release Candice and smashed the ceiling with a very immense air pressure. I flew her out before the explosives explode. I flew to a hospital and safely left her there but she was unconscious.
My rage perked up my senses and led me to Francis. I saw from a far that he already prepared an army to face my wrath. He is an extortionist of his wealth. Affluence would not help him when he’s facing his own Armageddon. One of his men saw me approaching and they rained me with their heat seeking missiles. They were too easy to manipulate. I changed the projectile’s direction and directed them to Francis men. The place instantly turned in to hell. Men were shouting. Their bodies were torn apart and most were burned alive. I glide over the dead cadavers and went straight to the place where Francis was hiding. I blew up a whole on his mansions flooring. It’s where his father’s secret chamber was built.
The explosion might get the local authorities attention. So, I needed to make this vengeance quickly done. I slithered down the narrow hall way that’s leading to the secret chamber. It was filled with Francis’ men. They started shooting but I managed to bend the air quickly and made a force field out of it. The bullets just bounced from the field of energy. A fierce gesture from my hand changed Francis’ men molecular composition. Every electrolyte from their body ignited and made them walking time bombs. And, the hall way became a river of blood as Francis’ men blew up.
I have reached the heavy locked metal entrance. With a blink of an eye, the vault door clobbered. There I was him with cold sweat oozed out of his body. “Do you fear death?”, I said. Terrified as he looked, he still managed to pull the trigger and tried to shoot me. I halted all the bullets. He ran out of options when he shot all of the bullets from his gun’s magazine. I hovered towards him and I sensed fear that’s compelling him. “Now, I am the one who is going to enjoy seeing you suffer.”, I said. I took control of his body and took all the air from his lungs. “I can read your mind now. You are a liar, a traitor, and a monster. You are the one who killed your father. You choked him to death when you forced him to change his last will and testament. Your insanity took away almost every precious thing in my life. Now, you will pay for all of this wickedness.”, I strongly uttered. By producing heat on my palm along with the existence of fat oil in my body as fuel and the oxygen surrounding the chamber, I created fire and uttered, “You see. God is no longer at your side… For I am… God!”As I was about to burn him alive, I heard Candice voice. “Stop! Stephen, stop this!”, she shouted. I looked back at the entrance and I saw here there standing with some local authorities. “Put him down. Now!”, one of the officer said. “Put him down, Stephen. If you kill him, you were not so different from him. Don’t be a monster like him. Come back to me, Stephen.”, she cried. My raging eye that was filled with retribution vanished.
I dropped on the floor and everything strength I had disappeared along with the fury. She hurriedly rushed and grabbed hold of me. She was shaking in fear as she saw some blood streaming out of my nose, ears and mouth. I have over used my brain and this might cause my life. The local authorities took away Francis in to custody.
Days have passed after that incident in the Knoles’ Mansion, Francis was sentenced a lifetime imprisonment. But since there were signs of psychosis seen in him, he was transferred to a mental institution. It is the same institution where Gary was detent. After knowing that Francis was the one who is responsible for Kyle’s death, Gary secretly attacked Francis and killed him. As for me, I didn’t lose every power that I have. Using more than 10% of my brain’s activity caused alterations with my body functions. Any increase means a disturbance, and in any disturbance, the body compensates negatively. And unfortunately, my life was cut short. Because of the happening in the Knoles’ Mansion, my brain was extremely abused. I have a brain cancer.
We would not get something good from vengeance. It led me to my timed death. Now, I am spending my last months with Candice. I am hoping that my love for her will keep me alive. I have done everything to delay my death, but the more I used my powers the lesser will be my time to stay with her. I am not ready to leave her but death is inevitable this time. So, this time, I will not die as a monster but as a hero in her eyes.
ORIGINAL POST:
[http://www.facebook.com/note.php?note_id=123035684416241]
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a1.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/259875_206813772695652_133447486698948_545343_7965921_n.jpg\\"\")
Life As I Know It
They say life is full surprises. Well, mine is more than that. You see, my life is kind of a different from any one of you. I can make the impossible possible. Have you ever dreamed or wished that you can fly, know what people thinks, and control or move the things around you? Believe it or not, I can do them all and I was once a superhero of the city of Woodrich. But all of these powers were lost for I am sick. I have a brain cancer and, whenever I use my powers, it makes things worst and, possibly, kills me. Now that my powers were all gone, I have been living the rest of my life with Candice.
Days ago, I live a life filled with tragedy. 2 of my closest friends and my mom died during those years. I was the one to be blame for their death. Every night I dreamt of them. It was a nightmare. Since the day of the incident at Knoles’ mansion, the local authorities kept on investigating on what they saw that night, on how I possibly did all of those impossible dreams. They kept questioning on how I am related to the superhero, Omniman. My cover was blown and I need to do something. Secretly, I brain washed everyone involved and who saw me that night. I used my powers for the last time and erased all of their memories on that night. It was successful, but it greatly affected my health.
After the incident at the Knoles’ mansion and with the closing of Knoles’ business, Luther D. Freeman, a businessman who’s in to medicine, bought their establishment. He made it a laboratory and a hospital at the same time. MedEx, that’s the name of his business. They said his doctors are the best in the world and that’s why Candice convinced me to see if they can cure me.
I stayed there for almost 2 months. I have grown weaker and weaker as each day passed. But the doctors were too eager to help me to get well. Candice, on the other hand, was working all day long and she’s only visiting me at night but for only two hours. She said that she must work double time so that she can help me pay the bills in the hospital. I am lucky enough to have her in my life. I love her so much and I know she loves me more.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a4.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/253801_206813899362306_133447486698948_545344_6546815_n.jpg\\"\")
Just Another Bad Dream
One night, while I was sleeping, I dreamt of my best friend, Francis Knoles. He was trying to choke me to death and I can’t do anything. Then everything turned dark. Suddenly, I heard a voice in the pitch black darkness. “Open not only your eyes but also your heart and mind.” I don’t know what he meant but I know that voice. It’s Gary’s. I woke up in the middle of the night from that nightmare and I was puzzled. Why would I dreamt about Gary and what was that all about? I tried to figure it out but, eventually, it just made my head ached.
The next day, Mr. Freeman visited my ward along with a doctor. He greeted me nicely and said, “Good morning, Mr. Cadavis. How are you feeling today?” “I’m feeling a bit well today Mr. Freeman.”, I replied. “Good. By the way, meet your new doctor, Dr. Gonzales.”, he said. “Don’t worry, Candice and I talked about it and she’s ok with it. Besides, I wanted you to have the best treatment in my hospital.”, he further explained. I was speechless and felt so lucky. “Th-thank you. I don’t know what to say.”, I said. “You’re welcome.”, he replied and smiled. He walked out the room and Dr. Gonzales nicely approached me and started taking samples of my blood.
It was very long and lonely day just like all of the previous days. Since the day Candice started to work day and night, days have been like this. I missed her so much. I hope she felt the same way too. She hasn’t been visiting me for couple of weeks now. Where could she be? What happened to her? I was getting worried already.
One day, while Dr. Gonzales is preparing for my radiation therapy, he was asking about how I feel. “Quite ok. Well, you see, I have these dreams from the past. Well most of them were from the past.”, I replied. “Someone’s chocking me. Then I blacked out. Then one of my friends told me to open my heart and mind not just my eyes.”, I added. “Dreams? I see. I am not a dream interpreter but dreams must not be ignored. Sometimes they will show you what will happen or they will just tell you how you’re feeling while you’re sleeping.”, he replied. “Look, I can’t help you with your dreams but I can help you to be cured. So, let’s start our therapy.”, he said and smiled.
The therapy was not that long but I felt a little bit strange whenever it was done. It was like, something was a mess inside my head. I felt like something was moving. I tried to relax and empted my thoughts. I took a deep breath and closed my eyes. Then suddenly, I heard voices. “What’s going on? Now, I am hearing voices.”, I said to myself. Two of the voices were familiar. It sounded like they were chatting. “We found what we were looking for. He is the one. If he concentrates more on healing himself, he can destroy the cancer cells in his brain. He is that powerful, Sir.”, one of the familiar voices echoed. “We will have a medical breakthrough because of him. Take a sample of Mr. Cadavis\\\' DNA.”, the other voices echoed. Upon hearing my name, I figured out that the two voices came from Dr. Gonzales and Mr. Freeman. I know what they are up to. They knew something about me and that’s why they were keeping me here for quite too long.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a6.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/254475_206813982695631_133447486698948_545345_2936787_n.jpg\\"\")
Not A Chance
I stood up and get off my bed. I was a little woozy but I needed to get out of this hospital and find Candice. As I get out of my room, there were guards standing on the both sides of the door. “Where do you think you’re going Mr. Cadavis?”, one of the guards said and held my shoulder. “Let go of me!”, I uttered and shove off his hand form my shoulder. “We’ve got orders to follow. You need to stay inside or else we will force you to.”, the other guard said while blocking my path. Dr. Gonzales suddenly came at the scene and asked, “What’s going on? And why is Mr. Cadavis out of his room?” “He wants to go out doctor.”, the guard said. “Is that so? Well unfortunately, Mr. Cadavis, I won’t allow you to go out of the hospital in your present condition.”, he uttered. “I am not a prisoner here! I know what you’re planning to do with me. I won’t allow you to do that to me. So let me go!”, I shouted. “Now, now, Mr. Cadavis. It’s better if we you will go back inside your ward and let’s talk about this tomorrow.”, he suggested. The guards grabbed me and tried to put me back inside the ward. “Let go of me!”, I shouted furiously as pushed away the guards. The guards stumbled on the floor but swiftly stood up and they were still forcing me to go inside the ward. Dr. Gonzales ordered them to hold me tightly as he pulled out a syringe. “No! You can’t do this to me!”, I shouted and violently escaping from the guards grip. “Hold him down. I’ve been nice to you Mr. Cadavis but you need to control yourself.”, Dr. Gonzaels uttered. The minute the needle of the syringe touched the skin of my neck, a huge force field wrapped around my body. The needle bent and the grip of the guards were loosening. an explosion.
Dr. Gonzales and the guards’ bodies were ripped off and flew everywhere. I get dizzier because of that but my eagerness to escape made me to stay conscious. The explosion triggered the alarm and now they were after me. Ever hall of the hospital I crossed were filled with security guards armed with heavy artillery. “Halt right there Mr. Cadavis!”, one of the guards shouted. Now, both ends of the hallway were surrounded with guards. How can I possibly escape in this condition?
Four of the guards walked towards me and one was carrying hand-cuffs. “Mr. Cadavis, this is for your own good.”, the guard with the hand-cuffs said while moving closer towards me. “No! Step away from my path. You will not get what you want from me! Not a chance!”, I roared as I raised my hands trying to create the same energy that I made earlier. But this time, I don’t want to kill anyone of them because what happened previously was an accident. I am now endangering myself but I need to escape. I intensely wave my hands on them and waves after waves of strong energy blew them away from all places. But no matter how hard I try to gust them away, more and more guards were coming. I looked around and saw an escape route.
I saw a large glass window. It’s thin enough for me to blast on to. I ran towards the window while they were shooting tranquilizers on me. I blasted the window and jumped out of it. Now, I am free falling for over 100 stories high. I struggled to gain enough energy and concentration for me to fly. As I have 30 stories left before me splat dead to the ground, I managed to glide one to the next building. At the same time as I landed on the rooftop of the building sitting right next to the hospital, I took off and jump on to the next building and on to the next and so on.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a8.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/248395_206814012695628_133447486698948_545346_6965633_n.jpg\\"\")
Alone
Minutes later, the city was alerted that a dangerous man has escaped MedEx Hospital and local authorities were after him. I know it’s me who’re they looking for. So I hurriedly went to Candice place before they could get there first. I flew half a way across the city to get there but she wasn’t there. Nobody’s at home. The lights were out and the doors were locked. Tired and heavily breathing, I sat on the doorway and thought of where could she possibly be at this time.
Suddenly, I’ve figured out that she’s still working as of this moment. Since I’ve got no more strength to use all my abilities, I walked it from her place. It wasn’t that far and I thought I’ll get there in time. As I was secretly walking in the shadows of the city, I’ve noticed that every street was filled with checkpoints and police patrols. Oh, Mr. Freeman was so damn keen to get what he wants.
I reached the clinic where Candice worked. I instantly asked the clinic receptionist for Candice immediate attention. “I am looking for Candice. Is she working here?”, I asked the receptionist. “Yes, she is working here. May I know who’s looking for her?”, she asked. “Of course, I’m her boyfriend, Stephen.”, I replied. “Boyfriend? Since when did Candice had a boyfriend?”, I confusedly asked. “What? What are you talking about? Oh, maybe she didn’t tell you about me because I don’t go out much.”, I answered. “Oh, well, Candice surely is a silent type of a person. Could you wait for a moment Mr. Stephen? I will look for her.”, she suggested and offered me a sit. “Could you make it fast? I am in a hurry.”, I said and asking for a favor. “By the way you look and the clothes you’re wearing, I think you really are in a hurry. You’re still wearing an examination gown. It looks like you have run off out of a hospital and you don’t have any money to pay for the bills that’s why you’re here to see Candice.”, she said and grinned. “I am sorry, where are my manners. I was just joking, Sir.”, she added. “No, it’s ok, actually you’re right. That’s the reason why I am here. Now, can I see her now? Please?”, I said. She nodded and walked away to find Candice. Nervously, I waited and kept myself hidden from the police patrols passing by.
Minutes later, she came back along with Candice. “Here he is, your so called boyfriend.”, the receptionist said. I stood up and walked towards her to hug her when suddenly she said, “I don’t know him.” It shocked me and frozen me right where I was standing. “Stop playing games with me, Rebecca.”, Candice said and turned away from me. “Wait! What are you talking about? Come on Candice. We need to go!”, I said and grabbed her wrist but she shook her wrist free from my grasp. “Let go of me freak! Look I don’t know you and I don’t have time for this nonsense. So, go home or go back to where in the world you’ve been.”, she loudly uttered. I was extreme shocked. This is unbelievable. I have no idea what’s going on. Yet, I have no choice and I have no time to waste. I grabbed her waist, put her on my shoulders and ran out from the clinic.
She resisted coming with me. I had no choice but to put her to sleep. The receptionist called the police right after I took Candice. Now, I am endangering both of us. I am not strong enough to protect her but I need to get away from this place and I’m not leaving without her. I hid to an abandon warehouse and stayed there till dawn. I thought maybe it was safer if I will let the situation calm a little. I am still puzzled on what could have happen to her and why she couldn’t remember me. Maybe, we’re going to be okay. She’s now with me, alone with me.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a2.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/249430_206814049362291_133447486698948_545347_1476435_n.jpg\\"\")
Freak Show
Few hours later, she walked up. She caught me looking at her. Noticing me and the unknown place she’s in to, she screamed for help. I quickly covered her mouth. “Quite. Please.”, I whispered. “Promise, I won’t hurt you. I am a good guy. I am just going to ask you some questions.”, I added. She nodded and I slowly removed my hand from her mouth. “Do you remember who I am?”, I asked her. She shook her head. “No? I am Stephen. Stephen Cadavis. I’m your boyfriend.”, I added. “Look, I don’t know you and I haven’t met you before.” she replied. “I don’t know what’s going on. But I will find a way to bring back your memory.”, I said. “There’s nothing wrong with me. Now, please, will you let me go?”, she cried and begged. “Ok. I will let you go but only by dawn. If that’s ok with you?”, I replied and she nodded. “But before anything else, I’ll show you something. Maybe this will help you remember me.”, I suggested. “Just don’t freak out, ok?”, I added. I let her stepped back and right in front of her; I elevated the rusted tables and chairs. I didn’t last long and I slowly descended them on the ground. I looked back at her and she was in shock. “What are you?”, she asked. “I don’t know what am I.”, I replied and walked closer to her. “Step back. Don’t come any closer, you… freak!”, she said. “Wait, I am going to do one more thing.”, I replied. “Step back.”, she said and picked a rust pipe. “I am warning you. I will strike you dead with this pipe.”, she uttered nervously. While closing to her, I intentionally frozen all parts of her body and touched her head. “I am sorry honey, but I need to do this.”, I said. As soon as I touched her head, I tried to fix every shattered memory she had until I got in touch with to the recent memory she had.
It was in the hospital on the day that I last saw her. She was walking down the hallway when Mr. Freeman walked in front of her. He wanted to talk with her about my condition. She willingly talked with him about it in his office. Upon reaching his office, he offered her a cup of tea. While he was talking about my state, she was sipping the coffee. Minutes later, she was unconscious. Everything went blank. I tried to go deeper in her thoughts but there’s nothing there. All of my strengths were drained during that process and so I pulled my hands off her head. She retains control of her body and, at the same time, we fell on our knees to the ground.
“Where? Where am I?”, she said and looked around. “Stephen? What’s going on? And why are we here? Why were you not in the hospital?”, she asked curiously. “Good. It’s good that you’re remembering me now. What happen to you back at Mr. Freeman’s office?”, I asked back. “Freeman? --- Oh! No! You must not trust that man. He is evil. He drugged me and… and…”, she said. “And he erased your memory.”, I uttered. “Wait… what? He did that?”, she asked. “Yeah, he did erase your memory. I don’t know what was his purpose.”, I replied. “By the way, what are we doing here?”, she asked again. “They’re after my ability. I don’t know they knew about it but they are going to do something bad to me.”, I said. Then suddenly, she hugged me. “Please, don’t tell me you used your powers to get to me. You are causing danger to your life.”, she worriedly said.
But at the moment I hugged her back, the cops came. “Stephen Cadavis. Step out of the warehouse now! We know you are in there. We mean you no harm. All we want is for you to surrender and you will be escorted back to the MedEx hospital safely.”, one of the police said. I immediately stood up even though I have no more energy to run away from them. I held Candice hand and we quickly find an escape route out of the warehouse. We found an exit door and we opened it. However, the minute we opened the door, Candice was shot. Everything was too fast. She fell on the floor and she’s no longer breathing. It made me motionless until I get hit with three tranquilizer darts. My tears fell at the same time as I fell down on the ground. Before the whole thing went black, I tried to reach her hand.
“This can’t be happening.”
“Candice!!!”
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a1.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-ash4/250453_206814072695622_133447486698948_545348_647018_n.jpg\\"\")
Leap
I woke up inside a white room with no windows or anything, just a bed and couple of laboratory equipments. There’re needles injected on my both arms and one at the back of my head. I couldn’t move or even talked. They must have drugged me or anything. I wish they just kill me instead. I don’t care about my life anymore. They took away from me the only last person that I treasured and loved.
Every now and then, there were men in white laboratory gowns surrounding me checking for my status. They were kept on injecting me needles after needles at the back of my head. It was really excruciatingly painful but it wasn’t painful as what my heart felt.
A month later, I was transferred to another facility along with the other patients where we were kept as prisoners. From there, I met this guy named Gideon Rives. He said he was special too just like me and the other patients in the facility. I wasn’t the only one who has powers after all. He said he could leap through time freely but that was before he was get caught by Freeman’s men. “Why is that you can’t leap again?”, I asked him. “I just can’t. Something was blocking me from doing it, like an invisible barrier. Whenever I use my power, my head suddenly in pain and I ended up vomiting and gone unconscious. I think they put a device inside our brain.”, he replied. Then I asked him to teach me how to leap time and he denied me. He said it’s impossible because of my condition. It was disappointing and heart breaking when you can’t do anything to fix everything.
Later that day, Gideon introduced me to other patients. There I met Lucy. She’s has the aptitude to copy the abilities of others and even transfer it to other person. Knowing Gideon’s and Lucy’s abilities, I thought of the craziest idea to save Candice from the past.
The next day, I told Gideon about my plan. At first he didn’t want to do it. It took me two months to convince him. But since I told him about my abilities and gave him a guarantee that we will not get caught, he gave it a shot. “Okay, the plan is that you will help me leap through time.”, I said. “How are we going to do that?”, Gideon asked. “I will let Lucy absorb your power and transfer it to me and then I will let her absorb mine so that she can temporarily disable all the devices in our head while I am going to save my Candice.”, I said. “And if they’ll look for you? Lucy and I will be in trouble.”, Gideon worriedly said. “Don’t worry, we will figure things out. We must help him. At least we could do something right in our miserable life.”, Lucy said. “Thank you, Lucy. Besides, she can use my powers for you to escape this place.”, I said. “Ok then. Let’s do this.”, said Gideon.
The plan was set and we’re already. We met on the cafeteria just like what we planned. Before I leapt through time, Gideon gave me his note book. “Keep it with you. If something went wrong, this will help you not to get lost on your way back here. That’s the only thing that came from this time. And I am warning you, you can’t change the past.”, he said. “Thank you for this Gideon. But I will try my best.”, I said and hugged him. “By the way, you can only use Gideon’s ability five times. So, use it wisely.”, Lucy whispered and kissed my cheek. “Good luck, Stephen. Don’t worry about us.”, she added as I smiled at her and hugged her. “Just empty your mind and focus on one date you want to go. Then you run like hell and leap. It works with me every time and I am confident that it will work on you too. Now, go.”, said Gideon. “I will not forget you guys. Thank you.”, I said and ran across the cafeteria. Right before I leapt, Lucy stood up and adapted my abilities well. I wasn’t expecting that our plan will be that successful. The devices in our brain were destroyed and miraculously it didn’t damage our brain. What a gifted, intelligent being Lucy is. “Don’t come back! We got this!”, Lucy shouted.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a7.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/246872_206814112695618_133447486698948_545349_820125_n.jpg\\"\")
Falls Apart
As I was about to reach the corner of the cafeteria, I empty my mind and focus on the time before Candice was shot then I leapt. Suddenly, I felt a stinging stir around my body. And in a blink of an eye I came back to the warehouse and Candice was there. She was hugging me. Unbelievably, I did it. I leapt through time. “What’s wrong?”, asked Candice. “Nothing. We need to get out of here. The police are coming.”, I said. “Wait! Your nose is bleeding.”, she said. “I am a little dizzy but I am ok. Let’s go before the cops arrives.”, I explained.
She found an escape route and it was leading to the back door of the warehouse. I stopped her and told her to find another way. But every time we escaped from her death, another incident will occur and end up killing her. I leap over and over again and I end up seeing her dead. In my fourth leap, we managed to escape from the warehouse and drove off away from the city. We planned to stay in her friend’s motel for a night and secretly hid there.
This time, I was very careful on every move we make. I didn’t want to see her die for the fourth time. I might not take the pain. While I was driving the car, she held my arm. “Are we going to be alright?”, she asked. “I am not strong enough. But have faith in me. We will be alright. Okay?”, I smiled and looked back on the road. As we were closing by on a cross road, my head was suddenly in pain because I’ve been pressuring my head for the last 6 hours. I lost control of the car. We skidded and eventually the car flipped over. Horrifyingly, the car flipped 6 times before it stopped. The car was upside down and the gas was leaking. I looked at the passenger seat but she wasn’t there anymore. I saw her outside lying down on the road ten feet away from the car. I hurriedly unstrapped the seatbelt and crawled out of the car. I ran to her and check her pulse. She was no longer breathing and she got no pulse.
I tried to bring her life back to life but it’s too late. I cried so hard that night. My anger and pain burst out. “What did I ever do to you to make my life this worse? Huh!? What!? Wh—what?”, I screamed as I looked up to the night sky trying to asked God. I know it’s not His fault for all of these things but it doesn’t make any wisdom or logic behind it. Then I remembered what Gideon told me back at the facility about the fact that no one can change what has already been done.
I failed on saving her. Gideon was right after all. I can’t change the past. I leapt four times already but everything went worse from bad. I was falling apart when I saw her die in front of me for the fourth time. I lost hope.
Then there I was. I rest on the road next to Candice. I touched her cold hand and said, “If only you didn’t meet me, this won’t happen to you.” Then I gave her a gentle kiss. “I am sorry, honey.”, I said and wept. Subsequently I realized something. Gideon’s wrong. I could still change the past. Thus, I stood up, looked at her and said, “Everything’s going to be alright.” I turned around and stared at the road. “This is my last shot to fix things once and for all.”, I said. I ran straight on the road and leapt.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a4.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/260346_206814149362281_133447486698948_545350_1877933_n.jpg\\"\")
Everything\\\'s Alright
I was back, back to the night that I should have died. I was standing next to my car waiting for Kyle in front of Knoles’ company building. Kyle and I worked there and we were partners. Kyle came out of the building and walked straight to me. She waved her hand and said, “I’m sorry. Did I take so long?” I just smiled at her. From a far I could see Francis in his car and he’s staring at Kyle and I. I told Kyle to wait for awhile because I need to talk to Francis. While Kyle was waiting beside my car, I called Francis. “Francis, wait. I need to talk to you.” “Hey, what’s up Stephen?”, he replied and stepped out of his car. “Nothing, actually… I just need to let you know that I’m quitting my job. I am going to send my resignation letter tomorrow.”, I said. “But why? Dad’s gonna be upset.”, he replied. “Your father? No he will not. Besides, you’re the boss now right?”, I uttered. “Look. I know that you’re jealous about me on how your father treated me and also to the fact that Kyle and I are going out. But you don’t have to be jealous. I am doing this because I felt guilty about it.”, I added. “What makes you think that I am jealous about you?”, he said and laughed. “You can’t hide it from me, Francis. I am your best friend. I know who you are. Besides, the reason why Kyle is going out with me is she wants to know some information about you from me. Kyle likes you. She’s just afraid that you won’t like her.”, I said and smiled. “Really?”, he asked curiously. “Yeah. So you don’t have to be jealous. Friends?”, I said and extended my hand for a hand shake. “Friends? We are friends. We are best friends, remember?”, he smiled and hugged me. “So tell me about her liking me.”, he said. “Why won’t you take her with you tonight and you guys talk about it?”, I suggested and called Kyle to come to us. “Wait! Wait!”, Francis uttered anxiously.
I told Kyle that she’ll be going out with Francis that night and she was blushing. Actually, they were both blushing. “Can I hug the two of you?”, I requested. “You’re acting weird tonight Stephen.”, Francis said. “What’s weird about hugging my two best pals in the world?”, I said and smiled at them. “Awwh! That’s so sweet, Stephen.”, Kyle said and hugged me tight. Francis was hesitating to hug Kyle and I. “Well? Francis? Come on. Think of it that it’s our last night together.”, I said and extended my arms. Francis slowly walked towards us. Eventually, he hugged us tight. The moment Francis embraced us; it was my cue to alter his mind and to try to remove his hate and anger. I succeeded and I never thought that Francis will cry that night while embracing us. “Are you crying, Francis?”, I asked and looked at him. “No, I am not! - - I am just - - happy.”, he replied. “Thank you, for being a good friend.”, I said to him using my intellect and left to my car. “Have a great evening the two of you.” , I said while walking to my car. As I drove off, I could hear Francis shouting the word “STOP!” I just simply ignored him. I know he planned on killing Kyle and I tonight. But this time, I will die alone.
I knew Francis is a good guy and he has a soft heart. Good thing I made him change for the ever last moment of my life. While driving, I picked up my phone and called my mother. She quickly answered and asked me if I am going to have my dinner at home. I told her that I am and I told her that I love her so much. Since I was talking to my mother on the phone, Francis tried many times to contact me but he couldn’t. I said goodbye to my mother and give her a soft kiss sound over the phone.
“This is it. This is the road.”, I said and tears were flowing down my cheek. I pulled out my wallet and took a closer look at Candice photo. “I love you… If I die, none of you will suffer in the future. This is the only way.”, I cried. As I gave a full step on the gas, a man ran across the road from out of nowhere just like what happened during that same night. I stepped on the brake and right before my car flipped over, I saw that guy’s face and I couldn’t believe what my eyes saw. It was Gideon. Then, everything’s turning around as the car flipped over. From the moment the car stopped from flipping over, my car suddenly exploded. Everything went dim and soundless. And everything is - - everything is alright, now.
Few days later, I just found myself waking form a coma on a hospital. How am I still alive? I asked everyone in the room about the accident and they say that before the car exploded, I flew off the car and I landed on the road head first. My mother even added that a man brought me here in the hospital. The man didn’t name himself and he just left. Then, suddenly, my mother gave me Gideon’s notebook and told me that they found it in my pocket. The doctor came few minutes later and told everyone to give me some moment to rest. While everybody’s gone, I scanned the writing in Gideon’s notebook until I reached the last part of the notebook. There I found out that he was guilty about what happened to me last night. He wrote there that he was trying to escape from Mr. Freeman’s men until he crossed the road and caused my accident. He helped me to survive and took me to the hospital nearby. He wrote that from the moment he touched me, he saw a premonition that I will free him and all of the patients that have special powers from Freeman in the future. After reading his last note which was dated on the day I left Lucy ang Gideon, everything was clear to me. There’s a reason for everything after all.
![\"\\"\\"\"](\"\\"http:/a6.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/251283_206814179362278_133447486698948_545351_5822473_n.jpg\\"\")
Save You All
The next day, I asked the doctor about my condition. I asked him about me having a brain cancer and he just smiled. “No, you don’t have a brain cancer. In fact you’re a lot better than yesterday. I never saw this kind of healing before. It’s like a miracle. A normal person would have not survive that crash and would have not healed this fast.”, he said. “By the way, I would like you to meet your private nurse.”, he added. Then suddenly, my heart was pounding so fast as he introduced her to me. It was Candice. I was a tear drop away when she said, “Have we met before?” “I am so sorry. I just got that feeling that we’ve already met somewhere. By the way, I am your private nurse. I am Candice. How are you feeling today?”, she added. I was speechless and I couldn’t hear a thing since my heart was beating so loud. If I could only see my face during that moment, oh man, I would look dumb. “I- I’m fine.”, I said tensely. “You looked so tense. Don’t worry, you don’t have to be anxious even though I am just a newly registered nurse.”, she said. Then out of the blue, she gave me an innocent smile just like in the picture in my wallet. She never knew how much I miss that smile. Oh, Candice, I love you so much.
Well the good news is I am not dead and so as everybody else, I got Candice back even though I am starting to court her again which was tougher than I thought and my brain cancer’s gone cause I finally figured out how to control my powers. On the other hand, my best friend, Francis, told me that he’s going to surrender to the police for killing his father and for attempting to kill me. I told him that I forgave him. I forced him not to surrender but he insisted. He was sentenced to be imprisoned for 12 years. Good thing Kyle never left his side. They even get married.
As for me? I am cursed to be like this, a freak of nature. Everything has purposes and this is my purpose, the purpose to save people. I know I am not alone there and I can’t do this alone. So, Lucy… Gideon… guys… hang on there. I am going to save you all and we will protect this world.
ORIGINAL POST:
[http://www.facebook.com/notes/abs-rivera/godlike-2/179064748813334]
Pendant (A short Suspense Saga)
MY ORIGINAL CREATION
Created : Sept 3, 2010
Maagang pumasok si Ador sa kanyang pinagtratrabahuhang Junkshop na pag-aari ng isang Filipino-Chinese na si Genoveva Tan. Ngunit nadatnan ni Ador na galit na galit ang kanyang amo sa kanya at sa iba pang mga hakot boys na kanya rin kasama.
“ Ikaw Ador sira mo na naman ang kariton mo lagi na lang ako pagawa niyan, ilang beses na ba
yan ha” singhal ni Genoveva
“ naku Mam, maayos ko pong sinoli yan kagabi” pagtanggi ni Ador
“ Ako, ha Ador sawa na sayo mga Alibay ha, ako tanggal na kita dito Junkshop, ikaw hanap ka
na iba ha trabaho, lage na lang ako abono sayo” muling sambit ng amo ni Ador.
Nakiusap naman si Ador na wag syang tanggalin nito ngunit hindi ito nakinig at patuloy na talaga syang tinerminate ng kanyang amo.
Sa kanyang paglabas ay nakita nya ang kanyang mga kasamahan na ngi-ngiti-ngiti sa kanya at para sa kanya ay sya ay binu-bully ng mga ito. Agad niyang nilapitan ang mga ito,
“Masaya na kayo? Ito lang alam kong trabaho, wala akong pinag-aralan, dito ko lang binubuhay
ang ina kong may-sakit, ang sasama ninyo ang sasama nyo” ang nasambit ni Ador
habang umaagos ang kanyang luha sa kanyang mga mata. Agad napayuko naman si Dennis at Von sa kanyang mga sinabi hanggang sa tuluyan na silang iwan ni Ador.
Si Ador ay isang simpleng mamamayan lamang, Sa kanyang edad na bente y tres, banaag sa kanyang katawan ang taglay ng karungisan, magaspang at maitim na balat, sya na lamang bumubuhay sa kanyang ina mula ng sila ay iwan ng kanyang ama, dahil sa pag-sama nito sa kanyang ibang pamilya. kaya sa kanyang kapaslitan ay nagsimula na syang dumiskarte sa buhay, hindi niya na rin nagawa pang ipagpatuloy ang kanyang pag-aaral at mas ginusto nya lang mag pulot pulot ng kung anu-anong mga mapapakinabangang bagay upang ibenta sa mga junkshops. Nawala sa katinuan si Aling Gunding ang ina ni Ador mula sa Sinapit ng kanilang pamilya at naging masasakitin ito dahil sa labis na pagdaramdam. ito ang mga eksena na bumalik sa alala ni Ador habang binabagtas ang mga daan patungo sa ibat ibang mga Junkshops, pakay niya ang mag-aaply sa mga ito ngunit sa kasamaang palad ay hindi sya natatanggap dahil sa kawalan ng mga bakante sa mga iyon.
Gumagabi na ay hindi parin sumusuko si Ador sa kanyangpaghahanap ng bagong mapapasukan napadaan sya sa simbahan ng Tondo, sya ay pumasok, lumuhod at nagsambit ng panalangin
“Panginoon ako po ay inyong Kaawaan! Bigyan nyo po kami ng aming Kakanin ng aking Inay at
bigyan nyo rin po ako ng aming ikakabuhay salamat Panginoon salamat!” Sambit ni Ador
Agad syang nagtungo sa kaharap nitong Fastfood (Jollibee) at sinisipat ni Ador mula sa labas ang mga taong kumakain doon, habang hawak niya ang kanyang sariling sikmura. At sa kanyang pagkakatayo duon ay nabangga sya ng isang humahangos na isang Holdaper na lalaki at nalaglag mula sa isang Kwintas ang Pendant sa isang balutan na hawak ni Ador, kitang kita iyon ng holdaper ngunit huli na para bawiin pa niya ito kay Ador, paparating na ang mga taong bayan at mga police na humahabol sa kanya, kaya nagpatuloy na lamang sa pagtakbo ang nasabing holdaper. Tinulungan naman ng mga police si Ador na makatayo mula sa kanyang pagkakahiga. Muli naman nagkagulo sa dako ng Ilaya kung saan nanggaling ang Mamang Holdaper, dahil sa isang bangkay ng babae na duon ay nakatambad, kumapal ang mga taong nagiisyoso duon kasama si Ador, at mula sa pagkatitig ni Ador sa bangkay na ngayon ay binubuhat na ng mga taga Funeraria ay biglang nalilis ng hangin ang kumot nito at tumambad sa kanya ang mukha ng babaeng bangkay na nakatingin sa kanya. Natakot si Ador at umalis sa mga kumpulan ng mga tao. Patuloy naman ang tsismisan ng mga taga Divisoria tungkol sa babaeng bangkay, at mula sa bulungan ng mga tao ay nalaman ni Ador na ang babaeng iyon pala ay ang biktima ng kaninang lalaking nakabangga sa kanya.
Nawala ang kalam ng Sikmura ni Ador sa kanyang mga nasaksihang pangyayari sa Divisoria. Ngunit bumili pa rin siya ng Limang Pisong Tinapay mula sa kanyang natitirang Bente pesos na sya naman nitong kanyang ipinang-hapunan sa kanyang inang may sakit sa pagiisip. Pagkapasok pa lamang niya sa kanilang tinitirahang bangketa na ang bubong ay tinali lamang na lumang tarpaulin ng pantalong LEE at diningdingan lamang ng mga retasong Plywood, nadatnan nya ang kanyang ina na natutulog ginising nya ito at sya ay nagmano dito, pinakain nya ito ng tinapay at binilihan nya rin ito ng 3in1 coffee mix, humingi sya ng tubig na mainit sa isang security guard na nagbantay ng isang malaking bahay na pag-aari naman ng isang negosyante na siyang pumayag na magtayo sila ng masisilungan sa kanilang bangketa.
Pagkatapos niyang mapakain ang kanyang ina nagsimulang humampas ang malakas na hangin kasunod ang pagkulog at pagkidlat at maya maya nga ay nagsimula na ang pagbayo ng malalakas na buhos ng ulan, Sinamanta ni Ador ang lamig ng panahon upang madali siyang makatulog at di niya na alintana ang mga ilan ilang mga pagtulo at pag-anggi sa loob ng kanilang munting tahanan. Ngunit ginising si Ador ng isang malakas na pagkulog na kanya ring ikinagulat, at mula sa kanyang pagkakadilat ay may napansin siyang isang lalaking nakatayo mula sa kalayuan at nagmamasid sa kanilang kinaroroonan, Tumayo si Ador at nagsindi ng isang kandila at agad niyang binalikan ng tingin ang kinatatayuan ng lalaki ngunit ito ay biglang naglaho. Luminga linga si Ador sa kanilang barong barong at sa kanyang pagbalik ng kanyang tingin sa pwesto ng lalaki ay kita nya ng mas malapit na ito sa kanya, kita nya na ito ng mas malinaw at mas klaro, namukhaan nya ang lalaki ito lalaking nangholdap sa Ilaya, kumakabog ang kanyang dibdib sa takot, kaya’t hinawakan nya ang kanyang tabak na ginagamit nya sa pagbabasura. Kumatok ang lalake at nag wika
“ Alam kong Andiyan ka, di kita sasaktan ibigay mo lang saakin yung pendant na nahulog ko sa
isang balutan mo kanina” wika ng Holdaper
Ngunit bago pa man makasagot si Ador ay may narinig na naman siyang isang Tinig mula sa labas, boses pala iyon ni Mang Cesario ang Security Guard mula sa malaking bahay
“Tol Anong ginawa mo dyan? May problema ba? “ Wika ng Security Guard
Hindi naman tumugon ang lalaking holdaper agad nya itong sinugod at sinaksak ng dala nitong Bente y nueve na patalim, na agad namang ikinasawi ni mang Cesario namatay ng dilat ito na humarap pa ang mukha sa mismong sinisilipan ni Ador, takot na takot si Ador ng mga oras na iyon muli nyang hinawakan ang kanyang tabak habang muling papalapit na naman ang lalaking holdaper sa kanilang barong barong at habang ginagapang ni ado rang kanyang kamay ay nahawakan nya ang isang kamay na punong puno ng dugo pag angat nya ng kanyang tingin ay tumambad sa kanyang paningin ang babaeng bangkay na biktima rin ng lalaking papalapit na sa kinaroroonan niya, hindi makasigaw si Ador sa kanyang nakikita ngayon dahil sa ingay na kanyang lilikhain kung nagkataon, palingon lingon si Ador sa dalawang panganib na nasa kanyang harapan ngayon at sa sobrang takot nawalan na lamang ng ulirat si Ador.
“Mara Mahal kita” wika ni Gino
“Mahal din kita Gino” sagot naman ni Mara
Tumayo si Gino at may kinuhang maliit na box sa kanyang bulsa, binigay niya ito kay Mara.
“Ano ito?” Tanong ni Mara
“ Sige buksan mo lang” sambit naman ni Gino
Binuksan nga ito ni Mara at pagbukas niya ay tumambad sa kanya ang isang kwintas na may pendant na locket na may larawan nilang magkasintahan.
“This is perfect Gino, Thank you so much” tuwang tuwang tugon ni Mara sa kabiyak.
“Akin na, isusuot ko sayo, ito ay simbolo lamang ng aking katapatan sayo habang ako ay
magtratrabaho sa Canada, ako ay magiipon lamang at pagbalik ko ay magpapakasal na tayo”
Magiingat ka dito ha at lagi mo akong susulatan” lambing ni Gino habang sila ay magkayakap,
binigyan din ni Gino ng isang halik si Mara bago tuluyang tumalikod papasok sa loob ng
paliparan.
Mula sa kalayuan ay nagmamasid lang pala sa kanila si Benito ang isang lalaking may matinding pagamamahal kay Mara. At sa sulok ng isip nito ay isang maitim na balak, kanyang susulutin si Mara mula kay Gino.
“Anak, Mara, nasaan ka? Nasa Airport ka parin ba? Bago ka umuwi idaan mo naman ako ng Telang Tetoron sa Ilaya ha, hindi na ako makakagawi duon sa dami ng aking tinatahi” Text ng ina ni Mara
“ Sige po Nay” Reply naman ni Mara
Sumakay na ng taxi si Mara papuntang Divisoria ang hindi niya alam ay palihim din palang sumakay si Benito sa kanyang motorsiklo at nagsuot ng helmet nito upang hindi siya makilala ni Mara at mapansin nito na sumusunod siya, At pagdating ni Mara sa Ilaya ay laking gulat na lamang nito na may humawak sa Braso niya.
“O Benito kaw pala yan anong ginagawa mo dito? Usisa ni Mara
“ Mara sumama ka sa akin mahal pa rin kita” sagot ni Benito
“Benito alam mo naman na ni minsan di kita nagawang mahalin , hanggang kaibigan lang ang
turing ko sayo” paliwanag ni Mara
“ Bigyan mo kasi ako ng pagkakataon kilalanin mo ako,” pasigaw na sambit ni Benito
“Hindi! Hindi ko yun magagawa sinabi ko na sayo na kahit kalian di kita magugustuhan “ at sya ay tumakbo
Hinabol siya mi Benito at ng sya ay naabutan ay hinila niya ang kwintas ni Mara at nag salita
“Ito ba pinagmamalaki mo?” kung hindi r in lang ako ang mapapasayo, wala rin makikinabang
sayo”
Pagkasabi nito ni Benito ay agad niyang sinaksak si Mara, ngunit bago pa man mawalan ng buhay si Mara ay nagsambit pa ito ng ilang salita
“Babalikan kita Benito papatayin din kita” banta ni Mara bago tuluyang mawalan ito ng buhay
Nagising si Ador mula sa kanyang pagkahimatay at nakita niya lahat sa kanyang panaginip ang lahat ng nangyari
“Ibigay mo na sakin ang pendant” sigaw ni Benito sa labas ng barong barong
“Pare, di ko alam ang sinasabi mong Pendant” sigaw ni Ador
“kitang kita ko na nalusot yun sa mga dalahin mo kanina, kailangan ko lang yun ibigay sa burol ng mahal ko para mapatawad niya ako at wag nya na akong balikan maawa ka” pagsusumamo ni Benito
“at huwag mo ng hintayin pa na pati ikaw idamay ko at mapatay. Kaya ibigay mo na” muling sambit ni Benito.
Nainip si Benito sa aksyon ni Ador agad niyang sinipa ang maliit na pintuan ng Barong barong dala ang baril ng Guwardiya na kanyang piñatay
Nagulat si Ador sa nangyari hinampas ni Ador si Benito ng hawak nitong tabak ngunit binaril siya agad ni Benito sa balikat, Napaupo si Ador sapo ang kanyang duguang balikat, papalapit ng papalapit si Benito sa kay Ador habang paatras ng paatras si Ador sa kanyang pagkaka-upo na malapit na sya sa dulo ng dingding ay kita nyang muli ang bangkay ni Mara nakatingin sa kanya dahilan para di na sya makaatras korner na naman sya ng dalawang panganib, patuloy pa rin lumalapit si Benito. Lumingon si Benito nakita niya ang inang tulog ni Ador at nagbanta
“Babarilin ko sya ilabas mo na? banta ni Benito
“huwag hahanapin ko na sandal lang” sagot ni Ador
Ngunit bago pa man makakilos si Ador ay nangisay ang katawan ni aling Gunding at bumangon ito at nag wika,
“huwag mong ibibigay sa kanya, sa tingin mo ba mapapatawad kita sa ginawa mong pagpatay
Sakin, kahit ibalik mo pa sakin, wala na rin ang buhay ko, wala na rin saysay”
Inangkin ni Mara ang katawan ni Aling Gunding ng sandaling iyon, agad namang pinagbabaril ni Benito ang katawan ni Aling Gunding ngunit patuloy parin ito sa paglapit sa kanya habang nanlilisik ang mga mata nito na nakatingin sa kanya, umaagos ang dugo ni aling Gunding sa buong katawan nito dahil sa tama ng baril, ngunit di niya ito iniinda, umangat ang katawan ni aling Gunding sa kisameng tarpaulin at kinubabawan si Benito, at pinagsasakal nito, panay parin ang baril ni Benito sa katawan ni aling Gunding habang sumisigaw ng ”huwag” si Ador, sabay na namatay si Benito at aling Gunding at patuloy ng umalis ang multo ni Mara sa katawan ng ina ni Ador.
Sa imbistigasyon ng mga pulis, lumabas na binalikan lang ng ng holdaper si Ador dahil sa naiwang pendant nito sa kanya , at walang naniniwala sa paliwanag ni Ador hinggil sa lahat ng patayang nangyari, dahil sa lahi nilang may sakit sa pagiisip. Nanlumo na lang si Ador sa kinahinatnan ng lahat dahil sa isang pendant ay nawala ang ilang mga buhay kasama ng kanyang ina. Hinanap ni Ador ang Pendant at ito ay tinago.
“tao po” Ador si Dennis at Von ito”
“ anong ginagawa ninyo dito? Sagot ni Ador
“ napakiusapan namin si aling Genoveva, pinababalik ka na niya inamin ko na ako ang sumira ng
kariton mo dahil sa inggit ko sayo dahil sa lakas mo kumita. Ayun pala madiskarte ka lang
talaga” ani ni Von
at muli ngang nakabalik sa trabaho si Ador sa Junkshop ni Aling Genoveva, at naging maayos na rin ang pakikitungo ni Dennis at ni Von sa kanya.
“What!? patay na ang anak ko? Hindi yan totoo! bakit namatay ang anak ko?” sigaw ni aling Genoveva sa telepono
Namatay ang anak ni Genoveva sa isang bangungot habang natutulog ito sa trabaho, inuwi ang bangkay ng kanyang anak mula sa Canada na halos wala pang isang buwan mula ng ito ay umalis. Dumalaw si Ador sa burol ng anak ni aling Genoveva, papalapit na siya sa ataul ng anak ni Aling Genoveva kumabog ang dibdib nya sa sobrang takot, at ngayon nga ay nasa harapan na siya ng patay, tiningnan niya mula paa nito pakaliwa hanggang sa muka nito, ganun na lang ang pagkabigla ni Ador ng nakatingin sa kanya ang patay at nag wika
“Nasaan ang Pendant ko”
Umatras si Ador at tumama siya sa Announcement Board ng Funeraria at nakita niya ang pangalan ng namatay
“GINO CHUA, TAN”
The end
Unang Kabanata
Malalim na ang gabi ay hindi pa ako sagian ng antok. Ang bagay na ito ang noon pa’y bumabagabag sa akin. Sa sandaling ako’y mapag-isa, ito na ang laman ng aking isipan. Bakit nga kaya naiiba ako sa lahat., may pambihirang bilis at lakas. Bakit nga kaya, mula nang tumigil ang aking pagtaas, ay nanatiling ganito ang aking anyo. Hindi ako tumatanda. Kung tutuusin ay mahigit na akong ‘sang daang taon ngayon.
Tumayo ako. Lumapit sa nakabukas na bintana. Tinanaw ko ang madilim na kapaligiran. Doon ay pilit kong hinahanap ang kasagutan... Kailangan, marahil, na ibinalik ko ang nakaraan. Baka dito ko masumpungan ang hinahanap kong kasagutan.
Taong 1868, buwan ng Agosto, pumasok sa Pilipinas ang ikatlong bagyo. Pabugso-bugso ang hanging sinasabayan ng malakas na ulan. Matatalim ang kidlat kasunod ang nakatutulig na kulog. Ito ang dahilan kung bakit ang dampa ni Mang Sidro at Aling Merced ay natumba at nawasak.
“Ano ang ating gagawin?” Narinig ni Mang Sidro mula sa kanyang asawa na noon ay nasa ika-siyam na buwan ng pagbubuntis. “Malawak na bukirin ito, wala tayong masisilungan.”
Tinanaw ni Mang Sidro ang kalawakan ng bukid. “Doon tayo dadako sa kahuyan. Makatutulong ang mga puno para maiwasan natin ang hangin at ulan.”
Magkahawak kamay ang mag-asawa nang magsimulang lumakad. Bumitiw lamang si Mang Sidro nang matanaw ang isang kumot na nililipad ng hangin. Kukunin niya iyon para maitalukbong sa asawang buntis. Huminto si Aling Merced sa paglakad, tinanaw niya ang lumayong kabiyak.
Noon gumuhit ang isang matalim na kidlat. Pakiramdam ni Mang Sidro ay dumaan iyon sa tabi niya kaya’t napatingin siya sa kinatatayuan ng asawa. Kitang-kita niya ang nangyari. Sandaling nag-apoy ang katawan ni Aling Merced nang tumama ang kidlat. Patakbo siyang lumapit. Umuusok pa ang katawan nitong nakabulagta sa putikang lupa. Lumuluha siyang lumuhod sa harap nito.
Sunog ang katawan ni Aling Merced. Bukas ang tiyan, kita ang nakabaluktot na bata sa loob. Hindi kumikilos ang bata, kaya inakala ni Mang Sidro na wala na ring buhay ito. Tumayo siya, dahil sa wala naman siyang magagawa, ay binalak niyang lumisan. Patalikod na siya nang marinig ang iyak ng isang sanggol..
“Buhay...,buhay ang aking anak!” Sa kagalakan ay pasigaw na nawika ni Mang Sidro. Napawi ang kalungkutang sumakanya dahil sa pagkamatay ng asawa. Paluhod niyang dinampot ang umiiyak na bata. Pinangko at dinala sa kahuyan para maikubli sa ulan at malakas na ihip ng hangin.
‘Yun siguro ang dahilan kung bakit Kidlat ang ipinangalan sa akin. Kidlat Orentes...., sa pangalang ito ako nakilala ng aming mga kamag-anak at ng lahat ng tao sa maliit naming nayon.
Mahigit na akong sampung taon nang ikwento sa akin ni Ama ang lahat. Hindi ko malilimot ang mga araw na iyon...., ang nangyari kung bakit siya nahiga sa banig ng karamdaman.
Matapos ang piging na dinaluhan ng mga kamag-anak ni Ina at Ama dahil sa pagdiriwang ng Pasko, ay gumala kaming mag-ama sa plaza ng bayan. Sa simbahang nababakuran ng may isang metrong taas na pader ay magkasama kaming pumasok at nagdasal. Noon lamang ako nakapasok ng simbahan. Hindi ko alam ang dapat gawin, kaya’t ginaya ko na lamang ang pagluhod at bawat kilos ni Ama. Matagal ding nakaluhod at bumubulong si Ama bago tumayo at lumabas ng simbahan.
Sandaling tumayo si Ama sa labas, inilibot ang paningin sa paligid na para bang noon lamang siya nakarating sa lugar. Ako naman, palibhasa marahil ay isang bata, ay patalon-talon na umiikot sa malawak na bakuran. Hindi sinasadya ay nabunggo ko ang isang sundalong Kastila na dumaraan. Nang magtaas ako ng paningin ay nakita ko ang tila nag-aapoy niyang mata na nakatitig sa akin.
“Punyeta!” Malakas na wika ng sundalo sabay tulak sa akin.
Hindi ko namalayan dahil gumulong ako sa lupa, pero patakbo palang nilapitan ni Ama ang Kastila sabay bigwas ng malakas na suntok. Talsik ang sundalo. Nang ito ay bumangon ay binunot ang nakasukbit na bayuneta at walang habag na isinaksak sa aking ama.
Natumba si Ama na tutop ang sugat na tinamo sa kanyang tiyan. Tumalikod naman ang Kastila at lumakad palabas ng bakuran. Tumayo ako, dala siguro ng matinding pagkamuhi sa ginawa ng Kastila, ay patakbo kong sinugod ang sundalong noon ay nasa labas na ng bakuran.
Tinalon ko ang ibabaw ng pader. At mula doon ay sumikad ako at sinipa ang Kastila. Sabay kaming bumagsak sa lupa. Ang kaibhan lamang ay bumagsak ako ng patayo at siya naman ay pahiga. Sa pagtumba ay tumama ang ulo ng sundalo sa isang bato na naging sanhi ng kanyang pagkamatay.
Dahil doon, tumalilis kaming akay ko si Ama. Patago naming tinahak ang daang pauwi sa bukid. Doon kami namalagi. Patapal-tapal lamang ng kung ano-ano ang iginagamot ko sa sugat ni Ama. Ayaw niyang tumawag ako ng albularyo sa takot na matunton ng mga Kastila ang aming pinagtataguan. At marahil, alam niya na ang sugat na iyon ang tatapos sa kanyang buhay, kung kaya’t ikinwento sa akin ang lahat.
Ang pagpanaw na iyon ni Ama ang kauna-unahang bagay na sumugat sa aking
puso. Noong una’y hindi ko matanggap ang nangyari. Nguni’t sa paglipas ng mga araw, ay unti-unti akong nakalimot. Natutuhan kong tanggapin na wala na si Ama.
Mula nang mamatay si Ama ay naging palaboy ako. Hindi ako pumayag sa alok na tumira kangino mang kamag-anak namin. Ginusto ko ang mabuhay na mag-isa. Umalis ako sa aming bayan. Alam ko kasing hinahanap pa rin ako ng mga Kastila. Nasumpungan ko ang aking sarili sa magulong siyudad ng Maynila.
Wala akong bahay na inuuwian. Kung saan-saan lamang ako natutulog. Sa ilog Pasig ako kadalasang naliligo at naglilinis ng katawan. Ang kinakain ko, kadalasan ay mga tira ng nagsisikain sa restoran, kung minsan, hindi maiwasan na ako ay magnakaw. Ang pinakamalala ay ang maghalungkat sa basurahan ng kahit na anong magtatawid-gutom sa akin.
Dito sa Maynila ko nabatid ang pambihirang bagay na nagagawa ng aking katawan. Nagnakaw ako noon ng makakain sa isang tindahan. Nakita ako ng may-ari kung kaya’t ito’y nagsisigaw. Husto namang may isang pulis na dumaraan na siyang humabol sa akin.
Pumasaok ako sa isang bakuran. Hindi ko namalayan ang yerong pinagkulahan ng damit. Sa pagtakbo ay tumama ang aking binti sa kanto ng yero na lumikha ng malaking sugat. Mabuti na lamang at hindi ako nasundan doon ng pulis na humahabol.
Kumubli ako sa likod ng bahay para talian ang sugat na natamo. Nagulat ako sa aking nakita. Naghilom ang aking sugat. Kitang-kita ko ang pagsasara ng nakabukang sugat. Para bang pinagdikit ang magkahiwalay na balat. Wala akong naramdamang sakit. Parang walang nangyari.
Naisip ko na siguro’y bunga iyon ng nangyari sa aking ina nang ako’y nasa kanyang sinapupunan pa. Sa ngayon ay may ilang bagay na akong natuklasan. Ang natatangi kong bilis at lakas, at ang nangyaring agarang paghihilom ng aking sugat. Ang mga ito kaya’y bunga ng tumamang kidlat sa aking Ina?
Umalis ako sa Maynila. Natatakot kasi akong mahuli ng pulis at makulong. Ilang bayan sa loob ng isang araw ang aking nadaraanan. Nanghihingi ako ng makakain kapag ako’y nagutom. Iniwasan ko ang mang-umit, ayoko ng madawit sa anumang kaguluhan.
Sa isang bayan sa Laguna ay may nahabag sa akin nang ako ay manghingi ng makakain. Pinapanhik ako sa kanilang bahay, binigyan ng kanin at ulam..., at habang ako’y kumakain ay maraming bagay ang inusisa sa akin.
“Saan ka ba galing niyan?” Unang tanong na narinig ko mula sa babaing nagbigay sa akin ng pagkain.
“Sa Maynila po.” Sagot ko sa pag-itan ng pagnguya.
“Wala ka na bang mga magulang?”
“Patay na po sila.”
“Saan ka pupunta? May kamag-anak ka bang pupuntahan?”
Huminto ako sa pagsubo. Tumingin ako sa aking kausap. Nagbabakasakali kasi akong makita sa kanya ang pakay sa pagtatanong na iyon. Wala akong nakita kundi ang maamo niyang mukha.
“Bakit ka tumingin sa akin. Dahil ba mausisa ako?”
“Ay.., hindi po. Napatingin lang ako dahil napakabait ninyo sa akin.”
Tumawa ang kaharap ko. “Hindi mo pa sinasagot ang aking tanong kung mayroon kang kamag-anak na pupuntahan.” Ulit niya.
“Wala po. Hindi ko nga po alam kung saan ako hahantong sa aking paglakad na ito.” Sagot ko at muling hinarap ang aking pagkain.
Matagal bago siya muling nangusap. Ilang sandali ring tila iniisip niya ang dapat sabihin. “Ako lamang at ang aking asawa ang nakatira dito.” Basag niya sa katahimikang sandaling naghari. “Wala kaming anak..., sabi ng duktor ay baog daw ako. Wala na kaming pag-asang magkaroon ng supling. Lalo na ngayong may edad na ako.”
Huminto ako sa pagkain. Nagtaas ako ng mukha at tumingin sa kanya. Lungkot ang natanaw kong bumalot sa kanyang pagkatao.
“Sana..,” patuloy niya, “ay aalukin kitang dumito na..., pero.., baka may iba kang balak para sa iyong sarili.”
Hindi ko na inalis ang aking tingin sa kanya. Ang narinig ko ay isang pagkakataon para ako magkaroon ng masisilungang bahay. Isang bagay na noon pa ay pinapangarap ko na. Matutulugan sa ilalim ng isang bubong, may malambot na unan at kumot na ibabalot sa katawan kapag taglamig.
“Hindi ka na sumagot.” Narinig kong wika niya.
“Ah.., eh..., kasi po nag-aalala akong baka hindi magustuhan ng asawa ninyo.” Nasabi ko sa kabila ng katotohanang nagustuhan ko ang kanyang alok.
Ngumiti siya. “Wala kang dapat alalahanin tungkol doon.” Wika niya. “Mabait
ang aking asawa, tinitiyak kong magugustuhan niya ang pagtira mo dito.”
“Malaking bagay po sa akin ang alok ninyo.”
Nakita ko ang malaking kasiyahang kumintal sa kanyang mukha. Bagay na
ikinatuwa ko. Sa di inaasahang pagkakataon ay nakapagdulot ako ng kasiyahan sa isang nilalang na makapagbibigay din sa akin ng kaluwagan sa buhay.
“Ano ba ang pangalan mo?” Narinig kong muli niyang tanong.
“Kidlat po.., Kidlat Orentes.” Sagot ko.
“Kidlat?” Ulit niya. “Bakit Kidlat?”
“’Yun po ang ipinangalan sa akin ni Ama.”
Tumawa siya sa narinig na sagot ko. “Mula ngayon..., ang pangalan mo ay magiging Kidlat Orentes Magpayo, ...Magpayo dahil yaon ang apelyido ng bago mong ama. Ayos ba ‘yon saiyo?” Tanong niya pagkatapos.
Tumango ako.
Doon nagsimula ang pagkakaroon ko ng ikalawang ama at ina. Tatay at Nanay
ang sinabi nilang itawag ko sa kanila. Danilo at Mitring ang kanilang mga pangalan. Kapwa sila mabait sa akin, itinuring nila akong parang tunay na anak. Ibinili ako ng bagong damit at pinapag-aral. Naging mabuti naman akong anak sa kanila. Nabuhay kaming tatlo bilang isang tunay na pamilya, masaya at maligaya. Kid ang tawag nila sa akin dahil sa pangalan kong Kidlat.
Si Tatay ay laging wala sa bahay. Araw-araw kasi, maliban lamang kung Sabado at Linggo, ay naglalagi sa lupaing tinatamnan ng lansones. Malawak ang lupaing iyon, yaon ang bumubuhay sa amin. Si Nanay naman ay sa bahay lamang. Masinop at malinis si Nanay. Masarap siyang magluto. Kaya siguro naging malusog ako. Doon ako lumaki sa kanila. Natapos ako sa pag-aaral. Balak nga ni Tatay at Nanay na magpatuloy ako sa Maynila, pero hindi natuloy iyon dahil sa pagsisimula ng ikalawang digmaang pangdaigdig.
Nasakop ng mga Hapon ang Pilipinas. Sa bayang kinalakihan ko ay dumating ang isang pangkat ng mga Hapones na pinamumunuan ng isang nagngangalang Captain Sumo. Mabagsik at malupit ang mga sundalong Hapon kung kaya’t ang mga mamamayan ay ilag sa kanila.
Si Tatay ay mata sa bayan ng mga gerilyang nasa bundok. Tuwing linggo, sa misa sa simbahan ang kanilang tagpuan, at doon, sa pamamag-itan ng kapirasong papel na iniaabot niya, inilalahad ni Tatay ang mga pangyayari at mahahalagang bagay na nakikita niyang ginagawa ng mga Hapones.
Isang araw ng Linggo, may kalahating oras pa lamang kami sa bahay mula sa simbahan, nang dumating ang ilang sundalong Hapon kasama ang isang lalaking natatakpan ng supot ang ulo. Marahas nilang itinulak ang bakal na pinto ng bakod at tuloy-tuloy na pumasok hanggang sa pinto ng bahay..
Malakas na katok ang sumunod naming narinig. Nang buksan iyon ni Tatay ay agad siyang itinuro ng lalaking nakatakip ang mukha. Mabilis ang mga sundalo, agad iginapos si Tatay at pahilang isinama sa garison.
Hindi ako nakasunod dahil nang makita ni Nanay ang nangyari ay umiyak siya at hindi nagtagal ay nawalan ng ulirat. Kinailangang himasmasan ko siya. Nang mapayapa ko ang kanyang kalooban at maihiga sa kama ay saka lamang ako nakaalis para alamin ang nangyari kay Tatay.
Wala ring nangyari sa aking lakad dahil hindi ako pinayagang makita si Tatay. Malungkot kong iniwan ang garison. Ang isang bagay na nakita ko, na hindi malilimot, ay ang paglabas ng alkalde ng bayan sa pinto ng garison. Ang suot nito ay katulad ng suot ng lalaking may takip sa ulo na kasama ng mga sundalo sa aming bahay.
Masasal ang kabang nadama ko. Oo nga’t hindi ko aktuwal na nakitang inalis ng alkalde ang supot sa kanyang ulo, pero ang suot naman nito ang isang bagay na masasabing sapat na katibayan para paniwalaang siya nga ang nagturo kay Tatay.
Malungkot akong bumalik sa aming bahay. Wala akong sinabi kay Nanay
maliban sa katotohanang hindi ko nakita’t nakausap si Tatay. Sinarili ko ang tungkol sa aking nakita sa garison. Naisumpa ko sa sarili na mula sa araw na iyon, ay gagawin kong isang misyon ang pagsubaybay sa bawat kilos ng aming alkalde
Ilang araw ang nakalipas nang humahangos na kumatok sa aming bahay ang kaibigan kong si Marcial. Ako ang nagbukas ng pinto. Humihingal siya nang magsalita. “Ang Tatay mo,” wika niya, “nakita kong inilabas ng mga sundalo sa garison.”
“Gan’un ba?” Sabi ko at akma akong tatakbo nang marinig ko ang boses ni Nanay.
“Hintay..., sasama ako!”
Tatlo kaming magkakasabay na nagtungo sa plasa kung saan naroon ang garison ng mga Hapon. Pagdating doon ay nakita naming nakatali si Tatay. Nakabilad siya sa matinding sikat ng araw. May edad na si Tatay, hindi na niya makakayanan ang init ng araw kaya marahil lupaypay na ang kanyang katawan. Lalapitan ko sana, nguni’t iniumang ng tanod ang kanyang riple na naging sanhi ng aking pag-atras.
Alam kong barilin man ako ng sundalo ay madaling mawawala ang sugat na
tulad ng nangyari noong masugatan ako sa kulahan. Ang inaalala ko ay si Nanay at si
Marcial. Baka sila ang pagbalingan ng sundalo. ‘Yun ang dahilan kung bakit ako umatras at bumalik sa aking mga kasama.
Marahil ay tama ang aking hinuha na hindi nakayanan ng katawan ni Tatay ang matinding init ng araw, kaya’t pagsapit ng hapon ay nakita naming nawalan siya ng lakas. Nakasabit na lamang sa nakataling lubid ang bigat ng kanyang katawan. Hindi na siya kumikilos. Nakita ng tanod ang nangyari, lumapit ito at pinulsuhan si Tatay, pagkatapos noon, ay tumalikod at nagbalik sa garison.
Patakbo kong nilapitan si Tatay. Matapos na kalagin ang pagkakatali ay nalaman kong wala na pala siyang buhay. Pinangko ko siya, lumakad akong papauwi kasunod si Nanay at Marcial. Hindi ko napigilan ang pagtulo ng aking luha.
Kinagat ni Nanay ang kanyang labi nang malamang patay na si Tatay.. Umaagos ang luha habang hinihimas ang gulong buhok ni Tatay. Dahil siguro sa nakita at sa malaking habag ay naiyak din si Marcial.
Muling nagbalik sa akin ang damdaming katulad ng mawala si Ama. Si Tatay ang pumalit sa kanya na nagmahal sa akin. At ngayon ay kalong ko ang katawan niyang wala ng buhay. Masakit. Tila hindi ko makakayanan ang sakit na aking nadama.
Ilang araw ding pinaglamayan namin si Tatay. Matapos madala sa kanyang huling hantungan, ay ginawa kong istambayan ang basketball court sa tapat ng munisipyo. ‘Yun ang naisip kong paraan para mabantayan ang mga kilos ng aming alkalde.
Umaga, hindi pa halos nakakalusot ang sikat ng araw sa mga punong humaharang, ay naroon na ako. Nakaupo ako sa sementong hagdan ng simbahang nasa tapat ng play ground at munisipyo. Nakita ko ang pagdating ng alkalde. Hindi siya lumabas hanggang sumapit ang ika labing dalawa ng tanghali. Ang paglabas na iyon, marahil, ay para mananghali. Hindi ko na siya sinundan. Umuwi na rin ako para kumain.
Magkasabay kaming nananghali ni Nanay. At habang kumakain ay tinanong niya ako. “Bakit ba mula ng mailibing ang iyong Tatay ay araw-araw kang umaalis?” Tanong niya. “At bakit ang balita ko ay doon sa tapat ng munisipyo ka nagpupunta?”
Tumingin ako sa kanya. “Gusto ko kasing malaman kung sino ang nagturo kay Tatay.” Matatag kong sagot.
“Bakit,” muli niyang tanong, “mayroon ka na bang pinaghihinalaan ?”
“Mayroon!”
“Sino?!”
“Saka ko na lang sasabihin kung matiyak kong tama ako.”
Hindi na siya kumibo. Kaya matapos kumain at bago mag-ika-isa ay muli akong bumalik sa tapat ng munisipyo. Nagkita kami sa daan ni Marcial, nagpilit na sumama, kaya nagkaroon ako ng kasama. Sa daan ay nasalubong namin ang grupo ng ilang sundalo na kasama ang isang lalaking nakatakip ang ulo.
Napabuntunghininga ako. Ito na ang aking hinihintay. At dahil wala doon si Nanay na kinakatakutan kong madamay, ay pumasok sa isipan kong ito na ang oras na dapat akong kumilos. Patakbo kong nilapitan ang grupong aming kasalubong. Nagulat ang lahat nang bigla kong hablutin ang supot sa ulo ng lalaki. Si alkalde, si alkalde nga ang makapiling tumutulong sa mga dayuhang sundalo. Isa siyang taksil na dapat mamatay.
Sa kabila ng pagkagulat ay nakuha pa ring magpaputok ng baril ang ilang sundalo. Pinaputukan nila ako. Hindi ko inalintana ang ilang balang nadama kong pumasok sa aking katawan. Hinawakan ko ang alkalde at ginawa kong panalag sa mga sumunod na balang tangka para sa akin. Nang makita kong duguan na ang alkalde ay binitiwan ko at hinarap ang ilang sundalong nagpapaputok. Noon ko nakitang si Marcial pala’y katulong kong lumalaban.
Sipa at suntok ang ginamit kong panlaban. Nang maagaw ko ang isang riple ay pinaghahampas ko ang mga sakang na kalaban. Lahat sila ay duguang nakahandusay sa daan matapos ang aming labanan. Isa si Marcial sa mga nakita kong nakahiga na maysugat. Patakbo akong lumapit para sumaklolo, nguni’t pinigilan niya ako.
“Tumakas ka,” sa mahinang boses ay wika niya, “iwan mo ako.”
“Hindi..,” sagot ko, “isasama kita!”
Pinangko ko siya para kasama kong tumakas. Pero hindi ko naituloy dahil nadama ko ang biglang pagbaksak ng kanyang mga kamay na nakahawak sa akin. Wala na siyang buhay. Wala na si Marcial. Bagamat sumagi sa akin ang matinding pangungulila, ay dahan-dahan kong ibinaba sa lupa ang kanyang katawan. May luha sa mga matang iniwan ko siya.
Patakbo akong tumalilis. Napansin ko ang ilang tao na nakakita sa nangyari. Nanlalaki ang kanilang mga mata. Siguro’y nagtataka na sa kabila ng mga tamang aking natamo ay tumatakbo pa rin akong umalis.
Dumating ako sa bahay na wala na ang mga sugat na likha ng mga balang naglagos sa aking katawan bagama’t naroon pa ang bakas ng dugo sa aking suot.
“Ano ang nangyari?” Malakas na tanong ni Nanay nang makita ang mapulang
bakas ng dugo sa aking damit.
“Napatay ko ang alkalde at ilang sundalong hapon.” Paliwanag ko. “Kaya kailangang umalis tayo. Tiyak na papatayin nila tayo.”
“Bakit si alkalde?”
“Siya ang nasa loob ng supot!” Sabi ko habang inilalagay sa isang sako ang ilan sa aming mga damit. “Hindi tayo dapat magtagal dito. Ngayon din ay mamumundok tayo.”
“Alam ko kung saan matatagpuan ang mga kasamahan ng iyong Tatay.” Wika ni Nanay na noon ay nagpapalit ng kasuotan.
Sa isang bayan ng Santa Veronika , nakatira ang isang babaeng ubod ng ganda na ang pangalan ay Rufina kasama ang kanyang Ina na si Aling Lucing ng Manghuhula at Ama na si Mang Basyo . Doon sa kanilang lugar naninirahan ang mga bampira na di kalayoansa bahay natinitirhan ng dalaga . Gabi – gabi umaalingawngaw ang mga boses na parang aso nagsisigawan at parang nag hahanap ng makakain . “ Nandito nanaman ang mga bampira “ ani ni Rufina na nag hahanda sa mga panglaban sa mga bampira na aataki sa kanilang bahay . “ grrrrrrrrr , grrrrrrrrr, grrrrrrrrrr .” tinig na ng gagaling sa silong ng kanilang bahay . “ Nandito na sila “ Bulong ni mang Basyo . Sa may silid nandoon si Aling Lucing gumagawa ng isang orasyon “ hmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm ,, aaaaay ay ay ay ay hhmmmmmmm” tinig ni Aling lucing Sabay namamalaspas ang kamay hawak ang dahong panglaban sa mga masasamang elemento . Hindi paman natapos ang orasyon ni Aling Lucing nawala na ang angulngul sa kanilang silong at nakatulog na din sila , Hindi paman masyadong lumiwanag sa labas na alingawngawan ang ang mga ito .
“aling Lucing Aling Lucing “ tinig na parang Humihingi ng Tulong sa matanda. Kaya agad na pumanaog sa kanilang bahay si Aling Lucing at nadat niya si Menda ang taga Santa Rosa na karga karga ang kanyang anak na Binatang Lalaki na walang malay at may kagat sa Leeg nito , Gulat na gulat ang matanda pati narin sina Rufina at asawang si Mang Basyo , Pinatuloy kaagad ang dalwa , “ paano nga po ba ito nangyari ?” tanong ni Aling Lucing . “Dumating nalang sya sa bahay na may sugat sa kanyang leeg at tinatanong naming kung ang hindi sya nakapag salita tulala at namumutla .” nangangambang kwento ni Menda . “at ng sya ay namalayan nangingiyak syang nag kweto sa akin “ dagdag pa ni Menda
Habang nagmamaneho si Diego bigla niyang na-itigil ang kanyang SUV dahil sa kanyang nakita. Mga batang hindi bababa sa edad na sampo hanggang siyam na taon, nagtatalo ang mga iyon sa tabi ng kalsada at ng lapitan niya iyon nakita niya na nag-aagawan ito sa isang stick ng sigarilyo. Iyon ang mga batang palaboy sa lansangan na pinabayaan ng mga magulang na mag-hanap buhay sa pamamagitan ng paglilimos sa mga dumaraang tao sa lansangang iyon, naalala niya tuloy ang dalawa niyang kapatid na yumao na. Si Diego\'y isang binatang mula sa mayamang pamilya na ulilang lubos na sa ina’t ama namatay ang mga ito sa isang Car accident noong bata pa siya, kasama ang dalawa pa niyang kapatid. He’s the only one survivor of his family kaya naman sa kanya napunta ang limpak-limpak na salapi na naiwan ng mga magulang nito pati mga ari-arian at negusyo na ngayon ay siya na ang namamahala. Piro sa halip na bumangon sa malagim na kahapon ay napoot siya sa kanyang mundong ginagalawan, wala siyang ginawa sa araw-araw kundi ang uminom at mag-saya, kasama ang mga kababaihang mababa ang moralidad.
Simula pag-kabata ay hindi siya nakaranas ng masayang pamilya, puros kaguluhan ang kanyang nakikita sa paligid. Kaya ngayon ay wala siyang hinangad kundi paglaruan ang mundong kanyang ginagalawan, manipulahin ang mga taong mangmang at magpakasaya sa piling ng mga babae niya sa pamamagitan ng kayamanang minana sa mga magulang niya.
“Mga bata bakit kayo nag-aagawan sa isang stick na sigarilyo?” tanong niya sa mga ito habang papalapit siya.
“Wala po kasi kaming pambili!” sagot ng mga ito sa kanya.
“Hito ang isang kaha ng sigarilyo, sa akin ito at wala pa itong bawas pag hati-hatian nalang ninyo” tugon niya sa mga ito at binigay niya ang isang kaha ng sigarilyo na wala pang bawas mula sa kanyang bulsa ng pang amerikana.
Masaya siya sa ginagawa niyang iyon at kung minsan siya pa ang pasimuno ng mga kagulohan sa kanilang lugar, ilang ulit narin siyang nakulong at muli’y nakakalaya sa tulong ng pera dahil sangkot siya sa mga illegal na pasugalan at gawain, marami rin siyang sinirang buhay dahil sa droga at konektado rin siya sa mga malalaking sindikato na nagbibenta nito.
Habang nasa kwarto siya niya masaya niyang ginugunita ang mga kasamaang ginawa niya sa buong araw na iyon, isa na don ang pag-bibigay niya sa mga bata ng sigarilyo at ang pagbabawas niya ng sahod sa mga trabahador ng kanyang negusyo, natawa pa siya ng maalala ang isang Janitor na nag-makaawa sa kanyang harapan para lang hindi matagkal sa kanyang trabaho.
“Hahahahah! Ang saya ng ganitong buhay!” bulong niya sa sarili at sinabayan iyon ng pag-lagok ng malamig na alak. Maya-maya pa ay nag-dilim ang buong silid ng kanyang kwarto agad siyang napatigil sa kanyang pwesto at marahang dinukot ang 45 baril mula sa drawer ng kanyang desk.
“Sino iyan?” tanong niya ng maramdaman niya na may tao kasabay nun ang isang ihip ng maalinsangang hangin.
“Don’t test me! babarilin kita hindi ako nagbibiro!” he added.
Isang mahiwagang tinig ang narinig niya mula sa kanyang likuran na malapit sa bintana na naka-bukas.
“Masaya ako sa ginagawa mo Diego! piro higit pa diyan ang magagawa mo kapag ginawa kitang katulad ko” sagot sa kanya ng mahiwagang tinig na unti-unting lumalapit sa kanyang likuran. Kinilabutan siya noong oras na iyon at sumagi sa kanya ang isang balita tungkol sa mga bampira na siyang dahilan raw ng mga namamatay na tao ngayon sa kanilang lugar.
“Isa kang bampira!” sigaw niya dito at noon di\'y pumihit siya sa kanyang likod at binaril niya ito sa katawan. Ngunit laking gulat niya na parang walang nangyari dito at hindi man lang ininda ang bala na tumama sa katawan nito at sa halip ay tumawa pa ito.
“Akala mo ba tatablan ako sa ginawa mo! Isang malaking kahibangan” wika nito sa kanya at sa isang kisap mata ay nasa harapan na niya ito.
“Ako si MAGNUS! Isa sa pinaka-malakas na bampira na nabubuhay” dagdag pa nito sa kanya at siya ay inihagis ng walang kahirap-hirap sa isang sulok ng silid.
“Isang bampira na salot sa lipunan...kayo! ang mga nilalang na kinapupootan ng mga tao” sigaw na tugon niya dito at mabilis siyang bumangon kahit nahihirapan at agad na itinutok ang hawak niyang baril. Tanging ang buwan lamang mula sa kalangitan ang tumatanglaw sa kanila noon mula sa bintana ng kanyang silid kaya may kaunting liwanag na dooy naglalagos, sapat na liwanag upang makita niya ang mukha ng Magnus na iyon.
“Pareho tayong salot sa lipunan...kaya wag kang mag-malinis” tugon ni Magnus sa kanya na nanlilisik ang mapupulang mata nito at tila bumilis pa ito kaysa kanina at sa isang saglit lamang ay nasa harapan na niya ang Magnus na iyon.
“Kami ang mga nilalang na nagbibigay ng buhay na walang hanggan…Pag-isipan mo ang alok ko sa iyo Diego...isang kapangyarihang walang kapantay at buhay na walang hanggan...hahahah!” dagdag sa kanya nito at bigla itong nawala sa isang kisap mata kasabay naman ang isang malakas na ihip ng hangin noon sa kanyang silid.
To be continue.
Chris got up and packed his things and try to look for help or any medical attention. The scars and bruises…the burning pain. He thought he would still need shots for rabies. He looked around the drive way, the parking lot, the vacant rooms. It doesn’t seemed to have any folks around. There were cars parked in the lot. Yet, it seemed like a ghost town.
He ran to the office where he met the manager who took him in. The manager was gone.
\"Damn, I could‘ve sworn I talked to him last night.\" he thought.
\" I am officially in the twilight zone.\" Chris said.
\"What the heck is going on around here?!\" he shouted out loud.
He yelled out with all his might. Nobody. Nobody was there. It’s like shouting at a mountain top and no one can hear you. That what it feels like to him. He went out to his car and packed his things inside. He sat at the driver’s seat and held the wheel. He went thru the nearby gas station. And still it seems that no one was there either. He’s in a Ghost town of some sort. He looked around to see if something was there to buy or eat. Before he left to look around, he filled his Mustang with high octane. Just to get the time’s worth. He loved his car that whatever happens, he makes sure the car stays awesome.
He was totally out of mind. He was wandering for several minutes. He just looked around. Try to find something he might able to use or eat.
He hasn’t talked to anyone since the night. So he turned on the radio. It’s working, that means he is near a city or town. So he sang like a concert king. His joy was outburst. He’s eating his chocolate until there were none. Now he needs a drink. There was a lake nearby. He stopped his car took off his clothes and ran to the lake. He obviously also need to take a bath. He plunged in to the water and while in it, he drank a lot. He was looking at his scars and bruises which still hurts a lot. No more bleeding. The scar looked strange when just last night he thought that it just happened.
While swimming, he thought much of what that tragedy had done to him.
\"What in the world did just happen? \" he thought.
\" Why in all the people in the world, did it happen to me?!\" He shouted.
\"Not much anything can do now. What’s done is done.\" He sadly thought
He thought a lot and he doesn’t seemed to connect the dots. Is it by chance? Coincidence? Or fate?
After a very cold bath in the lake, he went up to his car naked and held a pack of cigarettes. He obviously doesn’t smoke. He has asthma. But he just bought the cigarettes just to look cool in school. He lit one and started smoking naked thinking in pain. The moment on how he defeated the monster, how many times he was scratched and bitten. Without his Martial Arts training, he’d be dead by now. Or is it by sheer luck that he was alive?
He smoked another and another until he reached for the 13th stick, and then he heard scratches along the bushes. He hurriedly snatched the blade from his car while getting his pants on. He was alerted by the noise. He was being paranoid since the incident. No one can blame him after what happened. It’s just his reflex. Suddenly, a bunny came out of the bushes. He sighed but he was really scared at the time. His heart was beating so fast that it’s almost impossible that he is still breathing. A heartbeat like that could cause a person to a shock. He thought it was adrenaline. He felt so strong inside and his senses were heightened that he can almost smell the bunny that ran out of the bushes. And then suddenly he blacked out.
He was as stiffed as a corpse when he woke up. He was still at the side of the lake.. Half-naked and his body was soaked in blood. He got up walking towards the lake. As he washed it off by the water,
he quickly noticed that his pants were torn and with something like an animal fur all over. He thought he was attacked again until he caught a glimpse of a mutilated deer floating on the water. He suddenly felt afraid and outraged. Cause he feels like the monster was nearby. Unexpectedly, he saw a man near his car. Mostly likely the very same man he saw that was following him. He came across the field and yelled at the man. He was so furious and felt courageous coz of the blade he has on his back. He knew he could take this sucker out with one strike.
\"Hey you !!\" he was shouting angrily.
\"You were the one following time haven’t you?\" he asked strongly.
Chris just held his blade on his back just in case any attack or move the stranger had in mind.
The man just stayed and stared at him. Both of them just stood but Chris was more aggressive-looking than the man.
\"YES.\" says the man with a harsh voice along with an enchanted smile.
\"I mean you no harm.\" the stranger spoke.
\"What the hell are doing in my car and why the hell are you following me?!\" Chris yelled.
\" I am here to help you with whatever you’re experiencing. \" the man said.
\" I have been looking for you all this time and I know that you are the last piece of the puzzle.\" he mysteriously said.
\" What fucking puzzle? And why the hell are you looking for me? Am I a criminal? Are you a spy? Were you spying on me all this time? Are you gay?\" Chris asked spontaneously.
\" No. I am not gay. And yes I have been observing you for a long time from High school through College until the time was right to train you.\" the man mentioned.
\" You still haven’t answered my question. What puzzle?\" Chris said.
The man jumped acrobatically over the car and lands in front of him. He closely looked at his whole physical being from head to toe front and back. Chris was about to pull out his blade when the man stopped his arm with his two fingers. Even though how hard he tried, his arm was locked in that position. He was guessing this man knows something about Martial arts or Kung Fu or something.
\"Let me go !!\" Chris yelled at the man.
The man said to him that he will only let go until he enhance his calm. Until he was calm down the man will not let go. Then he announced his intention why he was following him. Explained everything to him on how he was a part of a puzzle. Chris told him that he was attacked recently and how he even woke up a week later after the incident. Eventually, Chris was gaining trust towards the man.
As the man was listening, he secretly snatched the blade from Chris’ back without him noticing. Just to make sure that he will not be using it in the future. Just in case. As Chris reached through his back pocket he immediately noticed that he lost his blade. When suddenly, the man showed it to him and said that he would just hold on to it for security reasons.
\" Forgive me for being impolite. My name is Stephen Hama. Master of the Uminarabi Clan.
I need you to come with me.\" the man said.
\" Umi what? Master of what? … Disaster? \" Chris amusingly asked.
\" Now why would I come with you? \" he said.
\" I know what happened to you even if you hadn’t told me. That was inevitable. Fate and destiny had taken place. The time was right and perfect. I was as if God had written it Himself.\" Stephen explained.
\"Hold on a minute! You mean to say, You were watching me even I was going to be killed?!\" Chis remarked
\"You mean to say you know what happened to me every step of the killing?! What if I died? What if luck was not on my side?!!!\" Chris furiously yelled.
@
\"Then you were not the one I am looking for.\" the man calmly answered.
\"Well, you go to hell !!\" Chris yelled.
Stephen just stood there, looked up and sighed. Looked back at him and
\" You do not understand, I knew you would defeat that monster. I knew…. I somehow knew you can take care of yourself pretty well. But not well enough.\" Stephen declared.
\"Who the heck are you to judge me? Who the hell are you to tell me all these things? Do you think I asked for this? What am I? What am I going to be?\" Chris ferociously said.
His eyes turned yellow, his veins suddenly popped out an outline all over his arms and hands. And then Chris fell on his knees. He cried in front of a stranger. Stephen quickly understood what he went thru the past few days. He pat his shoulders and explained that he wanted him to come with him to meet the rest of the puzzle.
Stephen wasn’t surprise of what had happened. Things that are weird to some people. Doesn’t even bother him. A pat on Chris’ shoulders and then he told him.
\"Chris… I want you to come with me., There are a lot of things you have to know about your condition.\"
Chris couldn’t believe what he heard.
\"What condition? What is this a cancer?!\" he said.
\"You will understand when we get there.\" Stephen answered back.
Chris went with him. They rode the Mustang and go about the highway. After hours of long drive, Stephen pointed out to exit and went off road. Moments later they were in the woods. Deep dark in the woods, he was totally scared. He’s never been in the woods before. He thought he be probably dead. He was uneasy. He couldn’t believe that he let this looney take him. He is now literally in a Twilight Zone.
After a while, They were at the camp. Chris never knew that there would be such place. Total weirdness but he was astonished. There in the middle of the wilderness, somewhat like a boot camp. There were several dudes or should I say recruits. Three to be exact. And an old man in a kimono suit. The old man called in the three men inside the cabin as Stephen got out of the car and bowed before the old man. Chris got out as well. The old man stepped towards him and greeted him with a bow.
\"Welcome. I have been expecting you.\" the old man said.
Chris was surprised.
\" What do mean expecting me? How do you know my name?\" he answered back.
The old man stared at him. Front and back. From head to feet. He nodded in approval. He looked at Stephen with a simple smile. Stephen bowed at the old man and went inside the cabin.
The old man talked to Chris about him being there. He told him he was chosen because he was the last piece of the puzzle they were looking for in years. He still doesn’t understand why he was a piece of the puzzle.
\" What puzzle are you talking about? Who am I? What am I? What have I become? And who are you anyway?\" he asked the old man.
\" Forgive me for my manners, I am Grandmaster Uminarabi.\" the old man introduced himself.
\" I know you have a lot to questions waiting to be answered. This is my home in the Himalayas. We are the Uminarabi Clan. And we are willing to teach you what you need to learn about your new found gift.\" the old man said.
to be continued................
Sa panahong nababalutan ng kadiliman ang mundo dahil sa muling pagsilang ng ika-labing isang henerasyon ng makabago at higit na makapangyarihang pagsanib pwersa ng mga bampira\\\\\\\'t lobo, sumibol ang nag-iisang \\\\\\\"vampwolf\\\\\\\", at tanging mga anghel lamang ang makakapagligtas sa sangkatauhan...
Si Yesuya, itinadhanang anghel ipinababa mula sa langit para sa isang misyon, subalit dahil lubhang makapangyarihan at imortal ang \\\\\\\"vampwolf\\\\\\\" (taglay ng bawat imortal ang buhay na walang hanggan), kailangan nyang magbalatkayo bilang isang ganap na tao at ipaibig si Shiyi sa kanya dahil tanging pag-ibig ang kalaban ng vampwolf (kapag sya\\\\\\\'y umibigat nagmahal, sumpa sa kanya ang pagiging mortal datapwat kahit napakamakapangyarihan man, mananaig parin ang katawang tao at sya\\\\\\\'y maaaring mamatay).
Umibig nga nang matindi si Shiyi kay Yesuya. Sa kabila naman ng misyon ni Yesuya, tunay na pag-ibig din ang nadama nya\\\\\\\'t sa kaibuturan ng kanyang puso, hindi nya kayang kitilin ang buhay ni Shiyi kahit may pagkakataon na syang gawin ito. Alam ng nilikhang pinuno ang naunsyaming misyon, subalit nakatadhana na ang paglipol ng kasamaan at kasabay nito ang pagsilang ng mapayapang mundo. Ang nilikhang mahiwagang espada ay bumulusong mula sa langit at tumagos sa puso ni Shiyi. Hindi naman hinayaan ni Yesuya at prinotektahan ang kanyang mahal ng kanyang mga pakpak ngunit nang huli na ang lahat, pinabayaan din nyang tumagos sa kanyang puso ang espada tanda ng kanyang tunay na pag-ibig at kasabay nilang pagpanaw at hanggang sa kabilang buhay...
Subalit ang pagtatapos ng epikong wagas na pag-ibig ng dalawang nilalang na ito ay magpapatuloy parin kaya? ... kung totoong may \\\\\\\"reincarnation\\\\\\\" nga....
Sa isang kakaibang daigdig na ang tawag ay \\\\\\\" Divine World \\\\\\\" , meron isang nakatayong Academy , ngunit ito ay hindi pinapasukan ng mga ordinaryong estudyante , kung hindi mga nilalang na may ibat-ibang kakayahan at mga lahi , hindi nalalayo ang Daigdig na ito sa mga mundo ng Tao , ang \\\\\\\" divine gate \\\\\\\" na nag bubukas sa pinto patungo sa mundo ng mga tao at mga \\\\\\\" Divines\\\\\\\" ( Divines ang tawag sa mga nilalang sa ibang daigdig).
Ngunit may isang pagkakataon na ito ay bumukas ng kusa at nasaksihan ito ng isang \\\\\\\"Divine\\\\\\\" , isang nag ngangalang Lexus , siya ay kalahating lobo at kalahating tao.
Sa isang araw ng pag aaral sa Divine Academy , nababagot itong si Lexus at kung ano-ano ang nasaisipan niya . Tapos na ang klase nila sa Academy.
Lexus:
hay , makagawa nga ng - kahit ano...
-Naglakad lakad itong si Lexus at pumunta sa Kagubatan , kung saan tumungtong siya sa mga puno-puno , at nagisip. Sa pag iisip niya biglang may malaking liwanag na nagmula sa isang kweba di kalayuan sa kanyang lugar.
Lexus:
T-teka , ano yun?.....liwanag?..
-Lumapit si Lexus upang tingnan , at silipin ang liwanag na iyon
Humakbang siya sa bawat puno na makita niya papunta sa liwanag . Narating niya ang kweba at tinitigan ang liwanag.
Lexus:
Ano ba tong liwanag? ....
-Biglang may tumalsik na Tao mula sa liwanag na iyon-isang babae , nadaganan si Lexus ng babae .
Lexus:
Aggghh! , Aray...Anong?!!!.-
???:
aahh!..ang sakit , ano bang nangyari?......
Lexus:
Sino ka ba ha?...! teka , isa kang tao? taong lobo?..
???:
Ah ano? ano bang sinasabi mo?...
-Hinawakan ni Lexus ang braso ng babae , at naramdaman niya ang daloy ng dugo sa pagiging Mortal.
Lexus:
Hindi pwede , isa kang Tao?!!!
???:
Ah oo nga , Tao ako...
-Napaatras si Lexus sa pagkagulat , hindi niya inaasahang makakakita siya ng isang tao sa kanilang lugar.
???:
Teka , Nasaan na nga ba ako?...pakiusap sabihin mo saakin...
-biglang may tumawag kay Lexus na kaibigan niya , siya ay si Tiffa , kalahi rin niya itong si Tiffa , isa siyang taong lobo.
Tiffa:
Hoy Lexus!! nandyan ka ba?!!...
Lexus:
Ah , Tiffa , teka sandali ..!!!
???:
Sino yun?...
Lexus:
Wag kang maingay , dyan ka lang!!... bawal ka nilang makita ..
-Kinausap ni Lexus si Tiffa na ayos lang siya at nagpapahangin lamang sa kagubatan .
Tiffa:
Ano ba ginagawa mo doon? kanina pa kita hinahanap...
Lexus:
Ah- w-wala , nababagot kasi ako pag mag isa , kaya naisipan ko na dito nalang muna ako ...
Tiffa:
Ah sige, maiwan muna kita , pupunta pa ako sa Academy....
Lexus:
Ah Sige!....
-Umalis na si Tiffa , at bumalik si Lexus sa babae .
Lexus:
Teka , ano ba ang pangalan mo?...
???:
Ah-ako , ako si Louise
Lexus:
Ako naman si Lexus , nandito ka sa mundo naming mga Divines , wala pang tao ang nakakapasok dito , ikaw lamang , kailangan mo nang umalis , mapanganib dito.
Louise:
H-hindi ko alam kung paano ako nakapasok dito , basta ang alam ko ay may liwanag akong nakita at pinuntahan ko ito , hindi ko alam kung paano makaalis dito.
Lexus:
Teka , dito ka sa kweba nanggaling ..
-Pumasok si Lexus sa kweba , pero wala siyang nakitang lagusan o daanan papalabas sa mundo nila.
Lexus:
imposible to , dito kita nakita , nanggaling ka dito..- bawal kita isama sa amin , sasaktan ka nila pag nangyari na malaman nila na isa kang mortal , kaming mga taong lobo gusto namin sa dugo.
Louise:
Ano , taong lobo ka?!.....
Lexus:
Wag kang magalala , hindi ako kumikitil ng buhay , lalo na sa mga kagaya mo na walang laban...-kaya kailangan mo nang umalis , pero di ko alam kung nasaan ang lagusan .
Louise:
meron pa bang ibang paraan ? ( kinakabahan ) , gusto ko na makaalis dito , sabihin mo .
Lexus:
Hindi ko alam , gusto man kitang paalisin , wala akong alam na paraan .
Louise:
Paano na yan.....
Hindi ko alam kung madidiktahan ang puso.pero alam kong naisara ko na ang puso ko..
kung pag-ibig ang pag-uusapan, hindi ko alam kung ano ang sasabihin dahil para sa akin and mundo ay akin.. walang iba kundi ako lang...
Isa akong finearts student, hindi ko alam kung anong nangyayari ngayon, tila isang lihim na sulat ang lagi kong nakikita sa harap ng pintuan ng aming bahay. na nanggagaling sa kung kanino ay hindi ko alam.... lihim niya akong pinapadalhan ng sulat sa tuwing sasapit ang alas otso ng gabi. laging nilalaman ng sulat ay ang pagtatapat ng kanyang pagmamahal para sa akin, ang mga ito bale wala para sa akin dahil wala akong panahon para dito.. sa tuwing ako ay nagpipinta ang tangi kong naiisip ay ang masaklap na mga pangyayari sa aking buhay at wala ng iba. Tama na para sa akin na mahal ko ang sarili ko dahil ayaw kong masaktan pang muli....
Ilang Buwan Din ang lumipas nang muli siyang nag paramdam............
Buwan ng Nobyembre.........
alas otso ng kinagabihan araw ng lunes, muli kong natanggap ang kanyang sulat, sabi:
\\\"Minahal kita ng palihim dahil alam kong ang mundo ay umiikot lamang sayo. gusto kong magpaalam dahil sa kadahilanang hindi mo maiintindihan.. noong una palamang kitang nakita, alam kong ikaw na ang hinahanap ko, matagal na.. gusto kong magkita tayo sa lugar na alam mong doon kita nahanap.. dahil gusto kong makita mo ako sa una\\\\\\\'t huling pagkakataon at malaman ko narin na kung minahal mo rin ako...\\\\\\\" hindi ko na alam ang gagawin ko ngayon pero sa tingin ko minahal ko siya kahit sa lihim nyang pagpapadala ng sulat lang at sa mga salitang nakapaloob dito.....
Tagpuan............
hinanap ko siya at pinuntahan nung gabing yun... kasing sinag ng araw ang buwan nang ako ay pumunta naghintay ako sa kanya, hanggang sa nagsimula ng magulap ang langit at umulan hinahanap at hinihintay ko parin siya.... at sa sandaling ako ay aalis na, nang biglang kumdlat at kumolog doon nakita ko siya sa tabi ko, tinangkang hawakan ang kamay ko at lumohod at sinabing:
\\\\\\\"Gabriel,ang lihim na nagmamahal sayo.\\\\\\\"
niyakap ko siya at hinalikan sa labi, hindi inisip ang maaring masamang mangyari dahil mahal ko siya kahit pa sabihin na isa siyang bampira..mahal ko siya kahit pa ay ibig sabihin nito ay ang pagkabasag ng pangako ko sa sarili, basta\\\\\\\'t para sa akin ang mahalin siya ay Unpredictable
=PHANTOM=
Mahirap maging guro dahil minsan kahit hindi mo na oras ng pagtatrabaho kailangan mo pa ring magtrabaho para mameet ang deadlines ng pasahan ng mga grades at papreworks. Kailangan mo ring makipagtunggali araw-araw sa mga pasaway na mag-aaral, at minsan kahit sa mga nilalang na hindi na taga-lupa.
Madalas kong kasabay ang estudyanteng ito. Matangkad, medyo payat, medyo lubog ang mga mata. Ngunit hindi siya pamilyar sa akin dahil hindi ko siya nahahawakan sa klase. Madalas ko lang siyang makita sa mga bakanteng classroom na nag-iisa o \'di kaya\'y sa hallway. Nakakasabay ko sa paglalakad pagpasok sa paaralan o \'di kaya\'y palabas kapag uwian.
Ang nakapagtataka, tila wala siyang kaibigan dahil hindi ko siya nakikitang may kasama o kakwentuhan. hindi rin siya pumupunta sa faculty room para magpasa ng project o ng seatwork.
Hanggang sa bigla na lang siyang nawala. Hindi ko na siya nakikita o nakakasabay. Normal lang sa akin, wala naman din ako masyadong pakialam sa kanya dahil hindi nga siya kabilang sa mga estudyanteng hinahawakan ko.
Dumating na lang ang araw na naglaho siya sa aking paningin. Hindi ko na siya kailanman nakita o nakasabay pa.
Minsan, tumitingin ako ng mga lumang yearbook sa library. Pagbuklat ko sa isang pahina, isang larawan ang tumawag ng aking pansin. Pamilyar ang mukha ng lalaking iyon. Nang matitigan kong mabuti ang mukha niya, parang kamukha niya yung estudyanteng madalas kong nakakasabay dati. Yung estudyanteng madalas kong makita sa mga bakanteng classroom na nag-iisa.
Tinanong ko sa isang co-teacher na matagal na sa eskwelahang ito kung naabutan niya yung bata sa larawan.
\"Ah, si Jerome. naging estudyante ko yan. Isa yan sa pinakamakulit at maingay sa klase! Hyper yan! pero may pagkaweirdo yan eh.\" sabi ni ma\'am annabelle
\"Eh nasaan na po siya ngayon?\" tanong ko.
\"Naku matagal nang patay yan! Nagpakamatay...nabroken hearted sa babae.\"
\"Po? Patay na siya?\" takang tanong ko.
\"Oo. Nakakapanghinayang nga yan eh..matalino din kasi. Bakit?\"
\"Eh kasi po, madalas ko siyang nakakasabay dati. Tsaka nakikita ko rin siya sa mga vacant rooms. Kala ko estudyante natin talaga...\"
\"Ay nagpapakita rin siya sa\\\'yo? Naku masanay ka na. Talagang nagpaparamdam pa rin yan hanggang ngayon sa mga teachers dito. Nasanay na lang din kami sa pagpaparamdam niya.\"
Nasanay??? Nakasasanayan pala ang pakikisalamuha sa mga ligaw na kaluluwa dito sa lupa? Kailan kaya ako masasanay, kung habang ginagawa ko itong kwentong ito ay nakaupo siya sa kabilang lamesa...
Chapter 1
Sabi ng iba she is perfect. With her witty and charm she can win every ones heart. Through her unnatural purple eyes mabibighani niya sinuman. Pero ang hindi alam ng iba may dahilan kung bakit ganoon siya.
Hindi lamang siya basta normal dahil siya ay kabilang sa mundo ng mga imortal, pero hindi siya bampira at lalong hindi siya isang lobo.
Sino siya? Siya si Chastity a sixteen years old witch. Siya ang nag-iisang witch sa angkan nila na makalipas ang sampung henerasyon ay inakala ng mga kalahi nila na tuluyan ng nawala ang kakayahang magbunga ng isang imortal na bata na nagtataglay ng kapangyarihang maging isang ganap na witch. Pero lahat iyon ay nagbago ng isilang si Chastity.
Ang kapangyarihang itinago ng panahon ngayon ay nagbabalik sa katauhan ng dalaga at ngayon sinong makapag-sasabi kung hanggang saan siya dadalhin ng tadhana kasama ang kapangyarihang iyon.
Wizard at witches kilala din sa tawag na “Sursum” dahil sa kasakiman at kahayukan sa kapangyarihan ng mga mortal at kapwa nila imortal napilitang magtago ang mga sursum upang maiwasan ang pagkontrol sa kanila ng magkabilang panig.
Minsan kasama silang namumuhay ng mga mortal pero karamihan ay piniling magtago sa lugar kung saan protektado sila ng majika ang lugar na kilala sa tawag na “Solunar”. Isang mundong maihahalintulad sa mundo ng mga mortal subalit sa lugar na ito malayang nagagamit ng mga sursum ang kakayahan nila.
At gaya ng digmaang naganap sa pagitan ng mga bampira at lobo sinubok din ang katatagan ng lahi ng mga sursum sa pagharap nila sa digmaang likha mismo ng kapwa nila sursum. Iyon ay si Lumerca isang makapangyarihan witch na nilamon ng kasakiman ang pagkatao at tinangkang pagharian di lamang ang mundo ng mga sursum kundi maging ng mga moratal at immortal.
Sa digmaang naganap marami ang nagbuwis ng buhay. Walang sinuman ang nakaligtas sa mapait na tadhana bata, matanda, babae o sino pa man ay lahat lumaban para sa kapayapaang inaasam ng lahat.
Sa pagnanais na mapigilan ang masamang balak ni Lumerca ibinuwis ng mga “Bana” ang kanilang buhay sila ang pitong haligi ng lahi ng mga sursum at gamit ang kanilang kapangyarihan naikulong nila si Lumerca sa Hedera ang kulungan ng mga tampalasang sursum pero naging kapalit noon ay buhay ng mga bana na ipinagluksa ng lahing sursum.
Sa pagnanais na magkaroon ng panibagong buhay nagpasya ang pamilya ni Chastity na umalis sa “Solunar” at makipamuhay sa mundo ng mga mortal kahit ang kapalit nito ay pagtalikod nila sa mundong kinagisnan.
Maging bahagi ng normal na mundo at kalimutan ang lahat madali nga bang gawin iyon? Kung ganoon bakit parang hindi iyan ang tumatakbo sa isipan ni Chastity habang nakatayo sa harapan ng bagong bahay nila.
Pakiramdam ni Chastity ng mga oras na iyon isa siyang paslit na nawawala sa gitna ng karamihan. Yung pakiramdam bang lumalaban siya sa napakalakas na agos ng buhay.
“Everything will be fine Chast.” Ang masuyong sabi ni Enrique sa anak ng mapansin nito an pag-aalala sa maamong mukha ng dalaga.
Isang payak na ngiti ni Chastity sa ama bago ito pumasok sa loob ng bahay kasama ang ina pero agad din iyong naglaho ng mawala ang mga ito sa paningin niya. Gusto man niyang paniwalaan ang aman pero hindi niya alam kung bakit parang iba ang pakiramdam niya.
Susunod na sana ang dalaga sa magulang ng bigla siyang mapatigil. Biglang nanlamig ang likuran niya na tila ba may nagmamatyag sa kanya subalit ng lumingon siya wala naman siyang nakita.
Inisip na lang niya na bahagi lang iyon ng imahinasyon niya kahit pa habang tumatagal lalong tumitindi ang pakiramdam niyang iyon, bagamat wala siyang panganib na nararamdaman hindi pa rin sapat iyon para makalma ang pakiramdam ng dalaga. Kaya naman ipinasya na lamang niyang pumasok sa loob.
Kung sana ay nagtagal pa ang dalaga o kaya ay lumapit sa laugar kung saan ituturo siya ng kanyang pakiramdam malamang makita niya ang may-ari ng isang pares na dilaw na mata na kanina pa nagmamasid sa kanya mula sa malayo.
Si Ruri ay isang simpleng manunulat, ang kanyang mga tula ay malalim at may ibig sabihin. ngunit sa likod ng mga papel at mga tulang pumukaw sa puso ng mga nakakabasa, ay isang pusong nabubuhay na ng mahigit isang daang taon... Nabubuhay dahil sa isang dahilan... Ang hanapin ang mga lobo na pumatay sa kanyang kasintahan. nabuhay siya nang may poot at galit... At yun ang apoy na nagpapanatiling buhay sa kanya...
Si Ruri ay naging bahagi na ng maraming digmaan at laban sa pagitan ng mga taong lobo at mga bampira, kumitil ng madaming buhay ng kaaway... ngunit sa likod ng matatalim na pangil at matang walang ibang alam kungdi pumatay ng kaaway, ay ang pusong nagmamahal sa kanyang kasintahang tao... si \\\\\\\'Anne\\\\\\\'... si Anne ay pinatay ng mga taong lobo. At hanggang ngayun ay naghahanap siya ng hustisya para sa pumanaw na kasintahan...
Makalipas ang ilang taon na pamamalagi sa America para mag aral ng pagsusulat ng tula at mga nobela. Bumalik siya sa Pilipinas para tuparin ang pangarap na magsulat at ibahagi ang karunungang natutunan niya sa ibang bansa, kasabay nun ang paghingi ng hustisya sa kanyang pumanaw na kasintahan 100 taon na ang lumipas... Pagbaba niya sa eroplano sa NAIA terminal 2 ay sinalubong niya ang mga tao ng mga pulang mata na may ibig sabihin at may nais ipabatid...
Sinalubong siya ng kanyang kaibigang manunulat si Josh Selis, ngumiti si Josha at sinabing \\\"Maligayang pagbabalik... ang Manunulat na gumagamit ng Dugo... Sa pagbabalik mo dito sa Pilipinas... ano naman ang gusto mong gawin?\\\" tanong ni Josh, ngumiti si Ruri at hinawi ng hangin ang kanyang bangs sa kanang mata, at pinapakita ang mga mapula nitong mata \\\"magsulat... at pumatay ng mga taong lobo na pumatay kay Anne\\\" sabi ni Ruri.
Sa pamamalagi ni Ruri sa Pilipinas ay tahimik siyang nagmasid sa boong paligid, at isang babae ang pumukaw sa kanyang attensyon, dali dali niya itong nilapitan at tinanong ang pangalan. Ngumiti ang babae at sinabing \\\"ako nga pala si Marie... Marie Delos Reyes\\\", naging magkasundo si Ruri at Marie. Nagustuhan ni Marie ang mga tula at kwentong isinusulat ni Ruri... At lumalim pa ang samahan ni Ruri at Marie hanggang sa maging sila, nalaman rin ni Marie ang pagkatao ni Ruri Bilang isang bampira ngunit hindi niya iyon pinansin dahil mahal na mahal niya si Ruri, at nagpasya silang magpakasal... At nagkaroon ng bunga ang kanilang pagmamahalan, isang sanggol na babae at lalaking pinangalanan nilang Rico at Anna. Nagsama sila bilang isang masayang pamilya at naging ehemplo ng matibay na pagsasama ng mag-asawa at pamilya. Di kalaunan at nawala narin sa isip ni Ruri ang paghihiganti at poot na kanyang nadama sa loob ng 100 taon. Bagkos ay pinatawad na niya ang mga taong lobo na pumatay kay Anne.
-End-
Continuation...
It’s been twelve decades and I’m still alive in this world. I’ve forgotten every reason for living a sane life. I’ve forgotten, shunned, and betrayed every aspect of humanity.
When I was still studying in college something unwanted happened... I’ve always been the only different guy in class. They say I was Intelligent, Strong, and a lady’s man. But I only loved one woman in my past life. Which is you Danica. Danica you’ve died a horrible death at the hands of the late president Ferdinand Marcos\'s rule.
At that time I almost committed suicide. But I was stopped by Heherson Furor Javier, my trusted friend. I didn’t know he was vampire. In a struggle of life and death. Furor accidentally bit me but saved my life in exchange for the damned curse of immortality. I only have one reason to remain living. My immortal search for new love.
I miss you Danica. But I’ve found someone new, Dahlia.
Then a chat box entered the screen. She almost screamed when she saw what was written.
[I’m right behind you... I hope your willing to be mine forever]
As the she turned the chair around. Enrique immediately kissed her on her lips.
\"Are you willing?\" Enrique asked.
\"Ye.. Yes\" Was Dahlia\'s shocked stumbling answer.
Enrique brushed the hair from her face and made his way to her neck where he gave her a lovingly dreadful gift.
Namangha si Andoy nang muling masilayan ang malaking puno ng santol sa tabi ng luma nilang bahay sa Baryo Alitaptap. Siyam na taong gulang lang siya noong isinama ng ina patungong Maynila. Biente-singko anyos na siya ngayon. Napakaraming taon din siyang nawala. Napakaraming taon ding nalugmok sa kalungkutan ang amang piniling mamuhay mag-isa magpahanggang ngayon, kahit alam niyang may bagong pamilya na ang ina ng nag-iisang anak na si Andoy. Biglang nakaramdam ng matinding kirot sa puso ang binata nang mapagtanto kung gaano kasakit ang ginawa nilang mag-ina kay Mang Jose. Gano’n pa man ang nangyari ay ‘di na maibabalik pa. Ito ang masakit na katotohanan sa kanyang buhay.
Mula sa sulok ng malulungkot na mga mata’y humulagpos ang iilang patak ng luha. At habang pinapahid ng kanyang palad ang mga luhang iyon, bigla siyang nakaramdam ng kakaibang ginhawa nang muling mapadako sa puno ng santol ang paningin. “ Maraming salamat sa’yo dahil nananatili kang kapiling ni Tatay. Mabuti ka pa, may panininindigan,” aniyang animo’y taong kinakausap ang puno ng Santol. Napansin niya kasi na habang tumatagal, lumalaki ito. Kumakapal na ng husto ang mga sanga’t dahon. Samantalang ang kanilang bahay ay halos dumapa na sa lupa. Hindi na ito pinaayos ng ama.
“Napakalaki na ng puno, ano? “ narinig niya ang boses ng matandang ama mula sa kanyang likuran.
‘ Tay, dapat siguro, bawasan na natin ng sanga ‘yan. Tumakip na kasi sa bahay “ suhestiyon ni Andoy.
“Wag na ‘wag mong gawin ‘yan ! “ Napasigaw si Mang Jose sa pagtutol.
Nagulat si Andoy sa reaksiyon ng ama. Subalit hindi na siya nag-usisa pa kung bakit. Naiisip niya kasing baka dahil sa sentimental value.
Kinagabihan, mailap ang tulog para kay Andoy. Lubha siyang nanibago sa higaan na banig na nakalatag sa sahig. Kung tutuusin, ito ang nakasanayan niya noong kanyang kabataan. Tila nasasakal din sya sa napakadilim na maliit na silid. Walang kuryente sa Alitaptap kaya walang ilaw maliban sa gasera na pinapatay din kapag matutulog na sila. Kararating niya lang pero hinahanap-hanap na ng katawan niya ang karangyaaan sa Maynila. Ang telebisyon, ang bentilador, at iba pa ay agad niyang na-miss.
Tumayo siya at binuksan ang bintana upang makapasok ang hangin o kahit hamog man lang. Nang makaramdam ng kaginhawaan mula sa preskong hangin, nanatili siyang nakatayo sa may bintana, ninanamnam ang sariwang pakiramdam at kapayapaan na dulot ng gabi. Napapikit siya, ngunit biglang napadilat nang naramdaman ang maliliit na batong tumama sa kanyang ulo. Kasunod niyon ay nakarinig siya ng mahinang tawa ng babae. Napatingin si Andoy sa taas ng puno ng santol. Wala siyang nakita maliban sa napakakapal na Alitaptap na masiglang nagpaikot-ikot sa mga dahon at sanga ng santol.
“ Andoy, “ tinatawag ang kanyang pangalan ng isang boses ng babae.
Pagbaba ni Andoy ng kanyang paningin, namangha siya nang makita ang napakalaking bahay sa lugar kung saan dapat naroon ang puno ng santol. At sa isang bintanang nakaharap sa kanya, isang magandang babae ang nakangiti sa kanya. Sa sobrang takot at pagkagulat, biglang naisara ni Andoy ang bintana ng silid. “Diyos ko! “bulalas niya.
Lumabas si Andoy ng silid at hinanap ang amang kanina ay tiyak niyang nakahiga sa maliit na sala. Kahit madilim, natiyak niyang wala na roon ang ama. Pumasok siya pabalik sa silid. Subalit mas nagulat siya nang pagbukas ng pintuan ay nakakasilaw na liwanag ang sumalubong sa kanya. Pakiramdam ni Andoy ay hindi na siya makakahinga sa sobrang takot. Sobrang init ang pakiramdam niya sa kanyang mga tainga. At halos lahat yata ng balahibo sa katawan niya’y nagtayuan na.
“Guni-guni mo lang yan. Matapang ka kaya lakasan mo ang loob mo.” untag niya sa sarili.
“Anak, ” si Mang Jose.
“ T- tay, “ nanginginig sa sabi ni Andoy.
Mula sa kung saan ay muling narinig ni Andoy ang boses ng babae. Halos humahalakhak na ito sa tawa na marahil ay dahil sa kanya. At pagkurap ni Andoy sa kanyang mga mata, nakita niya ang babaeng nakangisi sa tabi ng tatay niya.
“ Napakaduwag mo pa rin,” sabi ng babae sa kanya.
“Siya si Analen, anak. Siya ang nag-iisang anak ng mga taong tumulong at kumupkop sa akin. Sa kanila ako ngayon naglilingkod.” paliwanag ng ama.
Nakatulala lang si Andoy. Hindi alam kung ano ang paniniwalaan. Sa harap niya ay si Mang Jose at si Analen na hindi niya alam kung mga tauhan lang sa panaginip niya. Payat na matangkad si Analen. Makinis ang maputi nitong balat at hanggang balikat ang medyo kulay kayumangging buhok. May pagka-tisay ang maamo at palangiti nitong mukha. Modernong babae kung ituring niya ito. Subalit hindi niya lang matiyak kung may nakakubli itong buntot, pakpak o pangil. Hindi niya nga tiyak sa sarili niya kung pati siya ay totoo sa pagkakataong ito..
“Analen, huwag mo siyang pabayaan, ha. Nanibago lang siya rito. Matagal kasi siyang nawala , “ pakiusap ni Mang Jose sa dalaga at kasunod niyon ay humakbang na ito palayo sa kanila.
“Andoy, ‘wag ka ngang mag-isip ng nakakasakit sa ulo mo. Sino pa ba kasi ang nagdadamayan kung ‘di tayong magkakapitbahay. Iniwan kasi ninyo si Mang Jose. Sinagip lang siya ng mga magulang ko,” paliwanag ni Analen.
Hindi pa rin makapagsalita si Andoy. Naramdaman niya na lang na hinawakan ni Analen ang braso niya at hinila siya nito papunta sa malaking bahay.
Namangha si Andoy sa napakagandang bahay ni Analen. Pero hindi sila nagtagal doon. Dinala siya ni Analen sa bandang likuran ng bahay. Mula roon ay nakita ni Andoy ang iba pang malalaking bahay sa ‘di kalayuan. May nakita rin siyang napakalawak na pataniman.
“ Pataniman ng Cacao at Kape ‘yan”, paliwanag ni Analen .
“Napakalawak, “sabi ni Andoy.
Napangiti si Analen habang napatingin sa binata.
“ O, ayan, nagsalita ka rin. Akala ko umurong na ang dila mo, “ wika ni Analen.
Matagal-tagal silang naglibo sa buong kapaligiran. Hanggang sa marinig nila ang tilaok ng manok na tila nagmula sa ilalim ng lupa.
“Ihahatid na kita Andoy,”
At namalayan na lang ni Andoy na nakatayo na siya malapit sa puno ng santol. Napailing-iling siya at agad pumasok sa loob ng bahay.
“ Anak, magkape ka muna “, salubong ng amang nakatimpla na ng dalawang tasang kape.
Umupo si Andoy sa sahig sa may sala kaharap ng ama. Wala silang upuan kaya sa sahig sila mismo nakasalampak. “Tay, naguguluhan ako.”
“ Anak, paniwalaan mo ang napatunayan ng iyong mga mata. Huwag mong alamin pa ang mga bagay na hindi abot ng ating isipan. Basta tandaan mo lang na sa mundong ito, marami ang naninirahang hindi kagaya natin. Halos wala silang pinag-iba sa atin maliban sa taglay nilang kakayahan. May kaya silang gawin na hindi natin kaya, “ paliwanag ni Mang Jose.
At nabuo na sa isipan ni Andoy na na-engkanto na nga talaga siya at ang ama. Hindi na pangkaraniwan ang nagaganap sa kanila. Kailangan niyang lisanin ang Alitaptap.
“Dito na ako isinilang. Dito na rin ako mamamatay,” ang matigas na tugon ni Mang Jose ng yayain siya ni Andoy na lisanin ang Alitaptap. “ Ito na lang ang natitirang paraiso kung saan pinamumunuan ng mabubuting lahi ang mga tao. Dito , hindi ka magugutom , kung tatawid ka sa kabila. Maraming trabaho para sa amin.” Sa pagpapatuloy ni Mang Jose.
Masakit para kay Andoy na lisaning muli ang lupang sinilangan. Pero kailangan niyang gawin ito bago pa siya masiraan ng ulo. At bago siya tuluyang humakbang paalis ng Alitaptap, isang maliit na kahong gawa sa kahoy ang inabot ng kanyang ama.
“Naipon ko ‘yan sa pagtatrabaho ko kanila Analen. May maliit na supot diyan sa loob, mga retaso ‘yan doon sa minahan. Hiningi ko ‘yan dahil mga reject ang mga iyan. Pero alam kong mapapakinabangan mo ng husto ‘yan,” paliwanag ni Mang Jose na maluha-luha sa muling pag-alis ng anak.
Maya-maya ay huminto ang isang lalaking nakasakay sa itim na kabayo.
“ O, ayan na si Ruben, pinakiusapan kong ihatid ka sa highway dahil baka aabutin ka ng kalahating araw bago makarating sa highway kung lalakarin mo lang, “ wika ni Mang Jose.
Pagdating sa highway kung saan sasakay ng bus si Andoy patungong bayan, agad na ring nagpaalam si Ruben. Nagmadali itong balik sa baryo.
Hindi nagtagal dumaan ang isang lumang bus na halos wala ng pintura. Agad sumakay si Andoy. Pagdating sa bayan agad siyang tumuloy sa pier kung saan ang barkong pa-Maynila ay nakadaong na. Nagpaakyat na ito ng mga pasahero. Kaya agad na siyang sumakay. Nalungkot siya at naguguluhan. Pero kailangan niyang maliwanagan ang isipan.
“ O , bakit bumalik ka kaagad? “ ang tanong ng namanghang ina pagdating niya sa bahay.
“Nay, may kakaiba roon, e. Si tatay, parang na-engkanto o talagang na-engkanto,” sabi ni Andoy bago pa siya makaupo sa sala.
Hinatak siya ng ina pagpunta sa upuan at umupo silang dalawa. “ Anak, tinawagan ko ang kapatid ko sa kabilang bayan ng San Antonio. Nagulat ako nang sabihin niyang wala na raw nakatira sa bahay natin doon. Halos dumapa na raw ito sa lupa. Ang ibang tao doon nagsabi sa kanyang matagal na raw naglaho ng parang bula ang tatay mo.”
“Ano? Hindi totoong nawala si Tatay. Oo , nakadapa na halos sa lupa ang bahay. Pero si Tatay ay nandoon,” madiing sinabi ni Andoy.
“Pero iyon ang sinabi ng kapatid ko. Pero baka nagkamali lang din siya.”
Kinagabihan, hindi makatulog si Andoy. Nababagabag siyang niwan ang matandang ama. Pagkaalala sa ama, kinuha niya ang kahon at binuksan. Nagulat siya nang makita ang tig-iisang libong pisong maayos na nakakamada sa kahon. Halos tatlong pulgada ang kapal nito. Nakapatong dito ang maliit na supot na gawa sa puting tela. Binuhos niya ang laman sa kanyang kama at sobrang nagulat siya sa natuklasan. Mga maliliit na mamahaling bato at maliliit na retaso ng ginto ang laman ng supot.
Kinabukasan, sinubukang ipamili ni Andoy ang ilang pirasong tig-lilibo. Maayos naman ang lahat. Hindi naglaho ang kanyang pera nang ibinayad niya ito sa cashier.
Nagulat ang kanyang ina at mga kapatid na dalaga nang makita ang mga pinamili niya.
“ Oy!, nanalo ka ba sa lotto , Kuya? ” tanong ng isang kapatid.
“ Anak, akala ko ba ay naubos na ang pera mo? “ ang wika ng ina.
“Nay, abutin niyo ito. May natira pa sa akin sa pamasahe ko, “ paliwanag ni Andoy habang iniaabot ang ibang supot sa ina at mga kapatid.
Kinabukasan, bumalik sa trabaho si Andoy. Supervisor siya sa supermarket ng isang mall. Nang palabas na siya kinahapunan, nagulat siya nang makita ang isang babaeng pamilyar sa kanya palabas mula sa isang malaking building.
Hay! Baliw na yata talaga ako. Paano makakarating dito si Analen? Isa pa, nakadamit pang -executive ‘yang babae sa kabilang kalsada. Ang taas ng heels at sosyal na sosyal ang dating. At, at, may magandang kotse pa.
Umakyat si Andoy sa overpass upang sumakay ng jeep pauwi sa kabilang kalsada. Kahit maganda na ang trabaho niya, wala pa rin siyang kotse dahil pinapaaral niya pa ang dalawang kapatid sa kolehiyo. Kaya nagtitiyaga siyang sumakay ng jeep sa tuwing papasok at uuwi sa trabaho.
Nakatayo si Andoy sa kalsada nang biglang huminto sa tapat niya ang magandang itim na kotse. Kamukhang-kamukha ito sa kotse ng babaaeng kamukha ni Analen.
“ Andoy ! “ sabi ng babae nang bumukas ang bintana ng kotse.
Biglang natulala si Andoy nang matiyak na si Analen nga ang nakita niya kanina. Ang ipinagtataka niya , nakaabante na kanina ang kotse. Nang mawala ito roon, akala niya umandar na. Bakit ngayon nasa tapat niya ito? Napaisip si Andoy.
“Paano ka nakarating dito? A-anong ginagawa mo ? Bakit….? “ hindi na natuloy ni Andoy ang napakaraming tanong sa kanyang isipan.
“Mag e-export kasi kami ng cacao at kape. Dapat proud ka dahil ang pinakamalaking shipment ng cacao at kape palabas ng bansa ay galing sa atin, sa Alitaptap, “ masayang pahayag ni Analen habang nakatulala ang katabi niya si Andoy. “ Samahan mo muna akong mamili. Uuwi na kasi ako buka sa atin. “
Sunod-sunuran si Andoy sa dalaga namili sila sa mall ng mga damit ni Analen. Kumain sila sa restaurant. Walang kakaiba kay Analen. Normal na normal ito sa paningin ng binata.
“Wala ka bang bibilin para sa ama mo? “
“Aywan, naguguluhan ako.”
“Andoy, masaya siya nang umuwi ka. Pero sobrang nalungkot siya nang muli mo siyang iniwan. Naaawa kami sa kanya kayanamin siya kinupkop.”
“S-salamat”, ang tanging naging tugon ng binata.
“Andoy, maaaring magkaiba nga tayo ng pinanggalingan. Maraming kakaiba sa akin at sa mga kalahi ko. Pero kagaya mo, namumuhay lang kami ng tahimik. Ang mahalaga ay may repesto tayo sa isa’t isa.”
Tumalab kay Andoy ang sinabi ng dalaga. Bakit niya nga ba ginugulo ang kanyang isipan? Hindi niya pagmamay-ari ang mundo. Maraming naninirahan dito.Dapat magpasalamat na lang siya at may katulad kay Analen na umaruga sa tatay niya.
“ A – Analen, kung babalik ako sa Alitaptap, makikita ko pa kaya si Tatay?” pag-alinlangan niya lalo na at may narinig na siya mula sa ina.
Napatawa ng malakas si Analen. “ Ano bang tanong yan? Nakakapaglakbay ang iyong ama sa ibang dimensiyon. Pero hindi siya nawawala o maglalaho sa Alitaptap. Pareho tayong taga- Alitaptap, Andoy. Magkakapitbahay lang tayo, “paliwanag ni Analen.
“Parang hindi kapanipaniwala. e”
“Ayan ka na naman. “
Hanggang sa huminto ang kotse sa tapat ng bahay ng nanay ni Andoy. Hindi nagtagal ay nagpaalam na si Analen.
Buo na ang pasya ni Andoy. Babalik siya sa Alitaptap at susubukang manirahan doon. Aayusin niya ang bahay ng tatay niya at patataniman niya rin ng cacao ang lupa nila.
Natuwa si Analen sa naging pasya ni Andoy. At nagsabay silang sumakay ng eroplano. Pagbaba sa airport ng San Antonio , nakaabang na ang sundo ni Analen. Nakisakay na rin si Andoy. Pagdating nila sa tapat ng mga bundok kung saan nakakubli ang Alitaptap, biglang hinawakan ni Analen ang kamay ng binata.
Sobrang namangha si Andoy ng lumiko ang kotse nila patungo sa napakakipot na daanan sa gilid ng burol. Naramdaman niya ang pagpisil ni Analen sa palad niya. Napahigpit ang hawak niya sa kamay ni Analen nang napanganga siya sa pagkamangha nang mapansing ang makipot na daanan ay nagiging maluwag na sementadong kalsada kapag tinutumbok na ng kotse.
“ Mapalad ang mga tao sa Alitaptap dahil isa itong paraiso “ seryosong wika ni Analen.
“Alam ko. Ngayon pa lang nararamdaman ko na ang kapayapaan at kaligayahan sa aking puso.”
Takip-silim nang dumating sila sa tapat ng bahay ni Andoy. Agad bumaba ang binata. Nasasabik siyang muling makita ang ama.
“ Pasyal ka sa amin”, yaya ni Analen bago tuluyang tumakbo ang kotse nito patungo sa puno ng santol. Kitang-kita ni Andoy ang unti-unti nitong paglaho. Subalit hindi na siya takot ngayon.
Mula sa puno ng santol kung saan nananatili
BY;CHRISTINE NUEZ
OCT.22, 2011
10 years old pa lamang si Rhistine Deruez noon at 25 years old na siya ngayon subalit hinding-hindi pa rin niya nakakalimutan ang bangungot na nangyari sa buo niyang pagkatao.Ang bangungot na kumitil sa buhay ng kanyang pinakamamahal na pamilya.Nagdalaga siya asa Melbourne,Australia subalit hindi niya maipagkakailang Pilipinas ang lupang sinilangan niya subalit sa bansang iyon din nangyari ang malagim na bangungot sa kanyang buhay.oo nga\'t namana niya angkanyang Australian accent sa ama subalit aminado siyang pilipino ang puso niya.Kahit papaano ay mahal din niya ang kanyang lupang sinilangan sa kabila ng mga pangyayaring iyon.
Sa tuwing ipinipikit niya ang kanyang mapupungay na mga mata, talagang binabalik-balikan siya ng mga alaalang iyon ngunit nag lubos niyang ipinagtataka ay ang paglitaw ng ng isang estrangherong ni hindi niya kilala at \'di rin niya naiintindihan ang mga sinasabi nito.
Hanggang sa isang arw, napagpasyahan niyang dalawin angn ang lupang sinilangan niya at nang siyaý nakarating, nag-check-in siya agad sa isang Five Star Hotel.naisipan rin niyang puntahan ang kanilang bahay.15 taon na ang nakalipas subalit wala parin itong pagbabago maliban na lamang sa mga alikabok at damong tumutubo sa paligid nito..Nang siyy nasa labas, naaninag niya ang taong nasa loob ng kanilang bahay at gad siyang pumasok at hinanap ito subalit wala na ito.Ang anyo nito, na kahit nasa malayo ay pamilyar sa kanya parang nakita na niya ito ngunit saan?kailan?
Tuluyan na nga siyang tumira sa kanilang bahy at nag-hire ng mga katulong upang linisin ang kanilang bahy.Sa tigin niya kasi, malalakihan siya sa perang gagastahin kapag nagtagal siya sa hotel. Napagpasyahan rin niyang asikasuhin ang negosyo ng kanilang pamilya dahil mga Tita at Tito lamang niya ang nag-aasikaso noon.
Dumaan pa ang ilang arw at gabi . akala niyaý hindi na magpapakita ang estranghero sa panaginip niya subalit mali siya.bakas sa mga tinig nito ang matinding galit at naiintindihan na niya ang mga salitang ipinupukol nito.nakakatakot ng mga salitang binitiwan nito, ibig siyang pabalikin sa Australia dahil kung hindi, may masamang mangyari daw sa kanya. napabalikwas siya at nalaman niyang bumabagsak na pala ang luha sa kanyang mga mata.Ano ba ang nalalaman ng taong iyon s abuhay niya? sino ba ang estrangherong iyon sa kanyang panaginip ? Gusto niya itong makausap at makita subalit sa panaginip lang...
nasa Restaurant siya noon nang may biglang lumapit sa kanya.napakamisteryoso nito isama pa ang pangalang chrainier valraman.nagulat na lang siya nang siya nang walang sabi-sabing hinila siya nito sa isang masulok na lugar.Hindi niya alam kung paano sila nakapunta doon dahil para siyang nahi-hypnotize.
Ang tinig nito. kakaiba t at pamilyar sa kanya.Ang tindig at anyo parang nakita na niya.hindi siya nagkakamali, si Chrainier Valraman ay ang lalaking nasa panaginip niya.Galit na galit ito, tinataong kung bakit bumalik pa siya sa lugar na iyon. Ngunit hindi siya nanainiwalang mapapahamk lang daw siya.
mabilis na lumipas ang arw, kas-kasama niya ito ngunit hindi sa kanyang kagustuhan ito ang kusang lumalapit sa kaya. sinasabi nitongsiya daw ang isusunod sa kanyang mga magulang ngunit bakit? Matagal na iyong nangyari.At ano naman ang hangarin at makukuha g mga mamatay-taong iyon sa kanya kung sakaling papatayin nga siya ?
sinabi ni Chrainier ang dahilan kung bakitt.Nananalaytay daw kasi sa kanyang dugo ang dugon magpapalakas sa kanilang lahi at posible ring papatayin ang m mga i ito.Kung hindi siya maiialay sa kanilang panginoon, mas mabuting papatayin na lang daw siya. naguluhan siya sa katotohanang kanyang nalam, si chrainier pala ay isang bampira ! subalit sabi nga nito na ang dugong nananalayatay sa kanya ay mapapalakas ang lahi nila ngunit bakit siya tinutulungan nito at kung gustuhin naman nito, malaya nitong patayin siya?
isinalaysay nga ni chrainier ang dahilan at ang sagot sa kanyang mga katanungan.gusto raw kasi nitong baguhin ang sistema nila, gusto nito ng kaayusan sa pagitan ng mga tao\'t bampira at alam ni Chraiier na siya ang makakatuulong dito.
Subalit sa kasamaang palad, nalaman ng mga lahi ni chrainier na nasa kanya ang susi nila at agad naman itong nakarating s a kanya kung kayaý hindi na siya nagsayang pa ng oras, dinala niya si Rhistine sa isang bahay upang masiguro ang seguridad nito at nang hindi makuha ng mga kalahi niya.ayaw niyang maging alay ang kanyang mahal.Dumating sa kanilang tinitirhan ang mga kauri nitong mababait at sinabi ng mga ito na susugod ang iba nilang kalahi kapg bumilog ang buwan at kukunin si Rhistine.Sinabi ng mga kaibigan ni Chrainier na tutulingan siya ng mga ito at nawala ang mha panamba ni Rhistine.
Bilog na ang buwan, oras na ng pag-atake at nakipaglaban nga sina Chrainier sa mga ito. awang-awa siya kay Chrainier at sa mga kasAmahan nito.Nangangamba siyang baka mawala sa kanya ang lalaking una niyang inbig.At may kakaibang pwersa na lang ang biglang lumabas sa kanya at tuluyan na siyang nawala sa sarili.Nagulat na lamang siya nang nagising siyang sumisikay na ang araw at bigla niyang nabungaran ang nakangiting si Chrainier at nagtaka siya, yun pala nagtagumpay sila at sa tulong niya, natapos ang pagkagahaman ng kapangyarihan ng mga kalahi nito.
---THE END--
Halos madapa na ako sa kakatakbo at nararamdaman ko na rin ang hapdi sa paa ko ng dahil sa mga sugat.
Dulot iyon ng mga bato at ugat sa madilim na gubat na tinatakbuhan ko. Subalit hindi ako maaring tumig
il. Hindi dahil maaabutan nila ako. Wala akong ideya kung sino sila o kung bakit nila ako hinahabol!
Basta’t ang alam ko lang ay kailangan kong tumakas. Nadapa ako ngunit muling tumayo at tumakbo.
Nagtaka ako ng biglang nawala ang mga humahabol sa akin kaya tumigil ako sa pagtakbo ng maabot ko an
g dulo ng gubat. Kakabit iyon ng magandang dagat na kumikinang sanhi ng liwanag na nagmumula
sa bilog na buwan. Tumayo ako roon pansamantala. Pinagmamasdan ang buong paligid. Sa pag-ihip ng pang-gabi na hangin nayakap ko ang aking sarili at napapikit.
Sa muli kong pagdilat ay may natanaw akong mga naglalakad sa dalampasigan, isang grupo ng mga nilalang na nakasuot ng itim at mahabang cloak. Hindi ko makita ang mga mukha ng mga ito dahil nakatago
sa malaking hood. Anim sila, lahat ay may suot na kwintas na sumisimbulo sa isang samahan na hindi ko alam
Kumikinang ang mga iyon sa liwanag ng buwan. Isa ang nauuna sa kanila at mukhang ito ang pinuno,
samantalang ang lima pa ay may bitbit na isang lumang sako. Punit-punit na iyon.
Nanlaki ang mga mata ko at napasinghap ng makita kong lumabas sa sako ang isang duguan na braso kasabay ng tuluyan pagkapunit niyon. Doon ko lang napagtanto kung ano ang laman niyon.
Katawan ng isang babae. Buhay pa ito at naririnig kong umuungol wari’y nanghihingi ng
tulong. Hindi ko Makita ang mukha niya dahil natatabunan ng buhok nito. Binuhat
na ng lima ang katawan ng babae at isinakay sa Bangka at umalis na ang mga ito
Anong nangyayari? Sino ang mga iyon? At sino ang duguang babae?
“Janice! Gising na tanghali na!” Narinig kong sigaw ni nanay mula sa ibaba. Nag-inat ako at tumayo. Dumiretso ako sa banyo para maligo. Nagbibihis na ako ng biglang tumunog
ang cellphone ko. Kinuha ko iyon at sinagot.
“Hello babe, happy anniversary.” Si Jake ang nobyo ko.
“Happy anniversary din babe.” Tugon ko.
Ito na ang ika-tatlong taon anibersaryo naming ni Jake at tatlong taon na ang relasyon namin. Nakilala ko
siya ng iligatas niya ako sa mga magnanakaw. Pauwi na ako noon galling sa trabaho bilang sales
lady sa isang department store. Mabait si Jake at gwapo pero kung minsan may pagka weird ito bagay na gusto ko sa kanya.
“I’m looking forward to our dinner date tonight. Susunduin kita at nine in the evening”
“Oo ba! Alas-siyete ang out ko sa trabaho.”
“I love you babe.” Turan ni Jake. Nahimigan ko ang lungkot sa boses niya. Gusto ko pa sanang magtanong
kung may problema siya pero wala na ito sa kabilang linya.
Lumipas ang buong maghapon na excited ako sa date namin ni Jake. At para hindi ako mainip sa kahihintay
sa pagdating ng alas nueve ay isinubsob ko ang aking sarili sa trabaho.
“Masyado ka atang subsob ngayon sa trabaho?”
“Jake!” Tiningnan ko ang wristwatch ko. “Ang aga `ah! Ala-sais pa lang.”
“I can’t wait to see you.” Sabi nito.
Hinintay pa ako ni Jake hanggang dumating ang out ko. Lulan na kami ng
sasakyan niya ng mapansin kong papalabas na ng maynila ang daan na
tinatahak namin.
“Saan tayo pupunta?” Tanong ko. Pero hindi ito nagsalita. Tahimik lang
si Jake habang nagmamaneho. Tumingin ako sa labas ng bintana. Bilog
na bilog ang buwan, tulad ng nasa panaginip ko.
Halos mainip na ako sa tagal ng aming byahe bago kami nakarating sa
isang liblib na lugar. Puro puno at napaka tahimik. Huni lang ng kuliglig
ang tanging maririnig.
“Nandito na tayo.” Ani Jake. Lumabas na ito at sumunod naman ako sa
kanya. Isang kubo ang tanging naroon at wala ng iba pa.
“Anong gagawin natin dito?” Hindi na naman ito sumagot. Pumasok ito sa loob
ng kubo. Hindi na ako nakasunod dahil may narinig akong tila mga taong
kumakanta o nagdadasal. Hindi ko maintindihan ang lenguwahe. Mukhang
nagmumula iyon sa likuran ng kubo. Dala ng kuryosidad ay pinuntahan ko
iyon at tiningnan. Na sana ay hindi ko na lang ginawa. Inalihan ako ng
matinding takot ng makita ko ang grupo ng mga taong nakasuot ng itim
na cloak at may kwintas na may simbolo. Dinadasalan nila ang isang
bangkay ng babae.
Napasigaw ako ng biglang may humawak sa magkabilang braso ko. Pilit akong
nagpumiglas at swerte naman na nakaalpas ako. Hindi na ako nag-aksaya ng oras at tumakbo papuntang kagubatan. Dahil may heels ang sandals
na suot ko ay napilitan akong tangalin iyon. Halos madapa na ako sa kakatakbo
at nararamdaman ko na rin ang hapdi sa paa ko ng dahil sa mga sugat. Dulot
iyon ng mga bato at ugat sa madilim na gubat na tinatakbuhan ko. Subalit hindi
ako maaring tumigil. Hindi dahil maaabutan nila ako.
Tulad na tulad sa panaginip ko at nakakramdam ako ng dejavu. Wala akong ideya
kung sino sila o kung bakit nila ako hinahabol! Basta’t ang alam ko lang ay
kailangan kong tumakas. Nadapa ako at sa gilalas ko ay may humawak sa dalawa
kong paa. Hinatak ako at dinala sa may kubo. Doon pinagkakgat nila ang buo
kong katawan pilit nila akong hinubaran at sinugatan ang buo kong katawan.
“Wag niyo siyang patayin” Sabi ng kung sino. “Dadalhin pa natin siya sa kabilng
ibayo.”
Binuhat nila ang aking katawan at isinilid sa isang lumang sako. Wala na akong
lakas upang manlaban at alam na niya kung ano ang mga ito. Mga BAMPIRA!
Anong nangyari? Hindi ba dapat ay makaktakas ako? Iyon ang nasa panaginip ko.
Ngunit noon ko lang din naalala ang sinabi ni nanay tungkol sa mga panaginip.
Kabaligtaran daw iyon ng reyalidad. Wala na akong maramdaman at tila na lang
akong isang nauupos na kandila na malapit ng mamatay. Naramdaman kong bumagsak
ang katawan ko sa lupa.
Napunit ang sako at sa nanlalabong paningin at nakatabong buhok sa aking mukha ay
nakita ko ang makinang na dagat. Iginalaw ko ang aking ulo at napaluha ako ng makita
ko ang aking sarili na nakatayo sa ibabaw ng isang mataas na lupa. Nakatingin lang ito
sa amin at tila inaalam kung anong nangyayari. Tinangka kong magsalita upang balaan
ang aking sarili subalit isang malakas na ungol lang ang napakawalan ko. Subalit huli na
ang lahat dahil binuhat na ako at isinakay sa Bangka. Doon ko tinanggap na wala na
akong pag-asang mabuhay pa. At sa nanlalabong paningin nakita kong tumakip sa bilog na buwan ang mukha ni Jake na may malalaking pangil at kinagat ang leeg ko.
-End
Sa mundong ‘to masasabi kong mapalad ako dahil na rin sa taong umampon sa akin at itinuring akong bilang kanyang isang tunay na anak. Pinag aaral nya ko sa mga kilalang eskwelahan at sa ngayon ay naka abot na ako ng kolehiyo at kumukuha ng kursong nursing.
“Trisya! Trisya!, yung Crush mo si Keneathe dali nandito!” Sigaw ng kaibigan ko na si Adeth. Kaagad akong lumabas ng aming classroom, “Asan na sya?” kaagad kong natanong. “Hay Naku! Ang bagal mo kasing lumabas ng classroom ayan tuloy hindi mo sya naabutan”. Pang aasar sa ‘kin ni Camile. “ makikita ko din naman sya mamaya sa laboratory kaya ayos lang yun!” tugon ko.
Ala-Singco Imedya na ng magsimula ang klase naming sa Laboratory. Nag exam kami sa mga lamanloob ng mga taong namatay na. Natapos ang aming klase ng 7:30 at kami ang kahuli-hulihang umuwi. Pasakay na sana kami ng jeep ng maalala ko na naiwan ko ‘yung cellphone ko sa locker. “Wait guys! Naiwan ko yung cellphone ko sa locker!” kaagad kong binanggit. “ Cellphone, bukas mo na lang kunin gabi na masyado para balikan mo pa!”. sabi ni Adeth na halatang gusto ng umuwi. “ Sige mauna na kayo may importanteng tawag kasi akong inaantay galing sa Nanay ko mula sa probinsya. At nauna na nga sila at ako ay bumalik sa eskwelahan.
Nakuha ko na ang Cellphone ko at pauwi na ng madaanan ko muli ang Laboratory. Napansin ko doon na parang may kakaiba kaya’t nilapitan ko sya at kaagad akong nagulat ng makita ko si Keneathe. “anong ginagawa nya sa lugar na iyon?” ‘yan ang tanong sa aking isipan. Maya-maya pa ay nagulat na lang ako ng mapansin na tila gumalaw ng bahagya ang bangkay na pinag eeksperimentuhan namin kanina. At dahil doon ay napasigaw ako.
Lumabas si Keneathe at hinabol ako at agad ay hinatak sa loob ng Laboratory. “ Sino ka ba?, panu mo napagalaw yung..” nasabi ko habang nanginginig ang aking buong katawan. “hindi mo pwedeng sabihin ang nalalaman mo!” sabi nya na may halong pagbabanta. “Isa ka bang mangkukulam?, balak mo ba kong patayin?” ‘yan ang mga katanungan na gusto kong sagutin nya. tumango sya at nag sabi na kailangan naming iyong ilihim at sa aming dalawa lamang. Dito nagsimula ang istorya ng aming pag iibigan.
“bakit ka nga pala nandoon sa laboratory?, dahil ba gusto mong buhayin yung patay na nandoon?” tanong ko ng nag uusap kami sa canteen habang ako ay tumatawa. “Gusto kong buhayin ang babaeng nandoon!” sabi nya, “bakit naman yung babaeng yun? Anong kinalaman nya sa’yo?” pag uusisa ko. “dahil sya ang aking ina na pinatay ng mga bampira!” sagot nya na may halong galit, “ Bampira!, ayan na ang hindi ko mapapaniwalaan. Malaking kalokohan na ‘yan!” nasabi ko na may halong pagkainis. “ Totoo sila Trisya! Maniwala ka” pilit nyang pag papaliwanag, “ sabi mo anak ka ng mangkukulam at pinag aaralan mo ang libro ng iyong ina tapos ngayon bampira ano pa kaya sa susunod keneathes?!”nasabi ko habang inis na inis na ko, “totoo ang lahat ng sinasabi ko!,nandito sila kasama natin, nabubuhay at narito sila para ubusin tayo!”pagpapaliwanag nya. Tinamad na ko para pagdiskusyunan pa ang bagay na wala naman talagang katuturan. Naging usap –usapan sa block namin ang aming relayon ito ang bagay na hindi namin itinanggi.
Una naming monthsary at ito rin ang araw na magiging 18na ko kaya naman naghanda si keneathe para dito at nang uwian mga bandang 7:40 ay nanatili kami sa Laboratory kung saan ay doon kami unang nagkakilala at doon ay kumain ng hinanda ni keneathe. Naparami ang aming nakain, at napasarap ang kwentuhan kaya hindi na namin napansin ang oras. Habang nagkukwentuhan ay may kung ano akong naramdaman. Naninikip ang aking paghinga, unti-unting may kung anong masakit sa aking sikmura ng sobrang tindi napansin ito ni Keneathe at agad ay inasikaso ako. Unti-unti ay nag dilim ang aking paningin.
Nagising ako na may kung ano akong naaamoy, puro bahid ng dugo ang buong paligid. “Dugo!” takot na bigkas ko. Isang tinig ang aking narinig agad kong nilapitan iyon at nakita ko si keneathe. Nagulat ako ng labis, tadtad s’ya ng mga hiwa at naliligo sa sariling dugo, lumapit ako sa kinaroroonan nya na luhaan at nagtanong sa aking isipan kung sino ang may gawa ng karumaldumal na bagay na iyon. Nakita ko ang bintanang basag. “sino ang may gawa nito?, mga bampira ba?” tanong ko sa kanya. Tanging nabanggit lang nya ang salitang “ba-m-pi-ra.., ma-hal ki-ta ka-hit….” paputol-putol nyang sabi at sa huli ay hindi na nya natapos ang kanyang pagsasalita at tuluyang nawalan s’ya ng pulso. “Bampira! ‘yan ang gumawa sa kanya!” nagagalit ako kung bakit hindi ko sya pinaniwalaan nung una at ngayon ay ito ang tumapos sa kanyang buhay. Tumayo ako sa aking pagkakaupo at di sinasadya na mapatingin sa isang stainless na tray na nandoon. Nagulat ako sa aking nakita isang babae na ang mga mata’y nanlilisik, mga kukong matatalim, ang mga ngipin ay matatalas na anumang oras ay handang mangagat at higit sa lahat ang kanyang mukha ay tulad ng sa akin.
Pinaghandaan nya ang gabing iyon, gaya ng bawat gabing limilipas. Sa loob ng isang buwan na pakikipag-usap sa chatroom at paghahanap ng kasagutan sa mga tanong sa isipan, akala nya wala na talagang patutunguhan…binalak na nga nya na kalimutan na lang at isiping isang kalokohan ang lahat. Sino nga ba ang taong me matinong utak na magnanais na makaharap ng tunay na demon lover? Yun ang paniniwala nya, matagal na nyang kinikimkim sa mahabang panahon ang nagyari 3 taon na ang nakalilipas…sa probinsya ng kanyang ama…nung gabing yon nagpatalo sya sa nararamdaman. Nuon lamang sya nakaranas ng ganuon…di nya mawari na tila siya ay nananaginip, me masuyong kamay na dumadantay sa kanyang braso, sa leeg at iba pang bahagi ng kanyang katawan tila me masuyo rin na dumadampi sa kapwa labi. Ibang klase ang sensasyon na parang ginising ang pinaka romantikong kamalayan na hindi nya alam na taglay nya pala. Sa sobrang banayad ay nais nyang maiyak at ayaw ng bumitaw sa tila hangin na presensya. Parang solido nya ring nahahawakan, sumasabay rin sa bawat galaw nya at me taglay na kakaibang init. Tila nakikipag-usap sya sa kawalan…sa isip nya ay me nagaganap na pag-uusap … isang malalim na unawaan sa puwersang hindi naman nya nakikita…nung gabing iyon ay naramdaman nya na niyakap sya nito mula sa likuran habang sya ay nakahiga at lumuluha…sa wari nya ay nagpapaalam ito na parang iyon na ang una’t huli nilang pagkikita…nakaramdam sya ng matinding lungkot na bumalot sa kanyang puso at di nya mapigilan ang pagluha. Alam nya na hindi ito panaginip dahil Malaya nyang naimumulat ang kanyang mga mata subalit tanging ang pamilyar na madilim na kwarto nya lang ang kanyang naaaninag at dahil don mas pinili na lamang nya ang wag nang dumilat pa sa takot na mawala ang napakagandang sandaling iyon…
…sabay sa pagsikat ng araw ay tuluyan na itong naglaho ngunit mahigpit parin ang kanyang kapit sa tila kawalan…nanlamig ang kaninang init na bumalot sa kanyang katauhan at napalitan ng lungkot. At gaya ng tila pangako ay dina naulit pa iyon hanggang tuluyan na syang nanirahan sa maynila nakatapos sa kolehiyo at nakapag trabaho.
Di na rin mabilang ang naging karanasan nya sa mga naging nobyo at ni isa ay di nagawang tumbasan ang pagsuyo na naipadama sa kanya ng di nakikitang presensya ng gabing iyon. Nito lamang sya nagkalakas ng luob na i open-up ito at sa chatroom nya nga napiling ipagtapat sa harap ng mga taong walang mukha at nagtatago lamang sa mga alyas. Natuwa naman sya sa naging resulta. Nalaman nya na madami pala ang maaaring itawag dito at di lamang pala sya ang nakaranas, sa pakikipag-talastasan nya sa chat nalaman nya na nagaganap ito sa iba’t-ibang panig ng mundo…kilala ito bilang ‘demon lover’ at mga dalaga talaga ang binibiktima nito kung saan tila nililigawan nya ang isang dalaga at me pagkakataon ding nakikipag-talik ito, gaya na lamang ng nagyari sa kanya…sa kanyang isip ay di matatapos dito ang kanyang paghahanap sa kasagutan at sa puso nya naman ay nangangarap sya na sana…
Sa BUNDOK KASALUTAN ay may naninirahang isang di-pangkaraniwang tribo na kilala sa pangalang KALABIDA, kung saan mga lalaki lamang ang bida. Nakasaaad sa kanilang Talaan ng Doktrina na dapat kilalanin ang mga lalaki bilang pinakamahalagang nilalang na gumagalaw. Ang mga babae naman ay gumaganap bilang alipin lamang. Ang mga lalaki ay imortal. Ang mga babae naman ay hanggang 18 taong gulang lamang tumatagal. Kapag sila ay 16 na taong gulang na, inaalay nila ang kanilang sarili sa Hari ng tribo para sila’y anakan. Kailangan iyon para lumaki pa ang bilang ng mga lalaki, at para madagdagan pa ang mga aliping babae. Kapag nailuwal na ng mga babae ang dinadala, hihintayin na ang panahon na magiging 18 taong gulang na sila. Ang mga sanggol naman ay nasa pangangalaga ng Hari. Oras na sumapit na ang pinakahihintay na araw, isasagawa na ang Ritwal ng Pamamaalam, katumbas ng selebrasyonng ika-18 kaarawan ng mga normal na kababaihan. May malaking handaan, magaganda ang mga kasuotan na gawa pa sa mga balat ng mababangis na hayop, at mga palamuti na mula naman sa mga inihugis na bato. Ang sentro ng selebrasyon ay ang mga regaling matatanggap ng debutante. Kung ang isang normal na debutante ay may 18 roses, 18 wishes, at iba pa, ang debutante naman sa Tribo Kalabida ay makatatanggap ng: 18 euphorbias, na isa-isang iniaabot ng mga lalaki at dapat hawakan niya lahat hanggang sa dumugo na ang kanyang mga kamay sa mga tusok ng tinik; 18 sibat, na isa-isang iaasinta sa likuran ng debutante; 18 latigo, na ihahataw sa mga binti; at higit sa lahat, ipapasok ang debutante sa isang hawla na may 18 gutum na gutom na mga tigre sa loob na tatagal ng 18 tahol ng aso na katumbas ng 18 segundo sa ating orasan. Pagkatapos ay parang bulang mawawala ang debutante sapagkat maging ang mga buto ay nginata ng mga tigre. Magpapalakpakan, maghihiyawan at magtatalunan ang mga lalaki na para bang nagtagumpay sa isang napakalaking misyon. Ginagawa ito sapagkat naniniwala sila na ang mundo ay para lamang sa mga matatapang at malalakas. Sunod ay pupunta sa gitna ang Hari para maglatag ng isang katanungan. Itatanong ng Hari kung sino sa mga lalaki ang handang ialay ang kanyang buhay para lamang sa pagbabalik ng buhay ng nasawing debutante.
Sina Margo at Elisina ay lihim na magkaibigan mula sa pagkabata. Batid nila ang kanilang sasapitin oras na matuklasan nino man ang kanilang pagtuturingan. Iba si Margo sa lahat sapagkat di niya itinuturing na alipin ang mga babae sa kanilang tribo. Si Elisina ang naging pinakamalapit sa kanya. Marami na silang napagdaanan nang magkasama.
Dumating na ang oras para ialay ni Elisina ang kanyang sarili sa Hari. Matapos, sa bilis ng panahon ay dumating na rin ang kanyang Ritwal ng Pamamaalam. Naisakatuparan na ang mga hakbang tulad ng nakasaad. Ang bagay na halos pumutol sa hininga ng lahat ay ang pagsasabi ni Margo sa Hari na handa niyang ialay ang kanyang buhay para kay Elisina. Siya pala ay naglilihim ng pagmamahal kay Elisina. Agad siyang pinaslang. Sa ganitong pagkakataon ay di gumagana ang pagiging imortal ng isang lalaki. Ang kanyang puso ay isinalang sa isang kawang may kumukulong pulang likido. Umawit ng panalangin ang Hari. Umitim ang himpapawid. Uminit ang hangin. Ang mga tao at hayop sa bundok ay nawalan ng enerhiya tuloy nawalan ng malay. Ang Hari ay tuloy pa rin sa ritwal. Matapos ang ilang saglit, mula sa kawa a dahan-dahang lumabas si Elisina, walang ano mang sugat. Maya-maya pa’y bumalik na ang lahat sa dati. Sa kasaysayan ng kanilang tribo, iyon pa lang ang pagkakataon na inialay ng isang immortal na lalaki ang kanyang buhay para lang maibalik ang buhay ng isang aliping babae. Gulat na gulat ang lahat sa naganap. Si Elisina naman ay parang bagong panganak, burado na sa kanyang isipan ang kanyang nakaraan. Ngayon nga’y isa na siyang imortal, kaisa-isang babaeng imortal. Muli na namang napatunayan na tunay ngang maaaring mawala ang memorya, ngunit ang laman ng puso kailanma’y di mabubura. Natatandaan niya na may lalaki siyang minamahal. Di man niya masambit ang ngalan ngunit sigurado raw siya sa lanyang nararamdaman. Mula sa lupa ay nagkaroon ng malaking butas, lumakas ang ihip ng hangin, muling dumilim ang himpapawid, at umalingawngaw ang tunog ng mga kulog. Mula sa butas sa lupa ay lumabas ang isang matandang lalaki na kulay puti ang kasuotan. Sa ere siya ay nakalulutang. Kinilala siya ng Hari sa ngalang Among Kaluntod. Siya raw ang ugat ng kanilang lahi kaya dapat papurihan. Lahat ay lumuhod. Biglang nagsalita si Among, “Ang lahat ay kayang baguhin ng pag-ibig.” Ilang saglit pa ay iniluwal din ng lupa si Margo, buhay. “Kayo ay nagmamahalan, dapat ninyong mapagsaluhan ang kaligayahan.” Mula noon ay namuhay na nang magkasama sina Margo at Elisina, kauna-unahang mag-asawang imortal sa kanilang tribo. Buhat din noon ay di na isinasagawa pa ang Ritwal ng Pamamaalam, at ang mga babae ay kapantay na ng mga lalaki. Ang tunay na pag-ibig ay maaaring magdulot sa kanila ng pagiging imortal.
Sabi nga, “There are no shortcuts to any place worth going”, yan ang paniniwala ni Bruce, isang 18 years old teenager, photographer na galing Sampaloc. Well, dati na syang kilala bilang isa sa mga tanyag na geek sa kanyang high school and college days, abnormal daw siya. Hindi lang dahil kakaiba ang way of communicating nya pero dahil rin daw weird sya at palaging tulala. As in, totally isolated siya from his classmates. Last time na nakita siyang makipagusap ay sa mga kaibigan niya lang. Maglalabing-anim na taon pa lang siya nang mawalan ng kapatid.
Dala ng pagiging matuklasin nitong si Bruce, kung saan saan siya gumagala, mapaSM man o mapaQuiapo, palagi niyang bitbit ang kanyang camera, sayang naman daw kasi ang magagandang sandali ng kanyang buhay. Pero dahil malapit narin ang bakasyon, naisipan niyang tumambay sa grandmother niya sa Albay.
“Good views dagdagan mo pa ng clean air? What more can you ask for?” sabi ni Bruce.
Magaalas kwatro palang ng umaga ay naghanda na siya, he packed up his things and he’s ready to go. Bumisitang saglit sa simbahan at nagdasal at pagkatapos ay lumarga na. Mabilis lang ang naging biyahe ni Bruce at ilang oras lang ay nakarating na siya sa patutunguhan. Pagpasok sa bahay, mano kay lola at higa kaagad sa kama. Tiring nga naman ang biyahe, he opened his laptop. Napansing online na si Joseph, ang matalik niyang kaibigan, vinideo chat niya ito.
“Ui dre! aga mo ah! Musta na? hindi ako matutuloy sa gala nyo, may iba akong trip, naandito ako ngayon sa Albay with my lola.” sabi ni Bruce.
“Haha! Oks lang yun pare! It’s not bad naman to visit your grandmother once in a while. Nagsleep over nga pala dito ang tropa, eto gising na si Marlan! Step up to the plate! Ayiee haha!” sagot ni Joseph.
“Hahaha! Ayiee ka dyan! Kung okay lang, pakausap nga.” sagot ni Bruce.
“No problem pare, eto…” sabi ni Joseph.
“HI BRUCE!! Musta na? daya mo ah, hindi ka nagpakita. Sayang naman ngayon na lang ulit magkakaroon ng reunion ang tropa. Miss you!” sabi ni Marlan.
“Ahahaha! Miss you ka dyan, parang matagal tayong hindi nagkita ah, parang kahapon lang kasama ko kayo. Ay teka lang ah, may nakalimutan lang ako sa sala, Be right back!” Sagot ni Bruce.
“Sungit! Oh sya, may paguusapan daw kayo ni Joseph.. Bilisan mo ah.” sagot ni Marlan.
Si Joseph na muli ang pumwestong kakausap kay Bruce, nang pagbalik nito. Much to his surprise, nakita niyang walang ulo ang kaibigan, agad niyang inend call ang chat dala ng pagkatakot. Hindi makapagsalita si Joseph, natigilan ng ilang saglit..
Pinaalam niya ang nakita sa tropa. Nagtaka ang lahat kung nagbibiro ang kaibigan, hindi daw bumenta, nagsalita ang katropang si Abelle.
“Ayon sa sabi sabi, Ang mga taong walang ulo ay malapit na raw mamatay, hinaharangan ng espiritu ang liwanag na dapat tatama sa kanyang ulo, no reflection.” sabi ni Abelle.
“Then Bruce will die soon? Hindi convincing, lalo na kung hindi ka nagpapaniwala sa mga sabi sabi..” sagot ni Melvin.
“Maniwala kayo! Nagsasabi ako ng totoo!” kumbinsi ni Joseph.
Nagtaka si Bruce kung bakit inend call ng kaibigan ang chat, sinubukan niya itong tawagan muli kaso hindi siya sinasagot.
“Imba mga tao ngayon ah, bigla na lang mangiiwan, kung kailan talaga kailangang kailangan mo ng kausap.. haay nako.. BORING!” sabi ni Bruce.
Lumabas si Bruce upang magpicture-taking. Picture dyan, picture doon, bawat litratong nakukuha niya ay regalo sa kapatid.
Sa kabilang dako, Si Rex ang kapatid ni Bruce, labing apat na taong gulang pa lang siya ng bawian ng buhay. “They are invincible!” sabi ng mga kaibigan ni Bruce sa kanilang dalawa, nga naman, madalas magDoTA ang magkapatid, mamaw ba ang dating. Kaya tuwing lunchbreak nila, palaging nagkacutting ang dalawa, sabi nga, sanayan lang yan, manghahamon, pupusta at uuwing makapal ang bulsa. Kaya proud na proud si Bruce sa kanyang kapatid hanggang dumating ang trahedyang nagbago sa pamumuhay ni Bruce. Nasangkot sa car accident ang kapatid noong nanalanta ang Bagyong Ondoy, nahulog raw ang sasakyan ng kanilang pamilya sa ilalim ng tulay. Hindi na nakita pa ang kanilang bangkay. Kinikilabutan at ikinalulungkot ni Bruce ito tuwing maiisip niya. Magaalas siyete na ng gabi ng umuwi si Bruce sa bahay ng lola. Tired from taking pictures, he went to his room.
“Apo! Kumain ka muna at malilipasan ka ng gutom!” anyaya ng kanyang lola.
“Kayo nalang po lola! Wala po akong gana!” pagtanggi ni Bruce at naganyong matutulog.
Lahat ng litratong nakuha niya ay nakakalat sa kama, ang camera niya ay inilapag sa isang upuang katabi ng kanyang lamesa. Pagsarado ng ilaw, may isang pakiramdam si Bruce na hindi niya waring maintindihan, may halong pagkatakot, pagkapagod at panlalamig.
“Anlamig pala dito paggabi, ngayon nalang ulit ako nakaramdam nito ah, when is the last time ba? Hmm.. ah, oo.. Well this is not the time for flashbacks, matutulog na ko.”
Natulog na si Bruce, ang lola ay nagtaka kung bakit walang sumagot sa kanyang panganyaya.
“Tulog na siguro yung si Bruce..”
Nagsimulang managinip si Bruce, nasa isang lumang madilim na apartment siya at nagiisa, tulad ng nakagawian niya, dala niya ang kanyang camera, at nagsimulang magpicture taking.
“ Wow! Kung ganito ang atmosphere ng paligid, hindi malayong mapagkumpara kami ni Edward Cullen, astig dating ko oh!”
Nakakailang shots na siya at nakakapagtaka na iisa lang ang pose niya sa lahat ng photos sa kabila ng iba’t ibang pagpose niya sa harap ng camera. Then all of a sudden, habang busy siya sa pagpopose para sa camera, an unusual entity appears right behind him, an entity with red eyes, and cold body, masasabi mong hindi ito nabubuhay, isa itong bampira. Tinakpan nito ang kanyang bibig at naganyong papatayin siya gamit ang matatalim nitong pangil. Habang nilalasap nang bampira, ang sarap ng dugo na nananalaytay sa katawan ni Bruce ay sinaksak rin sya nito sa dibdib, hindi nakalaban si Bruce at di kinalauna’y namatay. Mabilis lang ang naging pangyayari.
Kinaumagahan, pinuntahan ng lola si Bruce sa kama upang gisingin. Hindi nakapagsalita ang lola niya ng makita niya ito at napatakbo sa labas ng bahay. Lingid sa kaalaman ng lahat, nang bago pa man patayin ni Bruce ang ilaw ng kanyang kwarto.. at bago pa man siya humiga ay nakaupo na lamang siyang bukas ang mga matang namumula at hindi gumagalaw, nakanganga at nanlalamig. Para bang may nakita siyang isang bagay at hindi nya alam kung paanong gagawin reaksyon dito. At habang kalunos lunos ang sinapit ng teenager na to ay mapapansing sa lahat ng litrato niya ay wala siyang ulo, at sa kama, kung saan nakalapag ang mga litrato na nakuha niya, ay may isang litratong para bang kanina nya lang kinuhanan, ang litrato kung saan kagatkagat sya sa liig ng isang kakaibang nilalang at may saksak siya sa dibdib. Duguan ang kanyang katawan. Sa likod ng litratong ito ay may nakasulat na isang mensahe gamit ang kanyang sariling dugo:
“Paalam”
from -Rex-
CHAPTER 1
Nasanay na si Albert na bago matulog ay nagpapakwento muna siya sa kanyang mama. Ngunit ng gabing iyon ay ang lolo niya ang kanyang kasama dahil kailangan mag overtime ng mama nito sa trabaho. Simula ng mamatay sa aksidente ang kanyang ama ay and mama na niya ang nagtaguyod sa kanya.
“ Lolo, sige na po kwentuhan niyo na po ako.” Pilit na paki usap ni Albert sa lolo nito
“ Wala kasi akong alam na mga kwento na kwenekwento ng mama mo apo eh.
Kung gusto mo kakantahan nalang kita”. Sagot ng lolo ni Albert
“ Ayoko po ng kanta lo, kahit anu nalang pong kwento “. Pilit ni Albert
“ Oh sige na nga, anu bang kwento ang gusto mo?. Alam mo na ba ang kwento ni SnowWhite?”.
“ Lolo naman eh. Yun pong kwentong hindi ko pa alam.”
“ Oo na, basta pangako mo. Pagkatapos ng kwentong ito ay matutulog ka na huh?”.
“Ok po lo”. Maikling sagot ni Albert
“ Sige pikit mo na ang mga mata mo at magkwekwento na ang lolo”
Sa liblib na baryo na kung tawagin ay Tabon, may naninirahang mag asawa na hindi mabiyayaan ng anak. Si Mang Kanor ay isa lamang magsasaka sa kanyang maliit na lupain at ang kanyang may bahay na sa Aling Metring na isang tindera naman ng gulay sa palengke.Pagsasaka lang ang kabuhayan nila. Ngunit tulad din ng ibang mag asawa sila din ay may kagustohang magka-anak ngunit sa idad nila na kwarenta ay malabo na itong mangyari . Ginawa na ng mag asawa ang kanilang makakaya ngunit tila ang isa sa kanila ay merong deperensiya na siyang sagabal sa kanilang pagkakaroon ng anak. Isang araw ay nabalitaan ng mag asawa na may makakatulong sa kanilang problema, labag man sa loob nila na sumanguni dito dahil ang taong makakatulong sa kanila ay kilala sa lugar nila na gumagamot gamit ng kapangyarihang itim. Pero dahil sa kagustuhan ng dalawa na magkaroon ng anak ay pumunta parin sila.
Pumunta ang mag asawa sa bahay ng nasabing albularyo at silay nagulat ng para bang alam nito na sila ay pupunta sa kanya.
“Tuloy kayo Kanor sa maliit kung tahanan”. Anyaya ng matadang albularyo sa kanila.
“Maraming salamat po. Panu niyo po nalaman ang pangalan ko mang? Wika ni mang Kanor dahil hindi niya kilala ang albularyo.
“Wag mo ng itanong kung bakit ko alam.Ako nga pala si Teryo isang mangagamot. At nakikita ko na ako lang ang makakatulong sa suliranin ninyong mag asawa. Sagot ng albularyo
“Tulongan niyo po kami Mang Teryo na magkaroon ng anak. Pipilitin ko pong maibigay sa inyo ang kagustuhan niyo kung matutulongan niyo kami”. Paki usap ni mang kanor sa albularyo
“ Sa idad niyo kanor ay malabo na talaga kayong magka anak. Ngunit akoy may magaga kung gusto niyo talagang magkaanak pero itoy may kundisyon. “ sagot ng ablbularo
“ Lahat po gagawin namin Mang Teryo magkaanak lang po kami.” Wika ni Mang Kanor
“Isang babae ang magiging anak ninyo isang magandang babae na kahit sino ay mahuhumaling ngunit wag na wag niyo siyang paliligawan kahit kanino”. Pagsasalaysay ng albularyo sa gagawin ng mag asawa.
“ Isang babae na hindi pweding ligawan? Bakit naman po ganun Mang Teryo?.” Sabat naman ni Aling Metring na naguguluhan kung bakit.
Isa itong kundisyon na dapat niyong gawin. Malalaman niyo rin ang dahilan kung bakit pagdating ng tamang pahanon. Wika ng albularyo
“ Gagawin po namin kung yun po ang inyong kagustuhan magkaanak lang po kami”. Sagot ni Mang Kanor
“Magsiping kayo sa kabilugan ng buwan at pagkatapos ay basahin ang panalangin na ibibigay ko sa inyo. Itoy isang ritwal na dapat niyong gawin upang magkaroon na kayo ng anak.” Wika ng albularyo
“ Maraming marami pong salamat Mang Teryo. Magkano po ang aming babayaran? Tanong ni Mang Kanor
“ Wala kayong babayaran Kanor datapwat ako pa ang may ibibigay sa inyo. Isa itong kwentas,isuot niyo sa magiging anak niyo pag siya ay naislilang. Isa itong kundisyon na dapat niyong gawin kung ayaw niyong mamatay ang inyong anak.
Sinunod ng mag asawa ang sinabi ng albularyo, ginawa nila ang ritwal sa kabilugan ng buwan at makalipas ang ilang buwan ay naging buntis si Aling Metring sa idad na kwarenta. Masayang masaya ang mag asawa dahil sa tinagal tagal na kagustuhan nilang magkaanak ay sa wakas ito’y natupad din. Siyam na buwan pa ang nakalipas at si Aling Metring ay nagsilang ng isang batang babae na pinangalanan nilang Thea at pagkasilang sa kanya ay isinuot ni Mang Kanor ang kwentas na pinapasuot ng albularyo kung maisilang na ang bata. Bata palang si Thea ay kinakitaan na ito ng kakaibang ganda na wala sa ibang batang babae. Lumaki naman itong masunurin sa kanyang mga magulang kaya laking pasalamat ni Aling Metring at Mang Kanor dahil hindi sila nagkakaproblema dahil kay Thea. Pagkatapos ng klase ay doon nanananghalian si Thea sa palengke sa mam nito at kapag tapos na ang klase niya kung hapon ay doon din ang tungo niya para tulongan ang mama niya upang maubos ang kanilang panindang gulay. Ngunit isang araw sa kasamaang habang papauwi ang mag ina ni Mang Kanor galing palengke ay mayroong humaharorot na sasakyan na bumondol sa mag ina. Nabangga ang dalawa at himala namang nabuhay si Thea kahit na sapul siya ng sasakyan. Hindi makapaniwala sa Mang Kanor sa nangyari at itoy lubhang nasaktan, ang masaklap pa nito ay tinakasan sila ng nagmamaneho ng sasakyan. Pero laking pasalamat parin ni Mang Kanor na hindi naubos ang kanyang mag ina at nabuhay ang anak nila. Si Thea naman ay ilang linggong tulala dahil sa nangyari at makalipas na mailibing ang mama nito ay may isang mysteryosong boses na sa kanya ay gumagabay at nagpapalakas ng kanyang loob na labanan ang lungkot upang mabuhay. Ang boses na yun ay ginagabayan siya lagi at hindi pinababayaan.
“ Tay, maniniwala ba kayo kung sasabihin kung may naririnig akong boses tuwing akoy nag iisa?”. Wika ni Thea sa ama
“ Mawawala din yan anak. Wag mo lang masyadong pansinin.” Sagot naman ni Mang Kanor.
Naging matalik na kaibigan ni Thea ang mysteryoson boses dahil kapakanan niya lagi ang iniisip nito. Lumipas pa ang ilang taon at naging ganap ng dalaga si Thea.
“ Napakaganda mo talaga best”. Wika ng mysteryosong boses
“ Hindi naman ikaw talaga. Pero alam mo best hindi lang ikaw ang nakapagsabi niyan”. Wika naman ni Thea sa tunong parang nagmamayabang
“ Ah, ganun ba best. Basta wag mo lang silang papansinin upang hindi ka mapagalitan ng tatay mo”. Maikling wika ng mysteryosong boses
“ Ewan ko lang best. Papayagan na siguro ako non kasi nasa tama na akung gulang at nintindihan ko ang pagbabawal niya dati kahit makipaglaro nga sa lalaki ay ayaw na ayaw ni tatay pero ngayong nasa tama na akung gulang palagay ko papayag na yun”. Sagot ni Thea sa mysteryosonmg boses
“ Basta wag mo lang pansinin”. Huling salita na iniwan ng boses at nawala na ito sa kahanginan.
CHAPTER 2
Minsan ay naririnig ni Mang Kanor si Thea na may kinakausap sa kwarto ngunit wala namang sumasagot o kaya ay tao na naroon. Inisip ni Mang Kanor na sumubra na ang pagbabawal nito na makipagkaibigan sa iba lalo na sa mga lalaki. At ngayong nasa tama ng idad ang anak ay babawas bawasan ang paghihigpit dito. Sa idad na diese otso ay nasa sekondarya na si Thea sa kursong kanyang pinapangarap ang maging isang guro balang araw. Sapagkat si Thea ay magandang babae simula ng tumontong siya sa kolehiyo ay marami na siyang taga hangga ngunit ni isa man sa lugar nila ay walang nagkalakas ng loob dahil natatakot kay Mang Kanor. Pero ng si Thea ay nasa tama ng idad ay marami na ang gustong makabihag sa puso nito. Simula ng makaroon ng manliligaw si Thea ay unti unting umiiba na ang pakikitungo ng boses sa kanya. Naging magagalitin na ito sa tuwing may aanyaya kay Thea na kumain sa labas. Palagi rin siyang pinagbabawalan na wag nang sumama sa iba dahil pag yun ay ginawa niya may mangyayaring hindi niya magugustuhan. Pero hindi ito pinansin ni Thea dahil sa kagustuhang magkaroon din inspirasyon sa kanyang pag aaral bukod sa kanyang ama. Patuloy parin si Thea sa pagtanggap ng manliligaw sa paaralan dahi hindi niya pa sigurado kung papayag ang ama nito kung dadalaw sa kanila. Nagulat nalang si Thea isang araw ng hindi na pumapasok sa paaralan ang mga manliligaw niya sa kadahilanang sila’y nagkakasit sa di pa malamang dahilan. Pero may isang lalaki na lihim di siyang iniibig at siya’y sinundan nito hanggang siya ay maka uwi. At ng makita ng lalaki ang bahay ni Thea ay binalak nitong umakyat ng ligaw. Pinaunlakan naman ito ni Thea dahil ito ang kauna unahang lalaki na dumalaw sa kanila at ito ang may lakas ng loob na dalawin siya. Wala namang nagawa si Mang Kanor kaya pinaunlakan niya ang binata at inanyayahan na doon nalang kumain. Subrang saya ni Thea ng gabing yun dahil dahil hindi nagalit ang kanyang ama. Ngunit ng nakauwi na ang binata at nasa kalagitnaan na ng gabi ay nagising si Thea sa pagmumura na ginagawa ng mysteryosong boses.
“ Magsisisi ka sa ginawa mong to”. Sigaw sa galit ng mysteryosong boses
“ Wag mo kung pakialaman buhay ko to. “ sagot naman ni Thea napasigaw rin.
Nagising naman si Mang Kanor sa sigaw ng anak ,hindi na ito makutulog kayat pinakikingganniya ang mga salita nitong binibitawan. Nagtagal pa ng ilang minuto ang sigawan ng unti-unti ng naririrnig ni Mang Kanor ang mysteryosong boses na kwenekwento sa kanya ng kanyang anak. At habang tumatagal ang sigawan ni Thea at ng mysteryosong boses ay naging nakakatakot na boses na ito na titindig ang bawat hibha ng iyong buhok sa katawan. Kaya nangamba na si Mang Kanor at pilit na pinasuk ang kwarto ng anak. Ang kwentas na suot ni Thea ay biglang nagliwanag at mula sa linawag nito ay namuo ang pigura ng isang nakakatakot na nilalang na naghahari sa kadiliman. Isang demonyo ang sa kanilay tumambad at sa galit nito kay Mang Kanor ay sinakal niya ito ai hinagis papalabas ng bahay. Si Thea ay nanginginig sa takot na pinuntahan ang ama. Sigaw naman ang ginawang panghabol ng demonyo
“Makakatakbo kayo ngayon pero hinding hindi niyo ko matatakasan. At isang halakhak ang iniwan nito bago nawala sa kahanginan.
Pinalipas ng mag-ama ang gabi sa simbahan at silay nagpasya na magpakalayo-layo muna sa kanilang lugar at pumunta sa mataong lungsod. Bumalik sila sa kanilang tahanan at kumuha ng ilang gamit at ang kaunting pera na naitatabi ni Mang Kanor ang kanilang gagamitin sa kanilang pakikipagsapalaran sa lungsog, ibinilin naman niya sa kanyang kaibigan na ipagbili ang kanyang ari-arian at ipadala sa kanya ang pera pagnabili na ito. Papunta na ng terminal ng bus ang mag ama ng may magbalita sa kanilang ang lalaki na dumalaw sa kanila kagabi ay pinatay sa di maipaliwanag kung anu o sino ang may kagagawan dahil wasak ang dibdib nito at bali-bali ang mga malalaking buto sa katawan. Wala naman silang maisagot at dali-dali nalang silang sumakay ng bus. Tanghali na ang mag ama ng dumating sila sa lungsod ng Altavas. Una nilang ginawa ay ang paghanap ng matutuluyan, swenerti naman ang mag ama dahil my nakita sila doon malapit sa may paaralan ng koliheyo. Isang bahay na may dalawang palapag ang inupahan ng mag ama at di kalaunay nabili nila ito gamin ang pinagbentahan ng lupa nila doon sa kanilang baryo.
Nagbukas naman ng maliit na bakery si Mang Kanor upang may pagkunan sila ng pera para sa pang araw-araw na gastusin silay kumuha ng trabahahador na kung umagang umaga pa pumapasuk para gumawa ng tinapay. Lumipas ang ilang buwang pananahimik ng mag ama inakala nila na ang bangungot na gusto nilang takasan ay nawala narin at sa panaginip nalang ni Thea ito nagpapakita. Ngunit isang byernes ng gabi kabilugan ng buwan, ang bangugot na kanilang tinatakasan ay nagbabalik. Napakaliwanag ng buwan ito ang nagsisilbing liwanag sa madilim ng gabi ngunit itoy nagbibigay lakas sa mga nilalang ng kadiliman.
Nagising si Thea sa halik na gumagapang sa kanyang katawan. Maya maya pa ay nasa leeg na niya ito ang mga kamay niya ay hindi makagalaw sa lakas ng pagkakahawak ng demonyo. Pilit niyang makawala ngunit wala siyang magawa, nakapatong sa kanya ang makapangyarihang demonyo.Nagsisisigaw si Thea upang magising ang kanyang ama na nasa kabilang kwarto. Ngunit magising man si Mang Kanor ay wala na siyang magawa naging isa na ang kailang katawan ng demonyo. Pilit namang binuksan ni Mang Kanor ang kwarto ng anak, nawasak nito ang pinto at sa kanyang pagpasuk ay tumambad sa kanya ang isang demonyo na nakapatong sa kanyang anak. Sinugod ni Mang Kanor pero ang demonyo ay nawalang parang bola. Napaiyak nalang si Mang Kanor sa nangyari sa kanyang anak.
Makalipas ang ilang buwan ng ay nalaman ni Thea na nabuntis siya ng demonyo. Nagwawala ito sa galit at ilang beses na siyang nagtangkang wakasan nalang ang kanyang buhay.
“ Tay, anu pong gagawin ko? Gusto ko pong mawala ang batang to sa sinapupunan ko.” Wika ni Thea habang umiiyak.
“ Wag nating idamay ang bata anak wala yang kasalanan.” Sagot naman ni Mang Kanor sa anak
“ Walang kasalanan?, demonyo po ang ama ng batang ito tay. Hindi ko po iyo matatanggap”.
Pilit nalang ni Mang Kanor na palakasin ang loob ng anak. Palagi niya itong sinusubaybayan sa mga ginagawa upang masiguradong hindi na ito magbabalak na kitilin ang bata pati ang kanyang buhay sapagkat hindi makakaya ni Mang Kanor kapag si Thea ay mawawala pa.
Nagsilang si Thea ng isang batang lalaki pagkatapos ng siyam na buwan. Si Mang Kanor ang nagpangalan sa bata dahil pinandidirian ito ng kanyang ina. Jayson ang ipinangalan ni Mang Kanor sa bata dahil ito ang paboritong pangalan ng kanyang asawa kung sila’y magkakaanak ng lalaki. Normal naman ng isilang si Jayson hindi naman ito kinakitaan ng anumang bakas o palatandaan na ito ay anak ng isang demonyo. Naging maloyo ang loob ni Thea sa bata kaya si Mang Kanor na ang nag aalaga sa batang si Jayson hanggang itoy tumontong sa elementarya. Si Thea naman ang nagbabantay sa kanilang maliit na bakery. Hatid sundo ni Mang Kanor si Jayson hanggang ito ay matutong umuwi na mag isa. Mas napalapit pa ang loob ng bata sa kanyang lolo kesa sa kanyang ina dahil hindi ito binibigyan ni Thea ng atensyon.
“Lolo bakit ayaw po sakin ng mama ko?Mabait naman po ako ah?.” Wika ni Jayson sa lolo nito
“ Aba,! Oo naman apo ikaw yata ang pinakamabait kung apo.” Pabirong sagot naman ng lolo niya.
Napatawa nalang si Jayson sa sagot ng kanyang lolo dahil siya lang dawang pinakamabait sa apo na ito na siya lang naman ang kaisa isang apo ng kanyang lolo.
Sa mga lumipas na taon sa elementarya naging normal naman si Jayson, ngunit sa isang pagkakataon kahit si Jayson ay naguguluhan sa nangyayari sa kanyang kamay. Nang may tinulungan itong lalaki na nahagip ng sasakyan, siya ang tumulong dito sa pamamagitan ng pagtatawag ng taong makakadala sa lalaki sa Hospital. Sa simpleng tulong na ginawang yun ni Jayson ay nag iba na ang kanyang daliri sa kaliwang kamay. Naging mistulang balat ito ng buwaya at naging matalas ang kuko nito. Sa kadahilanang iyon ay tarantang umuwi si Jayson a kanila upang malaman kung anu ang nangyayari sa kanyang kamay.
“ Mama!, Mama.! “Tarantang tawag ni Jayson sa mama nito
“ Oh, anung sinisigaw sigaw mo diyan?wag mo kung gagalitin ngayun mainit ang ulo ko.”wika ni Thea sa anak.
“ Tignan niyo po ang nangyayari sa daliri ko mama. “ paiyak na wika ni Jayson.
“ Ewan ko! Hindi ko alam. Sige dun kana pumunta sa lolo mo at marami akung ginagawa”. Sagot ni Thea sa anak
“ Pero Mama?”.habol pa ni Jayson
“ Wag mo kung gagalitin Jayson, tatamaan ka sakin.” Galit na wika ni Thea
Paiyak nalang na tumakbo si Jayson papunta sa ikalawang palapag ng bahay nila para maka usap ang lolo nito.
“ Lolo! Lolo!’. Tawag ni Jayson.
“ Anu yun apo? Nandito ako sa kwarto ko.” Sagot ng lolo niya.
“ Lolo, Anu pong nangyayari sa akin? May tinulungan lang po ako kanina bigla nalang pong nag iba ang aking daliri.” Wika ni Jayson sa lolo niya sabay pakita sa nagbagong daliri nito.
“ Hay! Wag mo nang isipin yan apo. Baka isang uri lang ng sakit yan takpan nalang muna natin hayaan mo at gagaling din yan.
“ Ok po lo. Ayoko po ng daliring ganito. Sagot ni Jayson
Subalit napakarami pa ang nagawang kabutihan ni Jayson sa iba, kaya ang buong kaliwang kamay nito ay naging parang kamay na ng isang halimaw. Doon naisip ni Jayson na hindi na ordinaryong sakit ang nangyayari sa kanya. Umuwi ito sa kanila na may balot ang kanyang kamay upang hindi mahalata ng iba ang kanyang kalagayan.
Nang makarating na ito sa kanila ay doon nalang siya dumiritso sa kwarto ng lolo niya.
“ Lo! Gusto ko pong malaman ang katotohanan anu po ba talaga ang nagyayari sa akin. Nahihiya po akung makita ng iba ang aking kalagayan, kamay po ng isang halimaw ang kamay ko lo?.”paiyak na wika ni Jayson sa lolo niyo.
“ Hindi ko rin alam yan apo. Kaya wala akung maisasagot sayo. Sagot mg lolo niya
“ Sabihin mo na kasi Tay ang katotohanan ng matigil na sa kakatanong ang demonyong batang yan. Pasigaw naman na sabat ni Thea sa nag uusap na maglolo.
“ Ano pong ibig sabihin ni mama lo?”. Tanong ni Jayson habnag umiiyak
“ Nasa highschool na po ako nextyear. Hindi ko po kayang pumasuk na ganito ang aking kalagayan.” Dagdag pa ni Jayson
“ Hay! Mahirap man itong ipaliwanag sayo apo. Pero tibayan mo lang ang loob mo. “ sagot ng lolo niya
“ Handa na po ako lo. Gusto ko pong malaman ang katotohanan, paki usap lang po sabihin niyo na.
“ Anak ka ng isang demonyo! Oh anu? Masaya kana huh?. Sabat ni Thea sa usapan ng maglolo.
“ Lo sabihin niyo pong hindi yun totoo.Alam ko pong hindi ako gusto ng mama simula pa noong bata ako.” Paki usap ni Jayson sa lolo nito.
“ Tama ang narinig mo apo. Hindi totoong nilayasan ang mama ng ama mo. Ginahasa siya ng isang demonyo at ikaw ang bunga nito. Pagpapaliwang ng lolo niya.
CHAPTER 3
Hindi matanggap ng bata ang katotohanan,ilang araw siyang hindi pumasuk sa paaralan at nagkukulong nalang ito sa kanyang kwarto. Bumalik nanaman ang takot ng mag ama ng marinig nilang may kinakausap si Jayson sa kanyang kwarto. Naging iba na ang kilos ni Jayson, isang tanong isang sagot nalang din siya sa kanyang lolo.
At isang gabi ng lagim, kabilugan ng buwan. Lumabas si Jayson na wala sa sarili tumatawa ito habang may ginagawang ritwal. Biglang nagliwanag ang kwarto ng mama niyan at mula sa kwarto ay lumabas ang isang demonyong gumahasa sa kanyang mama ilang taon ng nakakalipas. Nagising naman si Thea sa sigaw ni Mang Kanor at nang lumabas ito ay nakita niyang sinasakal ni Jayson ang tatay niya. Pilit na tinatanggal ni Thea ang kamay ng anak sa leeg ng tatay nito ngunit sadyang napakalakas ni Jayson at wala itong magawa. Malulutong na halakhak naman ang pinakakawalan ng demonyo habang pinapanuod sila. Niyakap nalang ni Thea ang anak habang umiiyak.
“ Jayson, itigil mo na yan.” Paki usap ng mama niya.
Bumalik sa sarili si Jayson at ang demonyong pinagtatwanan sila ang kanyang sinugod ngunit sadyang mabilis ito at hindi niya kayang habulin.
“ Ganyan ba ang tamang pagbati sa iyong ama Jayson?.Sigaw ng demonyo.
“ Hindi kita ama. Isa kang halimaw, lubayan mo ang pamilya ko.” Sigaw ni jayson sa demonyo.
“ Pamilya natin to Jayson, ako ang ama mo at dugo ko ang nananalaytay diyan sa katawan mo.” Wika ng demonyo kay Jayson.
“ Anu bang kailangan mo samin?, lubayan mo na kami.” Sigaw ni Thea
“ Hindi ikaw ang kailangan ko, Ang aking anak ang aking kailangan at kami ang maghahari sa lupa. Sagot ng demonyo.
“ Lumayas kana. Sigaw ni Jayson sa ama nito.
“ Hindi ito ang huling pagkikita natin anak.” Wika ng demonyo bago ito mawala sa dilim.
Umiyak nalang si Jayson athabang yakap niya anglolo at mama nito. Kinaumagahan ang mga tsismoso at tsismosang kapitbahay nila ay maaga pang nakiisyuso sa mga sigawan na nangyari sa kanilag bahay kagabi.
Ngunit hindi nalang pinansin ng pamilya nila ang mga tsismis na kumakalat sa kanilang lugar. Naging palaisispan tuloy sa mga taga roon ang balot sa kamay ni Jayson.Bawat galaw ni Jayson ay mayroong mga matang nagmamasid sa kanya. Ilang linggo nalang din ay graduation na nito. Ngunit nasa isip niya parin ang bangungot na gustong niyang mawala, akala ni Jayson na kung makakagawa siya ng mabuti ay mawawa ang di maipaliwanag na nagyayari sa kanyang katawan pero bawat kabutihan na gawin niya ay mas lumalala pa ang kalagayan ng kanyang kamay.
Maaga pang nagkumpol kumpol ang mga tsismosa sa harap ng bakery nila.
“ Mare anu ba talaga ang nangyayari sa bahay na yan?,”mukhang may tinatago sila na kakaiba. Wika ng isang tsismosa
“Ewan ko din mare, May lihim nga siguro silang tinatago, akalain mo ba naman kalagitnaan ng gabi eh mayroong sisigaw sa bahay na yan.” Sagot naman ng isa
“ Baka may sa demonyo nga ang pamilyang yan. Hayaan niyo at kami ng grupo ko ang gagawa ng paraan upang malaman natin ang sekreto nila. Pagmamayabang ng tambay na walang magawa sa kanila.
Nang papauwi na si Jayson galing sa paaralan ay inabangan siya ng mga tambay doon at siyay kanilang pinalibutan. Nagtataka naman si Jayson at itoy tumigil sa kanyang paglalakad.
“ Jayson sandali!. May mga katanungan kami sa iyo, sama ka muna sa amin”. Wika ng leader ng mga tambay
“Ha? At bakit naman? Paraanin niyo ko at madami pa akong gagawin sa bahay. Sagot ni Jayson
“Sandali lang naman wag ka ng pumalag ng hindi kana masaktan. Sabat ng isang lalaki
Ngunit bago pa sila makalapit ng husto kay Jayson ay tumakbo na ito papunta sa isang bakanteng lote para makapagtago at matakasan ang mga humahabol sa kanya. Nakahanap ito ng pagtataguan pumasuk siya sa isang drum na walang laman at doon ay tahimik na nagtago.
“ Lumabas kana Jayson! Hindi ka naman namin sasaktan”. Sigaw ng lalaki
“ May gusto lang kaming malaman. Lumabas kana.” Sigaw naman ng isa
Hinaloghog ng mag lalaki ang bawat sulok ng bakanteng lot at ang isa sa mga ito ay nakita si Jayson na nagtatgo sa drum. Sa galit ng lalaki sa kakahanap sa kanya ay sinabunutan niya si Jayson habang pinapalabas ng drum.
“ Andito ka lang pala. Ginagalit mo pa talaga kami sa kakahanap sayo.” Galit na wika ng lalaki
“Aray wag po! Nasasaktan po ako. Wika ni jayson na namimilipit sa sakit
“Kung kanina sumama ka kaagad sa amin di hindi kana sana nasaktan. Estong tangalin mo na nga ang balot sa kamay nito ng makaalis na tayo.” Pautos na wika ng leader nila.
Hindi makapalag si Jayson sa lakas ng pagkakahawak sa kanya kaya wala siyang nagawa sa sapilitang pagtanggal sa balot niya sa kamay.
At nang matanggal ang balot sa kamay ni Jaysn ay nagulat sa takot ang mga lalaki dahil nakita nila na ang kamay na may balot ni Jayson ay kamay ng isang halimaw.
“ Boss! Tama nga ang hinala natin, may sa demonyo nga ang pamilya nila.” Sabi ng lalaking nagtanggal sa balot ng kanyang kamay.
“ Maawa na po kayo sa akin,” pagmamakaawa ni Jayson sa mga lalaki.
“ Bilis anu pang tinutunganga niyo diyan mga bobo. Kumuha na kayo ng pamalo at patayin na ang batang ito ng maisunod na natin ang lolo at mama niyang mga demonyo rin.” Utos ng leader nilang may hawak kay Jayson
Nang makakuha ng pamalong kahoy ang mga lalaki at ihahampas na kay Jayson ay biglang nag iba ang kanyang anyo. Nanlilisik ang mag mata nito at wala siya sa kanyang sarili. Nasakal niya ang lalaki na humawak sa kanya. Hindi niya ito binitawan hanggang buhay pa ito. At bago pa makatakas ang ibang lalaki ay sunod-sunod niya itong napatay. Punong puno ang kamay ni Jayson ng dugo ngunit nagsilbing gamot iyon dahil unti unting nawawala ang mga bakas sa kanyang kamay ng pagiging isang demonyo. Bumalik sa normal and pag iisip ni Jayson at itoy dali daling tumakbo pauwi sa kanilang bahay.
Pagdating doon ay nagkulong siya at hindi sinabi sa mama at lolo niya kung anu ang nangyari. Nagulat nalang ang lahat sa lugar nila ng mabalitaang may natagpunag mag patay na lalaki sa isang bakanteng lote na hindi nila alam kung anung klaseng hayop ang may kagagawan nun.Wasak ang dibdib ng maga lalaki at at pinagbabali bali ang mga buto nito sa katawan. Kaya naging isang malaking mysteryo ang pagkamatay ng limang lalaki , naging mas mapagmatyag sila sa pamilya ni Jayson ngunit ng si Jayson ay pumasuk ng paaralan ng walang balot ang kamay nito ay nawala na ang pag iisip ng iba na demonyo ang batang lalaking si Jayson.
CHAPTER 4
Naging masaya si Jayson sa kanyang gradaution dahil umakyat ito sa stage na walang balot sa kamay at kahit na ang lolo lang nito ang kanyang kasama. Pinalipas ni Jayson ang bakasyon sa pagtulong sa mama nito sa kanilang maliit na bakery at sa panahong iyon at natutunan din ni Thea ang maging ina sa kanya. Hindi na niya itinuturing na anak ng isang halimaw si Jayson pero sa mga panahon ding yun ay may mga simpleng kabutihan siyang nagagawa kaya pa unti unti ay bumabalik ang malahalimaw niyang kamay. Kaya palagi nanamang may balot ang kamay ni Jayson, laking pasalamat nila sa panginoon dahil hindi na sila ginagambala ng demonyo at sa panaginip nalang ni Jayson ito nagpapakita. Nag enroll si Jayson sa High School na my kalapitan lang sa kanila nasa lungsod kasi sila kaya malapit lang doon ang mga paaralan.
Ilang araw ang nakalipas ng mag umpisa ang klase ay may naging kaibigan itong si Jayson, naging matalik niya itong kaibigan pero ang di niya alam ay isa pala itong demonyo na padala ng kanyang ama upang siyay gabayan sa pagawa ng masama. Sa kalakasan ni Jayson first year palang siya ay kinatatakutan na siya ng kanyang mga kaklase dahil kunting mali lang nila ay sinusuntok na sila ni Jayson at Brad. Dahil sa mga pambubugbog na ginagawa ng dalawa sa iba nilang kaklase kumalat iyon sa paaralan at pati ang ibang studyanteng matatapang ay gusto silang makaharap. Palaging umuuwing my bukol si Jayson kaya nag aalala ang mama at lolo nito kung anu ang pinagagagawa nito sa paaralan. Isang araw ng gabi na itong umuwi at may dugo pa ang damit ay hindi na nakapagtimpi pa ang mama niya at siyay napasabihan nito.
“ Jayson anu bang nangyayari sayo?. Tanong ni Thea sa mataas na boses
Hindi ito pinansin ni Jayson at dirediretso itong pumasuk sa kanyang kwarto. Hindi nalang siya sinundan ng mama niya dahil pinigilan ito ni Mang Kanor na pabayaan muna si Jayson. Kinabukasan pagkatapos ng almusal ay may mga katanungan si Jayson sa kanyang isip.
“ Lo? Totoo po ba ang mga bampira at taong lobo?” tanong ni Jayson
“ Hindi ko masasagot yan apo, pero sa palagay ko ay meron at kasama natin silang namumuhay araw-araw at naghihintay ng pagkakataon na ilabas ang kanilang tunay na anyo.” Sagot ng lolo ni Jayson
“ Nilalang ng dilim din po ako lo diba,katulad ko pala sila?” dagdag pa ni Jayson
“ Hindi apo, iba ka sa kanila, mas mabait ka at hindi pumapatay ng tao.” Pagpapaliwanag ng lolo niya
Pagkatapos ng maikling usapan ng malolo ay nagpaalam na ito sa lolo at mama niya at siya’y papasuk na sa paaralan. Sa paaralan ay palaging nasasangkot sa gulo dahil sa mga utos na din ni Brad sa kanya. Pero isang hapon ng papauwi na ang dalawa ay bigla silang hinarangan ng isang lalaki na naging biktima din ng pambubugbog nila.
“ Hoy! Kung inaakala niyo palalampasin ko pa ngayon nagkakamali kayo. Sigaw ng lalaki.
“ Tayo na pardz doon nalang tayo dumaan sa kabilang kanto, gusto ko na kasing umuwi.” Wika ni Jayson
“ Sandali lang to pardz paglaruan muna natin ang isang ito. Nangangati na ang kamay ko na para bang gusto ko siyang suntukin.” Sagot naman ni Brad
“Wag na kawawa naman yan. Tsaka isa pa hayaan na natin yan napaglaruan na kaya natin yan dati.” Sagot ni Jayson na gusto ng makauwi
At tumalikod na si Jayson at nagsimulang maglakad papalayo doon.
“ Wag niyo kung tatalikuran! Natatakot ba kayo sakin?.” Sigaw ng lalaki sa kanila
Nainis si Brad pero hindi iyon pinansin ni Jayson ngunit pumolot si Brad ng bato akala ng lalaki ay babatuhin siya ni Brad kaya pumulot din siya ng bato. Pero ang batong hawak ni Brad ay sa ulo ni Jayson niya ito binato. Galit na humarap si Jayson at nakita ang batong hawak ng lalaki. Wala ng salita pa ay mabilis niya itong sinugod sa galit.
Nangagalaiti itong sinakal ang kawawang lalaki, halos mamatay naman sa kakatawa si Brad sa ginawang iyon ni Jayson. Nang bumalik na si Jayson sa katinuan ay wala ng buhay ang lalaki pero hawak hawak nita parin ito sa leeg.
“ Pardz anong gagawin natin?napatay ko ang lalaki.?” Tarantang tanong ni Jayson
“ Hahaha! Wag kang mag alala pardz. Kasalanan niya dib yun hayaan at mo nasa langit na siya.” Sagot ni Brad habang tumatawa
“ Kung hindi niya sana ako pinukol ng bato hindi sana ako nagalit pardz.traidor din kasi siya ,papatalikurin niya ako bago niya batohin” Pagpapaliwanag ni Jayson
“ Hahaha! Tama ang ginawa mo pardz. Hayaan mo nalang yun ayleast uuwi tayong masaya.Hahaha!”. sagot ni Brad sa kanya
Lumipas pa ang ilang taon sa high school pero si Brad ay sige parin sa kakagawa ng paraan para gumawa si Jayson ng masama. Masayang masaya naman ang ama ni Jayson sa binabalita ni Brad kaya hindi niya ginagambala ang pamilya ni Jayson dahil ang anak na niya mismo ang gumagawa ng masama kahit hindi niya ipag utos.
Nasa sa ikaapat na taon na si Jayson sa high school halos apat na taon niya ding kilala si Brad pagdating sa pagigind masama ngunit ang hindi niya pa alam ay kung saan talaga itong si Brad nakatira porma palang kasi ni Brad ay malalaman mong mayaman ito kaya gustong gusto ni Jayson na makapunta din sa tahanan ng nag iisa niyang kaibigan sa kasamaan. Kaya habang papauwi ang dalawa ay nagtanong si Jayson kung saan ang bahay ni Brad.
“ Pardz saan ka ba talaga nakatira?”. Tanong niya
“ Wag mo na munang alamin pardz. Ako nga hindi rin nakapunta sa inyo”. Sagot naman nito
“ Eh kahit na pardz dapat maimbeta mo naman ako kahit meryenda lang” pilit ni Jayson
“ Hehe! Mapilit ka talaga pardz uh?. Graduation night ka nalang pumunta pardz. Maghahanda kami nun.” Sagot ni Brad.
“ Sige na nga. Siguraduhin mo lang na masasarap ang handa mo. Kung hindi uuwi nalang ako.” Pabiro ni Jayson.
“ Saan ka ba mag aaral ng kolehiyo pardz?” dagdag pa ni Jayson
“ Tinatanong pa ba yun pardz?. Siyempre kung saan ka andun din ako. Bestfriend tayo di ba?’’.sagot ni Brad
Marami pa ang ginawang kasamaan ng dalawa sa high school, pambubugbog, pagnanakaw at kahit pagsusugal ay naituro na rin ni Brad. Pero may nagkalakas ng loob na pumunta sa bahay nila at sinumbong ang pinagagawa ni Jayson. Gabi na kung umuwi si Jayson, pagdating nito sa bahay ay ang mama niya kaagad ang sumalubong sa kanya.
“ Jayson anu bang nangyayari sayo huh?.” Tanong ni Thea sa anak
“ Matutulog na po ako ma.” Maikling sagot ni Jayson
“ Tama a yan anak. Hayaan mo na muna siyang makapagpahinga. Sige apo magpahinga kana.” Wika ng lolo nito.
“Jayson wag mo kung tatalikuran hindi pa ako tapos sayo.” Pasigaw na wika ni Thea sa anak
Nagliwanag ang kwentas ni Thea at doon ay lumabas muli ang demonyo. Napaatras nalang si Thea at hindi nalang siya kumibo ng akbayan ng demonyo si Jayson at samahan ito papasuk ng kwarto. Si Jayson naman ay parang isang laruan na sunod-sunuran sa gusto ng ama niya. Maya-maya pa ay halakhak ng demonyo ang naririnig nila mula sa kwarto ni Jayson.
“ Tay sa palagay koy sa kwentas na to dumaan ang demonyo?parang lagusan niya sa tuwing kabilugan ng buwan. Wika ni Thea sa ama na nanginginig parin sa takot
“ Alam ko yun anak. Pero wag na wag mong matanggal yan dahil pag yan natanggal ay mamatay ka at hindi ko iton pahihintulutan.” Sagot ni Mang Kanor sa anak.
“ Ayoko ko po ng buhay na ganito tay”. Paitak na wika ni Thea sa ama.
“ Hayaan mo anak may awa sa atin ang diyos matatapos din ang problemang ito.
Nagtiis ang mag ama dahil wala silang magagawa sa kalagayan ni Jayson kontrolado tito ng kanyang amang demonyo.
isang simpleng tamad na lalake, na di inaasahan mabigyan ng mabigat na responsibilidad.Siya ang napili upang iligtas ang mundo laban sa nagbabantang panganib mula sa impyerno. Upang malabanan ang kadiliman siya ay binigyan ng kakayahang maglabay sa ibat ibang demensyon kung saan niya hahanapin ang mahiwagang sandata na ginamit ng mga dating tagapagligtas, tulad espada ni panday, anting anting ni pedro, at ni RAMON REVILLA,.etc... kelangan niya itong ipunin sa pagkat ang mga ito ay ngtataglay ng kapangyarihan mula sa kalingatan, upang makalikha ng malakas na sandata. kelangan nia harapin ang mga mortal na kalaban ng mga dating tagapagligtas, sapgkat sila ay muling nabuhay at ng babantang sirain nag nakagisnang mundo. Dito makakalaban niya ang karaniwang kampon ng kadiliman sa Phillipine mythology. Sa kanyang paglalakbay makakasama niya dito ang dalawang karakter na mula sa angkan ng Bampira at ng taong lobo na kapwa hindi magkasundo dahil sa alitan ng dalawang angkan. Pano kaya haharapin ni Juan ang ganitong responsibilidad? kung sa kanyang pananaw ay wala siya pakialam dahil ang gusto niya ay walang ginagaw pano niya tatanggapin ang itinakda?..
ADAN KALIKASAN
Ni Roldan Alvarez Paguio
(IMORTAL)
Ako si Adan; tinawag akong sa pangalang ito sa kadahilanang ako’y natagpuan ng aking kinalakhang mga magulang ( ang mag-asawang mangangaso na sina “Itay George” at “Inay Ellen”) sa sinapupunan ng pinaniniwalaang pinakamalaki at pinakamatandang puno sa gitna ng kagubatan na kung tawagin ay “Inang Puno” na siyang kanlungan ng sari-saring mga ibon at mga hayop sa gubat na wala man lang isang galos na kanilang ikinamangha ayon na rin sa kanilang salaysay at mga pahayag.
Sino ang aking tunay na mga magulang? Bakit nila ako iniwanan sa pusod ng kagubatan? Ako ba’y kinamumuhian nila? Hanggang sa simula na ako’y magkaisip sa ilalim ng kalinga at pagmamahal ng aking kinikilalang mga magulang ay hindi na nawala ang katanungan ko sa sarili ko…SINO AKO?at sa paglaki ko’y labis kong ipinagtataka ang kakaibang damdaming hindi ko maipaliwanag sa tuwing mapapalapit ako sa inang kalikasan na mula pa sa pagkabata ko’y lagi kong ipinagmamalasakit…
At mula dito’y magpapasimula ang isang alamat…
Gen 2:7 At nilalang ng Panginoong Dios ang tao sa alabok ng lupa, at hiningahan ang kaniyang mga butas ng ilong ng hininga ng buhay; at ang tao ay naging kaluluwang may buhay.
At mula nga sa mga salitang ito ng Panginoong Dios ay nalalang din naman si Ruben (Ruben Alcaraz Pablo); bantog sa larangan ng sining; isang tao na may malasakit sa kalikasan; na isinilang ng taong 1966 sa pusod ng kamaynilaan; at sa edad na 21 anyos ay nagkaasawa at nagkaroon dalawang anak na lalake, si Dariel at si Victor.
Malungkot sa Ruben; siya’y nagdadalamhati; sapagkat ang mahal niyang asawa’y nagtaksil sa kanya, si Nilda, na sumamang kumabit sa isang mayamang may asawa na rin; kay Don Nilo, may-ari ng pinakamalaki ngunit ilegal na trosohan sa gitna ng kagubatan na siyang mahigpit na kalaban at tinututulan ni Ruben dahil sa pagsira nito (Don Nilo) sa kagubatan.
At sa malabis na pagdadalamhati’y binitbit ni Ruben ang Canvas, pinsel at iba pang mga kagamitan sa pagguhit; at ihinabilin ang kanyang mga anak sa kanyang ina (Gng. Pablo o kilala rin sa pangalang “lola Pining”) at nagdala rin si Ruben ng mga kagamitang para sa gubat at tumungo kung saan sinisira ng mga tauhan ng walang pusong si Don Nilo ang mga puno upang ito’y iguhit at upang doo’y ilarawan ang sariling kabiguan dahil para kay Ruben, ang kagubatan ay kahalintulad ng isang tahanan, na kung wawasakin ay siyang dahilan upang mawalan ng kanlungan ang mga hayop at lahat ng naninirahan dito; tulad ng kaniyang pamilya na winasak ng walang pusong si Don Nilo, at ang asawa niya (Nilda) ay walang pinagkaiba sa isang taga-bantay ng kagubatan na ipinagbili ang sariling pagkatao dahil lamang sa pag-ibig sa salapi at mga material na bagay na alok ni Don Nilo na siyang pinag-uugatan ng kataksilan, katampalasanan at sari-saring kasalanan.
Lingid sa kaalaman ni Ruben; habang kanyang iginuguhit ang nasisirang kagubatan na larawan ng kanyang pamilya ay tumulo ang kanyang luha sa sinapupunan ng ‘Inang Puno”(dahil minagaling niyang dito magtago upang hindi siya matanawan ng mga magto-troso) at mula sa puno ay lumabas ang isang Imortal na nagngangalang “Ada” sapagkat siya nga’y isang Ada! Na nagwikang…Ruben! Ruben! Mula sa mga luha mo’y pinalaya mo ang aking espiritu na nananahanan at may-ari ng “Inang Puno” dahil nabuhay ako ng maramdaman ko ang malabis mong pagdaramdam sa pagtataksil ng iyong mahal na asawa at katulad mo’y malabis din ang pagdaramdam ng aking kaluluwa (espiritu at aking katawang-puno) dahil din sa katampalasanan ng tao sa “Inang Kalikasan” na pinagmumulan ng likas na yaman at nagsisilbing pundasyon ng lupa upang maingatan ito sa pagguho, pagbaha, paglindol at iba pang natural na kalamidad na pinalalabis ng tao dahil na rin sa kanyang mga sariling kagagawan.
At dahil sa pagpatak ng luha mo sa aking sinapupunan ay magsisimula ang isang bagong binhi; dahil ang binhing ito’y manggagaling sa alabok ng lupa na walang dili iba ay sa iyo; at sa akin na ang sangkap ay sa ilalim ng lupa; upang ang binhing ito rin ang magpaunawa sa tao ng kahalagahan ng kalikasan kung gaano ito kahalaga sa kanya na kung papaanong nilikha rin ng Dios ang kalikasan para sa tao ay kailangan din ng kalikasan ang tao upang siyang mangalaga at magpahalaga dito; dahil ang binhing ito ang lubos na makakaunawa sa tao at sa kalikasan; at ang ating binhi ang siyang magiging tagapagligtas ng kalikasan sa pagwasak ng tao sa kalikasan,..at ng tao na rin sa sarili niya. At iaalay ang ating binhi sa araw ng pagtatagumpay! At ihahatid mo siya dito Ruben, oo! Dahil ang pagpatak ng luha niya (Adan) sa sinapupunan ko ang pagtatagumpay, oo! Luha ng kaligayahan ng pagtatagumpay!
At pagdaka’y nabuwal si Ruben; at nanaginip; at ang espiritu ni Ruben at ng Ada ay nagsanib; at hindi kawasa’y natauhan si Ruben; at sa kanyang pagtataka ay nasa pangangalaga siya ng mga taong naninirahan sa hindi kalayuan ng kagubatan at isinaysay kay Ruben na siya’y natagpuan nilang hubo’t hubad na nakayakap sa ugat ng “Inang Puno”. At kinabukasa’y umuwi na si Ruben sa kanyang inang si aling Pining para sunduin ang kanyang mga anak na sina Dariel at Victor. At niyakap ang kanyang mga anak. Na walang dili iba’t ang mga kapatid ko….
…Ako si Adan; bunga ng isang alabok at ilalim ng lupa…isang…IMORTAL.
Para po sa Script Writer at Editor:
Dito po magmumula ang mga karakter base sa itatakbo ng istorya; love interest ni Adan; mga kapatid niya na pawang mabubuti sa kanya sa hindi nila (magkapatid na Dariel at Victor) maipaliwanag na dahilan sa kabila ng pagkalaban ng kanilang butangerang ina (Nilda) kay Adan dahil si Adan ay isang Environmentalist na namumuno sa paglaban (kay Don Nilo) at sa mga sumisira ng kalikasan na kinidnap at papatayin sa kagubatan ngunit doon na rin matutuklasan ni Adan ang kanyang pagiging imortal dahil doon ay parang magiging hunyango siya sa kahit anong bagay madaiti tulad ng bato, halaman, tubig, lupa, bastat bagay ng kalikasan ay magiging anyo niya (parang effect ng Hollywood movie na “PREDATOR”)
At mula po sa istoryang ito mabubuksan ang mga sari-saring elemento ng kasamaan na magpapasimula sa mundo ng mortal at patungo sa mga immortal upang dito’y kapulutan ng aral ng mga manonood at upang masagip at maingatan ang likas na yamang ipinagkaloob sa atin ng Dios na makapangyarihan sa lahat.
,Lubos po akong umaasa at nagpapasalamat
Roldan Alvarez Paguio
November 13, 2011
By: Yeng
Si Jhun ay nakababatang kapatid ni Andy, Sa isang eskuwela sila nag-aaral, fourth year si Andy at second year naman si Jhun, Probinsiya ang lugar nila, sa katunayan ang layo nila sa paaralan at maging sa bayan.
Minsan maagang umuwi ang magkapatid. Suwerte sabi ni jhun, magkakasabay kami ni kuya, palibhasa sabik makapunta ng bayan at makapanood ng sine, sinamantala na ni jhun ang pagkakataon, Sige na kuya, ngayun lang tayo nagkasabay umuwi ng maaga, baka pwede mo naman akong ipasyal sa bayan, tapos nood tayo ng sine, pagpupumilit ni Jhun sa kapatid.
Napangiti si Andy, Naku ikaw talagang bata ka, hilig mo sa gala. Nakangisi namang nakatitig si Jhun sa kanya. Kahit medyo nag aalala di natanggihan ni Andy ang nakababatang kapatid, naku pag ginabi tayo baka mag alala sila nanay, patay tayo dun! Pero nakangisi na nangatwiran si Jhun, Mabait si nanay, hindi yun magagalit.
Ngunit ang totoo hindi ang nanay nila ang inaalala ni Andy, kundi ang madilim na landas na dadaanan nila pag sapit ng gabi. Masayang Masaya si Jhun ng marating nila ang bayan. “Sobrang sarap sa loob ng sinehan ang lamig at ang laki ng screen, nakakalula”, sabi ni Jhun.
Tatawa tawa naman ang kuya niyang si Andy, Matapos ang palabas na Comedy, lumabas na ang magkapatid at nagulat sila sa nakita. “Naku yan ang sinasabi ko” sambit ni Andy, “inabot na tayo ng gabi”, Baka mapagalitan na tayo ni nanay sunod pa ni Andy sa kapatid.
Medyo lumungkot ang mukha ni Jhun. Habang binabaybay ng magkapatid ang daan patungo sa kanila, nadaanan nila ang isang kalabaw na kasalukuyang nakalublob sa kanyang lubluban, di maiwasang mapaisip ng dalawa, “Anu yun? Di man lang isinoga ng may ari”.
Natatawang sabi ng dalawa, sumagot naman si Andy, sabay lingon sa likuran, “Oo nga”, ngunit bigla siyang natigilan sapagkat pag lingon niya sa kinalalagyan ng kalabaw isang babaeng nakapatadyong ang pumalit sa kalabaw, nawala ang kalabaw at isang babae ang kanilang nakita,.
Kinabahan si Andy, dali dali niyang hinila ang kapatid upang lumakad ng mabilis, ngunit di niya pa rin maiwasang lumingon sa likuran, at muli siyang nasindak sapagkat ang babaeng nakita niya ay naging isang lalaki na bihis na bihis sa amerkana niyang itim, na may ribbon ding itim,.
Lubha ng natakot ang magkapatid at halos manakbo sila sa tindi ng takot, subalit namangha sila sa mga sumunod na pangyayari, sapagkat ang lalaking may pitong metro ang layo sa kanila, ay parang dinalawang hakbang lang ang kinalalagyan nila.
“Huh!! Nabiglang sabi ni Andy, nahaharangan na kase siya ng nasabing lalaki, hindi na siya nakagalaw sa kinatatayuan, sapagkat ang lalaki na nasa kanyang harapan ay kamangha mangha ang itsura, Natitigan siya nito sa mata at lumuha ng dugo ang kanyang mata, nawala na rin sa sarili si Andy, hindi alam ni Jhun ang gagawin, siya naman ang binalingan ng lalaki, ng titigan siya nito, dito niya napansin ang kabuuan ng mukha nito.
Namumutok na mga labi, mahabang pangil, maputlang mukha at namumulang mata na lubhang nakakatakot,. Nanlaban ang isip ni Jhun, bigla niyang naisip ang sinturon ng kanyang kuya andy na pang C.A.T. agad niya tong hinila mula sa baywang ng kapatid, at malakas na inihataw sa lalaking nakaitim, sabay hila sa kapatid at mabilis na tumakbo, biglang natauhan si Andy sa pagkakahila ni Jhun mabilis silang tumakbo ng tumakbo hanggang sa masalubong nila ang maraming kalalakihan na nanggaling sa isang lamay.
Agad silang humingi ng tulong sa mga ito, at sama sama nilang hinabol ang lalaking naka itim, mabilis namang nakatakbo ang lalaki, at namangha silang lahat nung Makita nilang tumalon ito sa isang bangin, at dun sila natigilan, sapagkat tanging ang damit na lamang na amerkana ang nakita nilang bumagsak mula sa itaas, wala silang nakitang tao mula dito.
Nahintakutan ang grupo at nagpulasan na rin ng takbo. Pagdating sa bahay, naikwento ng magkapatid sa kanilang magulang ang nangyari, at doon nila naliwanagan na ang nasabing lalaki ay ang dating binansagang Dracula na namatay sa bayang iyon, hindi pa rin ito natatahimik sa dami ng taon na lumipas, sapagkat doon nalibing ang katawan nito habang sinusunog ng taong bayan…
Mula noon natakot ng umuwi ng gabi ang magkapatid at iniiwasan na rin nila ang daang iyon.
Wakas.
Mortal
By Junather Villorejo
Prologue: Ang WANU
Sampung taong nakalipas matapos ang digmaang bampira at mga taong lobo isang propesiya ang nalantad. Ito ang paglitaw ng isang bata, ang “WANU” (warlock of nullity), na nakatakdang maging dahilan nang pagbabago ng samahan ng tao, taong-lobo at bampira.
Ang “wanu” ay sinisilang kada isandaang taon bilang tagapamayapa at taga-balanse ng tao, taong lobo at bampira. Espesyal ang kapangyarihang mayroon ang wanu, ang kapangyarihang ipawalang-bisa ang kapangyarihan ng taong-lobo at bampira dahil sa mata ng isang wanu, “lahat ay tao, ang lakas nito ay katumbas lamang ng tao”. Ngunit ang kapangyarihan ito ay nagagamit lamang ng wanu upang protektahan ang sarili at ang ibang taong gusto niyang protektahan. Kasabay ng pagsilang ng mga itinakdang bampira at taong-lobo ay ang pagsilang ng dalawang tagapangalaga ng wanu bilang tagapaghanda sa pagdating nito.
Ang “wanu” ay isisilang bilang tao. Hindi maaaring pumili ng mga magulang ang isang wanu mismong ang tadhana na ang gagawa nito. Samakatuwid, kahit kaninong tao, anumang ang katayuan sa buhay ay maaring maging magulang nito. Sa unang anim na taon ng isang wanu ay mamumuhay itong parang isang normal na tao, anak o kapatid. Ngunit sa pagsapit ng ika-pitong taon ay mabubuksan na ang kanyang kaisipan sa kanyang misyon. Kasabay ng kamatayan ng wanu bilang anak ay magsisimula na ang kanyang paghahanap sa mga taong-lobo at bampira. Katulad ng mga nakaraang wanu, lahat ng kaalaman pati ng kanyang mga nakaraang buhay ay kanyang madidiskubre sa tulong ng kanyang tagapangalaga at tuparin ang misyon.
Ang misyon na ito ay mabigyan ng pagkakataon ang bawat bampira at taong-lobo na maging tao, ang regalo ng pagiging mortal. Ngunit ang misyong ito ay tatagal lamang ng limang taon dahil sa pagsapit ng ika-labindalawang taon ng wanu ito’y itinakdang mamatay kasabay rin ng paglaho nito ang paglaho ng taga-pangalaga at ang mga bakas nito. Kapag ang bampira at lobo ay may pambihirang kapangyarihan at hiningi ang pagiging mortal maaring katumbas nito ay ang mas maagang kamatayan.
Chapter 1: Mapayapang Pamumuhay
Sa maayos na pamamahala ng nakatakdang lobo at bampira ay naging mapayapa ang pamumuhay ng makaibang lahi. Ang karamihan ng mga bampira ay natutuhan ng kumain ng digo ng hayop. Ang bawat isa ay nagtutulungan ng hayop. Ang bawat isa ay nagtutulungan at gumagawa ng paraan upang punan ang kakulangan ng bawat isa. May mga iba na nanggugulo ngunit naitutuwid naman.
Si Maria, anak ng mag-asawang Lia at Mateo Rodriguez, ay lumaking masayahin at mapagmahal sa kapwa lobo at bampira ngunit dahil bata pa ipinagbabawalan munang makipagsalamuha sa tao. Mas minabuti muna ng kanyang magulang na ipa-unawa na naiiba siya sa mga tao at kailangan pa niyang kontrolin ang kanyang kapangyarihan at kung paano ito gagamitin sa mabuti.
Sa kabilang banda, sabay ng ton ng pagsilang ni Maria, ang pagsilang ng wanu bilang bunsong anak ng mag-asawang Villa-Rejo, isang guro at inhinyero , at pinangalanang “Unah”. Si Unah ay may nakakatakdang kapatid na lalake na isang sikat na pulis at imbestigador sa Maynila ,si Adrian. Dahil sa malaking agwat sa kapatid sa kapatid na babae ay lumaking “spoiled” ito sa kanya.
Dahil sa biglaang pagkakaroon ng proyekto ng Ama ni Unah sa probinsiya ay napagpasyahan ng mag-asawa ng bakasyon kasabay ng pagsapit ng limang taong kaarawan ni Unah. Napagpasyahan na rin ng mag-asawa sa Rancho de LiMa (Lia at Mateo, Maria) sila manatili kung saan magtatrabaho si Mr. Villa-Rejo sa loob ng isang lingo bilang inhinyero ng lugar. Hindi nakasama si Adrian dahil sa isang importanteng trabaho at hindi pinayagan ng kanyang superior.
Sa pagdating ng Pamilya ay naging napakaganda ng pagtanggap ng mga tao dahil na rin sa kokonti ang mga bakasyunista kaya mas naengganyo sila na manatili na lamang dito. Hindi nila alam na ito ang maging simula ng isang malaking pagbabago.
Chapter 3: Ang Pagtatagpo
Habang nag-aayos ang mag-asawa sa kanilang mga gamit ay lumabas si Unah upang mamasyal. Palinga-lingang namamasid sa paligid ng makakita niya ang isang bata na patakbong sa di matinong direksyon. Sinundan niya ito at nakitang naglalaro malapit sa sapa.
Si Maria ay masayang naglalaro sa gilid ng sapa nang mapansin na may dalawang pares ng mata ang namamasid sa kanya. Nginitian niya ito pero ng akmang lalapitan nito at sinabihan niya itong huwag lalapit dahil maaaring masaktan ito sa sandaling mahawakan niya ito at dali-dali siyang tumakbo palayo mula dito.
Nagtataka man si Unah sa nagging reaksyon nito ay hinabol niya ito hanggang sa makarating siya sa isang bodega. Pilit niya itong hinanap at hindi naman siya nabigo. Nakita niya ito sa likod ng isang lamesa. Tinawag niya ito at dahan-dahang lumapit dito.
Dinig na dinig ni Maria ang yapak ng mga paa papalapit sa kanya dahil na rin sa wala ng mapagtaguan ay lumabas siya sa kanyang pinagtataguam at mabilis na itinulak ang bata. Ngunit sa laking pagkabigla ay hindi natinag ang bata at sa halip ay ngumiti ito. Sa kauna-unahang panahon ay hindi siyan nakasakit ng tao. Napakasarap ng kanyang pakiramdam na sa unag pagkakataon ay nakontrol niya ang kanyang kapangyarihan sa isang tao.
Nang makita ni Unah ang kanyang ngiti ay lumuwag ang kanyang pakiramdam.
Simula ng araw na iyon ay ginugol na ng dalawang bata ang isang linggong bakasyon sa paglalaro.
Naging mabilis ang panahon tapos na ang isang linggong pananatili ng mag-anak kahit na malungkot ang paghihiwalay ng dalawang bata ay nangakong panatilihin ang komuniksyon.
Sa pag-uwi ng mag-anak sa Maynila, nanumbalik ang pang-araw-araw na Gawain.
Chapter 4: Rebelasyon
Pagkalipas ng dalawang taon ay nabalitaan ng Pamilyang Rodriguez ang pagkamatay ng bunsong anak ng mga magasawang Villa-Rejo sa isang aksidente. Naging npakalungkot ni Maria ng araw na iyon. Labis niyang dinamdam pang pagkawala ng kanyang unang tao na naging kaibigan.
Sa kabilang banda, labis ang pagdadalamhati ng mag-asawa sa pagkawala ng kanilang bunsong anak. Si Adrian naman, ang nakakatandang kapatid ni Unah, ay sinisisi ang sarili dahil sa hindi pagtugot sa kapatod nito na samahan siya sa kanyang lakad at sa halip ay pinauwi niya ito kasabay ng yaya nito at driver. Hindi niya matanggap ng maagang pakawala ng bunsong kapatid kaya sinnubsob ang buong panahon sa pagtatrabaho at inimbestigahan ang aksidenteng kinasangkutan ng sinasakyang kotse ng kapatid, ng trak at bus. Natuklasan niyang parang may mali sa aksidente. Isang pangyayari na sa hindi malamang dahilan ay parang sinadya ang aksidente. Walang anumang nasaktan sa mga pasahero ng bus at sakay ng trak kahit kunting galos tanging ang sasakyan lang ng kanyang kapatid, yaya at driver ang wasak na wasak at hindi na makilala ang tatlong bangkay dahil sa pagsubog nito.
Dito magsisimula ang kwento ni Adrian na hahantong sa pagkatuklas niya sa kumunidad ng taong-lobo at bampira. Pagka-diskubreng BUHAY ang kanyang kapatid at sa TUNAY NA PAGKATAO nito!!!
--END--
BOTTLE
January 02, 2012
BY: Nathan08
Isang tahimik na gabi, malinis ang kalangitan na tipo\'y kitang kita muh ang mga nagkalat na nagkikislapang mga bituin sa langit, kasabay nito ang liwanag ng kabilugan ng buwan na tila ba\'y tanglaw mo sa daraanang iyong tinatahak. Mararamdaman mo ang bawat ihip ng hanging dumarampi sa iyong katawan na halos manginig ka sa sobrang lamig. Isang \"GABING TAHIMIK na kinaaasam-asam ng lahat\" ng mga tao sa baryo Tanglaw tuwing sasapit ang \"Takip silim.......\"
Maraming pag-atake ang nagaganap sa baryo Tanglaw, maraming buhay ang nawawala na hindi rin alam ng mga taong tagaroon kung anu ang totoong sanhi ng mga kamatayan ng bawat biktima.
isang pag-atake na naman..?!? lage na lang nangyayari to sa baryo naten.! Hindi naman matukoy ng mga ng-iinbistiga kung panu nangyari ang mga karumal dumal na pagpatay. nakilala na ba nila kung sino?!! sabi ng isang galit na lalaki na nakiki-usyoso.
Hindi pa nga eh... pero ang sabi ng mga pulis, isang mabagsik na hayop daw ang umatake sa biktima.
Hayop..?!?! Eh. tanga pala sila eh.! may Hayop ba naman\'g ganyan sasakmalen ka sa leeg. Tignan mo nga ang biktima halos wala ng dugo! kulay puti na..!
\"BaaaAaam...PiiIii...RrrRAaaa.......!\" nakita ko kagabi..... sabi ng isang \"taong grasa na may sugat sa kanyang noo\" na namumulot ng plastik sa may basurahan sabay tawa na parang baliw.
Bampira. baliw...! Sa panahong to\'h may bampira pa ba? ngpapaniwala kayo sa taong yan eh. sabi ng galet na lalaking nakiki-usyoso.
Nag-taka ang karamihan at napa-isip sa sinabi ng taong grasa, bampira nga ba ang umaatake sa baryo.? kung tutuusin may punto ang sinabi ng baliw na lalaki isang pumapatay na sumasakmal sa leeg ng biktima na tila ba\'y inuubos ang dugo nito sa katawan. Pero kung iisipin mo... \"totoo nga ba na may totoong bampira? lalu na\'t sa panahong ito?\"
Noong gabing iyon isang lalakeng lasing ang naglalakad pa-uwi sa kanilang bahay na naka-salubong ang isang \" taong grasa\".
Hoy panget! tumabi-tabi ka nga dyan...!
Di ako panget..! ikaw ang panget! sabay iyak na parang batang inagawan ng candy.
Ang baho mu.! sabi ng lasing na lalake sabay hagis ng bote ng alak na kanyang hawak.
Tinamaan sa noo ang baliw na taong grasa, hindi nito namamalayan na may tumutulo na palang dugo mula sa kanyang noo dahil sa kanyang pag-iyak na parang bata na naglulupasay sa gilid ng kalsada. Pagka-tapos nun tumigil sa kakaiyak ang kaawa-awang gusgusin, \"iminulat nya ang kanyang mga mata na tila ba\'y namumula na parang isang dugo\" sabay \"labas ng kanyang dila at matatalim na ngipin\" na tila\'y uhaw na uhaw sa dugo ng isang MORTAL.
Hindi alam ng mga taong tagaroon sa baryo tanglaw na ang pagala-gala at umaatake tuwing sasapit ang takip silim ay ang \"TAONG GRASANG BALIW NA BAMPIRA.\"
RUN!
Will’s forceful voice resounded in my head as I was swiftly finding my way out of this wilderness, away from him, the man I loved. The lush forest surrounding me seemed to consume me into its depths, with most of the trees bowing down as though they were offering to harbor me from the danger I was fleeing from.
The rain poured down relentlessly that I hardly noticed that there was downpour in my own eyes. Tears obscured my vision as the unforgettable scene replayed in my mind. The unveiled reality about Will was too heavy to bear. It unfolded right before my very eyes, and now I was running for my life.
My feet were braving through large roots of trees, through the murk and stinging cold, through an uncertain route taken out of the need to get away.
My heart pounded wildly as different emotions simultaneously imploded inside. Fragments of the appalling scene continued to usher in a rush of fear that was smothering me, taking me to the brink of fainting.
I finally emerged from the woods and reached the road. I saw Will’s parked car, but I realized I didn’t have the keys. I continued to run. Feeling helpless, hopeless, and terrified to the thought that there was not a single entity around to save me. I ran and ran. Like a blind man groping for his staff, I was in an empty road groping for safety.
Suddenly, I heard a drone behind me. Bright lights gleamed on my face as I turned around. I felt a surge of relief wash over me.
A CAR. A RESCUER. MY SAVIOR.
My knees inevitably gave in to this feeling of redemption that dissolved all my fears... And along with them went my consciousness.
***
When I came to, what greeted my eyes was a godlike, masculine beauty, a striking countenance, bright and ethereal. For a second, I was led to believe that I was in heaven, saved from the reality I was to face.
I blinked, and the image of the angel was still a bit unclear. His face was so close, like he was scrutinizing mine.
Another blink, and I heard him say, “Dana... Dana, can you hear me?”
It was then that reality hit me hard in the head. I suddenly became aware of the throbbing pain gnawing my skull. The last memory I had before I lost consciousness came in a flashback, and at once revived my panic. I jerked up from the couch I was laid on, away from the stranger right before me. Soon it struck me that he was no stranger at all, but my History professor last school year, Mr. Cole Walker.
He gave me a worried look as I calmed myself down. “Are you alright? You’re in my house. You’re safe here.”
I was oblivious of his presence as my thoughts took me back to Will, of what might have happened to him after I left.
I HAVE TO KNOW IF HE’S ALRIGHT, AFTER HE CHANGED INTO… INTO…
I couldn’t say the word even only in my thoughts.
WHAT IF HE’S NOT AWARE OF WHAT HE WAS DOING AND WHAT IF HE HAS ALREADY HURT, OR WORSE – KILLED SOMEONE?
I decided to call Will, then I realized that I left my phone in the cabin. I turned to Mr. Walker who was now still looking all worried about me. “Mr. Walker, can I borrow your cellphone?” I asked.
He immediately handed me his phone that he took from his pocket.
I dialed Will’s number, and my heart skipped when he answered.
“Will, it’s Dana. Where are you? Are you alright?”
“Dana, thank God you called! I’m fine now, I’m at home. Where are you?”
“I’m at Mr. Walker’s house… Will...”
“Dana, we have to talk about what happened. I don’t...”
“I know. We’ll deal with this together. You’re not alone in this.” I paused. “I’ll call you again later when I get home, okay?”
“Okay...”
I ended the call with a deep breath of relief.
“Mr. Walker, I... I really need to go now. Thank you for helping me,” I said as I was beginning to get up from the couch.
He immediately held me back down by the shoulders. “Hey, hey, Dana, slow down. You need to rest a few moments. Goodness knows what happened to you back there.”
“I... I’m fine now, Sir. I really am.” My eyes wandered through the walls around me, through its splendor and elegance. The theme was archaic, with a streak of modern design just enough for its classical magnificence to dominate. Hanging on the walls were frames of exquisite paintings and portraits that seemed to take me to an era way beyond the distant past.
I felt the part of my head that channeled a sort of pain that was once alien to me.
“You must have hit your head on the ground when you fainted.” He paused, looked me in the eye as though he was asking permission to shower me with a barrage of questions. And he did. “What happened, Dana? What were you doing there all alone? What, or who, were you running from?”
My mind went berserk thinking of what to tell him, of a credible lie. The real story should be left untold. I had to protect Will.
I fixed the thick towel wrapped around me and began with my extemporaneous story. ”My boyfriend and I had a fight in his car. We were on our way to a party. I... I told him to drop me off that road. Then when I was walking, there was this man... Along the road. It was like he was following me. He looked like a junkie. I... I got scared. So I ran fast. And that’s... That’s when you found me.”
He smiled, which made me wonder if he bought my story or he saw through my lie and found it hilarious. “Just... Don’t put yourself in danger next time, okay?” He patted me on the shoulder and stood up from the couch.
“Okay...” I answered like a submissive kid.
“Let’s get you home.”
Now, I was on the way home in Mr. Walker’s car. The memory of what happened kept coming back to me. This was truly a day to remember, and I wanted to hold on to the good times it had, and let the bad ones sink into oblivion. I closed my eyes...
“OF ALL PLACES, WHY HERE?” I ASKED WILL.
“BECAUSE I LIKE IT HERE. PEACE AND QUIET. FRESH AIR. BEAUTIFUL VIEW...”
“THERE MUST BE A LOT OF SNAKES HERE,” I INTERRUPTED.
“SNAKES? YEAH, I’LL COUNT THAT IN,” HE SAID IN AS-A-MATTER-OF-FACT WAY. “SEE, IT’S ALL HERE, FOR FREE.” HE SMILED AS HE GAVE ME A TEASING LOOK.
I PLAYED ALONG. “I HAVE TO AGREE. WE HAVE EVERYTHING WE NEED TO LIVE HERE. YOU AND ME AS TARZAN AND JANE.”
HE LAUGHED. “I DON’T LIKE TARZAN.”
LIKE A PAIR OF LOVEBIRDS, WE WERE SITTING ON THE LOWEST BRANCH OF AN OLD TREE ROOTED AT THE BACK PART OF WILL’S SMALL CABIN, WHICH WAS MORE LIKE A WOODEN PLAYHOUSE. HIS FATHER HAD IT BUILT FOR HIM AS A GIFT FOR HIS SIXTH BIRTHDAY. IT WAS SITUATED ON THE INNER PART OF THE WOODS ALONG WITH THE VAST LAND UNDER WILL’S NAME AS PART OF THE GRAND INHERITANCE HIS PARENTS HAD LEFT HIM. THEY DIED TWO YEARS AGO.
“OUR FAMILY ATTORNEY SUGGESTED THAT I PUT THIS LAND ON AUCTION, SAID THAT THIS IS WORTH AN IMMENSE FORTUNE AND SO I COULD USE THE MONEY FOR AN INVESTMENT. BUT NO, I WOULDN’T TRADE THIS FOR ANYTHING.” HE PAUSED. “THIS PLACE HOLDS PRECIOUS MEMORIES.” A TINGE OF SADNESS WAS EVIDENT IN HIS VOICE.
“BESIDES, YOUR PARENTS LEFT YOU WITH A GOOD DEAL OF INHERITANCE ENOUGH TO LAST A LIFETIME. YOU NEVER HAVE TO WORK A DAY IN YOUR LIFE.” I TRIED TO BRIGHTEN UP THE MOOD AGAIN.
HE SMILED.
“SO HOW ARE YOU FEELING NOW?” I ASKED.
“WELL, SURPRISINGLY, THE FEVER MUST HAVE SENSED THAT TODAY’S MY BIRTHDAY AND IT DECIDED TO GO AWAY, AS A GIFT TO ME.”
“LUCKY YOU, THEN.” I GAVE OUT A LAUGH.
THE SILENT MOMENT CAME. THE TRANQUILITY SEEMED TO AMPLIFY THE FACT THAT THERE WAS JUST ME AND HIM. I CLOSED MY EYES AND LISTENED TO THE LEAVES RUSTLE AS A WAY OF FLAUNTING THEIR MUSIC. WHEN I OPENED THEM, I SAW WILL GAZING AT ME, WITH HIS BROWN EYES THAT SEEM SACCHARINE AS CARAMEL. HIS HAIR, WITH THE DARKEST HUE OF BLACK SEEMED TO WALTZ WITH THE BREEZE AS SOME OF IT CLINGED ON HIS FOREHEAD. HE SMILED AT ME AND LOOKED UP AT THE OVERCAST SKY THAT PROMISED SOME RAINFALL.
“SINCE IT’S GETTING RATHER DARK, DO YOU MIND IF I LEAVE YOU HERE FOR A MOMENT TO MAKE THE NECESSARY PREPARATIONS FOR THE DINNER LATER, YOUR MAJESTY?” HE SAID IN A PLAYFUL TONE. “ALL THE STUFF’S IN MY CAR. IT’S A SURPRISE.”
A SMILE ESCAPED FROM MY LIPS. “HMMM.. WHOSE BIRTHDAY IS IT AGAIN?”
DINNER WAS SET. WILL PREPARED A SMALL FEAST (THANKS TO HIS SERVANTS) WITH A BOTTLE OF EXPENSIVE WINE TO BOOT. THE CABIN WAS ILLUMINATED WITH A LOT OF SCENTED CANDLES, GIVING THE PLACE ENOUGH WARMTH AMIDST THE RAINY NIGHT. THE FLICKERING FLAMES DANCED WITH THE SOFT WIND LET IN BY THE WINDOWS. PETALS OF RED ROSES WERE SCATTERED ALL AROUND THE FLOOR. WE SAT ON THE COLORFUL CARPET SPREAD BENEATH THE SMALL TABLE BETWEEN US.
EVERYTHING WAS WONDERFUL EXCEPT FOR THIS PART THAT I WISHED TO EXCISE FROM THIS ALMOST PERFECT NIGHT.
IT HAPPENED IN THE MIDDLE OF DINNER...
“WILL, ARE YOU OKAY?” I ASKED AFTER I SAW WILL WINCE ON HIS SEAT ALL OF A SUDDEN, LIKE HE WAS IN PAIN. I REACHED FOR HIS HAND AND FELT THAT HE WAS SLIGHTLY SHAKING.
HE IMMEDIATELY TOOK HIS HAND OFF MINE. “I’M FINE,” HE SAID BEFORE I COULD SAY ANOTHER WORD. BUT THEN HIS BODY STARTED TO QUIVER AGAIN. HE WRITHED IN PAIN, LIKE SOMETHING WAS TORMENTING HIM INSIDE. HIS BODY SLUMPED DOWN ON THE FLOOR, AND I QUICKLY WENT TO HIS SIDE.
“WILL, WE HAVE...” I FROZE AS MY EYES CAUGHT SIGHT OF WILL’S ARMS. I WATCHED IN TERROR AS LONG STRANDS OF BROWN HAIRSPROUTED FROM HIS SKIN.
“WILL, WHAT’S HAPPENING TO YOU?” MY PANIC SURFACED.
HE TRIED TO REPRESS A CRY AS ANOTHER WAVE OF PAIN LACERATED THROUGH HIM. “I DON’T KNOW.”
THE NEXT SCENE GOT MY LUNGS GASPING FOR BREATH. I BACKED AWAY UNTIL I WAS AGAINST THE WALL.
WILL’S FACE SLOWLY DISTORTED ITSELF, HIS SKIN STRETCHED AND TORE SPONTANEOUSLY TO REVEAL THE FLESH BENEATH IT. HIS BODY WAS RESHAPING, TRANSFORMING HIM INTO ANOTHER BEING.
I STOOD THERE, PETRIFIED WITH FEAR AND SHOCK.
HE LOOKED AT ME WITH HIS EYES FILLED OF AGONY AND READ THE FEAR IN MY FACE. “RUN, DANA! RUN!”
I opened my eyes and saw street lights glimmer outside through the car’s window. I looked over to Mr. Walker. He was silently driving, focusing on the road. The rain had gone and left the night with slick roads and icy air.
Now, we were on our way down to the neighborhood. Just a few blocks away, I could see a police car parked in front of our house, and a uniformed officer stood waiting by.
Mr. Walker pulled up behind the police car and I soon caught the stare of the cop that I quickly recognized as Mr. Tucker, my father’s close friend. The moment I discerned his firm but somber, somewhat inexplicable look, I knew that something was wrong.
I stepped out of the car to bravely confront whatever was about to hit me. Mr. Walker climbed out of the car the next second.
Mr. Tucker seemed to have sucked a lot of breath as he approached. “Dana, I’m sorry to break this news to you but... Your parents had a car accident,” and he got straight to the point, “not one of them survived.”
***
The next days were the hardest days of my life. Every morning, I woke up to the irrevocable truth that I would have to face life on my own.
After that worst night of my life, Will vanished, walked out of my life without a warning. He never called me again, his number was not in use anymore. He should have known better, that I loved him not by a superficial reason, that even his supernatural being wasn’t gonna push me away. He let go. But I didn’t. As soon as I had the time, I checked on his house to see if he was there, but the house was deserted.
The days went by, but I felt stuck in a pit of misery. Every second passed by unnoticed and unlived. I was dying inside, inch by inch.
***
Three months later...
THUD.
Books fell to the floor as I bumped against someone when I hustled on the hallway to my next class. It was Mr. Walker.
“I’m sorry Sir, I was...”
“It’s okay, Dana,” he cut in as we both stooped down to collect the books, of which, one caught my attention.
“Ancient Myths, J. V. Anderson.” I read the cover.
“A pretty good read, that is,” he said as he slowly picked it up and started to get on his feet.
“Mr. Walker, can I...” I spoke as soon as I stood up.
“Borrow this book?” he interrupted, with a smile on his face.
“Yes, Sir. But I promise it wouldn’t take long.”
“No, I don’t mind at all. Here.” He handed me the book.
“Thank you, Sir. This is gonna help me a lot. I’m working on my project. I chose this kind of topic.”
“Good to know that you’re into this stuff, too. If you need my help regarding your project, I’d be glad to share what I know and whatever resources I have.”
“That’s so kind of you, Sir. Actually, I’m still looking for more sources. And... I think I would really need your opinions and suggestions.”
“Well, you’re in luck, Dana. I’m not leaving town this weekend ‘cause I’m holding a group study in my house with my freshmen students this Saturday. You’re welcome to rummage through my collection of books and avail of my expertise.”
“Wow. Thanks again, Sir,” I said gleefully.
“Saturday, 3 p.m.” he said as he turned to leave.
***
The following Saturday, I drove to Mr. Walker’s house.
When I climbed out of my car, I took a little time to ogle at the fascinating old mansion right before me. The last time I was here, it was a bad time to be aesthetic.
“Bad architecture, huh?” he joked.
As always, he looked perfectly gorgeous. He was wearing a dark green turtleneck. His brown hair was rather messy in a charming way. I struggled inside from staring with such admiration at his face - the face in the dreams of every girl in school. He was about thirty-five.
“It’s like the best design I’ve ever seen.”
“Your eyes tell me it’s not.” He smiled. “Come in.”
As I stepped into the parlor, I couldn’t help being ravished by its elegance, for the second time. I felt like I was back to that night three months ago when I spotted the couch.
“Are your students already here, Sir?” I asked.
“They’ll be here shortly.” He stood at the foot of the staircase. “My study’s upstairs.”
He led me into a spacious room with the same elegance as the parlor downstairs, but this one afforded a more expensive touch. I walked along the tall shelves of books. The bulk of them were History books, as expected from a History professor. What captivated my eyes were the oldest ones that date back to centuries ago.
“Feel free to browse through and make yourself at home. ” He motioned me to the table at the center of the room.
“Okay...”
“I’ll get back to you later. I just have something to attend to downstairs.”
“I’ll be fine here.”
After almost an hour, he came back with a tray of biscuits and drinks. “Time for a short break,” he said.
He took the seat across the table. “Looks like it’s gonna be just the two of us here now. My students called, they are still on a project at school. “ He reached for the paper I was working on. “Can I see that?”
In the subsequent hour, we were both absorbed in my project. Every question I asked, he answered, like he was himself a book.
All of a sudden, everything around me seemed to spin. The next thing I knew, my head slumped down on the table. I saw the almost empty glass of orange juice. Before my eyelids shut, I saw Mr. Walker staring at me with a devilish grin on his face.
***
I woke up in the dark, with the cold seeping through my skin. Gentle breeze brushed on my face. I looked up and saw the leaves of lofty trees rustle, and through the rift I could see the moon, luminous and majestic as it dominated the night sky, casting some light down on this dark woods. I could feel my heart pound rapidly as I felt that my hands were tied, as well as my feet, my back against a tree.
“Help! Help me!” I yelled out to the wilderness.
“Scream your lungs out my dear. No one can hear you. We’re in the middle of a pretty secluded place.” The voice came from a figure slowly making his way towards me, but I knew who he was even before the moonlight hit his face. Mr. Walker. ”Had a nice sleep?” He walked a short distance to the right, lit something up, then a lamp glowed, casting its soft light on Will’s cabin.
I felt a rush of fear and anger in my veins. “Why did you take me here? Why are you doing this?”
“You are but a pawn in this game.”
“What do you mean?”
“Let’s just say that it all started with a secret I learned. A secret that only the three of us, I reckon, are privy to.”
“I don’t know what you’re talking about.”
“I’m talking about Will. I’m talking about that night when you saw him turning into a werewolf!” His voice was becoming more ominous after every word. “His first transformation.”
“That’s not true, you...”
“Not true?” In a split second, he was already inches away from my face, causing me to cringe in terror. “You can’t lie to me.” He caressed my cheek. “You see, with one touch of your skin, I could look through all your past memories.”
“You knew all along... And you planned everything to bring me here. For what? To lure Will? He’s been gone for...”
“Oh, no, Dana, he was never gone. Werewolves never leave whom they love.” He stood up. His eyes wandered through the darkness surrounding us. “He’s just around, looking out for you... But he was giving me such a hard time to track him down.”
“Why? What do you want from him?”
“If my theory turns out to be right, that he belongs to the pack of my enemies, I will kill him.”
“He’s not coming.”
He darted a sharp gaze at me. “He will. Sooner or later.”
My hands struggled for freedom, with the hope that they would be miraculously untied.
“What are you?”
“What am I?” he said. “I, my dear, am a vampire.” In an instant, long, sharp fangs emerged among his teeth.
I gave out my loudest cry as I felt his breath on my neck.
Suddenly, I saw a streak of something fly past in front of me which sent Mr. Walker crashing on the ground a few feet away from me.
It was a wolf.
IT’S WILL.
Mr. Walker struggled from being pounced and mauled as he tried to trounce the wolf’s savage claws and canines. He fired a gun at the wolf, and it gave out a howl as the silver bullet lunged into its skin. But then the bullet was spewed out by the wolf’s flesh. A growl and a cry echoed time and again as they fought.
Frozen with fear, I sat there as the bloody scene continued.
Eventually, Mr. Walker was on the verge of being subdued, his back laid flat on the ground, the wolf’s claws closing around his neck, his head about to be torn off.
“You are the firstborn of Miranda,” Mr. Walker said between his struggle for breath, fixing a fierce look at the wolf. “She’s the woman you saw in your strange dreams, your real mother.”
The wolf released him and backed away.
“You are a descendant of murderers,” he continued. “Yes, Will, my family was among them, the ones who were slain mercilessly by your great-grandfather Fiel and his brothers. You’ve seen what happened. It’s one of the memories that haunt you in your nightmares. The guilt of your forefathers handed down to you through your filthy blood. You didn’t know all these until now. Your dreams are giving you only fragments of the past. I’ve seen them all... All your memories.”
He slowly got up from the ground. “And as a firstborn, you are an heir to the legacy of leading the hunt for our kind, with your family’s vendetta against vampires. But it’s still a mystery how you happened to be raised by humans.” Then he looked in my direction. “Tell her, Will. Tell her about your secret. Don’t you think she deserves to know?” He paused. “That you are the reason why her parents died.”
My heart exploded along with the loud clap of thunder. The next second, Mr. Walker vanished, and rain began to fall. A mist of tears filled my eyes but still I could see Will, now in human form, coming towards me.
“Please tell me it’s not true,” I said as Will broke the ropes tied around my hands and feet.
He faced me, tears building up in his eyes. “It was an accident. Dana, you have to believe me.” He held my hand. “I chose to stay away, ‘cause I didn’t know how to tell you... I didn’t know what was happening to me. My head was in a turmoil that night, like something was trying to control me. And I tried hard to keep that at bay. I was running away from the voices calling me, from the violence inside me I couldn’t explain. And it happened that when I ran across the road... Your parents’ car... I’m so sorry...”
I slipped my hand away from his and stood up. I wrapped my hands around myself, as though to keep myself from breaking to pieces. I turned away from him and started to walk, with what strength my knees had.
I chose not to say a word, for I didn’t know if there ever was a word I could use to express how I felt. All I knew was that I was bleeding inside. For the painful truth. For my sad fate.
“Dana...” he said.
I stopped.
“Dana, I love you. And I’ll always be around to protect you. Always.”
And I walked on.
***
The following Monday, a resignation letter by Mr. Cole Walker landed on the door of the university, which then became devastated to lose one of its prided professors.
I knew he was still out there, waiting for another chance, devising another way to quench his thirst for revenge.
Almost all the time, I could feel Will’s presence. He was protecting me, as he said he would.
Days passed, but the scars in my heart remained for good. Life was so cruel to me, but I had to fight back. I couldn’t change the past. It was still painful but I eventually learned to embrace the truth that my parents’ death was an accident, that it wasn’t Will’s fault, that he himself was a victim of his own destiny.
I could never have back what I had lost. I had to start anew. To move on was the best option I got. I wanted to leave this place which was reminding me of all my loss and fears, and so, I decided to wait for my graduation.
***
A month had passed after graduation, and now I was packing up my stuff at home. A job was waiting for me in the city I would be moving to. It was my first opportunity to make a brand new start.
I was reaching for my photo albums up on the shelf when a picture from a stack fell to the floor. It was a photo of Will and I together. I picked it up and reminisced. The memories came flooding back to me, and this one thing that had been bothering me for some time resurged in my thoughts.
“...THE ONES WHO WERE SLAIN MERCILESSLY BY YOUR GREAT-GRANDFATHER FIEL AND HIS BROTHERS...” Mr. Walker’s words replayed in my head.
FIEL. I knew I encountered that name before.
And it finally came back to me. I remembered seeing that name on the caption of a portrait printed on the inside of the back cover of a book. The book Mr. Walker lent me.
I grabbed my laptop and searched “ANCIENT MYTHS BY J.V. ANDERSON” on Google. Results displayed a number of links and I clicked on one that led me to J.V. Anderson’s official website.
I browsed through and there was nothing in there about Fiel. But then there was this strange icon by the upper right corner of the page, like a pendant with a wolf’s head engraved on it.
I clicked on the icon and a new page opened up on my screen. The same pendant-like icon was in the center, but this time the image was larger and its elaborate engraving was more visible. Under it was a password box.
I tried WEREWOLF. Denied.
FIEL. Denied.
MIRANDA. Denied.
LYCAN. Denied.
FULL MOON. Denied.
SILVER. Denied.
FIRSTBORN. As soon as I submitted the password, the screen went black, then a lengthy article appeared.
I read through. Every succeeding paragraph took me closer to unraveling the story.
“...FIEL WAS THE STRONGEST OF HIS KIND...
...REVERED BY ALL WEREWOLVES...
...FEARED BY ALL OTHER IMMORTALS...”
“...AT THE DAWN OF HIS DOMINION, HE WAS SAID TO HAVE BEEN EXTREMELY AGGRESSIVE...”
“...THE RIFT BETWEEN FIEL AND FELIX, THE LEADER OF THE VAMPIRES, HAS BEEN AROUND FOR A LONG TIME...
...THE BLOOD FEUD GREW DEEPER AS THE ENMITY WAS HANDED DOWN TO THEIR PROGENIES...”
“...THE VAMPIRES, BEING THE LESSER IMMORTALS, STAYED IN HIDING AS THEY WERE OUTNUMBERED BY FIEL’S GROWING PACK...
...FELIX BELIEVED THAT THE KEY TO DEFEATING THEM ARE FIEL’S FIRSTBORN DESCENDANTS...”
“...EVERY FIRSTBORN IN FIEL\'S LINEAGE ARE PROTECTED SINCE THE HUNT FOR THEM WAS CONTRIVED BY FELIX ON THE THEORY THAT “FIRSTBORN BLOOD” HOLDS THE KEY TO POSSESSING THE SAME POWER THAT FIEL HAS...
...THAT FIEL’S POWER RUNS IN THE BLOOD OF THE FIRSTBORNS...
...THE “FIRSTBORNS” ARE THE STRONGEST OF WEREWOLVES...
...HAVING THE SAME STRENGTH AS FIEL, THE PRIME SOURCE OF FIRSTBORN BLOOD...”
I sat frozen as the details were just sinking into my mind.
SO THE MYTH’S TRUE. NO, IT’S NEVER A MYTH AT ALL. AND WILL IS IN SERIOUS DANGER.
![\"\"](\"http://a2.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-ash2/156620_163236180386745_133447486698948_295975_7834211_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a4.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc4/163177_163236200386743_133447486698948_295976_3710298_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a6.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/156351_163236220386741_133447486698948_295977_6749192_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a3.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc4/156775_163236267053403_133447486698948_295979_4653418_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a2.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc4/154310_163236300386733_133447486698948_295980_1487071_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a8.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-snc6/63582_163236310386732_133447486698948_295981_6262846_n.jpg\")
![\"\"](\"http://a6.sphotos.ak.fbcdn.net/hphotos-ak-ash2/63950_163236333720063_133447486698948_295982_4556846_n.jpg\")